How To Protect Yourself From WEF Davos Man& New Zealand Prime Minister Calls For A Global Censorship System October 4 2022 | From: BombThrower / JonathanTurley / Various
Read this if you don’t want your human rights ‘recalibrated.’
The pandemic is clearly in the rear-view mirror, no matter how badly the our elites wish it wasn’t so.
The window on the World Economic Forum’s self-proclaimed “opportunity” for transformative change is quickly closing. Yet, billions of plebes are still dragging their knuckles around, thinking for themselves.
This three part piece takes us through what we’re dealing with, why it’s actually impossible for it to succeed, and what you can personally do to secure your own future regardless.
#1. Know What You’re Dealing With
The Davos Club are at their core, Malthusians and Marxists. By Malthusian I mean that they think there are too many useless eaters in the world taking up space and resources. You’re one of them. They’re not.
By Marxist I mean the true outcome of socialism: a two tier society. Ostensibly, Marxism is about class struggle and equality for all, but in reality it’s about about eliminating the middle class and the reduction of the class structure to only two:
1. Them, a thin scab of elites who sit atop the cap table of the world, who own everything and make all the rules.
2. Everybody else, who own nothing and have no human or civil rights.
Class structure, now and future - Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Anything that comes out of Davos, no matter how noble it sounds is really just veneer to get enough useful idiots to convince enough useless eaters to accept the narrative that what is being done to them is for their own good.
This year took aim at individual carbon footprints.
Funded by the UK government’s UK Research and Innovation, along with “an active and growing industrial consortium”, their plan is to eliminate all carbon emissions by 2050. All of them.
This includes:
Elimination of air travel by 2050
Elimination of shipping (there are no electrically powered ships)
The phasing out of beef and lamb for food (replaced by vegetarian food)
Radical reduction of steel manufacturing and all blast furnaces
Elimination of cement (expand use of clay, “think up something else”, literally)
60% fewer cars, or 60% smaller in size
It’s an epic 60-page report that has it all figured out, most importantly how everybody else is going to live.
But if there’s one thing you can bet on it is this:
In 2050, the Royal Family, members of the government, billionaires and industrialists will all still be flying around in private jets or sailing somewhere aboard super-yachts, eating grass fed beef, lamb, bison, and being chauffeured around in 25-foot limos between their multiple 10,000 to 25,000 square foot residences.
Some people are angered by these machinations of our self-appointed betters.
The idea that the people who come up with these schemes will get to retain all the trappings of a modern, luxurious lifestyle while taking them all away from the rest of us in the name of “climate justice” or “equity” seems, somehow… unfair.
To put it lightly.
But when you fall into the trap of getting triggered by these plans, these high minded “roadmaps” and all encompassing agendas you’re actually falling into a type of mental trap that will compromise your own ability to mitigate these machinations.
One of the most sanity preserving mental tools I’ve ever discovered is what I call “Embracing the recipriversexcluson“.
The term was invented by Douglas Adams in his satirical classic “Hitchhikers Guide To the Galaxy”. It means: a number whose value can be anything but itself.
His example was the stated hour of a dinner party is the one moment in time when it is impossible for any of the guests to arrive.
In this world of management by technocrats and expert authorities, we are immersed in recipriversexclusons:
If the most wizened technocrats say “sub-prime is contained”, it isn’t.
The future inflation targets are the one value inflation can never have
GDP estimates, CPI, PPI, money velocity, all of it, aren’t predictions, they’re exclusions
There is a kind of ontological structure to why this is the case: Knowledge of the future (predictions) never occur in a vacuum.
Putting the prediction into the world (planning) by that very act creates reinforcement and opposition. However both forces reduce the odds of the outcome matching the prediction.
The reason why can be understood by looking at something called the Three Body Problem. It’s a physics concept which states that it is impossible to create an algorithm that describes the movement of three disparate objects in space.
Without getting too long-winded about it, I’ll distill it down to this:
The World Economic Forum could not successfully execute a plan for total world domination, even if the entire world consisted of only three inanimate objects.
I’m oversimplifying. But the upshot is that central planning is futile. Whether it’s Soviet-era Five-Year Plans or FOMC models for transitory inflation, the Three Body Problem suggests that there are simply too many moving parts in the world to be able to plan and control macro outcomes.
If there is no solution to calculating the trajectory of three independent entities even five minutes from now, never-mind trying to control the outcome of the entire global economy (or the planet’s climate) out past 2050.
What can happen though, and frequently does, is you can cause a lot of damage via central planning.
You can screw up everybody else’s plans, even the individual ones that would have otherwise landed in the ballpark.
The idea of the Great Reset derives from the New World Order which is still alive in the minds of the establishment or who we can call the globalists from people like Henry Kissinger to Joe Biden.
Of course there are many others on the top levels of the pyramid whose ideas range from establishing a police state, to implanting microchips the day we are born to track and trace us, to depopulating the planet. I know it all sounds insane but that’s what the globalists have planned for us for a very long time. Continue reading...
So for interim periods of time, central planning can appear to be omnipotent, but if you look closely, none of those plans actually succeeded at anything other than derailing everybody else’s lives (COVID, lockdowns, vaccines, etc).
Any time central planning or technocratic impulses appear to be in control of anything, it’s, as a rule never what was intended. More often it’s a train wreck of unintended consequences.
If that wasn’t the case, we wouldn’t have runaway inflation, we’d have had a soft-landing in the rate hikes, 100% vaccine compliance, Russia wouldn’t be Ukraine, the supply-chain would be humming along, oil wouldn’t be over $100/barrel and Bitcoin would be a zero.
#3. What You Actually Do About It
"There is a great difference between resisting evil and renouncing it. When you resist evil, you give it your attention; you continue to make it real.
When you renounce evil, you take your attention away from it and give your attention to what you want.
Now is the time to control your imagination and give your energy to what you want.”
- Neville Goddard
This quote provides a nice encapsulation for the decentralized revolution and the emergence of Bitcoin. This movement is not a full frontal assault against globalism, nor is it a fear-based reaction to any impending attempts at tyranny.
It is a worldwide, unstoppable opt-out. People are putting their energy literally into what they want. Non-state, neutral, digital bearer instruments, absolute property rights, and self-sovereign autonomy.
That’s what I want. That’s what many of you want. I really don’t give a rat’s ass what Klaus Schwab, Justin Trudeau or any of the collectivist eggheads who authored Absolute Zero 2050 want.
The reality is nobody is control, and for both the elites, and the NPCs who love to to have their lives ordered by them, that is terrifying.
We live in an out-of-control world, and yet each one of us are bestowed with a few super-powers that give us the ability to rise above any adversity or undesirable circumstances.
Those super-powers are the ability to adapt, learn and our ability to think creatively. Individually, any single person can rise above their circumstances. In parallel, we can upend entire empires.
A 2009 op-ed published by the United Nations, which is now removed from its website, heralds hunger as “the foundation of wealth” and a means to bolster the world economy.
In order to be able to live your life irrespective of how Davos Man thinks you should, you have to be independently wealthy. That may not be ideal or fair, but that’s how it is.
If you aren’t independently wealthy as we go through this Fourth Turning of history, then there’s high likelihood you’ll be a neo-Feudal serf, trapped within a social credit system, living on stimmies (CDBCs), and doing what you’re told.
By independently wealthy, I mean not reliant on single external entities, and especially not on government entitlements. If you live in a trailer on a plot of land that you own free and clear and have a viable niche in your community, you’re independent.
You’re in better shape than the mid-level investment banker whose bonus is $750K but he’s several million in debt over and above his assets.
If you aren’t where you want to be financially now (and it’s not because you’re still in school or otherwise laying the foundation for your future), then there’s one step you have to do first, which clears the path toward financial independence.
You have to identify your one crippling barrier to being who you want to be, and get rid of that obstacle. You probably already know what The Great Barrier is in your life, because you spend a lot of your mental energy pretending it’s not there or not a problem.
At the end of February 2020, the global village began to shake on its foundations. The world was presented with a foreboding crisis, the consequences of which were incalculable.
In a matter of weeks, everyone was gripped by the story of a virus - a story that was undoubtedly based on facts. But on which ones?
Maybe it’s drugs, booze, negative thinking, sex, porn, co-dependancy, television, Youtube, who the hell knows these days. Being a Karen.
Whatever it is, just stop it (for years I’ve been trying to figure out who wrote this book, but if you’re at this stage where you need to deal with your Great Barrier, then get it and read it, it’s under $3 for chrissake).
At the age of 30 I was broke, in debt, an alcoholic, alone and suffering from depression and crippling anxiety. Now I’m not. My Great Barrier was the booze. So I stopped drinking.
It’s hard to believe that was only 22 years ago, because I’ve come a long way since, and risen to comparatively dizzying heights. I am not especially gifted nor talented. If I can do it, so can you.
Become Financially Independent
After you smash through your Great Barrier, the first job if you’re not financially independent, is to do that. Become that. Yes, it’s that simple.
You make the decision and then you go out and do it. If your Great Barrier was an addiction, you’ll actually have so much extra time and money it will feel positively pink cloud-ish.
Use that lift to get up to speed on financial literacy and then the way you get there is through starting or owning a business. Even one on the side.
In an interview with Dr. Joseph Mercola, Edward Dowd, a former equity portfolio manager for BlackRock, explained why he believes the global financial system will collapse within the next six to 24 months.
Social media – massive curation will required here
All politicians
Expert authorities
You have to start paying attention to what’s going on in your head most of the time, and then ask yourself if it’s something put there by an external influence or if you’re actually expending brainpower on your own plans, goals and relationships.
People can waste their entire day on whatever Twitter puts in the “What’s Trending” bar. They can get caught up ruminating on external events, people and behaviours they have no control over and will almost never impact them.
Have a goal. Come up with a plan. Spend as much of your mental energy thinking about your goals and your own plan.
Think Napoleon:
"I see only the goal. The obstacle must give way.”
- Napoleon
Or the other Napoleon:
"Choose your goals. Work toward them. Direct your thoughts. Control your emotions. Get into action… and you ordain your Destiny”
Human rights defender + holocaust survivor Vera Sharav gives a stark warning about the dangers of ‘The Great Reset’ + its attempts to break down democracy. Will you be a part of the mass that stops them?
Once you’re the captain of your own ship, you’ll still have to navigate the machinations of innumerable external authorities who think they have moral claim over your life.
You do that by cultivating optionality. A wizened lawyer once told me, “he who has the most options, usually wins”.
When you’re on a single paycheque, over your head in debt or reliant on government stimmies, you have no choices.
Basically you live at the whim of your circumstances.
Are we hardwired to categorize each other into ‘Us vs Them?’ Simply put, yes. But this hardwiring is remarkably easy to break. It’s time we equip ourselves with the knowledge and tools to do so.
Why? Well, anything from powerful governments to mainstream and alternative media is consistently trying to divide us by focusing aggressively on our differences.
Imagine an insurance policy that covered you against being absolutely, totally wrong about something as important as the future of the global monetary system. What would that be worth to you?
$5? $10? If that’s all you’d be willing to concede that you might be proven wrong about Bitcoin, then take that five or ten dollar bill down to the nearest Bitcoin ATM and buy a few sats of Bitcoin.
Then do it again next week. Do it every time you’re at the store pissing away the rest of your money on lotto tickets and cigarettes and in due course you’ll have a cushion that could make all the difference in the world if the Bitcoin thesis plays out.
Be Ready
Being a Sovereign Individual (this is basically what we’ve been laying out herein) requires commitment and preparation.
You don’t have to do it, but just understand that if you don’t, we’re headed into a world where you’re probably going to spend the rest of your life doing what you’re told instead of what you want.
We’re in an air pocket now, the job is resiliency, because we’re transitioning out of an existing system that is no longer functional, and into a new one. Nobody really knows how it looks yet.
The tension between Davos Man and the Sovereign Individual is that the former wants to keep the old system going as a linear extension into the future: More centralization, more top down control, more confiscation of any remaining wealth.
The latter may not know what the future looks like but we know what it won’t look like: it won’t be a digitized linear extrapolation of the Industrial Age.
Aside from that, all bets are off, so we we need all manner of resiliency. Backup generators. Medical Supplies. Tools. Food. Lawyers, guns & money
We also have to connect with each other and create our own support structures because the government, the experts, the Davos crowd, they are not coming in to save us. My guess is in the not-so-distant future their primary concern will be outrunning the pitchforks and torches. So be it.
In Bitcoin circles there is a meme: WAGMI. I’ll leave it to the reader to find out what that means if they don’t already.
Many people believe that Davos Man controls the world and is steering everybody into a technocratic authoritarianism. Davos Man assuredly aspires toward this.
The laser-eyes, those who think WAGMI have their own designs on how things will play out. It is largely a global opt-out as incumbent institutions lose credibility, and their authority and importance in world affairs goes into secular decline.
Either way, they are both correct. It will be largely self-selecting.
New Zealand Prime Minister Calls For A Global Censorship System
New Zealand Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern is the latest liberal leader to call for an international alliance to censor speech.
Unsatisfied with the unprecedented corporate censorship of social media companies, leaders like Hillary Clinton have turned from private censorship to good old-fashioned state censorship.
Speech regulation has become an article of faith on the left. Ardern used her speech this week to the United Nations General Assembly to call for censorship on a global scale.
Ardern lashed out at “disinformation” and called for a global coalition to control speech. After nodding toward free speech, she proceeded to lay out a plan for its demise through government regulation:
"But what if that lie, told repeatedly, and across many platforms, prompts, inspires, or motivates others to take up arms. To threaten the security of others. To turn a blind eye to atrocities, or worse, to become complicit in them. What then?
This is no longer a hypothetical. The weapons of war have changed, they are upon us and require the same level of action and activity that we put into the weapons of old.
We recognized the threats that the old weapons created. We came together as communities to minimize these threats. We created international rules, norms and expectations. We never saw that as a threat to our individual liberties – rather, it was a preservation of them. The same must apply now as we take on these new challenges.”
Ardern noted how extremists use speech to spread lies without noting that non-extremists use the same free speech to counter such views.
To answer her question on “how do you tackle climate change if people do not believe it exists” is that you convince people using the same free speech. Instead, Ardern appears to want to silence those who have doubts.
Globalists are anxious to control little people in New Zealand and stave off any original and constructive thoughts they might entertain. Control of information is a vital part of the process. Our government has uncritically facilitated this.
While referring to a global censorship coalition as a “light-touch approach to disinformation,” Ardern revealed how sweeping such a system would likely be.
She defended the need for such global censorship on having to combat those who question climate change and the need to stop “hateful and dangerous rhetoric and ideology.”
"After all, how do you successfully end a war if people are led to believe the reason for its existence is not only legal but noble?
How do you tackle climate change if people do not believe it exists? How do you ensure the human rights of others are upheld, when they are subjected to hateful and dangerous rhetoric and ideology?”
That is the same rationale used by authoritarian countries like China, Iran, and Russia to censor dissidents, minority groups, and political rivals.
What is “hateful” and “dangerous” is a fluid concept that government have historically used to silence critics or dissenters.
Ardern is the smiling face of the new generation of censors.
At least the old generation of censors like the Iranians do not pretend to support free speech and openly admit that they are crushing dissent.
Transgenic Wars - How GMOs Impact Livestock And Human Health Around The Globe October 3 2022 | From: Mercola / Various "Transgenic Wars," an award-winning film by French investigative journalist Paul Moreira, takes us on a journey through Europe and Latin America, looking at the effects of genetically engineered (GE) crops, both on livestock and human health.
It also delves into tangential concerns, such as the increased use of glyphosate-based herbicides, atrazine and 2,4-D, the latter of which was an ingredient in the devastating defoliant Agent Orange, used during the Vietnam War.
Coincidentally, Monsanto was a leading producer of Agent Orange during the war, and its war contributions, which began with its involvement in the Manhattan Project and the creation of the atomic bomb, help explain how Monsanto has managed to secure such staunch allegiance from the U.S. government.
It's a destructive and often incomprehensible allegiance that continues to this day, with the U.S. government's support of and involvement in spreading Monsanto's genetically engineered (GE) crops and toxic chemicals around the world - now repackaged as "necessary" for agriculture.
Monsanto, being a leader in GE seeds and the chemicals that go with them, receives a fair share of the attention throughout the film. Ecologist Patrick Moore, Ph.D., who made the unlikely transition from co-founder of Greenpeace to being a professional GE supporter and lobbyist, is also featured.
In a sensational video that has garnered more than 1.4 million views, Moreira suggested Moore drink a glass of Roundup to prove his assertion that the herbicide is completely harmless. Moore's refusal, saying he's "not stupid," is included in the film.
Danish Pig Farmers Struggle With Mysterious Swine Disease
The film starts off in Denmark, where pig breeders are struggling to determine the cause of a mysterious swine disease, simply referred to as "the yellow death." The disease causes violent diarrhea, and is often lethal to the affected pigs.
Virtually all feed their pigs GE soy, and many suspect this may be the source of the problem. Ib Pedersen is a long-time pig farmer in Denmark.
When he first started feeding his pigs GE soy in the 1980s, the mix contained about 20 percent GE soy. Over the years, the ratio increased, and by 2002, about 90 percent of the soy in the feed was GE.
Like other farmers, Pedersen struggled to contain "the yellow death," which would kill up to 30 percent of the piglets born each year, until one day he decided to remove the GE soy from the feed mix. Within two days, changes were noticeable. There was not a single case of diarrhea among his pigs.
In the three years he's been feeding his pigs all non-GE feed, he's never had a single case of "the yellow death" again. Pedersen single-handedly managed to raise doubts about the safety of GE soy among Danish farmers. Interestingly, Pedersen may have identified the problem even more closely.
He noticed two intriguing connections:
1. When GE soy was sourced from Argentina, all of the farmers who received it ended up with outbreaks of diarrhea among their pigs. What was it about this Argentinian GE soy that was so much worse than others?
2. He found images of deformed Argentinian children online, which local doctors and scientists insist are caused by pesticide exposure, as many villagers are surrounded by GE fields where toxic chemicals are sprayed with wanton abandon.
He was struck by how similar these deformities were to the deformities found in his piglets. Could pesticide-contaminated GE soy be the cause of the pig farmers' problems?
Trailer: Transgenic Wars
Transgenic Soy Destroying Argentina
Argentina is the third largest grower of transgenic crops in the world, and the second-largest producer of GE soy. GE crops have radically altered the face of the country.
Transgenic crops have eliminated the need for large workforces on the farm, eradicating entire villages and contributing to massive poverty.
Gone is the agricultural diversity Argentina used to boast, replaced instead by massive single-crop fields of GE corn, soy and cotton.
Moreira visits Avia Terai, a small rural village surrounded by GE fields. Here, children are born with strange maladies and degenerative diseases of unknown origin. One little girl has large brownish-black spots all over her face and body - marks she's had since birth.
Another is slowly wasting away from an undiagnosed degenerative disease thought to be genetic, aggravated by exposure to herbicides.
Many of the children are deformed in one way or another. Many of the elders are dying from cancer.
The villagers refer to Monsanto's Roundup as "the poison," and do their best to avoid getting sprayed. They all fear the large tractor that sprays one of two things on the fields: water or herbicide, and there's no telling what is being sprayed when.
One woman describes how she shuts herself and her children inside whenever she hears the tractor. Still, avoidance is difficult when you're surrounded by fields, and spray drifts in the wind, settling in water and on clothes hanging out to dry.
Argentinian Farmers Recognize GE Soy Cannot Be Used for Animal Feed
Tellingly, a GE farmer being secretly taped by Moreira reveals they do not feed this GE soy to any of their animals; "If you feed your chickens with it, you can no longer eat their eggs," he says. When asked why, he says because the eggs smell so bad you cannot eat them. This is why all of his GE soy is exported.
Meanwhile, the nearby villagers suffer, being regularly fumigated. Efforts to dialogue with the GE soy farmers have led to naught, and the companies that own the fields are so rich, fines do not dissuade them from spraying well within the illegal perimeter of residential housing.
In the 15 years that transgenic crops have been grown in Argentina, there have only been three convictions for illegal fumigation, despite it being a common occurrence. In the case of Avia Terai, the village is only 200 meters (656 feet) from the transgenic soya field.
By law, pesticides are not permitted to be used within 1.5 kilometers (just under 1 mile) of resident housing.
Their situation is not unique. In fact, the problem is so great, the Argentinian government has been forced to subsidize pesticide-induced disability centers to manage the growing health crisis.
These centers are now filled with children from villages where the parents were exposed to agricultural chemicals. Overall, birth defects are about 350 percent higher in areas where GE crops are grown, compared to the rest of the country.
As noted by one of the nurses at a disability center in Saenz Peña;
“We export our [GE] soy to your countries to feed the animals you are eating … But we are the ones truly paying the price for it."
Retired pediatrician Dr. Maria Del Carmen Seveso goes so far as to call it genocide, saying the situation is really serious.
Deformed Children, Deformed Pigs - Are Herbicides to Blame?
It was images of these deformed Argentinian children, posted on the internet, that got Pedersen, the Danish pig farmer, thinking. Like all other pig farmers, he had his fair share of deformed pigs being born.
He hadn't paid it much attention, other than to recognize that these things happen from time to time, but deformities had become more common, and he was struck by the similarities of the deformities he saw in the Argentinian children who'd been exposed to pesticides in utero.
When it comes to determining which pesticides are to blame, there are many open questions. As it turns out, glyphosate is not the only chemical being used on Argentina's GE soy fields. As resistant weeds flourish, many farmers have resorted to adding other chemicals to the mix, and it's unclear who's using what.
The synergistic action of chemicals will typically augment the toxicity of the mixture, compared to any given chemical on its own, but no studies have been done to determine the exact hazard level of various concoctions.
As Moreira comes across a tractor set to spray a field, he finds not only Monsanto's Roundup, but also atrazine - which is banned in Europe but extensively used in the U.S. - and 2,4-D, one of the main components of the military herbicide Agent Orange, extensively used over the jungles during the Vietnam War.
One thing's clear: The promise that transgenic crops would lead to "greener" agriculture and less chemicals has NOT come to pass. Instead, more and more chemicals are being used on our food and the feed we raise our livestock on.
Mutant Enemies
As transgenic crops have taken over Argentina, herbicide-resistant weeds have become a serious problem. More than 30 million hectares (74.1 million acres) of GE soy is planted in Argentina, and glyphosate is applied to each field at least three or four times a year. This has spawned a whole new kind of weed - one resistant to glyphosate, just like the GE crop itself.
To address the problem, farmers not only apply more pesticides, they also mix different pesticides together to prevent the weeds from adapting to a single formula. As a result, anywhere from three to five additional chemicals are routinely added to the glyphosate. Newer GE seeds are also designed to resist even more toxic combinations.
As noted in the film, there's no definitive proof that agricultural chemicals are responsible for the health crisis in Argentina. But there's no evidence proving they're not responsible either. And the government has done nothing to determine the truth.
In fact, the government of Argentina has been and continues to be very supportive of the GE industry, and Monsanto ads are commonplace on Argentinian TV, assuring the people their products are safe and effective. Meanwhile, no studies have ever been done to ascertain whether all of these chemical cocktails create dangerous interactions or cause the severe health problems now seen among children raised in agricultural areas.
Staggering Increases in Cancer
The only independently organized investigation of the health impact of GE crops, conducted by students of the Rosario Medical University, found that cancer rates increased by 40 percent in a single year in one village.
In another, the cancer rate shot up by 250 percent. What these villages have in common is that they're surrounded by GE fields and the fumigation border is extremely close to where they live.
Sadly, Argentina's economy is now fully dependent on transgenic agriculture. According to Alejandro Mentaberry at the Ministry for Science, Argentina made about $65 billion on GE crops between 1996 - the year GE crops were introduced - and 2011. Mentaberry believes the country owes its "miraculous economic recovery" to the export of transgenic crops.
But at what price this miraculous economic boon? In April 2014, Argentinians took to the streets in Cordoba to protest against Monsanto and the use of their products. "Monsanto out! Yes to life, no to Monsanto! Monsanto is poison. Monsanto is corruption," the people chanted as they marched through the streets.
The film goes on to discuss the political powers that support and steer countries into accepting genetically modified organisms (GMOs).
For example, Wikileaks revealed how U.S. government officials are secretly doing the chemical technology industry's dirty work, cajoling and threatening governments with retaliation as needed. U.K. government officials have also been caught acting like lobbyists and spokesmen for the GE industry.
Transatlantic trade agreements also stand poised to dismantle any remaining prohibitions against the free flow of GMOs and toxic chemicals into Europe, where laws protecting human and environmental health are stricter than in the U.S. Depending on the final outcome of these agreements, it's possible no country will be able to oppose GMOs in the future, no matter what the human or environmental cost.
Patrick Moore and Golden Rice
Moore, a former Greenpeace activist, has become a prominent adversary of the movement against GMOs. According to Moreira, Moore left Greenpeace 30 years ago on bad terms, and has since made a name for himself as a supporter of all things anti-nature, including the nuclear industry, the mining industry and the transgenic industry. "He also thinks global warming is great for the planet," Moreira notes.
He's been a leading advocate for GE Golden Rice, designed to contain high amounts of beta-carotene, ostensibly to combat vitamin A deficiency in Third World countries. There are problems though. For starters, beta-carotene is a fat soluble vitamin. According to the University of Maryland Medical Center, you need at least 3 grams of fat to ensure absorption of beta-carotene supplements.
This enriched rice is intended for impoverished nations where dietary fats are nearly impossible to come by with any regularity, thereby rendering this type of supplementation useless at best.
It's also unknown whether the beta-carotene in Golden Rice will hold up during storage between harvest seasons, or whether traditional cooking methods used to prepare the rice will destroy the beta-carotene. Last but not least, the rice is still under development, and all claims are therefore little more than wishful thinking.
Such facts should have shut down the Golden Rice fairy tale right from the get-go, but it hasn't stopped the likes of Moore from spending much time and effort to promote it, likening the refusal to approve Golden Rice to genocide and Greenpeace's opposition to the rice "a crime against humanity."
To Build a Saner, Safer Food System, Start Close to Home
The problems may seem insurmountable, but there are solutions. The fact of the matter is farmers do not have to use chemical cocktails to produce ample food. Many areas would need serious intervention to improve and rebuild soil quality, which has been destroyed by decades of mechanized farming and chemicals, but it can be done.
As an individual, you can help steer the agricultural industry toward safer, more sustainable systems by growing your own foods and buying what you cannot grow from local farmers you trust.
By far, processed foods are the most likely to contain GE ingredients, so avoiding processed foods of all kinds, including condiments, is one of the best ways to avoid them - and the chemical cocktails sprayed on these crops.
If everyone were to refuse to buy products containing GMOs, insisting on feeding their families pesticide-free, GMO-free foods, the food industry would have no choice but to respond.
They cannot stay in business if people don't buy their goods, and if food companies refuse to buy GE ingredients, the chemical biotechnology industry will lose its financial power to corrupt and manipulate governments.
It's really just a massive trickle-down effect, and the masses really do have the power, even though Monsanto and their allies would like you to think otherwise.
There's a way out of this mess, and it starts with each person making different purchasing choices for themselves and their families. While many grocery stores now carry organic foods, it's preferable to source yours from local growers whenever possible, as much of the organic food sold in grocery stores is imported.
The Language Of Symbolism: How To Recognize These Three Symbols Hidden In Plain Sight October 2 2022 | From: TheMindUnleashed / Various
On the path of trying to figure out what this world is really about, many people ease into the study of symbolism.
When one recognizes the deliberate nature of power, and the characteristics power displays in various activities, they can begin to recognize deeper, more subtle layers of truth about power.
For example a government being the power, participating in psychological warfare against its own people, the government being composed of people who have histories with fraternal orders and secret societies who value symbolism, ect.
This video explores connections between fraternal orders and secret societies to high levels of power: an extremely thorough examination, well past the well known ones such as Skull and Bones at Yale.
Understanding the cult-like behavior of people in power, from royal bloodlines, to banks and corporations, to governments, one can reasonably deduce that their choice of symbolism is often well thought out. Symbols have historically been very important to people in power.
Symbols almost always have multiple layers of meaning: one layer of symbolism may be explained as a simple thing to the public, when it actually alludes to something deeper that only initiates to the symbol can recognize.
Understanding how symbols are deliberate and purposeful, suddenly meaning can be recognized in all kinds of things we see every day. Of course, they are also prone to being misunderstood, or having false meaning attributed to them. Certainty can be scarce in the study of symbolism.
Logos of different corporations and businesses, government flags, emblems, and more are rich with symbolism that speaks a language only those who pay close attention can understand.
Here’s an example I always think of: why do so many flags in the world display 5 pointed stars? Other symbols such as crosses, 6 pointed stars, 7 pointed stars, crescent moons, and more also appear on flags across the world.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Why would so many various factions of power across the world all unanimously decide that a 5 pointed star would best represent them on their flag?
Why do countries (China and the US) that appear to conflict with each other both have 5 pointed stars featured prominently on their flags?
It’s like an inside joke: there must be something that common civilian populations do not understand about the significance of the 5 pointed star. I don’t think so many governments and corporations unanimously decided a 5 pointed star is aesthetically pleasing for a flag.
It has to mean something more than we know.
It’s not difficult to make the case that some natural shapes and geometric formations are used as symbols simply because they look good. However, I think there are many more layers.
I believe shapes such as squares, octagons, triangles, and others are astrotheological references: references to the angles that planets make in the sky, and a system of esoteric knowledge that has been successfully hidden from most people. It is through understanding astrology and its significance to these people in power that I’ve come to this conclusion.
Some videos online can be found about astrotheological symbolism (essentially astrology related symbolism).
One video in particular examined symbolism in the auto-industry. Aries the Ram on the Dodge Ram logo, a Ford Taurus, a Mercury, the Mars symbol on Volvo: the astrotheological references are endless.
In addition, Marty Leeds explored what may be a reference to Pi (3.14), symbolism about the mathematics of creation in auto-industry logos.
To understand the 5 pointed star as an astrotheological reference, one would have to look at an unusual astrology aspect that seems to have been hidden from mainstream astrologers: the quintile, a 72 or 144 degree angle between two planets.
If 5 planets were locked into quintiles, that would make a pentagram in the sky.
There may be some hidden esoteric information in this 5 pointed star, but as of right now, I haven’t figured it out at all. People say the 5 pointed star represents the 4 elements (fire, air, earth, water) and spirit, but I don’t think that’s where the rabbit hole ends. There must be deeper layers of meaning to this strange symbol that appears everywhere.
However, the symbols that have my attention the most are probably the symbols that seem to represent slavery. The octagon, the 8 pointed star of Inanna, the oblong square, the hypercube: these symbols are said to represent slavery, being boxed in and trapped, never-ending loops, and things of that nature.
It would make sense to me, considering the malefic aspects in astrology are squares and oppositions. When planets make squares to each other, bad things happen, to sum it up briefly.
Trines and sextiles, multiples of the 6 pointed star are functional, positive aspects in astrology: and I’m starting to believe that’s why the 6 pointed star is chosen for some business logos and flags. Perhaps it’s a symbol of their effort succeeding or coming to fruition with ease.
In Stanley Kubrick’s final film Eyes Wide Shut, which is essentially about a psychopathic ruling class of people, the 8 pointed star is featured prominently in the first scenes of the movie.
Kubrick was known for his meticulous attention to detail: we know for sure the placement of this symbol was not an accident.
The Square, or Oblong Square, Hyper-Cube
The oblong square is a square that is positioned sideways like a diamond. It appears on many corporate logos, and all over architecture and things we see in every day life. It is said that it’s a symbol of boxing people in and trapping them at base consciousness.
However, it’s nearly impossible to have certainty recognizing the oblong square as a symbol meant to depict this. It’s everywhere, so differentiating coincidence from intentful symbolic representation is very difficult.
Over time, a person looking into symbolism can begin to make this distinction. It seems obvious for example, in the Chase Bank logo because it’s a square inside an octogon, making a sort of swastika shape.
The hypercube is thought to represent a never-ending loop, a prison of consciousness. Researchers such as Mark Passio have presented this theory.
The 6 Pointed Star, or Triangle
While for some reason, certain governmental, corporate, or institutional entities choose seemingly negative symbolism, such as the squares that seem to represent people being boxed in, other entities choose symbols that point to a focus on success.
From the Wal-Mart logo to the 6 pointed “Star of David” found on the Israeli flag (which is of course a symbol older than we could ever know), this symbol can be found everywhere.
Some claim that it represents a cube, since a cube looks like a hexagon if you look at it from an angle.
Theories about symbolism depicting the “Black Cube of Saturn” have circulated widely, and I think they are credible because something certainly is being represented by all these monuments in the picture below.
One of Saturn’s poles has a hexagonal storm on it, depicted below. However, somehow Saturn symbolism involving a black cube has been around for longer than the public has known Saturn has a hexagonal storm on it.
What do these symbols actually do to people? I’m not completely sure. Perhaps they work against our subconscious in a way we don’t understand. Perhaps they don’t do much to us, and people in power just have a belief that they do.
Whatever the reason, this much is clear: people in power care very much about symbolism, and meaning can be found in it that tells us about the world we live in.
Is Wikipedia An Establishment Psyop? October 1 2022 | From: CaitlinJohnstone / Various
If you haven’t been living in a hole in a cave with both fingers plugged into your ears, you may have noticed that an awful lot of fuss gets made about Russian propaganda and disinformation these days.
Here’s one published today titled “Border guards detain Russian over ‘information war’ on Poland“, about a woman who is to be expelled from that country on the grounds that she “worked to consolidate pro-Russian groups in Poland in order to challenge Polish government policy on historical issues and replace it with a Russian narrative” in order to “destabilize Polish society and politics.”
Here’s one entitled “Marines get new information warfare leader“, about a US Major General’s appointment to a new leadership position created “to better compete in a 21st century world.”
This notion that the US and its allies are fighting against Russian “hybrid warfare” (by which they typically mean hackers and disinformation campaigns) has taken such deep root among think tanks, DC elites and intelligence/defense circles that it often gets unquestioningly passed on as fact by mass media establishment stenographers who are immersed in and chummy with those groups.
The notion that these things present a real threat to the public is taken for granted to such an extent that they seldom bother to even attempt to explain to their audiences why we’re meant to be so worried about this new threat and what makes it a threat in the first place.
Which is, to put it mildly, really weird. Normally when the establishment cooks up a new Official Bad Guy they spell out exactly why we’re meant to be afraid of them.
Marijuana will give us reefer madness and ruin our communities. Terrorists will come to where we live and kill us because they hate our freedom. Saddam Hussein has Weapons of Mass Destruction which can be used to perpetrate another 9/11. Kim Jong Un might nuke Hawaii any second now.
With this new “Russian hybrid warfare” scare, we’re not getting any of that. This notion that Russians are scheming to give westerners the wrong kinds of political opinions is presented as though having those political opinions is an inherent, intrinsic threat all on its own.
The closest they typically ever get to explaining to us what makes “Russian disinformation” so threatening is that it makes us “lose trust in our institutions,” as though distrusting the CIA or the US State Department is somehow harmful and not the most logical position anyone could possibly have toward historically untrustworthy institutions.
Beyond that we’re never given a specific explanation as to why this “Russian disinformation” thing is so dangerous that we need our governments to rescue us from it.
The reason we are not given a straight answer as to why we’re meant to want our institutions fighting an information war on our behalf (instead of allowing us to sort out fact from fiction on our own like adults) is because the answer is ugly.
As we discussed last time, the only real power in this world is the ability to control the dominant narrative about what’s going on. The only reason government works the way it works, money operates the way it operates, and authority rests where it rests is because everyone has agreed to pretend that that’s how things are.
In actuality, government, money and authority are all man-made conceptual constructs and the collective can choose to change them whenever it wants.
The only reason this hasn’t happened in our deeply dysfunctional society yet is because the plutocrats who rule us have been successful in controlling the narrative.
Whoever controls the narrative controls the world. This has always been the case. In many societies throughout history a guy who made alliances with the biggest, baddest group of armed thugs could take control of the narrative by killing people until the dominant narrative was switched to “That guy is our leader now; whatever he says goes.”
In modern western society, the real leaders are less obvious, and the narrative is controlled by propaganda.
Propaganda is what keeps Americans [Westerners] accepting things like the fake two-party system, growing wealth inequality, medicine money being spent on bombs to be dropped on strangers in stupid immoral wars, and a government which simultaneously creates steadily increasing secrecy privileges for itself and steadily decreasing privacy rights for its citizenry.
It’s also what keeps people accepting that a dollar is worth what it’s worth, that personal property works the way it works, that the people on Capitol Hill write the rules, and that you need to behave a certain way around a police officer or he can legally kill you.
And therein lies the answer to the question. You are not being protected from “disinformation” by a compassionate government who is deeply troubled to see you believing erroneous beliefs, you are being herded back toward the official narrative by a power establishment which understands that losing control of the narrative means losing power.
It has nothing to do with Russia, and it has nothing to do with truth. It’s about power, and the unexpected trouble that existing power structures are having dealing with the public’s newfound ability to network and share information about what is going on in the world.
Until recently I haven’t been closely following the controversy between Wikipedia and popular anti-imperialist activists like John Pilger, George Galloway, Craig Murray, Neil Clark, Media Lens, Tim Hayward and Piers Robinson.
Wikipedia has always been biased in favor of mainstream CNN/CIA narratives, but until recently I hadn’t seen much evidence that this was due to anything other than the fact that Wikipedia is a crowdsourced project and most people believe establishment-friendly narratives. That all changed when I read this article by Craig Murray, which is primarily what I’m interested in directing people’s attention to here.
The article, and this one which prompted it by Five Filters, are definitely worth reading in their entirety, because their contents are jaw-dropping. In short there is an account which has been making edits to Wikipedia entries for many years called Philip Cross.
In the last five years this account’s operator has not taken a single day off–no weekends, holidays, nothing–and according to their time log they work extremely long hours adhering to a very strict, clockwork schedule of edits throughout the day as an ostensibly unpaid volunteer.
This is bizarre enough, but the fact that this account is undeniably focusing with malicious intent on anti-imperialist activists who question establishment narratives and the fact that its behavior is being aggressively defended by Wikipedia founder Jimmy Wales means that there’s some serious fuckery afoot.
“Philip Cross”, whoever or whatever that is, is absolutely head-over-heels for depraved Blairite war whore Oliver Kamm, whom Cross mentioned as a voice of authority no fewer than twelve times in an entry about the media analysis duo known collectively as Media Lens.
Cross harbors a special hatred for British politician and broadcaster George Galloway, who opposed the Iraq invasion as aggressively as Oliver Kamm cheered for it, and on whose Wikipedia entry Cross has made an astonishing 1,800 edits.
Despite the overwhelming evidence of constant malicious editing, as well as outright admissions of bias by the Twitter account linked to Philip Cross, Jimmy Wales has been extremely and conspicuously defensive of the account’s legitimacy while ignoring evidence provided to him.
“Or, just maybe, you’re wrong,” Wales said to a Twitter user inquiring about the controversy the other day. “Show me the diffs or any evidence of any kind. The whole claim appears so far to be completely ludicrous.”
“Riiiiight,” said the totally not-triggered Wales in another response. “You are really very very far from the facts of reality here. You might start with even one tiny shred of some kind of evidence, rather than just making up allegations out of thin air. But you won’t because… trolling.”
“You clearly have very very little idea how it works,” Wales tweeted in another response. “If your worldview is shaped by idiotic conspiracy sites, you will have a hard time grasping reality.”
As outlined in the articles by Murray and Five Filters, the evidence is there in abundance. Five Filters lays out “diffs” (editing changes) in black and white showing clear bias by the Philip Cross account, a very slanted perspective is clearly and undeniably documented, and yet Wales denies and aggressively ridicules any suggestion that something shady could be afoot.
This likely means that Wales is in on whatever game the Philip Cross account is playing. Which means the entire site is likely involved in some sort of psyop by a party which stands to benefit from keeping the dominant narrative slanted in a pro-establishment direction.
A 2016 Pew Research Center report found that Wikipedia was getting some 18 billion page views per month. Billion with a ‘b’. Youtube recently announced that it’s going to be showing text from Wikipedia articles on videos about conspiracy theories to help “curb fake news”.
Plainly the site is extremely important in the battle for control of the narrative about what’s going on in the world. Plainly its leadership fights on one side of that battle, which happens to be the side that favors western oligarchs and intelligence agencies.
How many other “Philip Cross”-like accounts are there on Wikipedia? Has the site always functioned as an establishment psyop designed to manipulate public perception of existing power structures, or did that start later?
I don’t know. Right now all I know is that an agenda very beneficial to the intelligence agencies, war profiteers and plutocrats of the western empire is clearly and undeniably being advanced on the site, and its founder is telling us it’s nothing.
The Global Power Hierarchy: Three City States Control The World September 30 2022 | From: FinalWakeupCall
Octogon is the Empire of Darkness: Many may think they are pretty well informed about all of the main players in the Deep State “conspiracy” playing field, regarding the various elements of society that control our world from behind the scenes.
The real top of the pyramid is the Luciferian Pharaonic rulers of Octogon established in Switzerland which appears to be the core of the Global octopus of ruling elites with their tentacles reaching into every niche of “our” society.
Octogon is the name of a highly secretive Nazi organisation, which by the end of WW2 acquired all of its fortune from looted Nazi Gold and goods deposited into Switzerland, in order to use it for future wars and illegal actions.
A well-known German scandal from the 90’s concerned black funds with which the political election campaign of Helmut Kohl and the CDU were financed by using Nazi Gold, laundered in Switzerland and organised by the Octogon secret Nazi organisation under the secret code word ‘Templars of Switzerland’.
At the top of the pyramid hierarchy sit the Swiss Octogon Templars, followed by the 2nd layer consisting of Soros and the Nazis. Actually, the Nazis are an integrated part of the Octogon, and somewhat belong to the top too.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
According to the highly recommended Documentary “The Pharaoh Show” The Crusaders’ last stronghold of the Templars fell on May 18th 1291, and only two and a half months later Switzerland was founded on August 1st 1291. According to the documentary, the Templar’s treasure was hidden in Switzerland, with which the Swiss banks were founded.
The Freemasons came out of the Templars. “The Pharaohs are still here and are ruling the world through secret societies, as the Pharaoh and his army disappeared into the sea”.
In ancient Egypt, the pharaoh was the most powerful person. The pharaoh was the political and religious leader of the Egyptian people, holding the titles: ‘Lord of the Two Lands’ and ‘High Priest of Every Temple’.
As ‘Lord of the Two Lands’ the Pharaoh was the ruler of Upper and Lower Egypt. He owned all of the land, made laws, collected taxes, and defended Egypt against foreigners.
As ‘High Priest of Every Temple’, the Pharaoh represented the gods on Earth. He performed rituals and built temples to honour the gods. Many pharaohs went to war when their land was threatened or when they wanted to control foreign lands. If the pharaoh won the battle, the conquered people had to recognise the Egyptian Pharaoh as their ruler and offer him the finest and most valuable goods from their land.
The sea of peoples refers to the fact that through mixing they are amongst us in all key positions, and Switzerland is their biggest base; and is the home of the Templars. This is why their flag shows a simplified Templar`s flag in exactly the same colours.
Preserved by the Knights Templar, the Magi Priesthood of Melchizedek, as part of the Ancient Priesthood of Solomon, directly connects the Order with the oldest civilisations, the ancient Pharaonic Egyptian Priesthood, the Priesthoods of the Biblical King Melchizedek and King Solomon, as well as the Essenes who recorded the Dead Sea Scrolls, including the Lost Gospels and the Book of Enoch.
The Magi Priesthood of Melchizedek within the Ancient Priesthood of Solomon is compatible with the practices of Reformed Catholicism. This more ancient part of the Solomon Priesthood is rooted in the Egyptian Djedet Priesthood as the earliest foundations of Christianity, as practiced by the 12th century Templars within Roman Catholicism.
It includes elements which later became 15th century Rosicrucians as Gnostic Protestantism, and 16th century Hermetic Theosophy as part of Liberal Catholicism.
This lineage of priestly succession also connects the Templar Priesthood with some of the most important leadersof civilisation in human history, including King Khufu – the architect of the Great Pyramid of Egypt, Amenhotep III – father of Queen Nefertiti and grandfather of King Tutankhamen, Sheshonq I – who returned the Ark of the Covenant from the Temple of Solomon to Egypt and Cleopatra – the High Priestess of Isis.
The Pharaohs morphed into the nobility, aristocracy and freemasonry. Out of the Freemasonry came the new world order.
All politicians are mixed descendants of the nobility and all are mixed descendants of their former knighthood called Octogon of the Templars; This is the pharaonic bloodline that rules the entire world, to which we the people are the slaves.
The Swiss Federal Institute (SFI) in Zurich released a study entitled “The Network of Global Corporate Control” that proves a small consortium of corporations – mainly banks – run the world.
These mega-corporations are at the centre of the global economy. The banks found to be most influential include:
Barclays plc.
Capital Group Companies Inc.
FMR Corporation
AXA
State Street Corporation
JPMorgan Chase & Co.
Legal & General Group plc.
Vanguard Group Inc.
UBS AG
Merrill Lynch & Co
These top ten transnational companies that hold the most control over the global economy – and if you are one of the millions that are convinced Big Banks run the world, you should get a creeping sense of justification from this list:
Some of the other usual suspects round out the top 25, including JP Morgan, Credit Suisse, and Goldman Sachs. What you won’t find on the list are ExxonMobil, Microsoft, or General Electric, which is strange. In fact, only China Petrochemical Group Company at number 50 is the first company on the list that creates something.
The top 49 corporations are financial institutions, banks, and insurance companies [ see aboce link] - with the exception of Wal-Mart, which ranks at number 15. The rest essentially just pushes money around to one another. This is the interconnectedness of the top players in this international scheme:
"However, as the connections to the controlling groups are networked throughout the world, they become the catalyst for the global financial collapse."
James Glattfelder, complex systems theorist at the SFI explains:
"In effect, less than one per cent of the companies were able to control 40 per cent of the entire network,"
The 3rd layer is the Palantir the most powerful structure for spying ever devised. Palantir has long sought to sell governments an unmatched power to sift and exploit information of any kind. Peter Thiel presents a perfect nexus of government clout with the kind of corporate swagger Trump loves.
The Intercept can now reveal that Palantir has worked for years to boost the global dragnet of the NSA and its international partners, and was in fact co-created with American spies.
The 4th layer is formed by the Black Jesuit Pope Adolfo Nicolas Pachón, who is the Superior General of the Society of Jesus Diabolical Plan for a New World Order, of the Roman Empire.
He controls the 5th layer with the secret societies who in turn control the CIA and via the JTTF – The Joint Terrorism Task Force – the FBI and US Intel agencies that run the drug trafficking, the depicted uranium weapons shipments, the illegal white phosphorus weapons, the organ harvesting, the paedophilia rings, the car theft rings, the illegal use of the diplomatic containers, etc. Human sacrifices and trafficking.
The secret societies are puppets of the Black Pope, while the Black Pope is puppet of the CIA. The Clinton Foundation serves the CIA and its agenda is served by the US-Congress. The department of Defence is sucked and drained by the CIA and has its spies in Congress. On the other side, the CIA is the puppet of the Swiss Octogon Templars. They hide their money in Bitcoin, which was created by Alice at the CERN LHC laboratories in Geneva. Bitcoin is run by AI.
The Black Pope’s foot soldiers are Jacob and Evelyn Rothschild, who are completely subordinate to the Jesuit run Roman empire, that also conducted the assassinations, among many others, of John F. Kennedy executed by the CIA and they now have their sight set on murdering Trump.
Comment: Read about the Alliance that has been working behind the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
The 6th layer consists of the Khazarian Mafia who are fake Jews. The Vatican – Pope Francis – and Queen Elizabeth II with among others the Dutch and Spanish Royalties, are in charge. They form the three-part rule of the Secret Government, and are puppets of the Vatican.
Three City-States Control the World
The 7th layer is the Roman Empire – with its three-principal city states in the Vatican, the City of London and Washington DC. These are the puppets of the six-higher layers in the hierarchy.
The Vatican is the power structure that wants to merge all religions into one, the City of London the financial branch, and Washington DC controls the military.
The 8th layer is formed by the banking cartel and is controlled by the Knights of Malta, a military order whose members, are the top of the Western elite, and must obey the given orders. The member list includes enough senior U.S. military officers and agency officials to control the military-industrial complex (MIC). Initial members include George Bush Sr. and Jr., Jeb Bush, Prescott Bush, Henry Kissinger, David Rockefeller, Queen Elizabeth, Queen Beatrix of the Netherlands, King Juan Carlos of Spain, the late Prince Bernhard of the Netherlands, Joe Biden, Tony Blair, Pat Buchanan, James Buckley, William F. Buckley, Jr., Frank Capra, William Casey, Bill Clinton, William Colby, Cardinal Terence Cooke, Kenneth Copeland, Senator John Danforth, Roy E. Disney, Allen Dulles, Archbishop Edward Egan, Rudy Giuliani, Dr Lawrence Gonzi, Sir John Gorman CVO, Thomas K. Gorman, J. Peter Grace, Alan Greenspan, William Randolph Hearst, Baron Conrad Hilton, J. Edgar Hoover, Daniel Imperato, Lee Iacocca, Alex Jones, Francis L. Kellogg, Joseph Kennedy, Senator Ted Kennedy, the late Nelson Mandela, Rupert Murdoch, Oliver North, Thomas ‘Tip’ O’Neill, Dr Ron Paul, President Ronald E. Reagan, William Westmoreland, Nelson Rockefeller, David Rockefeller, Amschel Mayer von Rothschild, Rick Santorum, Antonin Scalia, Joseph Edward Schmitz (Blackwater), televangelist-pastor Robert Schuller, Frank Sinatra, Cardinal Francis Spellman, Ted Turner, Archbishop Desmond Tutu, Gen. William Westmoreland. Robert, President of the World Bank Robert Zoellick.
The Bilderberg group, the Counsel of Foreign Relations, the Trilateral Commission, form an integral part of the banking cartel which is completely a Scam.
The Bilderberg group and the CFR are charged with the implementation of the agenda for the NWO, with the command over population control, vaccinations, Chemtrail spraying, food, water and air poisoning, and the drug cartels.
All together these comprise the global swamp that is still even now rapidly being drained by the TRUMP – team. With the help of every patriot who has awakened.
Be aware, all countries that are incorporated by the cabal are bankrupted by the banking cartel, that constitutes the thirteen archon bloodline families.
Their wealth and that of all banking families is seized by the militia of the people of planet Earth, under the order of the 188 members of the board of governors of the World Bank, under the Global Overseer mandate trustee of the Global Debt Facility assigned by all leaders to lead the new global freedom movement, guided along by The Power Transition Rule.
The swamp’s satanic possession is the result of a very well organised long-term conspiracy to establish the New World Order, based on the Luciferian revolution against God and Nature.
The curtain is now being pulled back to fully expose the Khazarian Mafia and its evil plan to infiltrate and tyrannise the whole World and eradicate all Abrahamic Religions and allow only for their Babylonian Talmudism, also known as Luciferianism, Satanism or ancient Baal worship.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
"The masses of people have more to fear from combinations of the wealthy and professional classes - from an aristocracy which through the influence of riches and talents, insidiously employed, have sometimes succeeded in preventing political institutions, however well-adjusted, from securing the freedom of the citizens.”
“The Bank has by degrees obtained almost entire dominion over the circulating medium, and with it, the power to increase or diminish the price of property and to levy taxes on the people in the form of premiums and interest to an amount only limited by the quantity of paper currency it is enabled to issue.”
Privately-Owned Central Bank has Been Vigorously Opposed
President Andrew Jackson, 7th president of the USA from 1829 – 1837 was probably the most intrepid man of his era to vigorously oppose a privately-owned central bank, because he foresaw that eventually the usurers would end up cheating the common people.
He also knew that fractional reserve banking was a sophisticated way of cheating that always ends up killing the economy. Jackson wanted to restore the economy. Yet some of his detractors, both past and present, have tried to dismiss him as ignorant, saying he knew little about economics. Nothing could be further from the truth.
They were not against all banking systems but against usurious bankers, who Jackson called “hydra-headed” monsters “eating the flesh of the common man.
The Illuminati use paedophilia to blackmail and control their puppet members, the revelation of which has rendered the masses in denial. In the meanwhile, corruption and sexual abuse abound and no one mentions the involvement of the Jesuits and the Freemasonry.
The legal system and police are comprised, and fully complicit in subversion of civilisation. The masses suffer from the Stockholm syndrome, and hope the psychopaths won’t harm them if they keep their heads down and play along.
Fully invested in their enslavement, people are too corruptible, cowardly or dumb to face reality, as the slaves are taught daily to love their slavery!
The Rothschild Khazarian Mafia (RKM)
The source of the evil that drives the Rothschild Khazarian Mafia (RKM) is taken from the Babylonian Talmud. It is based on religious delusions of racial superiority.
The RKM has a well-developed spy network through which they obtained prior warning and were able to escape from Khazaria to all European nations specifically Germany, taking their vast fortunes with them. In secret, they continued their Satanic child blood and sacrifice rituals, and trusted Baal to deliver to them the whole world and all its riches, as they believed it was promised to them, as long as they kept sacrificing children and infants to Baal.
The Rothschilds designed a private fiat banking system that specialised in making counterfeit money from nothing, charging insidious usury to governments while this should have been the people’s own money, free from interest charges.
The fake money idea came from the black art of Babylonian money-magic, claiming to insiders that such technology and secret money power was given to them by Baal, because of their frequent child-bleeding sacrifices and rituals to Baal.
Once they infiltrated and hijacked the banking system, they interbred with the Royals and infiltrated and completely hijacked all of England and all its major institutions. Some experts believe that the Rothschilds genocided the Royal Family members by staging secretly-managed illicit and adulterous breeding with their own Khazarian men in order to replace the Royals with their own pretenders to the throne.
The masses are still in large part in denial. The ruling class is fully complicit in the subversion of civilisation. People, adapted to their enslavement are too venal, craven and dumb to face reality. Many have neither an idea nor perception of the restraint that is eventually going to be put on them.
They would rather ignore the obvious and go into denial of a truth that has already become reality and they prefer reassuring each other that ‘they would never take people’s freedoms away and make us serfs of the elite’.
Humanity has on a large scale given away its mind and its responsibility – consider the broader consequences of this behaviour for human existence. When we give away our mind and responsibility, we also give away our freedom and in essence, our lives.
If we don’t awaken en masse, we will soon be totally degraded until humanity is completely lost. Then our culling under some false pretext will seem like Divine Retribution. And that is how Satan works.
The satanic possession is the product of a highly organised long-term conspiracy to establish the New World Order, based on the Luciferian revolution against God and Nature.
Luciferians detest all of Creation and Life itself, while they embrace Destruction and Death. It is a Death Cult.
THE GREAT AWAKENING must now arrive in full force as it is our plight to save humanity for our future generations.
The Zombie-Like Lives Of Sheeple From Birth To Death September 29 2022 | From: PrepareForChange / Various
This article is not meant to offend anyone. It was written with the intention to strengthen people’s spiritual awareness, allowing them to break the spells of words and see beyond the boundary of mainstream and alternative media.
To innerstand the zombie-like lives of sheeple, we need to first investigate the word sheeple, so we know what it means. According to Merriam-Webster.com, the word sheeple means, “people who are docile, compliant, or easily influenced : people likened to sheep”.
This word is derived from the combination of the words sheep and people. In many ways, sheeple are people who are naive and lack critical thinking skills, and obediently follow orders because they are too afraid to question their so-called authorities. This article will show you proof that most people are acting like sheeple and are far from being “awake”.
Why Sheeple are Properties of the State and are in a Daze
The zombie-like lives of sheeple begin on the day they are born. Shortly after sheeple are born, their parental sheeple give them a name and register them to the State using the “birth” certificate.
The sad thing that parental sheeple do not know is that the birth certificate is the legal document used by the State to trick them to “abandon” their babies or “lambs”, allowing the government to claim their babies/lambs as chattels (personal properties).
It also allows the government to transfer their babies/lambs to the land of the DEAD (legal fiction), turning their babies/lambs into dead entities in the eyes of the law. Hence, the name in all capital letters on their social security cards and driver’s licenses. The name in all capital letters is the same all caps name written on gravestones.
What sheeple do not know about governments is that nearly all of them have been incorporated and thereby are legal fictions. In the United States (incorporated), the U.S. government is a FOREIGN corporation with respect to a state of the United States of America (unincorporated).
For evidence of this, read this article. In the article, there is a sentence that says, “The United States government is a foreign corporation with respect to a state.” Most, if not all, sheeple have been brainwashed so bad that they actually think that governments are living entities and have power over them.
There is NO government that is living in reality because there is no living man or woman who is the government itself. There are only men and women acting as agents for the government.
Sheeple wake up in the morning thinking they are awake, but they do not realize that they are actually in a daze, which etymologically means “to become weary”. The word weary is derived from the Old English word werig, meaning “tired, exhausted; miserable, sad”.
As for the word awake, it secretly means “a night watch for the dead”. The evidence of this can be seen when you use the art of word magic to decipher the word awake. When you move the first letter “a” from the word “awake” a space to the left, you get the term “a wake”.
According to Dictionary.com, the word wake means “a watch or vigil by the body of a dead person before burial, sometimes accompanied by feasting or merrymaking.” (Bold emphasis added)
Another word you need to investigate, using the art of word magic, in the previous paragraph is morning. Phonetically, the word morning sounds like the word mourning, meaning “the act of a person who mourns; sorrowing or lamentation” or “the conventional manifestation of sorrow for a person’s death, especially by the wearing of black clothes or a black armband, the hanging of flags at half-mast, etc.” What do sheeple do at “a wake”? They mourn the dead wearing black clothes.
Why do sheeple mourn the dead? They mourn the dead because they are in a daze and feeling weary. Remember, the word weary is derived from the Old English word werig, meaning “tired, exhausted; miserable, sad”. To help ease the weariness, some sheeple give money to the family of the dead, but what they do not realize is that the so-called money that they give is called “legal tender”, which is a deceptive way of saying “debt”.
Phonetically, the word debt sounds like the word dead. All legal debts are fictitious because they are created by banks, which are corporations, also legally known as artificial persons. In other words, all legal debts are created for the dead (legal fiction). Why do you think sheeple “bury” their money in the bank? Sheeple bury their so-called money because it is dead/debt.
The Sins of Sheeple
One of the worst debts that sheeple have is called a mortgage. What sheeple do not know about the word mortgage is that it secretly means “a pledge to the dead”. To find evidence of this, you need to use an etymological dictionary and the art of wordplay to decipher the word mortgage.
When you split the word mortgage into two words, it transforms into the term “mort-gage”. Keep in mind that the word mortgage is derived from two Old French words, which are mort and gage. In Old French, mort means “dead” and gage means “pledge”.
The word pledge comes from Old French plegier, meaning “to promise”. Dictionary.com defines pledge using these exact words: “a solemn promise or agreement to do or refrain from doing something”. Based on the etymological definition of mort and gage, the term mortgage/”mort-gage” can be translated as “a pledge to the dead”.
All legal debts are for the dead, which is why the word debt can mean “sin”. Hence, the Bible verse Romans 6:23 (KJV), “23 For the wages of sin is death”.
Sin is debt/dead/death. To find evidence that the word debt can mean sin, go to Merriam-Webster.com and search for the definition of debt and you should see the word sin as one of its definitions. The word sin is derived from the Old English word synn, meaning “moral wrongdoing, injury, mischief, enmity, feud, guilt, crime, offense against God, misdeed”.
Deep down, sheeple feel bad for all the debts/sins that they created, so many of them go to church to see if they can find God and hope that God will forgive them for their sins/debts. What sheeple do not know is that nearly all churches throughout the world have been incorporated and thereby are dead corporations.
To make matters worse, nearly all clergies (e.g., pastors, priests and ministers) do not know the secret knowledge of the Bible. How many clergies do you know that have the knowledge and courage to teach sheeple that the true church or temple of God is WITHIN them? In this lifetime, I have never met one, have you?
To make matters even worse, sheeple baptize their babies/lambs, thinking that this external act will free their babies/lambs from original sin. External baptism will not free their babies/lambs from original sin. How do I know this? Because if it did free them from original sin, they would be immortal and not die.
To be free from original sin is to be free from death. External baptism is nothing more than a dark magic spell designed to deceive parental sheeple to give up their babies’ bodies and souls to the antichrist and the false gods of the false church.
Unlike external baptism, internal baptism is a holy process that occurs within the body, not outside of it.
Like the government, the church is also a fictitious entity. In other words, it is “an invisible body”. The evidence of this can be seen in the definition of the word parson. According to The Law-Dictionary (Tomlins, 1835), the word parson means, “One that hath full possession of all the rights of a parochial church.
He is called parson, persona, because by his person the church, which is an invisible body, is represented; and he is in himself a body corporate, in order to protect and defend the rights of the church (which he personates) by a perpetual succession. 1 Inst. 300.” (Bold emphasis added)
Esoterically, the word church means “body”. In other words, the temple or church of God is man’s physical body (gender-neutral). To be more specific, it is the TRUE temple/church of God. As a result of that, all external churches (buildings) are false churches.
No external church or temple built by man is more holy than the physical body of man (gender-neutral), because man was created by God and the Spirit of God dwells in man. Hence, the Bible verses 1 Corinthians 3:16-17 (KJV):
16 Know ye not that ye are the temple of God, and that the Spirit of God dwelleth in you?
17 If any man defile the temple of God, him shall God destroy; for the temple of God is holy, which temple ye are.
The Corporate Life of Sheeple
Nearly every morning/mourning, especially during the weekday or “week-daze”, millions, if not billions, of sheeple throughout the world go to work at corporations, which can be abbreviated as corps.
Phonetically, the word corps sounds similar to the word corpse, which is defined as “a dead body, usually of a human being”. Black’s Law Dictionary (6th edition) defines the word corporation as, “An artificial person or legal entity created by or under the authority of the laws of a state.”
An artificial person is considered dead in the eyes of the law and thereby can be defined as a corpse. Hence, the word corporation/corps/”corpse”. You can also find the word corps in the term “marine corps”. In law, all military personnel are considered dead and thereby have no natural rights, which is why government superiors order them around like dogs and make them wear dog tags.
To ease the pain of working at a corporation/corps/corpse, most sheeple are given a break during the “weekend” because they are “weakened”. Besides the weekend/weakened, sheeple like to celebrate yearly parties, so they do not have to think about their dead-end jobs.
One of these yearly parties is commonly known as a birthday. What sheeple do not innerstand about a birthday is that it is a ritual for celebrating the birth of a corpse, which is a dead body. Some of the evidence of this can be seen in certain legal definitions of the word birth.
An interesting fact you need to know about the word birth is that it can mean “a still-birth”. In New Zealand, the interpretation section of the Births, Deaths, Marriages, and Relationships Registration Act 1995 defines the word birth using these exact words: “includes a still-birth”.
An important word you need to investigate in the previous definition is include. In law, when the word include is used in an expression or definition of a legal matter, it EXCLUDES everything else that is not in that expression or definition. The evidence of this can be found in the legal definition of “inclusio unius est exclusio alterius”.
Black’s Law Dictionary (5th edition) defines “inclusio unius est exclusio alterius” using these exact words: “The inclusion of one is the exclusion of another. The certain designation of one person is an absolute exclusion of all others.”
The word birth is often used to describe the emergence of a new entity. In law, nearly every entity that is “birth” falls under the jurisdiction of the legal system. When it comes to jurisdiction, the legal system only has jurisdiction over fictitious entities, which are legally dead entities.
Because of this, all living babies that are “birthed” and registered to the State through the “birth” certificate are presumed to be dead in the eyes of the law.
One of the major reasons that they are presumed to be dead by the State is so that the government has the right to administer them. Remember, the government is a fictitious entity and thereby can only administer other fictitious (dead) entities.
To secretly tell sheeple that they are dead in the eyes of the law, the agents of the government indoctrinate sheeple to celebrate their birthdays with cakes and candles. When it comes to corpses, candles are traditionally used to dispel the darkness, so the spirits of corpses can find their way home.
This is one of the hidden reasons that they teach sheeple to light candles and stick them on cakes during birthday ceremonies. Every time sheeple light candles during their birthdays and stick them on a cake, their actions tell the Dark Forces (false gods and self-serving thought-form entities) that they consent to be participants of the birthday ceremony, which is a ritual for celebrating the birth of a corpse or dead baby.
During birthday ceremonies, many sheeple like to drink alcohol beverages. What they do not know is that alcohol is effective for weakening the connection to the true God that dwells within the “temples” of their head. They did not call that area of the head the “temples” for no reason. Besides weakening their connection to God, alcohol also drains their life force energy.
Alcohol is able to do this because it has the ability to extract the essence of an entity. This is why alcohol is an important substance for herbalists. With the aid of alcohol, herbalists can extract the essences of plants to make essential oils.
Because of the extracting effect of alcohol, when sheeple drink enough of it to make them drunk, it can temporary extract the essences of their souls, which contain their life force energies. This weakens their spirits, making their bodies more susceptible to being possessed by foreign spirits.
Why Sheeple Have Been Legally Dead Their Whole Lives
After decades of working, partying and drinking, sheeple’s bodies cannot handle the stress anymore, causing them to die prematurely. After they die, their names are written in ALL CAPITAL LETTERS on gravestones to seal the deal and let other sheeple know that they are officially DEAD.
What sheeple do not know is that shortly after their births, the government incorporated them, turning them into dead entities before they even learn how to say a word. It is often hard for sheeple to see the truth that they have been incorporated and thereby are corps/corpses, so to make it easier for them to see the truth, let us investigate the legal document known as “writ of summons”.
When a court agent serves sheeple a writ of summons, the first question he asks them is often related to their legal name, which 99 percent of the time is written in all capital letters on court documents. For example, the court agent may ask them the question “are you JOHN HENRY DOE?”
Most, if not all, sheeple would answer “yes”. By saying yes or responding with a similar answer and accepting the writ of summons, they basically agree to play the role of a dead character, which is the legal name (e.g., JOHN HENRY DOE). This occurs because the legal name is not living, but is a fictitious entity that has no life force of its own.
As a result of that, it is as DEAD as a fictional character in a storybook. The writ of summons is used to summon the dead using sheeple as mediums. This is why a court agent has to serve them a writ of summons with their legal name on it before a judge can demand them to appear in court.
To connect the dots, when sheeple accept a writ of summons, whether they realize it or not, they agree to raise the dead, so they can play the role of a dead character. In other words, they agree to be “zombies”. What do witches do when they want to communicate with dead spirits? They summon them using certain magic spells. Do you innerstand now why it is called a writ of summons?
The sheeple are so brainwashed and spiritually brain dead that they are not even aware that they have been monetized and turned into dead entities, so they can be sold on the stock market by the stock traders/traitors of mankind. To make fun of them, the Elite order their minions to create TV series and movies about zombies, such as The Walking Dead.
In this TV series, the zombies represent the sheeple that do not even realize that they are legally dead. The so-called zombie apocalypse is already here, because the sheeple are, in a sense, the walking dead!
It is time to wake up sheeple and stop acting like zombies! The grass is much greener on the side of the living.
Poll Shows Americans Waking Up, Majority Now Suspects Unelected Shadow Government In Charge [2018] September 28 2022 | From: TheFreeThoughtProject
According to a Monmouth University Poll that was released this week, the majority of Americans believes that a group of unelected government and military officials secretly manipulate the United State government from behind the scenes.
According to the poll, both democrats and republicans feel that there is a “deep state” faction that works in secrecy and exists to shape policy as well as spy on American citizens.
“A majority of the American public believe that the U.S. government engages in widespread monitoring of its own citizens and worry that the U.S. government could be invading their own privacy. The Monmouth University Poll also finds a large bipartisan majority who feel that national policy is being manipulated or directed by a “Deep State” of unelected government officials.
Americans of color on the center and left and NRA members on the right are among those most worried about the reach of government prying into average citizens’ lives.”
Not only do the majority assert that there is indeed a deep state, but they also readily admit that they think the US government is actively engaged in surveillance against its own citizens. Again, illustrating the ominous nature of such a notion, party lines did not matter. The suspicion of the government violating the rights of its own citizens is bipartisan.
“Fully 8-in-10 believe that the U.S. government currently monitors or spies on the activities of American citizens, including a majority (53%) who say this activity is widespread and another 29% who say such monitoring happens but is not widespread. Just 14% say this monitoring does not happen at all. There are no substantial partisan differences in these results..”
“This is a worrisome finding. The strength of our government relies on public faith in protecting our freedoms, which is not particularly robust. And it’s not a Democratic or Republican issue. These concerns span the political spectrum,” said Patrick Murray, director of the independent Monmouth University Polling Institute.
What’s more, only a small fraction of the people who were polled believe that this widespread 1984-style police state is justified. According to the poll, only 18% of Americans are asleep enough to believe that Uncle Sam watching their every move is warranted - a heartening statistic indeed.
This brings us to the question of why so many Americans [Westerners] feel that they are being spied on and controlled by shadow government officials who operate in secret?
The answer is quite simple: because it’s true!
As the torrent of Podesta emails from WikiLeaks exposed the crimes of the Clinton dynasty in 2016, the FBI followed up by releasing their own documents that were just as damning.
Buried inside 100 pages of heavily redacted interview summaries from the FBI’s investigation into Clinton, Americans were exposed to a series of allegations that were nothing short of bombshell - documenting an ultra-secret, high-level group within the government, who were actually referred to as “The Shadow Government.”
This Shadow Government has long been kept in the dark realms of conspiracy theory. However, thanks to the efforts of WikiLeaks and the push by Americans for more transparency, the truth has now become stranger and even more corrupt than fiction.
With every action recorded, phone tapped, innocent family surveilled, right stripped, and citizen killed by their government, the term “Freedom” has become a mere symbolic representation of the brittle shell of America left behind after being gutted by unelected operatives in the deep state hell bent on total control and perpetual war.
Those who thought electing Donald Trump could somehow change this paradigm are slowly figuring out that no matter what puppet resides at 1600 Pennsylvania Avenue, those who lurk behind the scenes are the ones shaping US policy. [Coment: WRONG. If you are not aware of the Alliance working to take down the Cabal then you should catch up on David Wilcock's work.].
No matter how much you may disagree or even like Donald Trump, the idea of a secret and unelected government forcing change without the public’s consent behind the scenes should shock the conscience.
DASH cryptocurrency and The Free Thought Project have formed a partnership that will continue to spread the ideas of peace and freedom while simultaneously teaching people how to operate outside of the establishment systems of control like using cryptocurrency instead of dollars.
Winning this battle is as simple as choosing to abstain from the violent corrupt old system and participating in the new and peaceful system that hands the power back to the people. DASH is this system.
DASH digital cash takes the control the banking elite has over money and gives it back to the people. It is the ultimate weapon in the battle against the money changers and information controllers.
If you'd like to start your own DASH wallet and be a part of this change and battle for peace and freedom, you can start right here. DASH is already accepted by vendors all across the world so you can begin using it immediately.
An Invisible Form Of Oppression: Our Food System September 27 2022 | From: Sott / Various
On April 4, 2018, the 50th anniversary of Martin Luther King Jr.'s death, I was honored to be asked to speak at Riverside Church in Harlem, the church where 51 years ago to the day MLK Jr. spoke out about the injustice of the Vietnam War. From that same pulpit, I gave a talk about the role of our food system and the food industry in deliberately subverting public health and targeting the poor and minorities.
The day was focused on MLK Jr's fight for civil rights and social justice for the minorities and poor. The harm of the food system, however, affects all of us. This is the transcript of the speech I gave on that auspicious night.
As a doctor, I took an oath to do no harm. Today, I stand here because there is harm being done to millions and I must speak out. We know all too well the visible forms of racism in our society. We know the inequities in income and opportunity.
We know the brutal violence and discrimination of the police. We know the shooting of black children. We know the name of Tamir Rice. We know the name of unarmed black men shot in the back. We know the name of Stephon Clark.
But we don't know the names of millions of African Americans [or anyone for that matter] killed every year by an invisible form of racism, a silent and insidious injustice.
This is an often-internalized force of racism and oppression that disproportionately affects the poor and African American communities.
We do know that 1.3% of all deaths are caused by gun violence. And it is real and tragic and needs to end.
But we may not know that 70% of deaths are caused by chronic disease - mostly the result of our toxic food system.
More African Americans are killed by bad food than anything else.
The science is clear - our processed, sugary, starchy diet is the single biggest cause of disease and death-type 2 diabetes, obesity, heart disease, stroke, high blood pressure, cancer, and even dementia.
Our food system is the deadliest weapon used against the poor and minorities- keeping them poor, sick and fat, hijacking their brains and biology.
We are told that it is our personal choice, that being fat results from eating too much and not exercising enough. That blames the victim - the subliminal message is that it's your fault you are fat and sick.
We may think that what we eat is a personal choice that is rooted in our cultural heritage and family customs.
But we know that the food industry designs our food to be addictive, that they hire craving experts who work in taste institutes to design what they call the bliss point of food - all with the purpose of creating heavy users. These are their internal corporate terms.
What if I told you that the food industry specifically targets the poor and minorities? It is easy to get someone who is already drinking a 20-ounce soda to buy a 2 liter bottle of soda.
What if I told you that sugar and processed foods were more addictive than cocaine, that the food industry has hijacked our brain chemistry, our taste buds, our metabolism, our bodies and our minds?
When our foods are biologically addictive the notion of personal choice is a fiction. It blames the victims for their choices.
How can we take care of our communities, when 23 million Americans live in food deserts? Where the only food available is processed junk from convenience stores, fast food outlets, and the closest grocery store is more than a mile away. And where it's hard to find fresh fruits and vegetables or healthy food.
It is food swamps - communities filled with fast food chains and bodegas plying highly processed addictive foods. They sell gallon cups of soda, and other sugar-loaded beverages, and there are fast-food chains peddling burgers, fries, and fried chicken on almost every street corner.
We know that your zip code is more important than your genetic code in determining your risk of disease and death.
And what about our kids? Forty percent of them are overweight. We now see 3 year olds with type 2 diabetes - which we used to call adult onset diabetes.
We are told that kids' behavior problems results from bad parenting. The research shows that African Americans are far less likely to graduate from high school or go to college.
But if our children go to school with a breakfast of Coke or colored sugar water and Doritos or Flaming Hot chips how can we expect them to focus or pay attention?
These are not foods. They are food-like substances with no nutritional benefit.
This diet creates an "achievement gap" because kids are too sick to learn - and affects far more kids of color than any other group. These kids are less likely to go to college, earn good incomes, and more likely to get sick and die young.
One in 10 of our kids are on ADD medication. And the science shows the junk our kids eat is a big part of the cause.
The food industry spends $10 billion on marketing junk food to our kids every year. The average kid sees over 6,000 ads for junk food and soda on TV and even more through social media. And minorities and African American kids are targeted more aggressively. These companies are junk food pushers.
Do you really think it was a coincidence that Paula Abdul and all the judges on American Idol had a 24 -ounce container of Coke in front of them at every show?
Top sports stars receive tens of millions of dollars from soda and fast food giants to promote their products to our children who idolize them.
Charter schools in the poorest most disadvantaged communities of color who feed the kids two to three healthy meals a day find that the kids are more likely to go to college than go to jail.
And we incarcerate African Americans at five times the rate of white Americans. Much of that is the result of racial targeting by the police and judicial system.
But it could be that much violent crime is also the result of our diet that robs us of our minds, affects our thinking, judgement, and ability to make good choices.
You may think that's too far-fetched. But studies have shown feeding violent prisoners healthy diets in prisons can reduce crime by 56%. When adding a multivitamin - because they're all so nutritionally deficient - violent crime goes down by 80%. We know that the task of ending mass incarceration and the New Jim Crow is complex and urgent.
We know that the task of building a just food system is also complex and urgent. We have to build a new food system together. Part of this task is listening to the voices of those directly affected by our toxic food system.
I once received a letter from a prison, from a murderer who changed his diet in prison and realized that his whole life of eating junk had made him violent and eating real food transformed him into a different person.
The food industry employs nefarious tactics to prevent change. They buy friends, silence critics, and sweeten their profits.
I was part of a documentary called Fed Up - a movie about how our food system makes us sick and fat with addictive sugary, starchy products.
I met with Bernice King, Martin Luther King Jr.'s daughter, and she explained to me to that non-violence also includes non-violence to ourselves. She was excited about showing Fed Up at the King Center in Atlanta.
But a few days later I got a call that the we couldn't show the film. Why, I asked? The answer: Coca-Cola funds the King Center.
The Dean of Spelman College in Atlanta told me that 50% of the entering class of African American freshman women had a chronic disease - type 2 diabetes, hypertension, or obesity.
Is it any surprise the NAACP and Hispanic groups oppose a soda tax?
We cannot stand for this. Martin Luther King Jr. once said, "Our lives begin to end the day we become silent about things that matter."
We can no longer be silent about this.
If you are African American you are 80% more likely to be diagnosed with type 2 diabetes, over 4 times as likely to have kidney failure, and 3.5 times as likely to suffer amputations as whites.
Yet we remain silent about the role of the food system killing millions of Americans. They tell us it is all personal choice.
Nonsense. Big food corrupts public health and advocacy groups. They fund hunger groups like the Food Research and Action Center and Feeding America.
These hunger groups strongly oppose limiting the use of food stamps or SNAP to buy soda, despite the fact the single biggest item of our food stamp bill (over $7 billion a year) is soda, or 20 billion servings a year to the poor.
Soda and sugar-sweetened beverages are the single biggest cause of obesity and type 2 diabetes.
Our bodies, our health, our children, our communities have been taken from us.
It is time we take them back.
It is time we say no to big food and institutionalized food injustice that is causing this slow-motion genocide.
It is time to free ourselves from corporate interests that privatize the profits and socialize the costs of their products.
Taking back our food and our food system is a revolutionary act.
There are things we can't change as individuals. But we all eat. We vote three times a day with our fork.
The single biggest political act and the single biggest act of self-love, of rebuilding our communities, is to choose real food.
So, what is real food? It's pretty simple. Next time you pick up something to eat, ask yourself this question: Did God make this or did man make this?
Did God make Doritos or a Coke? No. Did God make an egg or broccoli? Yes. We can teach our kids and teach ourselves how to choose and eat food that brings life not death.
Big Food would have you believe that it is expensive, that it is difficult, that it takes too much time. Don't believe them. It is not true.
We need to educate our kids, ourselves, and our communities. We have to do this together. In fact, we can only do this together. Black lives matter. Yes. And black health matters, too!
The harm done by the global food industry affects nearly all humans on the planet in some way.
This must stop. We can stop it with our fork, the most powerful weapon we have to change our health, our communities, our economy and the health the of the planet.
The Monetary System Is Collapsing: The Most Insidious Form Of Theft September 26 2022 | From: FinalWakeupCall / Various
Lack of logical foundation: President Richard M. Nixon announced on August 15, 1971, that the U.S. would no longer officially exchange dollars for gold and many are still referring to that decision as one of the biggest mistakes ever.
Nixon, for one, thought gold-price stability was bogus. It has since become clear why he went off the gold standard.
A good controlling factor over the monetary system would be the price of gold. The implications; conduct monetary and fiscal policy such that the gold markets are content to sit tight, and marvel at the economic results. Do otherwise, and the ordeal of the 1970s will be repeated today.
Rarely in the history of political economy have choices been so stark, so obvious. One wonders whether it is being done on purpose. Which as we know is actually the truth.
The USD has no logical foundation behind it with regards to any sustainable value due to a lack of hard asset collateral. It’s just air! That means all people’s money, in their checking, savings, investment and retirement accounts is simply not real! And since 1971 never has been!
When the new gold backed USN is forced into play, money will obtain real value, and matters are going to change very fast. This dramatic event for change will start happening sooner than anyone realises, while the great illusion of western dominance will end.
Three quarters of a century of military dominance will be gone in the blink of an eye. No more grace periods to extend. No more meetings to renegotiate treaties and implement international bankruptcy rulings.
It is clear, that the new global financial system has evolved to a higher standard. It will prevent many forms of fraud and allow for unrestricted movement of funds from place to place as needed, instead of delays or freezes or holds due to compliance issues.
Unimpeded movement of funds is important to the wellbeing of society. The timely arrival of funds according to budgetary needs is critical to the survival of businesses.
Today’s end of the line situation is far grimmer than anyone is being told. Only the implementation of RV followed by GESARA will deliver the fiscal remedy for folks who must now live in this new reality. By the way, only Americans enjoyed the continuing endless supply of currency being forced upon them by the holders of all global debt, known as The Chinese Elders.
The Weakness of Paper Money:
Precisely this non-backing of currency is the inherent weakness of “paper money” – governments have the power to declare paper to be “legal tender” – but they do not have the power to give that money value. This is something that no one, especially not politicians will tell you.
All Central Banks should be abolished.
The average citizen doesn’t have a clue how dangerous and corrupt the Central Banking System and their governments really are. Please read here how we the people can help to abolish all Central Banks.
The world over, governments have embarked on an out-of-control experiment with debt money, that they could alternatively have issued as ‘debt-free-money’, without interest. –In today’s world, credit money is printed in absurd quantities out of thin air, and so much of it is borrowed that it can never ever be paid back in full to the creditors.
It took the USA “216 years to rack up $8.5 trillion in debt… and then just 8 more years to double that amount.” – Governments won’t be able to do a single thing about this crisis, as they themselves have knowingly created it!
When governments tap out their ability to increase their tax revenue and their debts become too mountainous to maintain; they have one last way they can take what they need, and it is the most insidious. They can print the currency they need to pay for whatever they want.
The Most Insidious Form of Theft
The Central Banks’ balance sheet – which represents the total amount of currency in circulation or in central bank’s reserves – has the USD blown up from $1.1 trillion in 2008 to nearly $4 trillion in 2017.
Not many people understand the misconception of these actions or their inevitable failure. The great advantage of paper money is purportedly its flexibility.
They can, in theory, print more of it when they need it to facilitate economic growth or forestall a crisis. But that doesn’t really work. Printing money doesn’t create wealth or stimulatethe economy. Instead, it simply makes each unit in circulation less valuable and leads to higher prices, a monetary phenomenon that is called inflation.
It is an insidious form of stealing. People feel wealthier as the numbers on their pay checks and bank balances rise. As nominal stock prices rise, people feel as though things are going well. But they don’t notice the value of each unit is eroding steadily.
Worse still, it provides incentives for going into debt. People who borrow today will repay those obligations in the future with units that are worth much less.
Inflation has been so prevalent for so long, most people don’t even know it’s not part of a normal economic system. Data on consumer prices from 1596-1971 in Great Britain prove that during gold-standard periods, commodity prices remain stable – even over hundreds of years – during periods of massive economic growth and soaring populations.
The most important test of paper money is whether it facilitates real, per-capita economic growth. And on that score, the evidence is overwhelmingly negative. When money is sound and reliable, it doesn’t lose value over time.
The Name of the Game is the ‘Race to Debase’ Purchasing Power
Today’s monetary system, however, isn’t sound or reliable. Politicians fool around with the money supply constantly. Sometimes, they increase the amount of money by huge amounts in response to demands from powerful groups, especially banks.
As a result, the products you need to live a regular life – like gasoline, milk, housing, and medical care – constantly increase in price. And these prices go up, year after year, even when wages don’t.
Paper money works great for the rich, who can hedge their exposure to the currency and whose access to fixed-rate credit allows huge asset purchases. But it is horrible for the middle class.
When the US-dollar as the reserve currency was taken off gold, it allowed the central banks to continuously debase their currency, while the wages paid in the same currency no longer kept pace with inflation.
Any reasonable study of paper-money systems versus gold-backed monetary systems demonstrates the superiority of gold straightaway. So, why does almost every modern government choose paper?
The answer is because paper money allows the wealthy and powerful vested interests in the economy to manipulate interest rates, prices, the money supply, and credit to their exclusive advantage.
Today’s monetary system dooms every average worker to poverty and almost guarantees that the rich and powerful will become richer. And it is this massive gap that is ultimately fuelling the problems the world faces today.
The Problem with Paper Assets
Wealth is either physical, by for example owning a big house or a Rembrandt painting, or it is paper wealth.
All paper assets are a claim against tangible goods and services. No more goods and services can be obtained than the economy can produce. Since the economy of 2008-13 produced only a fraction as much real wealth as the claims against it, those claims will have to be applied to future output.
The Debt
The IMF has just reported that total global debt is now at a staggering $164 trillion, which amounts to 225% of total global GDP. Every person on this planet could turn over everything they produce for the next two to three years and the world will still be in debt.
The number is so astronomically high that it is impossible to pay off, and so there really is no point in even trying. In fact, governments are not at all concerned with paying off the debt because they know the number has lost it’s meaning in the face of such cartoonish proportions.
Currency is created by private institutions who create as much money as banks and governments desire. This money is created out of thin air, literally by punching a few keys on a computer keyboard and sending tiny currents of electricity to a screen which displays whatever number the private corporation wants.
It is not backed by anything of value, yet these private institutions charge interest to governments and private sector borrowers.
For every unit created and loaned, the magical money-lenders demand that unit back with interest. Since the lender is demanding more than was created, it is mathematically impossible to ever pay off debt, because the currency units to pay for interest simply don’t exist.
The modern-day debt system maintains a tragic if not dramatic tension in the world, and on a planet with such abundant resources, you have to wonder with a global debt number so high, do people of the planet owe money to each other, or are they really in debt to some type of institution?
It definitely does not make sense for the human race to enslave itself with such an insane system. Theoretically the debt is owed to the central banks that created the units out of nothing. So actually there is no debt owed to anybody!
Corruption of Debt
The only way the government can give away something is by first taking it from someone else. This is critical. The governments are taking what they want, and this is exactly what has created today’s crisis.
Taxes are the most obvious way governments take for redistribution. But governments are now reaching the limits of what they can generate from new or higher taxes. When governments realise they can’t take any more from you through taxes, they use debt instruments to take from your children and grandchildren.
Governments have taken advantage of that option to a historic degree; the U.S. and EU government owe more than $20 trillion each. The number is so large, it’s meaningless. No one can comprehend how much money $20 trillion really is. A better way to think about it is to say; each taxpayer owes roughly $175,000. That’s like a whole additional mortgage for most people.
This massive amount of national debt cannot be financed at any real rate of interest. If governments have to pay even 6% interest on their debt, it would cost roughly $1.2 trillion a year. And that’s just to pay the interest on the debt. The entire government brings in about $3.3 trillion a year in taxes.
This debt addiction has filtered into four critical areas of the economy. Instead of learning from the mistakes that crippled the economy in 2008 when the mortgage bubble burst, they have created three new bubbles that could soon blow up.
1.
The largest threat is the corporate bond market, particularly junk bonds.
Over the past 10 years, students, most of whom have virtually no income, have racked up enormous debts. As of 2017, student debt totals more than $1.5 trillion, the second-largest source of household debt after home mortgages.
All the signs show that the debt piled on our youth will become another catastrophic bubble in the western economy.
Most people have no idea how pervasive subprime loans have become in auto lending. Over 90% of cars sold are financed by loans of leases.
4.
The housing bubble trouble
The housing bubble is going to repeat itself with even more unsold and unfinished houses. Spain in 2008 was stuck throughout the country with over 3,5 million unsold houses. That number is set to grow again as about half of the houses ‘sold’ were bought by speculators that cannot resell. So, expect more new and unfinished properties in this upcoming crash, than ten years ago.
How is this substantiated? It’s simple. Historically, “junk” bonds – aka high-yield bonds issued by less-creditworthy companies – have never yielded less than 5% annually. But they hit that low in mid-2014, and today, they’re not much higher than that.
Likewise, in 2014, the difference between the yields on junk bonds and the yields on investment-grade bonds had almost never been lower. That means credit was more available than almost ever before for small, less-than-investment-grade companies. The last time credit was that widely available – and at such low costs – was in 2007. And that ended badly.
Throughout 2015, the spread between low-quality corporate bonds and high-quality corporate bonds began rising. That indicated a growing fear in the market as people reduced the amount of risk in their portfolios and shifted to higher-quality and higher-rated assets.
During the first half of 2016, the high-yield spread began declining. It’s now close to the post-crisis lows of 2014, indicating complacency in the high-yield debt market. But it won’t last. It never does.
Most investors don’t know anything about the Central Banks quietly reversing course. They have started draining the system of reserves. In October 2017, they began to “run off” their balance sheet by about $13 billion a month.
That is, as the bonds they hold mature, these assets won’t “roll” into new securities. And so, for the last seven months, their balance sheets have shrunk by $10 billion a month in bond securities and $3 billion a month in mortgage securities.
It took the speculative bubble a long time to reach negative interest rates on junk bonds. It likewise will take a shorter time for this to fundamentally change the financial markets, hurting sentiment and securities prices. But make no mistake, the tide is going out. And the tide is going to get more powerful as it moves on.
The coming collapse in the bond market also will be far worse than it was last time. The Federal Reserve’s twin policies of keeping interest rates near zero and buying tens of billions of dollars in Treasury securities and mortgage-backed debt have driven the huge bull market in bonds and properties.
As the Central Banks buy bonds, they push bond rates down and force the other buyers of bonds to buy riskier debt that historically offers much higher yields.
The Real Panic in the Corporate Bond Market Could Arrive Soon
Expect the average price of non-investment debt – junk bonds – to fall by 50%. Investment-grade bonds will fall substantially too, by an estimated 25%. This is going to wipe out a huge amount of capital, which is almost 100% guaranteed to happen.
Junk-bond guru Martin Fridson has projected $1.6 trillion of bonds and loans will default. That means three times as many debt issuers will default than in the last recession.
This would have happened already, according to Fridson, but the government has kept interest rates artificially low, making it possible for many at-risk debt-issuers to refinance their debt at a lower interest rate. This delayed an inevitable wave of defaults in the junk-bond industry, but only temporarily. The government can’t keep interest rates low forever. The obvious question is:
Why on Earth did so many people borrow so much money they have no hope of ever repaying?
Because it is impossible to pay off the debts that have been accumulated. Society is fast approaching the point where the government cannot even afford to pay the interest on this debt and that leaves it with one last tool to extend its power over we, the people.
Consumer Society
We have been left with a heavily indebted economy that’s still being fuelled by consumption. The system rewards debtors and punishes savers. It makes long-term capital investments nearly impossible because of economic volatility and financial risks caused by inflation.
Worst of all, the system requires everyone to become a speculator because there’s no other way to safeguard savings.
What the gold standard would really do would be to ensure a level playing field for all economic actors – borrowers, lenders, and even governments.
That’s why bankers – who are always highly leveraged, media barons – who constantly borrow to buy more properties, and governments – which can never balance their budgets, all hate gold. To maintain their power, they all need paper money. The system and those who profit from it would not survive a transition back to the gold standard.
The little-known reality of a paper money system is that it robs the people of purchasing power.
That means the average person works harder and produces more, but cannot buy as much as he has been used to. Meanwhile, asset prices soar.
The wealthy become wealthier as the value of everything they own becomes inflated along with the currency.
This explains why the wealth gap has grown so much since 2000. And it explains why the wealth gap will continue to grow, so long as governments continue their corrupt policies of quantitative easing, corporate bailouts, overspending, and over-taxation.
Simply working harder – or working smarter – isn’t benefiting employees anymore. On the other hand, People who own assets and businesses have seen their wealth soar over the last 40 years.
This system dooms every average worker to poverty and almost guarantees that the rich and powerful will stay that way. And it is this massive gap that is ultimately fuelling today’s problems.
How Greece Became A Guinea Pig For A Cashless And Controlled Society September 25 2022 | From: MintPressNews / Various
As Greece moves closer to becoming a cashless society, it is clear that the country’s attitude towards cash is reckless and dangerous. The supposed convenience of switching to a cash-free system comes with a great deal of risk, including needless overreach by the state.
Day by day, we’re moving towards a brave new world where every transaction is tracked, every purchase is recorded, the habits and preferences of everyone noted and analyzed. What I am describing is the “cashless society,” where plastic and electronic money are king, while banknotes and coins are abolished.
“Progress” is, after all, deemed to be a great thing. In a recent discussion, I observed on an online message board regarding gentrification in my former neighborhood of residence in Queens, New York, the closure of yet another longtime local business was met by one user with a virtual shrug: “Who needs stores when you have Amazon?”
This last quote is, of course, indicative of the brick-and-mortar store, at least in its familiar form. In December 2016, Amazon launched a checkout-free convenience store in Seattle - largely free of employees, but also free of cash transactions, as purchases are automatically charged to one’s Amazon account.
“Progress” is therefore cast as the abolition of currency, and the elimination of even more jobs, all in the name of technological progress and the “convenience” of saving a few minutes of waiting at the checkout counter.
Still insist on being old-fashioned and stuck behind the times, preferring to visit brick-and-mortar stores and paying in cash? You may very well be a terrorist! Pay for your coffee or your visit to an internet cafe with cash?
Potential terrorist, according to the FBI. Indeed, insisting on paying with cash is, according to the United States Department of Homeland Security, “suspicious and weird.”
The European Union, ever a force for positive change and progress, also seems to agree. The non-elected European Commission’s “Inception Impact Assessment” warns that the anonymity of cash transactions facilitates “money laundering” and “terrorist financing activities.”
This point of view is shared by such economists as the thoroughly discredited proponent of austerity Kenneth Rogoff, Lawrence Summer (a famed deregulator, as well as eulogizer of the “godfather” of austerity Milton Friedman), and supposed anti-austerity crusader Joseph Stiglitz, who told fawning participants at the World Economic Forum in Davos earlier this year that the United States should do away with all currency.
Logically, of course, the next step is to punish law-abiding citizens for the actions of a very small criminal population and for the failures of law enforcement to curb such activities. The EU plans to accomplish this through the exploration of upper limits on cash payments, while it has already taken the step of abolishing the 500-euro banknote.
The International Monetary Fund (IMF), which day after day is busy “saving” economically suffering countries such as Greece, also happens to agree with this brave new worldview. In a working paper titled “The Macroeconomics of De-Cashing,” which the IMF claims does not necessarily represent its official views, the fund nevertheless provides a blueprint with which governments around the world could begin to phase out cash.
This process would commence with “initial and largely uncontested steps” (such as the phasing out of large-denomination bills or the placement of upper limits on cash transactions). This process would then be furthered largely by the private sector, providing cashless payment options for people’s “convenience,” rather than risk popular objections to policy-led decashing.
The IMF, which certainly has a sterling track record of sticking up for the poor and vulnerable in society, comforts us by saying that these policies should be implemented in ways that would augment “economic and social benefits.”
The IMF’s Greek Experiment in Austerity
These suggestions, which of course the IMF does not necessarily officially agree with, have already begun to be implemented to a significant extent in the IMF debt colony known officially as Greece, where the IMF has been implementing “socially fair and just” austerity policies since 2010, which have resulted, during this period, in a GDP decline of over 25 percent, unemployment levels exceeding 28 percent, repeated cuts to what are now poverty-level salaries and pensions, and a “brain drain” of over 500,000 people - largely young and university-educated - migrating out of Greece.
Protesters against new austerity measures hold a placard depicting Labour Minister George Katrougalos as the movie character Edward Scissorhands during a protest outside Zappeion Hall in Athens, Friday, Sept. 16, 2016. The placard reads in Greek”Katrougalos Scissorhands”
Indeed, it could be said that Greece is being used as a guinea pig not just for a grand neoliberal experiment in both austerity, but de-cashing as well. The examples are many, and they have found fertile ground in a country whose populace remains shell-shocked by eight years of economic depression.
A new law that came into effect on January 1 incentivizes going cashless by setting a minimum threshold of spending at least 10 percent of one’s income via credit, debit, or prepaid card in order to attain a somewhat higher tax-free threshold.
Beginning July 27, dozens of categories of businesses in Greece will be required to install aptly-acronymized “POS” (point-of-sale) card readers and to accept payments by card. Businesses are also required to post a notice, typically by the entrance or point of sale, stating whether card payments are accepted or not.
Another new piece of legislation, in effect as of June 1, requires salaries to be paid via direct electronic transfers to bank accounts. Furthermore, cash transactions of over 500 euros have been outlawed.
In Greece, where in the eyes of the state citizens are guilty even if proven innocent, capital controls have been implemented preventing ATM cash withdrawals of over 840 euros every two weeks. These capital controls, in varying forms, have been in place for two years with no end in sight, choking small businesses that are already suffering.
Citizens have, at various times, been asked to collect every last receipt of their expenditures, in order to prove their income and expenses - otherwise, tax evasion is assumed, just as ownership of a car (even if purchased a decade or two ago) or an apartment (even if inherited) is considered proof of wealth and a “hidden income” that is not being declared.
The “heroic” former Finance Minister Yanis Varoufakis had previously proposed a cap of cash transactions at 50 or 70 euros on Greek islands that are popular tourist destinations, while also putting forth an asinine plan to hire tourists to work as “tax snitches,” reporting businesses that “evade taxes” by not providing receipts even for the smallest transactions.
All of these measures, of course, are for the Greeks’ own good and are in the best interest of the country and its economy, combating supposedly rampant “tax evasion” (while letting the biggest tax evaders off the hook), fighting the “black market” (over selling cheese pies without issuing a receipt, apparently), and of course, nipping “terrorism” in the bud.
As with the previous discussion I observed about Amazon being a satisfactory replacement for the endangered brick-and-mortar business, one learns a lot from observing everyday conversations amongst ordinary citizens. A recent conversation I personally overheard while paying a bill at a public utility revealed just how successful the initial and largely uncontested steps enacted in Greece have been.
In the line ahead of me, an elderly man announced that he was paying his water bill by debit card, “in order to build towards the tax-free threshold.”
When it was suggested to him that the true purpose of encouraging cashless payments was to track every transaction, even for a stick of gum, and to transfer all money into the banking system, he and one other elderly gentleman threw a fit, claiming “there is no other way to combat tax evasion.”
The irony that they were paying by card to avoid taxation themselves was lost on them—as is the fact that the otherwise fiscally responsible Germany, whose government never misses an opportunity to lecture the “spendthrift” and “irresponsible” Greeks, has the largest black market in Europe (exceeding 100 billion euros annually), ranks first in Europe in financial fraud, is the eighth-largest tax haven worldwide, and one of the top tax-evading countries in Europe.
Also lost on these otherwise elderly gentlemen was a fact not included in the official propaganda campaign: Germans happen to love their cash, as evidenced by the fierce opposition that met a government plan to outlaw cash payments of 5,000 euros or more.
In addition, about 80 percent of transactions in Germany are still conducted in cash. The German tabloid Bild went as far as to publish an op-ed titled “Hands off our cash” in response to the proposed measure.
Global Powers Jumping on Cashless Bandwagon
Nevertheless, a host of other countries across Europe and worldwide have shunned Germany’s example, instead siding with the IMF and Stiglitz. India, one of the most cash-reliant countries on earth, recently eliminated 86 percent of its currency practically overnight, with the claimed goal, of course, of targeting terrorism and the “black market.”
Indians stand in line to deposit discontinued notes in a bank in Jammu and Kashmir, India,, Dec. 30, 2016. India yanked most of its currency bills from circulation without warning on Nov. 8, delivering a jolt to the country’s high-performing economy and leaving countless citizens scrambling for cash. (AP/Channi Anand)
Iceland, a country that stands as an admirable example of standing up to the IMF-global banking cartel in terms of its response to the country’s financial meltdown of 2008, nevertheless has long embraced cashlessness.
Practically all transactions, even the most minute, are conducted electronically, while “progressive” tourists extol the benefits of not being inconvenienced by the many seconds it would take to withdraw funds from an ATM or exchange currency upon arrival.
Oddly enough, Iceland was already largely cashless prior to its financial collapse in 2008 - proving that this move towards “progress” did nothing to prevent an economic meltdown or to stop its perpetrators: the very same banks being entrusted with nearly all of the money supply.
Other examples of cashlessness abound in Europe. Cash transactions in Sweden represent just 3 percent of the national economy, and most banks no longer hold banknotes. Similarly, many Norwegian banks no longer issue cash, while the country’s largest bank, DNB, has called upon the public to cease using cash. Denmark has announced a goal of eliminating banknotes by 2030.
Belgium has introduced a 3,000-euro limit on cash transactions and 93 percent of transactions are cashless. In France, the respective percentage is 92 percent, and cash transactions have been limited to 1,000 euros, just as in Spain.
Outside of Europe, cash is being eliminated even in countries such as Somalia and Kenya, while South Korea - itself no stranger to IMF intervention in its economy - has, similarly to Greece, implemented preferential tax policies for consumers who make payments using cards.
Aside from policy changes, practical everyday examples also exist in abundance. Just try to purchase an airline ticket with cash, for instance. It remains possible - but is also said to raise red flags. In many cases, renting an automobile or booking a hotel room with cash is simply not possible.
The aforementioned Department of Homeland Security manual considers any payment with cash to be “suspicious behavior” - as one clearly has something to hide if they do not wish to be tracked via electronic payment methods. Ownership of gold makes the list of suspicious activities as well.
Just as the irony of Germany being a largely cash-based society while pushing cashless policies in its Greek protectorate is lost on many Greeks, what is lost on seemingly almost everyone is this: something that is new doesn’t necessarily represent progress, nor does something different.
Something that is seemingly easier, or more convenient, is not necessarily progress either. But for many, “technological progress,” just like “scientific innovation” in all its forms and without exception, has attained an aura of infallibility, revered with religious-like fervor.
People queue in front of a bank for an ATM as a man lies on the ground begging for change, in Athens. (AP/Thanassis Stavrakis)
Combating purported tax evasion is also treated with a religious-like fervor, even while ordinary citizens - such as the two aforementioned gentlemen in Greece - typically seek to minimize their outlays to the tax offices.
Moreover, while such measures essentially enact a collective punishment regardless of guilt or innocence, corporations and oligarchs who utilize tax loopholes and offshore havens go unpunished and are wholly unaffected by a switch to a cashless economy in the supposed battle against tax evasion.
This is evident, for instance, in the case of “LuxLeaks,” which revealed the names of dozens of corporations benefiting from favorable tax rulings and tax avoidance schemes in Luxembourg, one of the original founding members of the EU.
European Commission President Jean-Claude Juncker, formerly the prime minister of Luxembourg, has faced repeated accusations of impeding EU investigations into corporate tax avoidance scandals during his 18-year term as prime minister. Juncker has defended Luxembourg’s tax arrangements as legal.
He has not hesitated to unabashedly intervene in Greek electoral contests, calling on Greeks to avoid the “wrong outcome” in the January 2015 elections (where the supposedly anti-austerity SYRIZA, which has since proven to be boldly pro-austerity, were elected).
He also urged the Greek electorate to vote “yes” (in favor of more EU-proposed austerity) in the July 2015 referendum - where the overwhelming result in favor of “no” was itself overturned by SYRIZA within a matter of days. In the European Union today, if there’s something that can be counted on, it’s the blatant hypocrisy of its leaders.
Nevertheless, proving that old habits of collaborationism die hard in Greece, the rector of the law school of the state-owned Aristotle University in Thessaloniki awarded Juncker with an honorary doctorate for his contribution to European political and legal values.
Cashless Policies Bode Poorly for the Future
Where does all this lead though? What does a cashless economy actually mean and why are global elites pushing so fervently for it?
Consider the following: in a cashless economy without coins or banknotes, every transaction is tracked. Buying and spending habits are monitored, and it is not unheard of for credit card companies to cancel an individual’s credit or to lower their credit rating based on real or perceived risks ranging from shopping at discount stores to purchasing alcoholic beverages. Indeed, this is understood to be common practice.
Other players are entering the game too: in late May, Google announced plans to track credit and debit card transactions.
Claudia Lombana, PayPal’s shopping specialist, stamps a guest’s passport as he visits the travel section of PayPal’s Cashless Utopia in New York (Victoria Will/AP)
More to the point though, a cashless economy doesn’t just mean that financial institutions, large corporations, or the state itself can monitor all transactions that are occurring. It also means that the entirety of the money supply - itself now existing only in “virtual” form - will belong to the banking system.
Not one cent will exist outside of the banking system, as physical currency will simply not be in circulation. The banking system - and others - will be aware not just of every transaction, but will be in possession of all of our society’s money supply, and will even have the ability to receive a percentage of every transaction that is taking place.
So what happens if your spending habits or your choice of travel destinations raises “red flags”? What happens if you run into hard times economically and miss a few payments? What happens if you are deemed to be a political dissident or liability – perhaps an “enemy of the state”?
Freezing a bank account or confiscating funds from accounts can take place almost instantaneously. Users of eBay and PayPal, for instance, are quite aware of the ease with which PayPal can confiscate funds from a user’s account based simply on a claim filed against that individual.
Simply forgetting one’s password to an online account can set off an aggravating flurry of calls in order to prove that your money is your own - and that’s without considering the risks of phishing and of online databases being compromised.
Many responsible credit card holders found that their credit cards were suddenly canceled in the aftermath of the “Great Recession” simply due to perceived risk. And if you happen to be an individual deemed to be “dangerous,” you can be effectively and easily frozen out of the economy.
Those thinking that the “cashless revolution” will also herald the return of old-style bartering and other communal economic schemes might also wish to reconsider that line of thinking. In the United States, for instance, bartering transactions are considered taxable by the Internal Revenue Service.
As more and more economic activity of all sorts takes place online, the tax collector will have an easier time detecting such activity. Thinking of teaching your child to be responsible with finances? That too will have a cost, as even lemonade stands have been targeted for “operating without a permit.” It’s not far-fetched to imagine that particularly overzealous government authorities could also target such activity for “tax evasion.”
In Greece, while oligarchs get to shift their money to offshore tax havens without repercussion and former Finance Minister Gikas Hardouvelis has been acquitted for failure to submit a declaration of assets, where major television and radio stations operate with impunity without a valid license while no new players can enter the marketplace and where ordinary households and small businesses are literally being taxed to death, police in August 2016 arrested a father of three with an unemployed spouse for selling donuts without a license and fined him 5,000 euros. In another incident, an elderly man selling roasted chestnuts in Thessaloniki was surrounded by 15 police officers and arrested for operating without a license.
Amidst this blatant hypocrisy, governments and financial institutions love electronic money for another reason, aside from the sheer control that it affords them.
But ultimately, the elephant in the room is whether the banking system even should be entrusted with the entirety of the monetary supply. The past decade has seen the financial collapse of 2008, the crumbling of financial institutions such as Lehman Brothers in the United States and a continent-wide banking crisis in Europe, which was the true objective behind the “bailouts” of countries such as Greece - saving European and American banks exposed to “toxic” bonds from these nations.
Italy’s banking system is currently teetering on dangerous ground, while the Greek banking system, already recapitalized three times since the onset of the country’s economic crisis, may need yet another taxpayer-funded recapitalization. Even the virtual elimination of cash in Iceland did not prevent the country’s banking meltdown in 2008.
Should we entrust the entirety of the money supply to these institutions? What happens if the banking system experiences another systemic failure? Who do you trust more: yourself or institutions that have proven to be wholly irresponsible and unaccountable in their actions?
The answer to that question should help guide the debate as to whether society should go cashless.
The Crown Of England Is Owned And Operated By The Vatican September 24 2022 | From: OmniThought / Various
The Vatican is one of the most powerful corporations in the world. It is powerful because it controls the Crown of England and nearly every church in the world, especially Catholic churches.
Furthermore, the Vatican operates under Roman law and controls most of the Western courts and some Eastern courts.
In the USA today, nearly every U.S. court is controlled by the Crown Temple, a corporation controlled by the Vatican. This is why there is always a Crown agent in the courtroom during a trial. Any country that has Crown agents running its legal system is controlled by the Vatican / Rome to a large degree.
This means that the United States, Canada, United Kingdom, Australia, New Zealand, and “countries” that are operating under the Western legal system are all Roman “colonies”.
The Vatican is a religious corporation run by religious leaders who are loyal to the Roman Empire. In other words, Rome still rules the world! It rules the world through the Crown of England, the Roman Catholic Church and the Vatican.
They did not call it the ROMAN Catholic Church for no reason. It is right in your face and hidden in plain sight!
According to an article published by BBC.com, there are an estimated 1.2 billion Roman Catholics in the world. This means that the Vatican/Rome has about 1.2 billion “citizens”, or more accurately slaves.
Because nearly every Christian church is controlled by the Vatican to a certain degree, the Vatican/Rome has more than 1.2 billion slaves to exploit and sell. Do you innerstand now why Rome still rules the world?
The Crown is Owned and Operated by the Roman Cult, and Has Been Since 1213
The Definitive Treaty of Peace of 1783 says that King George was the Arch Treasurer and Prince Elector of the Holy Roman Empire and the United States of America.
This video goes through how the Roman Cult orchestrated the slave trade, then the War of Independence, then the War of 1812, then the Civil War, then WW1, WW2, and now they are building up to WW3 [which will not take place].
All warfare is commerce, and all commerce is warfare. All fictitious entities operate under Roman Law.
Are Elite Controllers A Fantasy? Read This September 23 2022 | From: JonRappoport / Various
We rarely get a chance to see a smoking gun that proves elite controllers are running the show from behind the curtain. That’s why there is a curtain.
So I’m republishing a conversation between two members of the Rockefeller Trilateral Commission (TC) and a US reporter.
In 1969, four years before birthing the TC with David Rockefeller, Zbigniew Brzezinski wrote:
“[The] nation state as a fundamental unit of man’s organized life has ceased to be the principal creative force.
International banks and multinational corporations are acting and planning in terms that are far in advance of the political concepts of the nation state.”
Goodbye, separate nations.
Any doubt on the question of TC goals is answered by David Rockefeller himself, the founder of the TC, in his Memoirs (2003):
“Some even believe we are part of a secret cabal working against the best interests of the United States, characterizing my family and me as ‘internationalists’ and of conspiring with others around the world to build a more integrated global political and economic structure—one world, if you will. If that is the charge, I stand guilty, and I am proud of it.”
The conversation was public knowledge at the time. Anyone who was anyone in Washington politics, in media, in think-tanks, had access to it. Understood its meaning.
But no one shouted from the rooftops. No one used the conversation to force a scandal. No one protested loudly.
The conversation revealed that the entire basis of the US Constitution had been torpedoed, that the people who were running US national policy (which includes trade treaties) were agents of an elite shadow group. No question about it.
And yet: official silence. Media silence. The Dept. of Justice made no moves, Congress undertook no serious inquiries, and the President, Jimmy Carter, issued no statements.
Carter was himself an agent of the Trilateral Commission in the White House.
He had been plucked from obscurity by David Rockefeller, and through elite TC press connections, vaulted into the spotlight as a pre-eminent choice for the Presidency.
The 1978 conversation featured reporter, Jeremiah Novak, and two Trilateral Commission members, Karl Kaiser and Richard Cooper. The interview took up the issue of who exactly, during President Carter’s administration, was formulating US economic and political policy.
The careless and off-hand attitude of Trilateralists Kaiser and Cooper is astonishing. It’s as if they’re saying, “What we’re revealing is already out in the open, it’s too late to do anything about it, why are you so worked up, we’ve already won…”
Here we go:
Novak (the reporter): Is it true that a private [Trilateral committee] led by Henry Owen of the US and made up of [Trilateral] representatives of the US, UK, West Germany, Japan, France and the EEC is coordinating the economic and political policies of the Trilateral countries [which would include the US]?
Cooper:Yes, they have met three times.
Novak: Yet, in your recent paper you state that this committee should remain informal because to formalize ‘this function might well prove offensive to some of the Trilateral and other countries which do not take part.’ Who are you afraid of?
Kaiser: Many countries in Europe would resent the dominant role that West Germany plays at these [Trilateral] meetings.
Cooper:Many people still live in a world of separate nations, and they would resent such coordination [of policy].
Novak: But this [Trilateral] committee is essential to your whole policy. How can you keep it a secret or fail to try to get popular support [for its decisions on how Trilateral member nations will conduct their economic and political policies]?
Cooper:Well, I guess it’s the press’ job to publicize it.
Novak: Yes, but why doesn’t President Carter come out with it and tell the American people that [US] economic and political power is being coordinated by a [Trilateral] committee made up of Henry Owen and six others? After all, if [US] policy is being made on a multinational level, the people should know.
Cooper:President Carter and Secretary of State Vance have constantly alluded to this in their speeches. [a lie]
Kaiser: It just hasn’t become an issue.
This interview slipped under the mainstream media radar, which is to say, it was buried.
US economic and political policy run by a committee of the Trilateral Commission - the Commission had been created in 1973 by David Rockefeller and his sidekick, Zbigniew Brzezinski.
When Carter won the presidential election, his aide, Hamilton Jordan, said that if after the inauguration, Cy Vance and Brzezinski came on board as secretary of state and national security adviser, “We’ve lost. And I’ll quit.” Lost - because both men were powerful members of the Trilateral Commission and their appointment to key positions would signal a surrender of White House control to the Commission.
Vance and Brzezinski were appointed secretary of state and national security adviser, as Jordan feared. But he didn’t quit. He became Carter’s chief of staff.
Now consider the vast propaganda efforts of the past 40 years, on so many levels, to install the idea that all nations and peoples of the world are a single Collective.
From a very high level of political and economic power, this propaganda op has had the objective of grooming the population for a planet that is one coagulated mass, run and managed by one force. A central engine of that force is the Trilateral Commission.
How does a shadowy group like the TC accomplish its goal?
One basic strategy is: destabilize nations; ruin their economies; ratify trade treaties that effectively send millions and millions of manufacturing jobs off to places where virtual slave labor does the work; adding insult to injury, export the cheap products of those slave-factories back to the nations who lost the jobs and undercut their domestic manufacturers, forcing them to close their doors and fire still more employees.
Related: More Confessions Of An Economic Hit Man: "This Time, They’re Coming For Your Democracy"
And then solve that economic chaos by bringing order.
What kind of order?
Eventually, one planet, with national borders erased, under one management system, with a planned global economy, “to restore stability,” “for the good of all, for lasting harmony.”
If you were a young ambitious reporter for The New York Times, if you read this astonishing Trilateral interview, wouldn’t you go to your editor and demand to be put on the story?
Wouldn’t you want to dig deep and find out more details and names? Wouldn’t you want to blow the whole, yes, conspiracy, wide open? Wouldn’t you want readers to know the truth about who is running their country from behind the scenes?
Well, yes, you might. But if you did, and if you wouldn’t back down after your editor told you to forget about it, you would end up with no job, and eventually you would be covering picnics for some small-town newspaper.
With the rise of independent media, however, reporters don’t need to worry about Sunday picnics.
The truth suffices.
With the rise of independent media, reporters know some of their stories will be linked and forwarded all over the world, and people with curiosity and intelligence and alert minds will discover the truth that major media have been hiding from them.
If You Limit ANY Free Speech, This Is What You Get September 22 2022 | From: ActivistPost / Various
The law originally targeted the KKK. Now it has been used to arrest people protesting against white supremacists. And that is why free speech is so important.
Plenty of people would love to see new laws to stop white supremacists from exercising their–albeit offensive–free speech.
"Faced with hundreds of demonstrators rallying against a crowd of neo-Nazis in Newnan, local and state authorities turned to a little-known Georgia law adopted in 1951 to combat the Ku Klux Klan.
The law, which makes it illegal to wear a mask at most public events, was cited in several of the arrests of counterdemonstrators who joined a protest Saturday against white supremacists.
And the irony was not lost upon the organizers of the counterdemonstration, who were fuming Sunday that a law aimed at weakening white supremacists was used to arrest protesters who opposed a neo-Nazi rally.”
There are so many problems with this law. Why are masks not protected forms of expression? What about hats, hoods, and sunglasses? At what point do those fit the definition of a mask?
Have you ever threatened to shoot someone with a rifle because they had a mask on? Me neither. Police are a different breed.
"A video posted on social media by freelance journalist Daniel Shular appeared to show authorities scuffling with counterdemonstrators. Authorities demanded that the counterprotesters remove their masks, and the footage showed an officer raising his rifle at demonstrators.”
This is another good reminder that police will enforce any law handed down on high from politicians - even dead politicians who passed the law in 1951. The only actual violence at the rally was committed by police, in the name of the law.
But free speech, the very First Amendment in the blueprint for this country’s government, is not so important to law enforcement.
Police have no problem throwing people to the ground, handcuffing them, using pepper spray, billy clubs, and aiming deadly weapons at peaceful protesters because they wear a piece of cloth obscuring their faces.
And any other anti-free speech laws will be enforced with equal vigor.
Hate speech. Offensive displays. Fake news. Laws aimed at combating these will absolutely limit free speech. Maybe, maybe, at first they will only be used against the neo-Nazis and the white supremacists, just like this anti-mask law was at first only used against the KKK.
But it is only a matter of time until innocent people find themselves in the crosshairs of these freedom crushing laws.
"State law bans the wearing of masks, hoods or other devices that conceal a person’s identity if they’re on public property or on private property where the owner has not consented. It includes exceptions for holidays, theatrical productions, civil emergencies and sporting events.
The laws have been adopted by about a dozen states, most aimed at weakening the KKK in the middle of the 20th century. The Georgia Supreme Court in 1990 upheld the state’s ban after a Klansman donned a hood on the Lawrenceville Square, citing his First Amendment rights."
This is just one of many laws in the arsenal of the police state. There are enough laws that you can be arrested for basically anything. It gives an official appearance to entirely arbitrary policing. You can be arrested on any officer’s whim, and then he will be able to find an excuse.
Other counter-protesters were arrested for “resisting arrest,” a classic joke of a charge. How can you be charged with only resisting arrest? It means there was no reason for them to be arresting you, and only once they illegally tried to arrest you did you commit a crime.
A blot of ink on a 70-year-old piece of paper would not protect these cops from charges that they threw people to the ground without provocation, that they chained and kidnapped people, that they aimed loaded guns at people who had done nothing aggressive or threatening.
Make no mistake, ANY anti-free speech law will be used against innocent, non-violent, peaceful people. And the Western police states will enforce those laws on its victims with glee.
I have spent the better part of a week trying to think of a better way to approach my writing. Forgive me if I have come to the conclusion that most of what I say is not really “getting” through to people!
"It just does not seem like anything I say is making a “dent”….
And, for those of my dedicated readers and followers who decided to read it… We have this quote from William Tompkins!
William Tompkins likes to say throughout his interviews that “everything you’re told is a lie”. He claims that many of the systems and sciences we pursue, such as astronomy, medicine, etc., have been seeded with lies to trick us.
This harks back to his claim that every government on Earth right now is under Reptilian control. Whether that turns out to be true or not remains to be seen, but certainly, so much deception has already been uncovered in so many areas of life that it is wisest to remain open to this possibility."
How many times have I said myself that same thing: Everything You’re Told is a Lie
You see, what we have now, and are experiencing is extreme cognitive dissonance, where the minds and brains of most human beings just can not process that ALL of it’s “programs” are faulty!
This is what the LUCIFERIANS have done to humanity. It is “they” who gave you your “beliefs”, and they who gave you your “truths” (which were lies), and they who are running the show even now. So, when somone finally comes out and tells you the REAL TRUTH, it is so huge that it is difficult to even know where to start changing things.
They gave us their “courts”, (Laws), they gave us their “religions” (beliefs), they gave us their “systems” (Governments), and let me once again state exactly what you need to hear - The Truth.
All of it is a lie. It’s a CON GAME of epic and monumental proportions, and you, (yes, even you) have been “conned” all of your life. Here is the difficulty with this: We have been trained (yes trained) just like dogs and cats, to be OBEDIANT, to what we were “told” were the rules.
Only these rules were not made in heaven as we thought, but were made in HELL instead. These rules were not GODS rules, but man’s rules! (And the worlds governments are STILL AT IT, and making crazy and insane rules which NO ONE wants to follow)
Just ask yourself this logical question…, and be very honest!
WHY do you suppose there is a plan on the drawing board to KILL 90 percent of humanity?
The answer is clear. “They” realize that the population is waking up from the CON, and they also realize that once that happens, they will have lost positive control of the surface humanity.
Now, before I continue, guys like me are ALWAYS condemned by the readers for pointing out the problem, but offering no solutions. Here, I will offer suggestions to make a difference. You, and everyone one else who you are in contact with, must make the “decision” that you will no longer play or participate in their evil game.
This means:
Taking any and every action you can to be “in defiance” of their rules, their cons, and their “systems”
We need to become the resistance
We need to stop consenting to every single thing we are told we need to do, and start OBJECTING
When India was fighting for it’s Independence from Great Britian, tens of thousands of workers and men simply stopped particpating and consenting! Even if they were beaten, they stopped consenting, and that is how they won their freedom.
This battle will not be won without COURAGE, and if you think it can, then by all means, see if being a coward gets you anything, but a first class seat in a FEMA camp.
Now, for those who don’t know me, and think I’m joking or have not done my reasearch, or am talking off the top of my head, here are several articles written by: Anna von Reitz, (posted on the Maine Republic) which spell out and show you the extent of the GREAT CON in fine details.
So You Want Solutions?
Well, how about this? The court system is messed up because it has been turned into a giant debt collection agency run by the creditors of the Federal Government and its “State of State” franchises.
The rest of the story is that they are collecting on fraudulent debts - debts that:
1) Don’t exist for the most part - and that:
2) Aren’t your debts
Moreover, these courts are being run as quasi-military tribunals in military districts, under the pretense that the “American Civil War” was ever an actual war.
It wasn’t. It was never Declared by the actual Congress and no Peace Treaty ending it exists, either. It was and is nothing but an illegal commercial mercenary operation on our shores that has been enforced and promoted by disloyal military commanders and criminals in Congress and clueless Presidents.
So, given the fact that these “courts” are foreign military tribunals here on our soil as the result of an illegal and immoral commercial mercenary action now 150 years old - and that they are collecting on debts that are odious and fraudulent by nature.
And given the fact that Donald Trump is now the “Commander in Chief” and able to order the District Commanders to shut these so-called courts down and reopen the courts we are owed….
Why not light a firecracker up Commander-in-Chief Trump’s rump and suggest that he do so, post haste? Tell him that Judge Anna can show him precisely how and when this system got set up and how it has been abused, and what his power is with respect to ending the hideous mockery that “stands for” a court system in this country right now.
The Financial Curse
Banks create money out of thin air.
Banks are thought of as deposit taking institutions that lend money. The legal reality is that banks don’t take deposits and banks don’t lend money.
A deposit is not actually a deposit. It’s not a bailment. It’s not held in custody. At law the word “deposit” is meaningless.
The law courts and various judgments have made it very clear that if you “give” your money to a bank, even though it’s called a “deposit”, this money is simply a loan to the bank.
So there is no such thing as a deposit. It is a loan to the bank. So banks borrow their money from the public.
“Surely they are lending money?” you say. Not at all. Banks don’t “lend” money.
Banks - again at law it’s very clear - they are in the business of purchasing “securities”. That’s it.
So you say, “I want a loan.”
Fine. Here is the loan contract. Here is the “offer letter”, and you sign it. At law, it is very clear that you have issued a “security”, namely a “promissory note”, and the bank is going to purchase that “promissory note / security”.
That’s what’s happening. What the bank is doing, is very different from what it presents to the public that it’s doing.
But, you say, “So the bank purchases my promissory note, but how do I get my money?”
The bank will then say, “You will find it in your account with us.” That would be technically correct.
If they say, “We’ll transfer it to your account”, that would be wrong because no money is transferred at all, from anywhere, inside the bank, or outside the bank.
Why? Because what we call a “deposit” is simply the bank’s record of its debt to the public. Now the bank also owes you money, and the bank’s “record” of the money it owes you is what you think you’re getting as money.
That’s all it is. And that is how the banks create the money supply. The money supply consists of 97% of bank deposits, and these are created out of nothing by the banks when they “lend”, because they invent fictitious so-called customer “deposits”.
Why? The bank simply restates - a slightly incorrect accounting term - what is an “accounts payable liability” arising from the loan contract, having purchased your “promissory note” as a customer deposit, but nobody has deposited any money.
I wonder how the FDIC deals with this because in the financial sector you’re not supposed to mislead your customers.
In such a case, you loan (“give”) the bank the title to your collateral via your signed “promissory note / security” and the bank monetizes this by selling it to the non-federal Federal Reserve Bank to get the money the bank loans (“gives back”) to you disguised as a loan.
In other words, you “give” the bank your “signature” via you “promissory note / security” which the bank then monetizes via the non-federal Federal Reserve Bank, and the bank gives you back the value of your signature as a so-called “loan”.
We are on a “promissory note” standard, instead of a “gold” money standard.
If you don’t pay the money that the bank gives you back to the bank, plus interest, the bank then takes your stuff ! (It really doesn’t want you to repay the so-called loan; it would simply rather just take your stuff).
150 Years of British Criminality – The Very Short Version
We are Third Party Beneficiaries with respect to the National Trust created in the Preamble and are indemnified in the British system under two Royal Sovereign Seals - the seal of King George the III with respect to the delegated powers, and the seal of William Belcher with respect to the undelegated powers, otherwise known as the Great Seal of the United States.
William Belcher inherited his sovereignty as a result of the Norman Conquest of Britain and Wales. Thus, the Definitive Treaty of Peace, Paris, 1783, calls George III the “prince of the United States” and does not mention who the actual Head of State - the “king” of the United States - was. Later generations simply presumed it was the British Monarch, with results disastrous to them and to us.
This split of delegated and undelegated powers held by two sovereigns in international jurisdiction ultimately resulted in the situation we have today, where the delegated powers are held by the British-backed United States and the undelegated powers are held by the “states and people” under the Belcher Seal and operated by the United States of America by default.
The misunderstanding about our states (and also, therefore, our state offices) comes about because people don’t grasp the difference between the international jurisdiction of the sea and the national jurisdiction of the land.
Everything discussed above, including the National Trust established by the Preamble, exists only in the international jurisdiction of the sea and has nothing to do with our sovereignty on the land.
We have all been taught to focus on the Constitution but that is substantially a red herring in that it discusses only our position with respect to the foreign international jurisdiction and says nothing about our own sovereign domain.
This can be excused in that our land jurisdiction was never the subject of The Constitution, so why would the Founders talk about that? We were expected to know the basis of our own sovereignty on the land, just as we were expected to know the history and protect our own Common Law Courts from British meddling.
Two centuries later, the situation speaks for itself.
As to our sovereignty on the land which vests itself in our nations called “states” for international purposes, that sovereignty derives from entirely different authorities and specifically begins with a land grant and settlement made by the King of Spain via (yet another) Treaty of Paris in 1778.
The situation was that the British King was financing both sides of the Revolution to hedge his bets - he emerged the victor to a greater or lesser extent, either way.
The King of France was intermediary funneling funds to the Americans. The King of Spain, however, had grudges against both the King of Britain and the King of France - and he was in charge of the land jurisdiction worldwide, thanks to the claims of the Holy See and its “dispensations” under the Unam Sanctum Trust.
So while the Americans were concluding their treaty with France to secure what most of them believed was French support for the American Revolution, the King of Spain quietly granted the entire continent (absent Spain’s holdings of course) to the rebels via the “other” Treaty of Paris, 1778.
If they could win the war, the land was already vouchsafed to them - and as of 1778, it was available to them to use as collateral to borrow against internationally.
This is how the Americans financed their loans from the French King who was actually acting as a pass-through agent for King George III. They wagered their claim to the land given to them by the Spanish King and used it as collateral.
If George III had won the ground war, he would have won the whole shooting match; as it was, he emerged with a tidy debt owed by the Americans and a great deal of leverage, which he used to secure the delegated powers granted to him and his proxy government in DC.
The land claim passed from the Spanish King to the colonies, which in the years immediately following the end of open hostilities with Britain (1783-1789) undertook a number of inter-colony initiatives to settle the land jurisdiction claims.
This all focused on settling the national borders of the separate nation-states, establishing trade relationships, currencies, treaties with respect to international commercial issues, taxation, interstate travel, security of the international Post Roads and Post Offices, and similar concerns.
As for the basic grant of land jurisdiction, they issued another trust known as The Supreme Republican Declaration of the United Colonies, grandfathering in the original thirteen colonies as a union of land jurisdiction states, and claiming all the rest of the land jurisdiction for themselves and their progeny subject to later arrangements and acquisitions.
The later arrangements were solidified by the Northwest Ordinance which provided for the orderly creation and inclusion of territories and from the territories the creation of new nation-states which would be enabled to enter the union under the Equal Footing Doctrine.
The inclusion of “other acquisitions” such as the Louisiana Purchase and the Republic of Texas and the Spanish Settlement followed the same basic pattern of establishing a form of territorial government and later, upon enrollment in the original union, a separate state government.
Throughout this discussion we are talking about geographically defined nations and their body politics simply called, “California” or “Wisconsin” or “Ohio”.
References in law books to these states always use the style “states”- no capitalization whatsoever. These are the sovereign states from which our sovereignty on the land of this continent derives. These states are nations in the fullest sense of the word, just like Britain or France.
They are completely different and separate from any “State of __________”, and in fact, the word “of” means “separate from, apart from, or belonging to”, so “State of Delaware” is talking about what? The international corporation used by the actual state known as Delaware and its people to operate in international commerce.
In trade, Delaware needs no “State of _________” to conduct business within its own borders or with other unincorporated sovereign states and nations. It is only when it wishes to engage in incorporated business transactions with the other nation-states, like the State of California, or with other countries like France, that it needs to use an incorporated “State of ___________”.
And therein lies the rub.
Each state retains its right to conduct trade within its borders and also retains the right to trade with other sovereign nations; it uses a “State of _________” corporation to operate in international commerce outside its borders— and the proxy “Federal Government” run by the British Monarch has delegated control of international commerce. This control is exercised by operating all incorporated businesses in all states as franchises of the United States, Inc.
So now you know the difference between the actual land jurisdiction sovereign state and the fact that each one is, in fact, a separate nation, an entire country unto itself, plus you know what the “State of _________” entity is and what it is used for and who controls it and why.
None of the states operated in international commerce until after the Civil War. At that time, The United States of America, Inc. was formed, and the original states were forced to write new “state constitutions”.
Under these new constitutions (all constitutions are debt agreements) the corporation used by the actual sovereign state was obliged to operate under names styled like this: California State, Wyoming State, Florida State.
Meanwhile, the name “State of California” and “State of Wyoming”, etc. was “adopted” by totally different entities under new ownership.
This switch and the use of the same old names applied to different corporate entities led up to the greatest fraud in human history. The “State of Illinois” prior to the Civil War was an entirely different beastie and under completely different ownership that the “State of Illinois” after the Civil War and the same pattern applies across the whole country.
There is a state constitution prior to the Civil War and a new state constitution after the Civil War.
Fast forward again to the 1930’s. FDR is working as liaison for the United States, Inc. at the Geneva Conventions, May, 1930.
As a business ploy, the G-5 nations agree by private treaty to bankrupt their “international corporations” and discharge all debts left over from the First World War.
Three years later, Roosevelt, now elected President of the United States, carries through and by sleight of hand and deceptive wordsmithing, sets up a constructive fraud by which the California State, Illinois State, and other land jurisdiction corporations are “assumed” to be sureties standing good for the debts of the United States, Inc. even though they are owned and operated by the United States of America, Inc.
This isn’t a corporate take-over. It’s just plain old commercial fraud in which false claims are made against the assets of a Third Party and false assumptions then lead to that innocent victim being charged for the debt via a process of commercial liens and titles and hypothecation of debt.
The American states and people were raped, pillaged, and plundered by the United States, Inc. and the British Crown from 1930 to 1999, when all debts of the bankruptcy of the United States of America were discharged and settled and our “States” doing business as “California State” and “Wisconsin State” were left derelict and adrift, mere shells - and in exactly the same condition as a man recovering from bankruptcy.
All this was accomplished in Breach of Trust and Commercial Contract by the British Monarch and the British Government operating under color of law on our land, pretending to be our friends, allies, and protectors.
As a result of their vicious fraud our State corporations were left in financial ruin, but like a man recovering from bankruptcy, not dead.The vermin responsible for palming off their odious debts on us have tried by every means to “finish us off” in the intervening years, without success.
All this history is necessary for you to know before I can answer your “simple” question about the oaths of office owed to our actual States.
The “vacated offices” that we are occupying belong to the land jurisdiction state and are operated as offices of the formerly bankrupted “Alaska State”, “California State” and so on. These offices were “vacated” during the long bankruptcy and so far as the vermin responsible for this circumstance are concerned, it was never anticipated that they would be re-occupied by the states and the people they belong to.
During the bankruptcy, these States were operated by “State of State Legislatures” functioning as Bankruptcy Trustees - corporate con artists overseeing the rape and the pillaging, but nonetheless “representing” the state in the position of Trustees.
These legislatures operating in that capacity continued to pass “Session Laws” to administer the affairs of the victims. Thus, for example, we have Session Laws that establish the “California State” under a new “state constitution” in 1879, and we have Session Laws established for the bankrupt entity throughout the bankruptcy.
It is via the circa 1870’s “constitutions” creating the Wisconsin State, Louisiana State and so on, that we maintain a chain of title and succession of contract back to the original Constitution and are enabled to enforce it.
It is via the Session Laws related to the “second” state constitutions that we obtain the offices and the oaths.
All land jurisdiction offices are exercised under red ink. Business signatures are in script in Upper and Lower Case.
All land jurisdiction transactions are understood to be in trade, not commerce, and are not under the control of the United States.
Our business as State officials and State Citizens is all conducted under unincorporated business structures locally (hence the need for all state and county assemblies to operate as unincorporated businesses) and under undelegated powers internationally - note the red Post Marks.
All commerce is exercised in blue ink. Commercial signatures of “Account Holders” are in script in Upper and Lower Case. All sea jurisdiction transactions entered into by US PERSONS are understood to be in commerce. You are considered to be acting as a US PERSON if you retain such a PERSON.
You surrender these PERSONS via surrendering the BC to the Secretary of the Treasury and appoint him your Fiduciary and credit the United States of America, U.S. Treasury, without recourse.
That settles the issue of whether you are operating as a State Citizen or a US Citizen.
This entire history from the Civil War to date is nothing but a nasty scam designed by the British to bilk their Creditors and palm off their debts on innocent Third Parties, but once you have the history and the names nailed down, it gets easier to comprehend.
Conclusion
So when guys like myself, start writing and asking for the rest of humanity to “please wake up”, it isn’t just some joke or some opinion we are espousing. Humanity has until now been SLEEP WALKING into it’s own grave, and was for quite some time!
The trouble with trying to do this job is that we are not only up against the Satanists and the Luciferians, but are also up against very well meaning men and women who, have “taken the bait” and swallowed the new CON of the New Age.
In the new Con of the New Age, there are countless real spiritual “teaching” which have been “bastardiszed” into something they are not. The true and real meaning has been flipped or inverted so that it does NOT mean what it was supposed to mean.
The biggest of which is very simply this: Don't focus on negative things: a teaching, which the NEW AGE has bastardized into a very strange teaching which good men and women have come to believe means that you don’t even acknowledge real and truthful “information” about what is happening in the world if it can be catagorized as negative.
This is the height of ABSURDITY, and, as David Icke points out, INFORMATION is neither negative or positive, it is just information (or knowledge).
KNOWLEDGE IS NOT A BAD THING
And it happens to be a fundament requirement in order to make progress.
No problem can ever be solved if you don’t “know” what the problem is or how it is being created, or even better who is doing it. And it's not just the Cabal causing problems, we also have the 'New Agers' and their channeled entities!
As David Icke says in the Title of one of his books: HUMANITY, GET OFF YOUR KNEES. Get off your knees and QUESTION EVERYTHING! There are no authority figures that you need to “obey".
The only real and true authority is the prime creator. There is only ONE AUTHORITY in this Universe, and no one on Earth represents him, not the Queen, nor the Pope, nor the Jesuits, nor the Police, nor the Governments, NOT ANYONE.
What will it really take for us to become free? Courage - nothing more, nothing less. We won't get out of this mess by ignoring it.
Who Runs The World? BlackRock And Vanguard September 20 2022 | From: LewRockwell / Various
If you’ve been wondering how the world economy has been hijacked and humanity has been kidnapped by a completely bogus narrative, look no further than this video by Dutch creator, Covid Lie.
What she uncovers is that the stock of the world’s largest corporations are owned by the same institutional investors. They all own each other.
This means that “competing” brands, like Coke and Pepsi aren’t really competitors, at all, since their stock is owned by exactly the same investment companies, investment funds, insurance companies, banks and in some cases, governments.
This is the case, across all industries. As she says: The smaller investors are owned by larger investors. Those are owned by even bigger investors. The visible top of this pyramid shows only two companies whose names we have often seen…
They are Vanguard and BlackRock.
The power of these two companies is beyond your imagination. Not only do they own a large part of the stocks of nearly all big companies but also the stocks of the investors in those companies. This gives them a complete monopoly.
A Bloomberg report states that both these companies in the year 2028, together will have investments in the amount of 20 trillion dollars.That means that they will own almost everything.
Bloomberg calls BlackRock “The fourth branch of government”, because it’s the only private agency that closely works with the central banks. BlackRock lends money to the central bank but it’s also the advisor.
It also develops the software the central bank uses. Many BlackRock employees were in the White House with Bush and Obama.
Its CEO, Larry Fink can count on a warm welcome from leaders and politicians. Not so strange, if you know that he is the front man of the ruling company but Larry Fink does not pull the strings himself.
BlackRock, itself is also owned by shareholders. Who are those shareholders? We come to a strange conclusion. The biggest shareholder is Vanguard. But now he gets murky. [See this as referenced below if you want to see just how murky it gets NZ International Ownership of New Zealand Banks]
Vanguard is a private company and we cannot see who the shareholders are. The elite who own Vanguard apparently do not like being in the spotlight but of course they cannot hide from who is willing to dig.
Reports from Oxfam and Bloomberg say that 1% of the world, together owns more money than the other 99%. Even worse, Oxfam says that 82% of all earned money in 2017 went to this 1%.
In other words, these two investment companies, Vanguard and BlackRock hold a monopoly in all industries in the world and they, in turn are owned by the richest families in the world, some of whom are royalty and who have been very rich since before the Industrial Revolution.
Why doesn’t everybody know this? Why aren’t there movies and documentaries about this? Why isn’t it in the news? Because 90% of the international media is owned by nine media conglomerates.
Covid Lie asks;
"Who sponsors the organization and press agencies that produce our news? With Project Syndicate, we see the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, the Open Society Foundation and the European Journalism Centre.
The organizations that bring the news get paid by non-profit organizations, of the same elite that also owns the entire media but also a part of taxpayers money is used to pay them.”
So when Lynn Forester de Rothschild wants the United States to be a one-party country (like China) and doesn’t want voter ID laws passed in the US, so that more election fraud can be perpetrated to achieve that end,what does she do?
She holds a conference call with the world’s top 100 CEOs and tells them to publicly decry as “Jim Crow” Georgia’s passing of an anti-corruption law and she orders her dutiful CEOs to boycott the State of Georgia, like we saw with Coca-Cola and Major League Baseball and even Hollywood star, Will Smith. In this conference call, we see shades of the Great Reset, Agenda 2030, the New World Order.
The UN wants to make sure, as does Schwab that in 2030, poverty, hunger, pollution and disease no longer plague the Earth.
To achieve this, the UN wants taxes from Western countries to be split by the mega corporations of the elite to create a brand new society. For this project, the UN says we need a world government – namely the UN, itself.
And it is clear that the “pandemic” was orchestrated in order to bring this about. This video does an incredible job of explaining how it is all being done.
Transcript
As you are watching millions fall into poverty because of the corona measures of the past year, even if the greatest economic crisis in history has not affected you yet, it will only be a matter of time until the rippling effects will hit you, as well
This is not fear-mongering but it’s a harsh reality. I also think we might mitigate the damage and may even do better, provided we are informed correctly about our situation.
This is why I would like to show you a few facts you can easily check facts that are of crucial importance.
Less than a handful of big corporations dominate every aspect of our lives. That may seem exaggerated but from the breakfast we eat to the mattress we sleep on and everything we wear and consume in between is largely dependent on these corporations.
Those are huge investment companies that determine the course of money flow. They are the main characters of the play that we are witnessing. I know your time is valuable, so I summarize the most important data.
How does it work?
The Food Industry
Let’s take Pepsico as an example. It is the parent company of many soda companies and snack companies. The so-called competitive brands are from factories from a few corporations who monopolize the entire industry.
In the packaged food industry, there are a few big companies, like Unilever, the Coca-Cola Company, Mondelez and Nestlé.
In the picture, you see that most brands in the food industry belong to one of these corporations. The big companies are on the stock market and have the big shareholders in the board of directors.
On sources like Yahoo Finance, we can see detailed company info, such as who the biggest shareholders actually are. Let’s take Pepsico again, as an example.
We see about 72% of stock is owned by no less than 3,155 institutional investors. These are investment companies, investment funds, insurance companies, banks and in some cases, governments.
Who are the biggest institutional investors of Pepsico? As you can see, only 10 of the investors own together nearly one third of the stock.
The top 10 of investors together amount to a value of $59 billion dollars but out of those ten, only three own more stock than the other seven. Let’s remember them and look up who owns the most stocks of the Coca-Cola Company, the biggest competitor of Pepsi.
The biggest lump of stock is again owned by institutional investors. Let’s look at the top 10 and start at the bottom six of them. Four of these institutional investors we also saw at the bottom six of Pepsico.
These are Northern Trust, JPMorgan-Chase, Geode Capital Management and Wellington Management. Now, let’s look at the four biggest stock owners.
They are BlackRock, Vanguard and State Street. These are the world’s biggest investment firms, so Pepsico and Coca-Cola are not competitors, at all.
The other big companies that own a myriad of brand names, like Unilever, Mondelez and Nestlé are from the same small group of investors. But it’s not only in the food industry that their names come up. Let’s find out on Wikipedia, which are the biggest tech companies.
Facebook is the owner of Whatsapp and Instagram. Together with Twitter, they form the most popular social media platforms.
Alphabet is the parent of all Google companies, like YouTube and Gmail but they are also the biggest investor in Android, one of the two operating systems for nearly all smartphones and tablets.
The other operating system is Apple’s IOS. If we add Microsoft, we see four companies making the software for nearly all computers, tablets and smartphones in the world.
Let’s see who are the biggest shareholders of these companies. Take Facebook: we see that 80% of the stock is owned by institutional investors.
These are the same names that came up in the food industry; the same investors are in the top three. Next, is Twitter. It forms with Facebook and Instagram the top three.
Surprisingly, this company is in the hands of the same investors, as well. We see them again, with Apple and even with their biggest competitor, Microsoft.
Also, if we look at other big companies in the tech industry that develop and make our computers, TVs, phones and home appliances, we see the same big investors, that together own the majority of the stock.
It’s true for all industries. I’m not exaggerating.
The Travel Industry (And Energy & Mining)
One last example, let’s book a holiday on a computer or smartphone. We search for a flight to a sunny country on Skyscanner or Expedia.
Both are from the same small group of investors. We fly with one of the many airlines. Many of which are in the hands of the same investors and of governments, as is the case with Air France, KLM.
The plane we board is, in most cases a Boeing or an Airbus, also owned by the same names. We book through Booking.com or AirBnB and when we arrive we go out for dinner and place a comment on Tripadvisor.
The same big investors show up in every aspect of our trip and their power is even bigger, because of the kerosene is from their oil companies or refineries.
The steel from which the plane is made comes from their mining companies. This small group of investment firms and funds and banks are namely also the biggest investors in the industry that dig for raw materials.
Wikipedia shows that the biggest mining companies have the same big investors that we see everywhere.
Also, the big agricultural businesses, on which the entire food industry depends; they own Bayer, the parent company of Monsanto, the biggest seed producer in the world but they are also the shareholders of the big textile industry.
And even many popular fashion brands who make the clothing out of the cotton are owned by the same investors. Whether we look at the world’s biggest solar panel companies or oil refineries, the stocks are in the hands of the same companies.
They own the tobacco companies that produce all the popular tobacco brands but they also own all big pharmaceutical companies and the scientific institutions that produce medicine.
They own the companies that produce our metals and also the entire car, plane and weapons industry, where a great deal of the metals and raw materials are used.
They own the companies that build our electronics, they own the big warehouses and online markets and even the means of payments we use to buy their products.
To make this video as short as possible, I only showed you the tip of the iceberg.
If you decide to research this with the sources I just showed you, then you will see that most popular insurance companies, banks, construction companies, telephone companies restaurant chains and cosmetics are owned by the same institutional investors we have just seen.
Blackrock & Vanguard
These institutional investors are mainly investment firms banks and insurance companies. In turn, they, themselves are owned by shareholders and the most surprising thing is that they own each other’s stocks
Together, they form an immense network comparable to a pyramid. The smaller investors are owned by larger investors. Those are owned by even bigger investors.
The visible top of this pyramid shows only two companies whose names we have often seen by now. They are Vanguard and BlackRock.
The power of these two companies is beyond your imagination. Not only do they own a large part of the stocks of nearly all big companies but also the stocks of the investors in those companies. This gives them a complete monopoly.
A Bloomberg report states that both these companies in the year 2028, together will have investments in the amount of 20 trillion dollars. That means that they will own almost anything.
Bloomberg calls BlackRock “The fourth branch of government”, because it’s the only private agency that closely works with the central banks. BlackRock lends money to the central bank but it’s also the advisor.
It also develops the software the central bank uses. Many BlackRock employees were in the White House with Bush and Obama. Its CEO, Larry Fink can count on a warm welcome from leaders and politicians.
Not so strange, if you know that he is the front man of the ruling company. But Larry Fink does not pull the strings, himself.
BlackRock, itself is also owned by shareholders. Who are those shareholders? We come to a strange conclusion. The biggest shareholder is Vanguard. But now he gets murky.
Vanguard is a private company and we cannot see who the shareholders are. The elite who own Vanguard apparently do not like being in the spotlight but of course they cannot hide from who is willing to dig.
Reports from Oxfam and Bloomberg say that 1% of the world, together owns more money than the other 99%. Even worse, Oxfam says that 82% of all earned money in 2017 went to this 1%.
Insider Economist Reveals COVID-19 Cashless Society Takeover Plan
Alex Jones is joined by banking industry expert Catherine Austin Fitts, who explains how the aim of the global financial structure is to merge the worst aspects of crony capitalism with communism in a neo-feudalistic model of financial dictatorship.
Forbes, the most famous business magazine says that in March 2020, there were 2,095 billionaires in the world. This means that Vanguard is owned by the richest families in the world.
If we research their history, we see that they have always been the wealthiest. Some of them, even before the start of the Industrial Revolution, because their history is so interesting and extensive, I will make a sequel.
For now, I just want to say that these families of whom many are in royalty are the founders of our banking system and of every industry in the world, these families have never lost power but due to an increasing population, they had to hide behind firms, like Vanguard, which the stockholders are the private funds and non-profits of these families.
NGOs and Foundations and Their Ownership of Big Pharma
To clarify the picture, I have to explain briefly what non-profits actually are.
These appear to be the link between companies, politics and media. This conceals the conflicts of interests a bit.
Non-profits, also called “foundations” are dependent on donations they do not have to disclose who their donors are they can invest the money in the way they see fit and do not pay taxes as long as the profits are invested again in new projects.
In this way, non-profits keep hundreds of billions of dollars among themselves according to the Australian government, non-profits are an ideal way of financing terrorists and of massive money-laundering.
The foundations and funds of the families that are the richest stay in the background as much as possible. For issues that get much attention, the foundation of philanthropists are used that are lower in rank but very rich.
I want to keep it short, so I will show you the three most important ones that connect all industries in the world.
They are the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, the Open Society Foundation of the controversial multi-billionaire, Soros and the Clinton Foundation. I will give you a very short introduction to show you their power.
According to the website of the World Economic Forum, the Gates Foundation is the biggest sponsor of the WHO. That was after Donald Trump quit USA financial support to the WHO in 2020.
So the Gates Foundation is one of the most influential entities in everything that concerns our health. The Gates Foundation works closely with the biggest pharma companies, among which are Pfizer, AstraZeneca, Johnson & Johnson, Biontech and Bayer.
And we have just seen who their biggest shareholders are. Bill Gates was not a poor computer nerd who miraculously became very rich. He’s from a philanthropist’s family that works for the absolute elite.
His Microsoft is owned by Vanguard, BlackRock and Berkshire Hathaway. But the Gates Foundation, after BlackRock and Vanguard is the biggest shareholder in Berkshire Hathaway. He was even the member of the board there.
We would need hours if we wanted to uncover everything in which Gates, the Open Society Foundation of Soros and the Clinton Foundation are involved. They form a bridge to the current situation, so I had to introduce them.
We need to start the next topic with a question. Someone like me, who never makes videos can, with an old laptop objectively show that only two companies hold a monopoly in all industries in the world. My question is, why is this never talked about in the media?
We can choose daily between all sorts of documentaries and TV programs but none of them cover this subject.
Is it not interesting enough or are there other interests at play? Wikipedia, again gives us the answer. They say that about 90% of the international media is owned by nine media conglomerates.
Whether we take the monopolist Netflix and Amazon Prime or enormous concerns that own many daughter companies, like Time-Warner, the Walt Disney Company, Comcast, Fox Corporation, Bertelsmann and Viacom, CBS, we see that the same names own stocks.
These corporations not only make all the programs, movies and documentaries but also own the channels on which those are broadcast. So, not only the industries but also the information is owned by the elite.
I will show you briefly how this works in the Netherlands. To start with, all the Dutch mainstream media are owned by three companies. The first one is De PersGroep [DPG Media], the parent company of the following brands (Apart from the many newspapers and magazines, they also own Sanoma, the parent company of some of the big commercial Dutch channels. Many media outlets from abroad, like VTM are also owned by the De PersGroep.)
The second one is Mediahuis, one of Europe’s biggest media concerns. In the Netherlands, Mediahuis owns the following brands. Until 2017, also Sky Radio and Radio Veronica were owned by Mediahuis, as were Radio 538 and radio 10.
And then there is Bertelsmann, which is one of the 9 biggest media firms. This company owns RTL, that owns 45 television stations and 32 radio stations in 11 countries. But Bertelsmann is also co-owner of the world’s biggest book publisher, Penguin Random House.
The stocks of these companies are owned by private funds of three families. Those are the Belgian Van Thillo family, the Belgian Leysen family and the German Bertelsmann-Mohn family. All three families sided with the Nazis in the War.
According to Wikipedia, for this reason, the Telegraaf, the Leysen newspaper was temporarily forbidden in the Netherlands after the war.
To complete this overview, look at where the news comes from. The daily news of all these media outlets the diverse news media do not produce news. They use information and footage from the press agencies, APN and Reuters.
These agencies are not independent. APN is owned by Talpa, John de Mol. Thomson-Reuters is owned by the powerful Canadian Thomson family.
The most important journalists and editors working for these agencies are members of a journalism agency, like the European Journalism Centre.
These are one of the biggest European sponsors of media-related projects. They educatejournalists, publish study books, provide training spaces and press agencies and work closely together with the big corporations, Google and Facebook.
For journalistic analysis and views, the big media use Project Syndicate. This is the most powerful organization in the field. Project Syndicate and organizations like I mentioned are together with the press agencies.
The link between all worldwide media outlets when news anchors reap from their autocues [teleprompters], chances are that the text stems from one of these organizations. That is the reason that worldwide media shows synchronicity in their reporting.
And look at the European journalism center, itself. Again, the Gates Foundation and the Open Society Foundation. They are also heavily-sponsored by Facebook, Google, the Ministry of Education and Science and the Ministry of Foreign Affairs.
The organizations that bring the news get paid by non-profit organizations, of the same elite that also owns the entire media but also a part of taxpayers money is used to pay them.
In Belgium, there are protests regularly, since Mediahuis and De Persgroep receive millions of euros from the government, while many are abroad…
The Danger We Are in Now
Well, this was a lot to chew on and I tried to make it as short as I could. I only used examples that I thought were necessary to create a clear overview. This helps to better understand our current situation, that can shed new light on past events
There will be enough time to dive into the past, but now let’s talk about today but my goal is to inform you about the danger we are in now.
The elite governs every aspect of our lives, also, the information we get and they depend on a coordination, cooperation to connect all industries in the world to serve their interests. This is done through the World Economic Forum, among others, a very important organization.
Every year in Davos, the CEOs of big corporations meet national leaders, politicians and other influential parties, like UNICEF and Greenpeace.
On the supervisory board of the WEF is former Vice President, Al Gore, our own minister, Sigrid Kaag, Feike Sijbesma, Chairman of the Royal Dutch State Mines and the Commissioner of the Dutch bank, Christine Lagarde, the Chairwoman of the European Central Bank. Also, politician, Ferdinand Grapperhaus’ son works for the WEF.
Wikipedia says that the annual fee for members is 35,000 euros “but over half of our budget comes from partners who pay the cost for politicians who otherwise could not afford membership.”
According to critics, the WEF is for rich businesses to do business with other businesses or with politicians. For most members, the WEF would support personal gain instead of being a means to solve the world’s problems.
Why would there be many world problems if the industry leaders, bankers and politicians from 1971 onwards have gathered every year to solve the world’s problems?
Isn’t it illogical, that after 50 years of meetings between environmentalists and the CEOs of the most polluting companies, nature is gradually doing worse, not better; that those critics are right, it’s clear, when we look at the main partners that together make up more than half of the budget of the WEF.
Because these are BlackRock, the Open Society foundation, the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation and many big companies, from which Vanguard and BlackRock own the stocks.
Chairman and founder of the WEF is Klaus Schwab, a Swiss professor and businessman. In his book, The Great Reset, he writes about the plans of his organization.
The coronavirus is, according to him a great “opportunity” to reset our societies. He calls it “Build Back Better”. The slogan is now on the lips of all Globalist politicians in the world.
Our old society must switch to a new one, says Schwab. The people own nothing but work for the state to have their primary needs met. The WEF says it’s necessary for the consumption society the elite forced upon us is not sustainable anymore.
Schwab says in his book that we will never return to the old normal and the WEF published a video recently to make clear that by 2030, we will own nothing but we will be happy.
You probably heard of the New World Order. The media wants us to believe that this is a conspiracy theory, yet it has been talked about by leaders for decades.
The UN presented in 2015 their controversial Agenda 2030. It is almost identical to the Great Reset of Klaus Schwab. The UN wants to make sure, as does Schwab that in 2030, poverty, hunger, pollution and disease no longer plague the Earth.
Sounds nice but wait till you read the small print. The plan is that Agenda 2030 will be paid by us, the citizens. Just like they ask of us now to give away our rights for public health, they will ask us to give away our wealth to battle poverty.
These are no conspiracy theories. It is on their official website. It comes down to this: The UN wants taxes from Western countries to be split by the mega corporations of the elite to create a brand new society.
The new infrastructure, because fossil fuels are gone in 2030.
For this project, the UN says we need a world government, namely the UN, itself.
The UN agrees with Schwab that a pandemic is a golden chance to accelerate the implementation of Agenda 2030.
It is worrisome that the WEF and the UN openly admit that pandemics and other catastrophes can be used to reshape society. We must not think lightly about this and do thorough research.
There is nothing sadder and more pathetic, than a notorious liar shouting, spitting saliva, insulting normal people left and right, while terrorizing those who are telling the truth.
It doesn’t even hide its intentions, anymore. The intentions are clear: to destroy all of its opponents, be they in Russia, China, Iran or in any other patriotic and independent-minded state.
To silence all the media outlets that are speaking the truth; not the truth as it is defined in London, Washington, Paris or Berlin, but the truth as it is perceived in Moscow, Beijing, Caracas or Teheran; the truth that simply serves the people, not the fake, pseudo-truth fabricated in order to uphold the supremacy of the Western Empire.
Huge funds are now being allocated for the mortal propaganda onslaught, originating predominantly in both London and Washington.
Millions of pounds and dollars have been allocated and spent, officially and openly, in order to ‘counter’ the voices of Russian, Chinese, Arab, Iranian and Latin American people; voices that are finally reaching ‘the Others’ – the desolate inhabitants of the ‘global south’, the dwellers of the colonies and neo-colonies; the modern-day slaves living in the ‘client’ states.
The mask is falling down and the gangrenous face of Western propaganda is being exposed. It is awful, frightening, but at least it is what it is, for everyone to see.
No more suspense, no surprises. It is all suddenly out in the open. It is frightening but honest. This is our world. This is how low our humanity has sunk. This is the so-called world order, or more precisely, neo-colonialism.
The West knows how to slaughter millions, and it knows how to manipulate masses. Its propaganda has always been tough (and repeated a thousand times, not unlike corporate advertisements or the WWII fascist indoctrination campaigns) when it originates in the United States, or brilliantly Machiavellian and lethally effective when coming from the United Kingdom.
Let us never forget: the U.K. has been murdering and enslaving hundreds of millions of innocent and much more advanced human beings, for many long centuries and all over the world.
Due to its talent in brainwashing and manipulating the masses, Great Britain has been getting away with countless genocides, robberies and even managing to convince the world that it should be respected and allowed to retain both a moral mandate and the seat at the U.N. Security Council.
The Western regime knows how to lie, shamelessly but professionally, and above all, perpetually. There are thousands of lies piling up on top of each other, delivered with perfect upper-class ‘educated’ accents: lies about Salisbury, about Communism, Russia, China, Iran, Venezuela, Cuba, North Korea, Syria, Yugoslavia, Rwanda, South Africa, Libya, refugees. There are lies about the past, present and even about the future.
Nobody is laughing, seeing such imperialist thugs like the U.K. and France preaching, all over the world and with straight face, about both freedom and human rights. Not laughing, yet. But many are slowly getting outraged.
People in the Middle East, Africa, Asia and Latin America are beginning to realize that they have been fooled, cheated, lied to; that the so called ‘education’ and ‘information’ coming from the West have been nothing else other than shameless indoctrination campaigns.
For years I worked on all continents, compiling stories and testimonies about the crimes of imperialism, and about the awakening of the world, ‘summarized’ in my 840-page book: “Exposing Lies Of The Empire”.
Millions can now see, for the first time, that media outlets such as BBC, DW, CNN, Voice of America, Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty, have been encoding them mercilessly and thoroughly, for years and decades.
Reuters, AP, AFP and several other Western press agencies, have managed to create a uniformed narrative for the entire planet, with local newspapers everywhere in the world now publishing identical fabrications that originate from Washington, London, Paris and other Western capitals.
Totally false pictures about such important subjects as the Soviet Union, Communism, China, but also freedom and democracy, have been engraved into billions of human brains.
The main reason for the opening of the eyes of people of the world which is still oppressed by Western imperialism, is, the relentless work of media outlets such as the Russian-based New Eastern Outlook (NEO), RT and Sputnik, as China-based CGTN, China Radio International and China Daily, Venezuela-based TeleSur, Lebanese Al-Mayadeen, and Iranian Press TV.
Of course, there are many other proud and determined anti-imperialist media outlets in various parts of the world, but the above-mentioned ones are the most important vehicles of the counter-propaganda coming from the countries that fought for their freedom and simply refused to be conquered, colonized, prostituted and brainwashed by the West.
One mighty anti-imperialist coalition of truly independent states has been forming and solidifying. It is now inspiring billions of oppressed human beings everywhere on Earth, giving them hope, promising a better, optimistic and just future. Standing at the vanguard of many positive changes and expectations is the ‘new media’.
And the West is watching, horrified, desperate and increasingly vitriolic. It is willing to destroy, to kill and to crush, just in order to stop this wave of ‘dangerous optimism’ and strive for true independence and freedom.
There are now constant attacks against the new media of the free world. In the West, RT is being threatened with expulsion, brilliant and increasingly popular New Eastern Outlook (NEO) came just recently under vicious cyber-attack from, most likely, professional Western hackers.
TeleSur is periodically crippled by sanctions shamefully unleashed against Venezuela, and the same banditry is targeting Iranian Press TV.
You see, the West may be responsible for billions of ruined lives everywhere in the world, but it is still faces no sanctions, no punitive actions.
While countries like Russia, Iran, China, Cuba, DPRK or Venezuela have to ‘face consequences’ mainly in the form of embargos, sanctions, propaganda, direct intimidation, even military bullying, simply for refusing to accept the insane Western global dictatorship, and for choosing their own form of the government and political as well as economic system.
The West simply doesn’t seem to be able to tolerate dissent. It requires full and unconditional obedience, an absolute submission. It acts as both religious fundamentalist and a global thug. And to make things worse, its citizens appear to be so programmed or so indifferent or both, that they are not capable of comprehending what their countries and their ‘culture’ are doing to the rest of the world.
When being interviewed, I am often asked: “is the world facing real danger of WWIII?”
I always reply “yes”. It is because it appears that both North America and Europe are unable to stop forcing the world into obedience and to virtual slavery. They appear to be unwilling to accept any rational and democratic arrangement on our Planet. Would they sacrifice one, tens or hundreds of millions of human beings, just in order to retain control over the universe? Definitely they would!
They already have, on several occasions, without thinking twice, with no regret and no mercy.
The gamble of the Western fundamentalists is that the rest of the world is so much more decent and much less brutal, that it could not stomach yet another war, another carnage, another bloodbath; that it rather surrenders, rather gives up all its dreams for a much better future, instead of fighting and defending itself against what increasingly appears to be an inevitable Western military attack.
Such calculations and ‘hopes’ of the Western fanatics are false. Countries that are now being confronted and intimidated are well aware what to expect if they give up and surrender to Western insanity and imperialist designs.
People know, they remember what it is like to be enslaved.
Russia under Yeltsin, collapsed, being plundered by Western corporations, being spat at, in the face, by the European and North American governments; its life expectancy dropped to sub-Saharan African levels.
China survived unimaginable agony of “humiliation period’, being ransacked, plundered and divided by French, British and the U.S. invaders.
Iran robbed of its legitimate and socialist government, having to live under a sadistic maniac, the Western puppet, the Shah.
The entire ‘Latin’ America, with its open veins, with ruined culture, with Western religion forced down its throat; with literally all democratically-elected socialist and Communist governments and leaders either overthrown, or directly murdered, or at least manipulated out of power by Washington and its lackeys.
North Korea, survivor of a beastly genocide against its civilians, committed by the U.S. and its allies in the so-called Korean War.
Vietnam and Laos, raped and humiliated by the French, and then bombed to the stone ages by the U.S. and its allies.
South Africa… East Timor… Cambodia…
There are living carcasses, decomposing horrid wrecks, left after the Western deadly ‘liberating’ embraces: Libya and Iraq, Afghanistan and Honduras, Indonesia and the Democratic Republic of Congo, to name just a few. These are serving as warnings to those who still have some illusions left about the Western ‘good will’ and spirit of justice!
Syria… Oh Syria! Just look what the West has done to a proud and beautiful country which refused to fall on its knees and lick Washington’s and London’s feet. But also, look how strong, how determined those who truly love their country can be.
Against all odds, Syria stood up, it fought foreign-backed terrorists, and it won, surrounded and supported by the great internationalist coalition!
The West thought it was triggering yet another Libyan scenario, but instead, it encountered an iron fist, nerves of steel, another Stalingrad. Fascism was identified, confronted and stopped. At an enormous cost, but stopped!
The entire Middle East is watching. The entire world is watching.
People now see and they remember. They are beginning to remember clearly what happened to them. They are starting to understand. They are emboldened. They clearly comprehend that slavery is not the only way to live their lives.
The Anti-Western or more precisely, anti-imperialist coalition is now solid like steel. Because it is one great coalition of victims, of people who know what rape is and what plunder is, and what thorough destruction is.
They know precisely what is administered by the self-proclaimed champions of freedom and democracy – by the Western cultural and economic fundamentalism.
This coalition of independent and proud nations is here to protect itself, to protect each other, as well as the rest of the world.
It will never surrender, never back up. Because the people have spoken and they are sending clear messages to their leaders:
“Never again! Do not capitulate. Do not yield to the Western intimidations. We will fight if attacked. And we will stand, proudly, on our own feet, no matter what, no matter what brutal force we have to face.
Never on our knees, comrades! We will never again fall to our knees in front of those who are spreading terror!”
And the media in these wonderful countries that are resisting Western imperialism and terror is spreading countless optimistic and brave messages.
And the Western establishing is watching and shaking and soiling its pants.
It knows the end of its brutal rule over the world is approaching. It knows those days of impunity are ending. It knows the world will soon judge the West, for the centuries of crimes it has been committing against humanity.
It knows that the media war will be won by ‘us’, not by ‘them’.
The battlefield is being defined. With some bright exceptions, the Westerners and their media outlets are closing ranks, sticking to their masters. Like several other writers, I had been unceremoniously kicked out from Counterpunch, one of the increasingly anti-Communist, anti-Russian, anti-Syrian and anti-Chinese U.S.-based publications.
From their point of view, I was writing for several ‘wrong’ publications. I am actually proud that they stopped publishing me. I am fine where I am: facing them, as I am facing other mass-circulation media outlets of the West.
The extent of Western ideological control of the world is degenerate, truly perverse. Its media and ‘educational’ outlets are fully at the service of the regime.
But the world is waking up and confronting this deadly cultural and political fundamentalism.
A great ideological battle is on. These are exciting, bright times. Nothing could be worse than slavery. Chains are being broken. From now on, there will be no impunity for those who have been torturing the world for centuries.
Their lies, as well as their armor, will be confronted and stopped!
Taking shape in the United States and throughout the world in recent history is the gradual transformation of how media, particularly journalism, is created and distributed. Independent media companies have been folded into larger corporations, and virtually all “local” television stations have been purchased by giant corporations.
The end result is hundreds upon hundreds of entities suffering from a troubling lack of autonomy.
Ben Swann - an Emmy-winning investigative journalist and the founder of Truth In Media and Reality Check series - is fully aware of this transformation, as he has spent the majority of his career devoted to remaining a completely independent journalist not bound to any influence or higher authority.
Over the last 20 years across multiple stations, Swann amassed awards for his investigative reports, yet found himself at odds with executive leadership seeking to maintain more routine reporting.
This clash was particularly apparent when Swann began a series called Reality Check that discussed current US and international events while providing critical context missing from traditional mainstream media reports on those same issues.
For example, during the early years of Reality Check Swann covered the 2012 Republican Presidential primary and opted to scrutinize issues in the US electoral process and the methods used by mainstream media to gloss over overlooked aspects of the system.
Also during the early stages of Reality Check, Swann took unprecedented action as a journalist by directly confronting President Barack Obama about the Constitutionality of his little-known “kill list,” and went on to grill Mitt Romney about using coercion on delegates during the 2012 Republican National Convention.
Despite being advised to take a conventional approach to reporting, Swann continued to stay true to his principles and founded the Truth In Media Project in 2013, where he created two seasons of episodes that closely examined the Federal Reserve, police militarization, crony capitalism, the origin of ISIS, the government’s grip on cannabis, the conflict in Syria, and more.
Along with continued Reality Check episodes and a network of additional independent journalists creating content for the Truth In Media Project, Swann has attracted an audience of tens of millions of people spanning the political, geographical and social spectrum.
In early 2017, his commitment to sovereign reporting clashed with limitations handed down to him in his “day job” as a news anchor; by February of 2017, Ben’s independent endeavors ground to a halt. For the remainder of the year, Swann sought and ultimately discovered the key to true independence: decentralization and an organization known as a DAO.
Decentralization means that there is no single person, or group of people, that has control over an organization. A DAO is a decentralized autonomous organization; in a DAO, an organization operates within a set of guidelines but is free from any ruler or group of rulers, and operates with all aspects of the organization funded by the network itself.
A DAO is the antithesis of a centralized corporation that is often suppressed by layers upon layers of bureaucracy. The DAO of Dash, a revolutionary digital currency, features a treasury in which a network of participants may vote to allocate portions to a number of projects submitted through a proposal process.
The structure is similar to a sponsorship, but the key distinction of a DAO is that there’s no central authority to mandate terms. The Dash DAO has funded numerous proposals, with Swann’s Reality Check Series and Truth In Media Project being among the most significant proposal in Dash’s history.
Independent media is often incredibly difficult to pull off successfully, especially when reporting on issues that powerful conglomerates don’t want discussed.
There is no doubt that Swann has always aimed for disruptive, informative journalism, which is embraced by citizens yet often unwelcome in most media corporations.
As Swann has aimed to disrupt the media, the Dash DAO has disrupted the financial industry. The unique harmony between the Dash DAO and Swann has eliminated journalistic constraints previously laid out by corporate media, and is the world’s most detailed illustration of how decentralization is able to put the power back into the hands of the creator.
Decentralization is an immensely powerful element, and it’s not limited to the financial sector. It can be applied to virtually any industry, and the Dash DAO is responsible for a historic, revolutionary transformation in media with Swann becoming the first journalist in the world to be powered by decentralization.
How Rockefeller Founded Big Pharma And Waged War On Natural Cures September 18 2022 | From: PoliticalVelCraft/ Various
Western medicine has some good points, and is great in an emergency, but it’s high time people realized that today’s mainstream medicine (western medicine or allopathy), with its focus on drugs, drugs, radiation, drugs, surgery, drugs and more drugs, is at its foundation a money spinning Rockefeller creation.
Much like anything else, politics and money have been used to warp people’s minds and encourage them to embrace what is bad for them.
It all began with John D. Rockefeller (1839 – 1937) who was an oil magnate, a robber baron, America’s first billionaire, and a natural-born monopolist.
By the turn on the 20th century, he controlled 90% of all oil refineries in the U.S. through his oil company, Standard Oil, which was later on broken up to become Chevron, Exxon, Mobil etc.
World Affairs reports: At the same time, around 1900, scientists discovered “petrochemicals” and the ability to create all kinds of chemicals from oil.
For example, the first plastic - called Bakelite - was made from oil in 1907. Scientists were discovering various vitamins and guessed that many pharmaceutical drugs could be made from oil.
This was a wonderful opportunity for Rockefeller who saw the ability to monopolize the oil, chemical and the medical industries at the same time!
The best thing about petrochemicals was that everything could be patented and sold for high profits.
But there was one problem with Rockefeller’s plan for the medical industry: natural/herbal medicines were very popular in America at that time. Almost half the doctors and medical colleges in the U.S. were practicing holistic medicine, using knowledge from Europe and Native Americans.
Rockefeller, the monopolist, had to figure out a way to get rid of his biggest competition. So he used the classic strategy of “problem-reaction-solution.” That is, create a problem and scare people, and then offer a (pre-planned) solution. (Similar to terrorism scare, followed by the “Patriot Act”).
He went to his buddy Andrew Carnegie – another plutocrat who made his money from monopolizing the steel industry – who devised a scheme. From the prestigious Carnegie Foundation, they sent a man named Abraham Flexner to travel around the country and report on the status of medical colleges and hospitals around the country.
This led to the Flexner Report, which gave birth to the modern medicine as we know it.
Needless to say, the report talked about the need for revamping and centralizing our medical institutions. Based on this report, more than half of all medical colleges were soon closed.
Homeopathy and natural medicines were mocked and demonized; and doctors were even jailed.
To help with the transition and change the minds of other doctors and scientists, Rockefeller gave more than $100 million to colleges, hospitals and founded a philanthropic front group called “General Education Board” (GEB). This is the classic carrot and stick approach.
In a very short time, medical colleges were all streamlined and homogenized. All the students were learning the same thing, and medicine was all about using patented drugs.
Scientists received huge grants to study how plants cured diseases, but their goal was to first identify which chemicals in the plant were effective, and then recreate a similar chemical – but not identical – in the lab that could be patented.
A pill for an ill became the mantra for modern medicine.
So, now we are, 100 years later, churning out doctors who know nothing about the benefits of nutrition or herbs or any holistic practices. We have an entire society that is enslaved to corporations for its well-being.
America spends 15% of its GDP on healthcare, which should be really called “sick care.” It is focused not on cure, but only on symptoms, thus creating repeat customers. There is no cure for cancer, diabetes, autism, asthma, or even flu.
Why would there be real cures? This is a system founded by oligarchs and plutocrats, not by doctors.
As for cancer, oh yeah, the American Cancer Society was founded by none other than Rockefeller in 1913.
In this month of breast cancer awareness, it is sad to see people being brainwashed about chemotherapy, radiation and surgery. That’s another topic - but here is a quote from John D. Rockefeller that summarizes his New World Order vision for America…
The Global Fascist State: Physical Control Of The Global Population Is Impossible September 17 2022 | From: FinalWakeUpCall / Various
Centralised, controlled Global fascist state:The momentum for the completion of the New World Order (NWO) through centralised control of global politics, business, banking, military and media is gaining pace by the day, and is clearly evident through the large scale spying upon us.
Whenever a hidden agenda is about to be implemented, something occurs to scare the people, justifying the action for implementation. Our world is more and more becoming a recurrence of fascist Nazi Germany, before WWII. This is, in accordance with the plans of the Deep State Brotherhood, the new world that awaits the global population.
The Council on Foreign Relations (CFR), and multinational corporations already control most Governments;promoting the one world government through their control of the media, foundation grants, and education; with power exerted over all issues of the day; they already control almost all avenues; they have the financial power to promote the “New World Order”.
The key to their success is the control and manipulation bythe international bankers of the money systems of almost every nation, while making it appear as though they are controlled by the government.
If you wish to live in a world that is “urbane” enough to be run by a world government, managed by the Brotherhood of the élite and global bankers, then by all means, continue to follow the mainstream media to get all your information.
If, however, the idea of a select coterie of a global intellectual-financial elites running the world does not sound like the ideal society for humanity’s future, then it is time to come into action.
By battling the tide of misinformation and by helping to expose the dangers of the ‘New World Order.’
People have neither the slightest idea, nor the insight of the restrain that is going to be put on them. They would rather ignore the obvious and go into denial of the truth that has already become reality. Instead, people prefer assuring each other that they would never take people’s freedoms away and make us serfs of the elite.
Humanity has on a large scale given away its mind and its responsibility – it is advisable to consider the broader consequences of this behaviour for human existence.
When we give away our mind and responsibility, we give away our freedom and hence, our lives.
If enough people do it, we give the world away, and that is precisely what has been done throughout history. We’re now entering a fascist society, as was the case before WWII. The leaders of this era, such as Benito Mussolini in Italy and Adolf Hitler in Germany embodied the state and they claimed indisputable power, transforming countries into fascist states.
Now history is repeating itself and soon the world will become a fascist society all over again. The only difference is that this time, a few families, alias – the elite – are manipulating the entire planet, through the globalisation of business, banking and communications.
The primary goal of their control is to keep the people in ignorance, fear and at war. Divide, rule and conquer and keep the most important information secret.
Those who have applied these methods to control humanity for thousands of years are members of the same force, following a long-term Brotherhood Agenda, which now is reaching its point of completion.
So, the global fascist state is upon us. People must wake up now – and see this as their “final wake up call” – to mobilise and organise themselves to rebel against this injustice, as the real power is still with the many of us, and not with the few of the elites!
Infinite Power is Within Every Individual:
Infinite power is within each and every individual. The reason we are controlled is not because we don’t have the power to decide our own destiny, it is that we unknowingly give that power away when we don’t take responsibility for our destiny on all fronts.
When something happens that we don’t like, we look for someone else to blame. When there is a problem, people think first what are they, our so-called leaders going to do about it.
But remember it is they who have secretly created most problems, and they consequently respond to people’s demands by offering a ‘solution’ that always entails more centralisation of power and erosion of our freedom.
Man Sends Audition Tape To Globalists To Be Crisis Actor in Next False Flag Hilarious Satire Skit
If you want to give more power to the police, security agencies and military, that is exactly what they want the public to ask for, then they ensure there is more crime, more violence and more terrorism, and so they increasingly get exactly what they want, ever-increasing control and power.
Once people are in fear of being attacked by terrorists, they will demand to have their freedoms taken away, to protect them from what they have been manipulated to become – ‘fearful’.
As Benjamin Franklin once so typically stated:
“Those who would give up essential liberty, to purchase a little temporary safety, deserve neither liberty nor safety.”
The 9/11 Twin Tower destruction in New York in 2001 and the Global warming meme are both classic examples of ‘Problem - Reaction - Solution’ manipulations.
Physical Control of the Global Population is Impossible:
In short it is a technique of ‘problem - reaction - solution’. Create the problem; encourage the reaction that something has to be done about, and then offer the solution, their solution. In other words:
Create chaos and then offer a solution to restore order on people’s request, a solution which serves their agenda.
The masses are herded and directed by emotional and mental control. This is the only way their rules can be implemented. However, the few elites cannot control billions of people physically, unless a large number of people are involved.
So physical control of the global population is impossible. But when you can manipulate the way people feel and think to the point that they decide to do what they want us to do, by demanding to introduce regulations that they want to have implemented, then the door is set open for Centralised Global Control, by making people believe that it is their own idea.
Consequently, humanity becomes mind-controlled.
People are Mind Controlled:
The question is not how many people are mind-controlled, but how few are not. When you believe the news stories in the media, and allow these to affect your perception of events, your mind is controlled.
The answer to freedom of thought and perception is to take your mind back to conclude and decide for yourself.
The choice of interpretations is yours and not someone else’s. Remember they always want to have your mind, because once they have it, they have you. So keep your mind objective under all circumstances.
Think for yourself and don’t allow others to think for you, and if we All do this, their Agenda will not be able to be implemented and we will keep our freedoms, it’s as simple as that. Come into action now in the interest of our children, future generations, and in our own interest.
Remember; the secret Agenda is a conspiracy of minds, of people and events to ensure that the plans of the elite are employed. They conspire to put their people into positions of power, with hidden, stringent instructions to make the agenda happen, by conspiring to create events which will make the public demand the Agenda be implemented in complete ignorance of the devastating consequences.
It is frightening that we have entered the world George Orwell envisioned and wrote about in 1984 of mass surveillance, as portrayed in the movie ‘The Truman Show’.
Stick Your New World Order Up Your Arse!
Recently numerous scandals have revealed the surveillance state of the West and put it up for show. Whistleblowers have been warning about this for years!
But saying you were right won’t help you in the long run. Now we know that the government is listening, recording, and duplicating everything we do online or over the phone, it’s time to start taking action. It’s time to take back our right to privacy.
Although we may not fear Chinese tanks rolling through our streets, make no mistake; our most basic rights are under attack: reporters are being investigated and suspended by Government officials for exposing scandals, legislation is designed to water down our privacy rights and the NSA acts like it was nothing more than a necessity to crack down on terrorists, while presenting the matter as though they have the authority to do so.
Watch the powerful explanation of Snowden; it’s a lot easier, as was put forth by him, to change this intrusion on civilisation as has been laid out in the above writing: Be objective and make up your own mind; deciding for yourself.
Do You Know What We Are Breathing In From Weather Geoengineering Efforts? September 16 2022 | From: ActivistPost/ Various
Air is one of the primary elements of life; without it for about three minutes, we cannot survive. If air is such an important biological and functional life component, why are weather geoengineers messing around with it?
Well, think again, since many independent and non-cabal-financially-sponsored “non-consensus scientists” are finding STUFF in the air we breathe that should not be there unless placed for nefarious reasons. What a mouthful! Is there any documentation to substantiate what I say? But of course! Would I say it, if there were none?
Well, I’m going to explain some things readers may find doubtful, interesting and even frightful, but cannot deny once you stop playing around with your iPhones, etc. and look up and study the sky, which no longer is the crystal clear gorgeous blue it used to be in my youth, since I was born during the Depression years.
“Nano particles and Smart Dust [is] being absorbed by all of us via inhalation of chemtrail fallout and from contaminated grocery store food (including organically grown food) where the crops pick up and absorb the same Nano particles and Smart Dust that we are breathing in.
In addition, food sources are intentionally being sprayed with Nano technology. I first became aware of “nanobots” as a component of chemtrails in 2005 when the topic of Morgellons first surfaced on the internet.
These nanobots were somehow integrating themselves with biological functions inside people’s bodies producing these colored fibers and wire-like threads that would ooze out of lesions on the skin.
I had no idea why some people produced the fibers and had the sensation of insects crawling under their skin, while other people had no symptoms at all.”
According to Tony Pantalleresco:
“[W]e’ve been breathing in Nano particles in the atmosphere since the 1960s and they’ve been adding Nano particles to food since the 1970s. The expresion [sic] “Nano particles” refers to the size of the particles.
A particle 1 micron wide is equivalent to one millionth of one meter, while 1 Nano is equivalent to one billionth of one meter. Our bodies can handle particles in the micron range, but Nano size particles in the 1-100 Nano range especially, cause a great deal of damage to the bodyl.”
Tony should know; he’s been making videos about them.
“He explains that many thousands of Nano particles are now residing in EACH human cell of all human beings (including you) and are integrating themselves with our biological functions to re-program our body (and our DNA) into an Android-like hybrid, that is part human biology and part Artificial Intelligence robotics.
These Nano particles inside our bodies are activated by (and programmable from a distance) using radio frequencies (microwaves) and ELF waves.
That means we are ALL being set up for a 21st Century version of enslavement employing electronic mind-control and body-control coercion harassment (which is what Targeted Individuals who call into the Ella Free podcasts are experiencing and talking about). l.”
1962: “He Who Controls The Weather, Will Control The World” (LBJ)
There’s an amazing, astounding and seemingly unbelievable indication of what Tony contends, as a result of his research, being found in human bodies, and he demonstrates that using his arm and a special Anti-Nano Concoction protocol he created.
“Towards the end of the video, he immerses his arm in the anti-Nano bucket (after first adding vinegar, distilled water, salt, DMSO and a capful of olive oil) and following a few minutes, you can see the Nano metal dust particles coming out of the skin and sticking to the floating oil globules.
Jump ahead to 1:22 to see the Nano particles coming out of his skin.”
The video referenced above, which I have watched in full and taken notes on, must be considered very seriously, as it deals with emerging protocols to counter Nano technology, which very few individuals know anything about, but all of us are exposed to and compromised by.
After watching more than an hour of his creating the electro-field bucket, Tony discusses the ‘recipe’ for the anti-Nano soaking mixture around 1 hour 12 minutes, more or less.
The mixture includes cheap white vinegar, distilled water, salt, DMSO and oil, either olive or almond. The exact measurements are given.
At 1 hour 24 minutes “results” (Nano-dust particulates) start showing up emerging from Tony’s arm soaking in the anti-Nano mixture. Tony recommends soaking your feet, but with certain precautions.
PRECAUTIONS
If you have any electrical device implanted in your body, DO NOT use this method; it is NOT FOR YOU!
If you have a heart condition or pacemaker, this is NOT FOR YOU!
Tattoos use Nano-inks, which get into the bloodstream. The younger generations, who have gone bonkers over tats, are playing right into the NWO artificial intelligence agenda. Can that be why tattoos are not government regulated? Tattoo inks are neither regulated nor tested by the federal government and are considered a health risk [2]. However, most states regulate “body art studios.”
“The American Red Cross requires someone who has had a tattoo to wait a year before donating blood if the tattoo was applied in Georgia, Idaho, Maryland, Massachusetts, Nevada, New Hampshire, New York, Pennsylvania, Utah, Wyoming or the District - jurisdictions that do not regulate tattoo facilities.”
Nano-dust and particulates make all human bodies receivers and transmitters, a necessary component for control of humans because we can be controlled by microwaves transmitted to those frequency receivers residing within our bodies. Hard to believe, isn’t it?
Furthermore, it’s my understanding that special “matching” frequencies even can be “designed” for those who have given DNA and body tissues sample, e.g., blood tests, which have been collected by certain ‘vested interest’ agencies doing such AI/transhumanism technology work.
It’s part-and-parcel of global weather geoengineering or “chemtrails,” which literally rain down 43 known chemicals and metals, especially aluminum - the key “tagging” mineral/element, which also is a constituent in most, if not all, vaccines.
When Life Gets Too Complicated: Minimalist Living: How To Enjoy Life More With Less September 15 2022 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / Various
If it feels like your life sucks, there are extreme chances that it's too complicated. On the other hand, if it feels like it doesn't suck, I bet your life is quite simple.
How do I know? Well, I've found my life sucking many times, and that was always when it became wildly complicated. Now that it doesn't suck anymore (or at least it feels like it doesn't), it's simpler than ever before
Of course, my life didn't just get simple on its own. I played my part in getting it the way it is. A BIG part, in fact.
How? By making a few small yet tremendously effective lifestyle changes. If you're entangled in the complexity of your own life, and would like to know what those changes were so that you can apply and benefit from them too, I have good news for you.
For most people, life has become a burden on their shoulders, and year by year its weight is growing heavier and heavier, until one day they can’t carry it anymore.
But does life have to be such a drudgery? No, it doesn’t. In fact, life can be stunningly great, if we allow it to be so.
How? Keep scrolling and I’ll show you.
Why is Life So Messed Up?
This is a question I get a lot from readers. I find it quite misleading, since life in itself isn’t messed up. Rather, we insist on making it look like it. Here’s how: By complicating it to such a degree that we can’t enjoy it anymore.
Let me give you a few examples: We do work we don’t enjoy, we buy stuff we don’t need, we say things we don’t mean, we eat food that doesn’t contribute to our health… you get what I mean.
Of course, no person is entirely to blame for that. From an early age, society has conditioned us to live this way. Just consider, for example, the advertising industry, which is constantly preying on our insecurities in order to make us want new products.
Or, contemplate on our school system, which is indoctrinating us with the belief that success is nothing but the result of getting good at things we don’t like just for the sake of an external reward. Or, lastly, think of our economic system, which is forcing us to work as wage slaves just so we can merely feed ourselves and sleep under a roof.
As you can understand, it’s not surprising that life seems messed up. But it’s in our hands to change this, if we want to, and make life worth-living again. There are various ways we can do so, and here I’m going to share with you some helpful ways you can create more space for peace, contentment, and health in your life.
Minimalism: A Turn Back to Simplicity
So how can we design a life that is less complicated and more meaningful? With minimalism.
If you haven’t heard of the term minimalism before, here’s it’s key idea: Getting rid of what isn’t adding value to your life in order make room for what does, such as removing clutter, distractions and unhealthy relationships, and allowing more space for things that are essential to our well-being, such as creativity, love, and play.
Therefore, minimalism or minimalist living is about intentionally focusing on what truly matters to you, and letting go of what doesn’t. Or, to put it differently, it’s about enjoying life more with less.
Now, this might sound like an easy thing to do, but it’s actually quite hard. Why? Because during the course of our lives most of us have lost touch with our true needs and wants.
This has resulted in a lack of inner fulfillment, out of which arises a desperate effort to fill our psychological void with physical, mental and emotional clutter, which, instead of making us feel better, actually makes us feel much worse.
The question is: How can one break free from this chaos we’re entangled in and which seems so out of hand?
If you’re trying to figure this out for yourself, I created the following guide to assist you in your journey to living a simpler yet fuller life. It consists of easy yet empowering tips and practices that you can apply in your everyday life in order to reap the incredible benefits of a minimalist lifestyle. Are you ready to dive into it?
A Guide to Minimalist Living: 10 Ways to Enjoy Life More with Less
1. Get Rid of Stuff that Doesn’t Serve Your Happiness
Most people’s living space is cluttered with myriads of things they never use and which don’t contribute to their well-being.
On the contrary, those objects are only standing in their way, distracting their attention and preventing them from finding calm, clarity and focus. Some of them even need regular maintenance, and hence require money, time and energy to be spent - or, to be more precise, wasted - on them.
Have a look at your possessions and ask yourself: Do I really need ALL of them? Separate the one’s you do need from the ones you don’t, and throw the latter right into the rubbish bin - or better, give them away to people who might actually benefit from them.
2. Resist Consuming Products You Don’t Need
Discarding things you don’t need is crucial to emptying your life from unnecessary stuff, but if you keep on acquiring new material possessions, it’s going to be filled up pretty soon again.
The solution? It’s simple: Stop buying things you don’t need.
The main reason why so many of us want to buy new products all the time is that we’ve been fooled by the advertising industry that shopping is all we need to be happy.
However, the reality is that once we have enough to satisfy our basic human needs, products can’t improve our well-being in any way. They can only provide us with momentary gratification that quite soon vanishes into thin air, leading us in an even worse psychological state than before.
3. Appreciate all the Amazing Things You Already Have
In the day and age of Instagram, so many people are having terrific self-esteem issues. That’s because they constantly compare themselves to others who, in their eyes, always seem happier, more beautiful and way more important than them.
As they are, they feel like crap, and they try their best to imitate those they are jealous of, in a desperate effort to feel better about themselves. Yet no matter how much they try, they always fail.
If you’d like to stop feeling crappy, you need to learn to appreciate what you already have, instead of always being focused on what you don’t. That means you need to stop comparing yourself to others and embrace yourself for who you are, with all your flaws and imperfections. Only then will you be able to make peace with yourself, focus on what’s truly important and feel grateful for the amazing gift of life.
Starting now, take a moment to appreciate that you’re pulsating with life and able to experience all the goodness existence has to offer:
Appreciate the beauty of nature.
Appreciate the joy of tasting food.
Appreciate the heart-to-heart bonding between you and your loved ones.
Appreciate the little things in life, and all of a sudden you’ll discover that you actually have way more than ever thought.
4. Minimize Your Internet Distractions
Was checking your email the first thing you did this morning? Or was it perhaps scrolling through your social media feed? Or maybe having a look at your favorite news sites for updates?
But you aren’t alone in that. In fact, nowadays most people are constantly fixated on an electronic screen, wasting hours upon hours everyday being carried away by a constant flood of information. They endlessly jump from one social media network to the other, from this article to that, from one picture to the next.
Don’t get me wrong, I adore the internet and spend much of my time online myself, but if we don’t learn how to use it mindfully, and instead let it use us, then it can play havoc with our mental health.
If you’d like to find more a peaceful state of mind, then you likely need to minimize your internet distractions.
To help you get started, here are some practical tips:
Close as many tabs you can.
Check your emails up to two times a day, filter and process them immediately, and clear out your inbox.
Spend as less time on social media as possible (I’d recommend not more than an hour per day).
Pick a handful of good sources and check them only once a day.
Set some hours offline each day.
After you’ve applied them for a month or so, shoot me an email at contact@theunboundedspirit.com and let me know about your progress and the impact this small minimalist lifestyle change has had on your well-being.
5. Build Intimate Relationships
What’s missing in the world more than anything else is human connection.
People feel disconnected from one another, and that’s for plenty of reasons, with the main being our economic system, which is compelling us to compete with and exploit each other in an endless effort to maximize our personal gain, and thus is constantly reinforcing the idea that others are inimical, or at best indifferent to us.
The result? Loneliness, insecurity, depression.
Every person - including you - is a social being with an emotional need to connect with other people. We all deep down want to be heard, understood, and embraced for who we are.
So whenever you find an opportunity for human connection, don’t shy away from it. Put your mobile phone aside for a while and take the time to look at someone in the eye, listen to their story, and open your heart to them.
One of the main reasons why our lives are so complicated is that we’re not quite honest with each other. We say things we don’t mean and we don’t say those things that we do mean, and this inevitably leads to plenty of misunderstandings and interpersonal conflict.
From now on, be sure to avoid uttering lies, and instead voice your sincere thoughts as well as express your feelings.
This way you’ll be able to form healthier and more genuine relationships, which will do wonders to simplify your day-to-day life.
7. Do One Thing at a Time
Minimalist living in essence means focused living, and focused living means making the most out of each and every moment.
The problem is that, because of the constant distractions we experience in the modern world, most of us haven’t learned to fully concentrate on one act at a time. Instead, we’re usually carrying out different tasks at the same time, and so whatever we are doing, our mind is partly wondering somewhere else.
Here are some examples:
We check our phones while we’re eating.
We are jumping between tasks in a browser.
We are lost in our thoughts when others are talking to us.
We are thinking of what thing to do next before finishing the current thing.
This way, not only aren’t we able to give our best to what we’re doing, but also we can’t enjoy the task at hand.
If you’re used to multi-tasking and would like to change that in order to be better at what you do as well as to get totally immersed in the things you like, make sure that you concentrate on a single thing or task at a time. For instance, when you’re eating, don’t check your phone at the same time and just focus on savoring every bite of your food.
Or when you’re talking to someone, don’t be preoccupied with what you’ll say next when your turn to talk comes - instead, give your full attention to your partner so that you can understand what he or she is saying.
8. Treat Your Body With Care
In order to be able to enjoy your life, you first and foremost need to be in good health. Hence, it’s vital that you treat your body with loving care.
Unfortunately, this isn’t how most people treat their bodies. They tend to consume toxic foods, they don’t exercise, they sleep less than needed, and do all sorts of other things that mess up with their health. Of course, they don’t do so on purpose.
Rather, they usually act like this either out of ignorance or because the stress of everyday life has led them to make poor lifestyle choices. But one thing is certain: They’ve stopped feeling connected to their bodies, and no longer understand how their actions are impacting their health.
As a result, they sooner or later end up experiencing all sorts of illnesses that could have been avoided if they payed more attention to their physical needs.
If you’d like to optimize your health, you need to turn your attention inwards, get in tune with your body, listen to its needs and act accordingly.
For example, if you feel like moving, move. If, on the other hand, you feel tired, stop moving your body to recharge your batteries. Or, to give you another example, if you feel hungry, eat to feed your body with fuel, but if you feel that your stomach is full, don’t eat any more and burden yourself with extra food.
The body has its own wisdom but we’ve lost touch with it. By starting to pay more attention to it, we can re-connect with it and allow it to lead us to a healthier and more fulfilling life.
9. Focus on Your Most Important Goals
People usually have a big number of goals they want to achieve, and often they are even opposing to each other. One day they want this thing, the next day another, and the next still another. No wonder they usually end up achieving nothing but complicating their lives.
A life that is simple has a clear purpose. To live such a life, you need to discover those few things that you’re most interested in and dedicate yourself to them.
Whatever they are, be sure to make them your top priority. By doing so, you’ll be able to live a life that is filled with meaning and purpose, without getting sidetracked by things that don’t matter to you.
Lastly yet perhaps most importantly, minimalist living requires a calm and undisturbed mind - that is, a mind that is free of conflicting thoughts and in tune with the present moment.
Unfortunately, in our busy, stressful lives, our minds are filled with worries - worries about what happened in the past or what is going to happen in the future, which don’t allow us to let go and enjoy the only moment that ever was, is and will be - the here and now.
To be able to regain a peaceful state of consciousness, you need to develop mindfulness. Mindfulness means fully attending what’s happening in the present, instead of dwelling in the past or the future.
It also means observing your thoughts and feelings without judging, resisting or feeding them. Lastly, it means consciously responding to situations instead of overreacting to them or being overwhelmed by them.
Every single person can develop mindfulness, and there are many ways one can do so. Perhaps the most common way is to sit for about 30 minutes somewhere comfortably with your upper back straight and pay full attention to your breath as it’s coming in and out through your nostrils, without allowing yourself to be distracted by your thoughts.
When, however, you feel that your mind has carried you away, make sure that you return your attention to your breath and continue your practice. By doing so, you’ll find that slowly slowly your thoughts become less and less, and as a result you’ll experience more clarity, focus and a sense of inner peace, which you can carry with you throughout your day.
Mindfulness is an ancient practice that is now backed up by science. By implementing it into your daily routine, you’ll be able to relieve yourself from the constant stream of thoughts that is flooding your mind and savor each and every moment of your life.
Science Is Broken, And The Peer-Review Process Produces “Utter Bulls##t” Parading Around As Real Science September 14 2022 | From: NaturalNews / Various
Much of what gets published in so-called “science journals” or “medical journals” is actually complete “bulls##t,” warn many observers.
In recent years the defects in the peer review system have been the subject of a profusion of critical editorials and studies in the literature. It is high time that the world took heed of what the critics are saying, not least of all because of the medical and health ramifications.
The notion of peer review has long occupied special territory in the world of science. However, investigation of suppressed innovations, inventions, treatments, cures, and so on, rapidly reveals that the peer review system is arguably better at one thing above all others: censorship.
This can mean censorship of everything from contrarian viewpoints to innovations that render favored dogmas, products, or services obsolete (economic threats).
The problem is endemic, as many scientists have learned the hard way.
In truth, the systemic failure of peer review is one of science’s major, embarrassing open secrets.
As Dr David Kaplan tells us, “Peer review is known to engender bias, incompetence, excessive expense, ineffectiveness, and corruption. A surfeit of publications has documented the deficiencies of this system.”
Australian physicist Brian Martin elaborates in his excellent article Strategies for Dissenting Scientists:
"Certain sorts of innovation are welcome in science, when they fall within established frameworks and do not threaten vested interests. But aside from this sort of routine innovation, science has many similarities to systems of dogma. Dissenters are not welcome. They are ignored, rejected, and sometimes attacked."
Electric universe researcher and Big Bang critic Wal Thornhill (a REAL scientist) stated plainly in our GFM Media interview that the peer review system amounts to censorship. Fellow independent scientist Gary Novak agrees scathingly:
"Peer review is a form of censorship, which is tyranny over the mind. Censorship does not purify; it corrupts… There is a lot of junk science and trash that goes through the peer review process."
Brian Martin asks us rhetorically:
"What do [scientists] have to gain by spending time helping an outsider? Most likely, the alleged discovery will turn out to be pointless or wrong from the standard point of view.
If the outsider has made a genuine discovery, that means the outsider would win rewards at the expense of those already in the field who have invested years of effort in the conventional ideas."
Herein lies the problem in moving science forward and shifting paradigms. A paradigm is only as malleable (or mutable) as the minds and egos invested in it.
The Problem of “Experts”
The reality is (as any real scientist will tell you) that scientists are prone - just like lay people - to being cathected to their pet theories and opinions, especially if they have been visibly rewarded or publicly obtained accolades or financial remuneration as a result.
Scientists, like laypeople, have susceptible emotional bodies and often fairly hefty egos - partially due to their “expertise” and academic titles, qualifications, theories, etc.
Once those hefty egos - belonging to people generally known as “experts” - rise to positions of power and/or influence, they can calcify the flow of scientific progress as well as the understanding of new discoveries or theories - particularly if they end up acting as “peer reviewers” at high levels in prestigious publications.
In that capacity, too many become mere gatekeepers and seek not to facilitate innovation or vital new Copernican-scale revelations, but to maintain the status quo which got them there in the first place.
Dr Malcolm Kendrick comments in his excellent book Doctoring Data that, “by definition, anyone who is an ‘expert’ in an area of medicine will be a supporter of whatever dogma holds sway.” Close study of power dynamics in medicine bears this out.
The players with the deepest pockets have the funds to buy all of the “experts” they need to sell a bogus product or ideology to an unsuspecting public.
Consider the following words from The Lancet’s editor Richard Horton (pictured below):
"The mistake, of course, is to have thought that peer review was any more than a crude means of discovering the acceptability - not the validity - of a new finding… We portray peer review to the public as a quasi-sacred process that helps to make science our most objective truth teller.
But we know that the system of peer review is biased, unjust, unaccountable, incomplete, easily fixed, often insulting, usually ignorant, occasionally foolish, and frequently wrong."
Peer review, as a “quasi-sacred” process that somehow supposedly transcends the foibles and follies human nature has taken on sacred ritual status. Has the paper been blessed by the Peer Review Priest?
Peer review is held to be more than just pragmatically useful and functional (which clearly it is not, generally speaking) - it is held as a transcendent, almost magical, organizing force occurring in the heavenly ivory towers of Science, which somehow avoids falling prey to human weaknesses by virtue of those humans’ lofty qualifications as “scientists” or “experts.”
Scientists, of course, aren’t quite human - they are something more, something pure, something that the layman can never be. Students undergo a magical alchemical process as they proceed through educational institutions and emerge transformed from their chrysalis with their doctorates, masters, stethoscopes and equations.
They are the Chosen Ones, the purified, the holy, the redeemed, the righteous. They do not have to answer to the lowly non-scientific peasantry – let alone unbelieving heretics.
It is clear, however, that not only is the popular view of peer review misleading, but the most prestigious publications are some of the very worst offenders. Significant scientific publications - for example, the journal Nature - have a well documented history of prejudice against findings or hypotheses that run contrary to established scientific dogma.
Writing in the British Medical Journal (BMJ) in May 2000, Canadian-based researcher, David Sackett, said that he would “never again lecture, write, or referee anything to do with evidence based clinical practice,” over his concern that “experts” are stifling new ideas. He wants the retirement of experts to be made compulsory and I think it’s a brilliant proposition.
Sackett says that “…progress towards the truth is impaired in the presence of an expert.”
Trusting “experts” in oncology, for example, is generally a very good way to artificially speed one’s trip to the grave, particularly if one has metastatic cancer (allopathic medicine is notoriously ineffective in that realm). And yet “experts” are now on a rarified level that perhaps only popes and celebrities can understand - they are virtually demigods today.
In the main, “experts” are those people in the establishment who espouse the mainstream dogma and reify the politically correct belief structures. “Experts” are lionized because the world that made them experts promotes and validates them when they affirm the already established (and profitable) beliefs - and the media is complicit in this.
If you want to be horribly misled on any number of important issues, just head straight to just about any mainstream news media outlet and listen to the establishment’s “experts.”
Is it not time to get the crusty, rigidified, and corrupt Old Guard out of the way so we can let science move forward?
Harvard Medical School’s Dr. Marcia Angell is the former Editor-in-Chief at the New England Journal of Medicine, where she spent twenty years poring over scientific papers, saturated in the dubious practices that pervade the world of medical research. She states bluntly:
"It is simply no longer possible to believe much of the clinical research that is published, or to rely on the judgment of trusted physicians or authoritative medical guidelines. I take no pleasure in this conclusion, which I reached slowly and reluctantly over my two decades as an editor of The New England Journal of Medicine."
Most “experts” in medicine are, psychologically speaking, simply engaged in well-paid groupthink and confirmation bias exercises, vigorously affirming and defending their ego’s (lucrative) construction of the world. To paraphrase physicist Max Planck, medicine, like science, “advances one funeral at a time.”
Once the public has accepted the scientific establishment’s truths, narratives, and designated “experts” then researchers who yield findings deviating from the accepted norm can be immediately branded as crackpots, lunatics, fringe nuts, pseudo-scientists and so on, regardless of how meticulous their methods, and irrefutable their results.
The media is crucial in this control dynamic because it sells the establishment’s reality.
Thus is the politically correct status quo maintained.
Peer “Review” Lets Garbage Through - and Lots of it!
“Peer review” censorship exemplifies the neophobia in the world of science which serves to protect the status quo rather than improve knowledge by weeding out dubious epistemologies and results, as it is meant to.
This supposed mechanism of “quality control” has resulted not only in the dismissal of much important and credible research, but it has also let fraudulent research - and lots of it! - be published at the same time. Papers that appear to support fashionable ideas or entrenched dogmas are likely to fare well, even if they are badly flawed - or outright rubbish!
David Kaplan, a professor of pathology at the Case Western Reserve University School of Medicine in Cleveland, has stated that;
"Peer review is broken. It needs to be overhauled, not just tinkered with. The incentives should be changed so that: authors are more satisfied and more likely to produce better work, the reviewing is more transparent and honest, and journals do not have to manage an unwieldy and corrupt system that produces disaffection and misses out on innovation."
Is it any wonder that John Ionnidis reported in his famous 2005 paper that, “Most research findings are false for most research designs and for most fields”? Given the already outlined problems, is it really surprising that, in Ionnidis words, “Claimed research findings may often be simply accurate measures of the prevailing bias”?
Dr. Marc Girard, a mathematician and physician who serves on the editorial board of Medicine Veritas (The Journal of Medical Truth), has written;
"The reason for this disaster is too clear: the power of money. In academic institutions, the current dynamics of research is more favourable to the ability of getting grants - collecting money and spending it - than to scientific imagination or creativity."
In general, peer reviewers - generally not time-rich - don’t try to replicate experiments and rarely even request the raw data supporting a paper’s conclusions. Who has the time for all that? Thus, peer review is, according to Richard Smith writing in Peer review in health sciences;
"Thought to be slow, expensive, profligate of academic time, highly subjective, prone to bias, easily abused, poor at detecting gross defects, and almost useless for detecting fraud."
What about fake peer review? This is where the corrupt and abysmal becomes the theatre of the absurd. For example, Berlin-based Springer Nature, who publishes the aforementioned Nature journal announced the retraction of 64 articles in 10 journals in an August 18th statement in 2015. This followed an internal investigation which found fabricated peer-review write-ups linked to the articles.
The purge followed similar discoveries of “fake peer review” by several other major publishers, including London-based BioMed Central, an arm of Springer, which began retracting 43 articles in March citing “reviews from fabricated reviewers”.
Yes, that means reviewers that don’t exist - recommended as “reviewers” by the people submitting their work for review.
Imagine writing a paper and being able to nominate a non-existent person to review your work, and the contact email supplied to the publisher for this purpose is actually one you made up, which routes the paper back to you (unbeknownst to the publisher), so that you can then secretly carry out a (favourable) review of your own work under a pseudonym!
It’s being done, folks, this is not a joke.
In response to fake peer review some publishers have actually ended the practice of author-suggested reviewers.
And now for the Conceptual Penis…
Recently two scientists performed a brilliant Sokal-style hoax on the journal Cogent Social Sciences. Under the pen names “Jamie Lindsay” and “Peter Boyle,” and writing for the fictitious “Southeast Independent Social Research Group,” Peter Boghossian and James Lindsay wrote a deliberately absurd paper loosely composed in the style of “post-structuralist discursive gender theory” - what exactly that is they made no attempt to find out.
The authors tell us:
"The paper was ridiculous by intention, essentially arguing that penises shouldn’t be thought of as male genital organs but as damaging social constructions…
We assumed that if we were merely clear in our moral implications that maleness is intrinsically bad and that the penis is somehow at the root of it, we could get the paper published in a respectable journal."
And they did. After completing the paper, and being unable to identify what it was actually about, it was deemed a success and ready for submission, which went ahead in April 2017.
It was published the next month after some editorial feedback and additional tweaking. To illustrate how deliberately absurd the paper is, a quote is in order:
"We conclude that penises are not best understood as the male sexual organ, or as a male reproductive organ, but instead as an enacted social construct that is both damaging and problematic for society and future generations… and is the conceptual driver behind much of climate change."
In plain English, they (seemingly) argued here that a penis is not a male sexual organ but a social construct; the “conceptual penis” is problematic for “gender (and reproductive) identity,” as well as being the “conceptual” driver of climate change. No, really. How this ever got published is something to ponder. The paper is filled with meaningless jargon, arrant nonsense, and references to fake papers and authors.
As part of the hoax, none of the sources that were cited were even read by the hoaxers. As Boghossian and Lindsay point out, it never should have been published. No one - not even Boghossian and Lindsay - knows what it is actually saying.
Almost a third of the sources cited in the original version of the paper point to fake sources, such as created by Postmodern Generator, making mock of how absurdly easy it is to execute this kind of hoax, especially, the authors add, in “‘academic’ fields corrupted by postmodernism.” (emphasis added)
The Spectacular Success of Hoax Papers and Non-existent Authors
In April 2010, Cyril Labbé of Joseph Fourier University in Grenoble, France, used a computer program called SCIgen to create 102 fake papers under the pseudonym of Ike Antkare. SCIgen was created in 2005 by researchers at MIT in Cambridge in order to demonstrate that conferences would accept such nonsense…as well as to amuse themselves.
Labbé added the bogus papers to the Google Scholar database, which boosted Ike Antkare’s h-index, a measure of published output, to 94 - at the time, making Antkare the world’s 21st most highly cited scientist. (emphasis added)
So a non-existent scientist has achieved the distinction of being one of the world’s most highly cited authors - while “authoring” papers consisting of utter gibberish. Congratulations are certainly in order. In February 2014 it was reported that Springer and the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), were removing over 120 such bogus papers from their subscription services after Labbe identified them using his own software.
Going back at least as far as 1996 journalists and researchers have been getting spoof papers published in conferences or journals to deliberately expose weaknesses in academic quality controls.
“Physicist Alan Sokal (of the famous Sokal Affair) succeeded in the journal Social Text in 1996,” while Harvard science journalist John Bohannon revealed in a 2013 issue of Science that he had duped over 150 open-access journals into publishing “a deliberately flawed study.”
Bohannon organized submission of the flawed study (technically, many different but very similar variations of the study) to 304 open access journals worldwide over a period of 10 months. 255 went through the whole editing process to the point of either acceptance or rejection.
He wrote:
"Any reviewer with more than a high-school knowledge of chemistry and the ability to understand a basic data plot should have spotted the paper’s shortcomings immediately. Its experiments are so hopelessly flawed that the results are meaningless."
The hoax paper was accepted by a whopping 157 of the journals and rejected by only 98. Of the 106 journals that did conduct “peer review,” fully 70% accepted the paper.
If peer review was a transparent and accountable process, according to Gary Novak;
"There might be a small chance of correcting some of the corruptions through truth and criticism; but the process is cloaked in the darkness of anonymity…Due to the exploitive and corrupt process, nearly everything in science has official errors within it… A culture of protecting and exploiting the errors creates an official reality which cannot be opposed."
Returning specifically to the arena of (mainstream) medicine, a quote in PLoS Medicine, states:
"Journals have devolved into information laundering operations for the pharmaceutical industry”, wrote Richard Horton, editor of the Lancet, in March 2004.
In the same year, Marcia Angell, former editor of the New England Journal of Medicine, lambasted the industry for becoming “primarily a marketing machine” and co-opting “every institution that might stand in its way”…
Jerry Kassirer, another former editor of the New England Journal of Medicine, argues that the industry has deflected the moral compasses of many physicians, and the editors of PLoS Medicine have declared that they will not become “part of the cycle of dependency…between journals and the pharmaceutical industry”.
In the words of John Ionnidis, “Most scientific studies are wrong, and they are wrong because scientists are interested in funding and careers rather than truth.”
If most studies are wrong, and most scientists are more interested in their own careers and funding than getting at the truth - while journals daily allow bogus and flawed pharmaceutical research to be published and promoted - then why would anyone in their right mind believe the claims made by doctors about the efficacy of products based upon “peer review” or pharmaceutical “studies”?
What does a term like “safe and effective” even mean in this world of deception and subterfuge?
Clearly the problem of corruption and conflicts of interest have been increasingly on the radar of professional academics for some time now, so much so that it has been the subject of an increasing number of harshly critical articles and editorials. Conveying the depth and breadth of deception to the “uninitiated,” however, presents a unique challenge.
And it isn’t just conflict of interest and corruption to blame for the failure of peer review, there is human bias, shoddy review work, fake reviewers and fraud, and varying other human interests to factor in.
At the very least we need to cease indoctrinating students into the dogma that all good things have been peer reviewed, and the converse: anything that has not been peer reviewed is clearly blasphemous and crafted by the unholy hands of sinners.
In the meantime, the public needs to be warned: peer review is largely a sham and will not protect you or your family from medical pseudo-science or dangerous pharmaceutical products.
Your doctor’s word should not be blindly trusted, especially when we know that doctors rely absurdly heavily on information (read: propaganda) provided by the pharmaceutical industry itself (can you say “conflicted”?!) in developing their views and opinions.
I can’t help but cringe when I hear people ask if a study has been “peer-reviewed.” The response this question most often deserves is simply, “Who cares?”
"The case against science is straightforward: much of the scientific literature, perhaps half, may simply be untrue. Afflicted by studies with small sample sizes, tiny effects, invalid exploratory analyses, and flagrant conflicts of interest, together with an obsession for pursuing fashionable trends of dubious importance, science has taken a turn towards darkness."
- Richard Horton, Offline: What is medicine’s 5 sigma? The Lancet, 11 April 2015, thelancet.com (Horton is editor of The Lancet)
Scientific American Writer Exposes The Tribal Cultist Arrogance And Dogmatic Lunacy Of Science 'Skeptics' September 13 2022 | From: NaturalNews/ Various
In his article, Horgan rightly points out that today's so-called "science skeptics" are little more than dogmatic tribal cultists (my words, not Horgan's) who celebrate "skeptical" thinking concerning their selected philosophical targets while vehemently denying anyone's right to question their own beliefs on things like breast cancer screening, vaccine safety, global warming and genetically engineered foods.
Related: How ‘Science’ Is Used To Deceive The Public
As Horgan eloquently explains in his piece, real skeptics are skeptical of everything, not just selected topics that are targeted by the madness of status quo science crowds (i.e. the "cult of scientism").
Real Skepticism Means Questioning Everything... Especially the Status Quo
A real skeptic, in other words, would bring critical thinking to all of our science narratives and cultural beliefs, including those that cover the origin of the universe (cosmology), the origin of the human species, the nature of consciousness, the long history of indigenous botanical medicine, the cancer industry and mammography, homeopathy, antidepressant drugs, water filters, the existence of God and everything else imaginable.
But far too many of today's infamous "skeptics" (such as Richard Dawkins) are really just cultists who labor under the false banner of "science."
And they're offensive to real critical thinkers, it turns out.
"I don’t hang out with people who self-identify as capital-S Skeptics. Or Atheists. Or Rationalists," explains Horgan. "When people like this get together, they become tribal.
They pat each other on the back and tell each other how smart they are compared to those outside the tribe. But belonging to a tribe often makes you dumber."
I've seen this myself, on both ends of the medicine spectrum. I've seen insanely stupid pharmacology experts swear that statin drugs are such miraculous chemicals that they should be dripped into the public water supply. But I've also seen "raw foodies" at festivals swearing that their "water vortexer machines" could levitate water in defiance of the laws of gravity.
In both cases, my critical thinking alarms go haywire, and I shake my head in disbelief that so many people are so gullible, regardless of their level of academic education or technical mastery of certain subjects.
A highly trained doctor with an IQ of 200 can be just as functionally stupid as a high school dropout, I've observed. In fact, when it comes to medicine and health, many so-called "experts" are so ignorant of reality that they almost seem cognitively retarded.
My Experience as a Food Research Scientist Has Taught Me to Distrust Everything by Default
As a food scientist and lab science director of CWC Labs where I conduct food analysis via ICP-MS, LC/MS-TOF and other instruments, I've become even more skeptical of the mainstream natural products industry over the last few years.
Take note of the massive scam of commercial almond milk sold in grocery stores. Such products contain almost no almonds at all. Instead, they're thickened with carageenan and made to look milky white by the addition of an inorganic mineral compound called calcium carbonate - ground up rocks!
This calcium carbonate, when consumed in large quantities, can cause extreme bone pain, kidney calcification and may even contribute to the calcification of arteries. Yet it's added to a so-called "natural" health product that people are drinking in huge quantities while thinking they're being smart about their health. Truth be told, you'd be far better off drinking raw, unpasteurized cow's milk than commercial almond milk.
I've also seen so much pollution in "natural" products - including toxic heavy metals and alarming quantities of pesticides and herbicides in supposedly "clean" products - that I've reached the point where my own food manufacturing operation now rejects 80% of the raw material lots we test. (See my upcoming book Food Forensics for detailed ICP-MS analysis revealing the heavy metals concentrations in over 800 foods, supplements and spices.)
Similarly, I find myself rejecting 80% of the total B.S. science nonsense reported by the scientifically illiterate mainstream media... (and sometimes even the "science" media).
I've literally seen seemingly credible reports in the mainstream media that claim the most ludicrous science nonsense, including claims that cars can be "powered" by air and that cell phones can be "powered" by water. The air powered cars stories always neglect to mention that the air must be pressurized by some other energy source; usually coal-generated electricity that's used to power the compressors in the first place.
I've also seen the Associated Press falsely report that all mercury has been removed from all vaccines in America (blatantly false), and I've seen the obedient Monsanto-puppet media (i.e. Forbes.com, a propaganda rag steeped in utterly false journalism) report ridiculous claims such as asserting that glyphosate disintegrates quickly in the food supply.
In truth, this cancer-causing weed killer survives food processing and human digestion, showing up in both urine and breast milk, fully intact in its original molecular form.
So why is there no skepticism among "skeptics" about the food chain persistence of pesticides? The false diagnosis hoax of mammography? The lunatic quack medicine diagnosis of "psychiatric disorders" that are treated with mind-bending psychiatric drugs? Or even the scientifically proven fact that some children are seriously harmed by certain vaccines, most notably HPV vaccines?
As Horgan writes in Scientific American:
"The Science Delusion” is common among Capital-S Skeptics. You don’t apply your skepticism equally. You are extremely critical of belief in God, ghosts, heaven, ESP, astrology, homeopathy and Bigfoot. You also attack disbelief in global warming, vaccines and genetically modified food...
Meanwhile, you neglect what I call hard targets. These are dubious and even harmful claims promoted by major scientists and institutions. In the rest of this talk, I’ll give you examples of hard targets from physics, medicine and biology. I’ll wrap up with a rant about war, the hardest target of all."
What Horgan is doing is, dare we say, exercising REAL scientific skepticism. He's refusing to sign up for the "cult of scientism" that all the other closed-minded skeptics obediently follow as their dogmatic mental prison.
Horgan understands that legitimate science is a process, not a belief system. "Science" isn't belief in vaccines, GMOs, chemotherapy and global warming. Those are conclusions, not processes.
Real science is a process of discovery; and that process must be subjected to questioning and criticism, or it isn't science at all.
Let me repeat that for emphasis: Real science is a PROCESS, not a set of conclusions. Any "scientific" belief system which rejects critical questioning isn't based in real science at all. It's just dogma.
This explains why the entire vaccine industry - as it is fraudulently promoted today - isn't scientific at all.
Vaccine propaganda is founded in a dogmatic belief system that demands absolute obedience to political vaccine narratives while rejecting even the slightest questions or criticisms about vaccine ingredients, vaccine safety, vaccine adverse events or vaccine efficacy.
For example, merely asking the question of why flu shots still contain over 50,000 ppb mercury -- that's over 25,000 times the EPA limit of mercury in drinking water -- earns you widespread ridicule and condemnation. And yet the mercury is still being injected into children. Yet the entire vaccine propaganda establishment rejects even the hint of discussion of mercury in vaccines, pretending it doesn't exist.
By the way, how do I know for sure that flu shots still contain over 50,000 ppb mercury? Because I tested flu shots myself via ICP-MS. How accuracy is my testing via ICP-MS? My lab was recently awarded a certificate of excellence for producing extremely accurate results in a blind water contamination proficiency test involving 323 laboratories.
The vaccine establishment, as Natural News readers well know, is practicing delusional thinking masquerading as science. It's just as delusional as so-called "psychic surgeons" who claim to pull diseased liver parts out of a patient's body (which later turn out to be chicken livers, go figure...).
Any real skeptic, upon observing the quackery, propaganda and blatant deception of the vaccine industry, would have to conclude that the way vaccines are formulated, approved and promoted today makes a mockery of science.
More "Science" B.S. is Readily Found in the Fields of Physics and Medicine, Too
Speaking on the subject of computing and AI systems, Horgan explains;
"The Singularity is an apocalyptic cult, with science substituted for God. When high-status scientists promote flaky ideas like the Singularity and multiverse, they hurt science. They undermine its credibility on issues like global warming."
Of course, Horgan may not yet understand that belief in man-made global warming as the primary cause for rising CO2 levels is also based on a politicized science cult. But that's not even the point. I don't expect other scientists to arrive at the same conclusions I've reached.
What I do expect, however, is that scientists should honor the process of critical scientific thinking. If they honor the process, they will eventually reach the correct conclusions on subjects such as man-made global warming, vaccine safety problems, the total con job of statin drugs and so on.
On medicine, Horgan nails it. He gets the fact that today's medical screening system is largely a fraud:
"Over the past half-century, physicians and hospitals have introduced increasingly sophisticated, expensive tests. They assure us that early detection of disease will lead to better health.
But tests often do more harm than good. For every woman whose life is extended because a mammogram detected a tumor, up to 33 receive unnecessary treatment, including biopsies, surgery, radiation and chemotherapy. For men diagnosed with prostate cancer after a PSA test, the ratio is 47 to one. Similar data are emerging on colonoscopies and other tests."
He's also right on the mark when it comes to psychiatric drugs and their fraudulent marketing:
"Over the last few decades, American psychiatry has morphed into a marketing branch of Big Pharma. I started critiquing medications for mental illness more than 20 years ago, pointing out that antidepressants like Prozac are scarcely more effective than placebos.
In retrospect, my criticism was too mild. Psychiatric drugs help some people in the short term, but over time, in the aggregate, they make people sicker.
He also exposes the total fraud of so-called "gene discoveries" that ridiculously claim genes have been discovered for things like gay-ness or intelligence:
Another hard target that needs your attention is behavioral genetics, which seeks the genes that make us tick. I call it gene-whiz science, because the media and the public love it.
Over the past several decades, geneticists have announced the discovery of "genes for" virtually every trait or disorder. We’ve had the God gene, gay gene, alcoholism gene, warrior gene, liberal gene, intelligence gene, schizophrenia gene, and on and on.
None of these linkages of single genes to complex traits or disorders has been confirmed. None!"
Much of What You'reTold Today Under the Banner of "Science" is Complete Bullshit
Horgan has come to the same conclusion that I've reached through a different path: Much of what we are taught today under the banner of "science" is complete bunk. Some of it is sheer hucksterism, and a lot of it qualifies as criminal fraud.
Check out my recent video compilation:
The 12 Biggest SCIENCE LIES You've Been Told by Corporations, Government and the Corrupt Media
At the top of that list of science frauds is, of course, vaccines. As I've exhaustively documented here on Natural News, many popular vaccines (flu shots, measles, mumps) simply don't work at all. Shockingly, outright admissions of a complete lack of scientific testing of the efficacy of such vaccines is admitted on their insert sheets.
Yet despite these extraordinary admissions of lack of efficacy, vaccine research fraud and the known toxicity of vaccine ingredients (which still include formaldehyde, mercury, aluminum and MSG), the systematic rejection of such evidence by vaccine promoting "science skeptics" borders on the fringe of mental illness.
These are not scientists at all... they are con artists and criminals - like Poul Thorsen, a fugitive from justice who was once a CDC researcher - pretending to be scientists.
As a real scientist, I've dared to ask 21 questions we're never allowed to ask about vaccines. Such questions are based on reason and rationality. They include commonsense questions such as, "If measles vaccines confer measles immunity, then why do already-vaccinated children have anything to fear from a measles outbreak?"
The government tells us that lead in water is bad, but mercury in vaccines is good...
It is notable that the entire vaccine establishment not only refuses to answer such questions; they consider the mere act of questioning vaccine dogma to be blasphemy. The demand for absolute obedience to the false narratives surrounding vaccines has reached such a fever pitch that anyone can now see it's no longer based in science at all.
It is a kind of religious fervor put on by deranged zealots who claim an intellectual monopoly over all things related to vaccines. This phenomenon is, in a very real way, a "scientific dictatorship" - an apt oxymoron to describe today's juxtaposition of conformist demands and so-called "scientific evidence."
Hint: If you aren't allowed to ask questions about the evidence, it isn't evidence at all. It's dogma, plain and simple. Vaccine proponents, as they operate today, are faith-based dogmatists who don't need any legitimate evidence because they BELIEVE in vaccines. Their belief is so strong that it outweighs all evidence contrary to their current beliefs. And in case you didn't notice, what I've just described here is a cult, not a science.
Vaccine "Science" is a Massive Con Job
The other huge con job found in vaccines is described thusly: Vaccines only "work" on those who don't need them. In other words, when vaccines do work, they do so by initiating an immune response to a weakened virus that's introduced into the body.
This response requires an active and complex immune system that's functioning well... the same kind of immune system, in other words, that could ward off an infection of a live virus encountered in the wild.
Meanwhile, people who have suppressed immune systems and are therefore extremely vulnerable to infections in the wild also happen to have extremely poor (and sometimes completely nullified) responses to vaccines. They don't build antibodies, in other words, so the vaccines don't work for them (they are non-efficacious).
In order to make vaccines "work" better on those with weakened immune systems, vaccine manufacturers add adjuvant chemicals that are irritants which cause excessive inflammation in the hope of eliciting a stronger immune response. While this may help some people, it also carries a very real risk of causing inflammatory damage to the neurology of some children who receive these vaccines.
The results, as borne out by the vaccine adverse events databases and Vaccine Injury Compensation Program, is a growing number of children who are maimed, neurological damaged, put into comas or even killed by vaccines.
The entire "skeptics" cult of modern medicine denies any of this is happening, and that's one reason why the skeptics are increasingly seen as high-functioning idiots who are possibly vaccine damaged themselves.
Zealotous hate-bloggers like Doctor David Gorski - a psychopathic, mentally ill vaccine promoter who also carries out cancer surgery on African-American victims in Detroit - now characterize the skeptics cult, a cabal of mentally deranged lunatics and gay sex fetish seekers like James Randi who was caught on tape soliciting sex from a young man.
Richard Dawkins, for his part, is also an anti-consciousness cultist who believes in the irrational dualism that no other humans on this planet are conscious beings other than himself. Everybody else, he claims, is an unconscious biological robot suffering under the illusion of self awareness.
Meet Three Real Scientists We Need to Empower to Ask More Questions of the Scientific Establishment
What kind of people do we really need to see more of in the realm of scientific skepticism? People like Rupert Sheldrake, author of Science Set Free. Sheldrake's work is transformative, as it challenges the underlying non-scientific assumptions of modern science.
We also need more people like Gilbert Welch, author of Less Medicine, More Health. This book challenges the seven false assumptions of modern medicine.
Dr. Lewis was maliciously attacked, discredited and ultimately thrown out of the government-funded scientific establishment for the simple reason that he questioned the safety of toxic biosludge -- recycled human and industrial waste that's sold as "organic fertilizer" to be spread on home gardens, childrens' playgrounds and city parks.
(I am currently investigating biosludge in my laboratory and will have some truly shocking, mind-blowing results to share with everyone this summer... you won't believe what's in this crap...) Check out Dr. Lewis's recent post entitled Inspector General dismantled scientific integrity at EPA.
The other thing we need, quite frankly, is independent scientists like myself who are conducting cutting edge, truly independent science, without any financial ties to governments, corporations or academia.
My science lab, which has now passed our ISO 17025 accreditation audit, is free to pursue precisely the kind of scientific analysis of food and medicine that is blackballed or censored in the government-funded scientific community.
Other scientists would lose their jobs if they pursued the kind of science I'm pursuing on a daily basis with absolute freedom.
Notably, this makes me a rare practitioner of real, independent science and a protector of the very kind of independent skepticism and scientific analysis that should be embraced by any system of knowledge that's based on legitimate science.
Yet the science I'm conducting is widely considered a threat to the scientific establishment, precisely because I'm willing to analyze vaccines for heavy metals and organic chemicals, for example.
Such research is simply not allowed by the cult of scientism (the vaccine zealots) because they depend on widespread ignorance of vaccine composition to continue parlaying their fraudulent lies about vaccine safety.
I Honor Scientists Who Pursue a Rigorous Process of Critical Thinking... and I Despise Obedient Status Quo Cultists
John Horgan might not yet be aware of the full story on vaccines, so he might disagree with me on such conclusions. But that's not the point. I honor Horgan's commitment to asking big questions. In fact, I honor those who vehemently disagree with me as long as they are following a process of authentic inquiry and open-minded skepticism.
What I despise is science cultists, dogmatic science propagandists and the worship of the "high priests" of science such as Neil DeGrasse Tyson, who can only be described as a "sciency" sleight-of-mind huckster who has more in common with stage illusionist David Copperfield than, say, Richard Feynman.
Tyson, like Dawkins, is a cultist. He has zero intellectual integrity and has sold out to the tribal dogmatists who spin tall tales of irrational mysticism that currently pass for "accepted science."
For my part, I don't claim to have all the answers - no human mind can possibly dare to claim a full understanding of the mysteries of nature (or the mind of God, for that matter).
But as a real scientist, I'm willing to skeptically explore the evidence on just about anything.
I don't reject entire fields of scientific inquiry merely because they are taboo. It doesn't mean I'm a sucker for silly claims, just that I'm intelligent and humble enough to realize that nature is far more mysterious than any human mind can possibly grasp. And we have much more to learn... many more scientific discoveries to make in the years ahead.
For example, psychic phenomena are often called "paranormal." But what if they are so commonplace that they're actually normal? Why can't we study things like pets somehow anticipating the random arrivals of their owners many minutes in advance? Or mothers having a seemingly intuitive emotional connection to their children even when separated by distance? Why can't we study dream premonition?
Consciousness after biological death? Or even the possibility that the brain is a "quantum antenna" that can receive information transmitted from other conscious sources, transmitted by a quantum entanglement mechanism that Einstein described as "spooky action at a distance?"
If we are true scientists, we must at least BE CURIOUS about the nature of the universe and the apparent consciousness we seem to experience inside that universe. The minute we lose curiosity and decide we have all the answers, we cease being scientists at all.
At that point, we just become mentally incapacitated dogmatic fools... like Dawkins and Randi, two people whom history will judge as being not just unwise hucksters, but even for slowing the progress of human knowledge into realms of understanding that are viciously attacked by "skeptics" today.
I often wonder just how many people have died needlessly due to the malicious "skepticism" of info-terrorist David Gorski or the Quackwatch propagandist Stephen Barrett.
How many cases of cancer could have been prevented or reversed by natural and complementary medicine?
How many studies might have been conducted in the pursuit of natural cures if not for the vicious, aggressive assaults on scientific curiosity being waged by "cult of scientism" intellectual bigots?
We'll never know the answer to that question, but at least a few people like John Horgan are willing to start asking some legitimate questions about the false assumptions of "skeptics." Have no doubt that Horgan himself will be maliciously slandered, attacked, defamed, censored and lied about for daring to ask such questions.
The one thing today's bullshit scientific establishment cannot tolerate is actual skepticism. It threatens the cultist beliefs of the faithful "scientism" worshippers, you see...
Willful Ignorance: Why We Stay Oblivious To Facts That Threaten Our Health And The Planet September 12 2022 | From: WakingTimes / Various
How many times have you read or heard that refined sugar and processed meats are bad for you? Or how many pictures have you seen that show plastic pollution pervading the oceans?
But yet, many of us remain willfully blind to these fundamental facts. We make very little changes in our lifestyle even though our habits may be destroying our bodies and planet. Why does this happen?
In her book Willful Blindness, Margaret Hefferman argues that it is our human nature to willingly ignore the facts, even if they are destructive.
“Failing to see – or admit to ourselves or our colleagues – the issues and problems in plain sight can ruin private lives and bring down corporations."
- Margaret Hefferman
Willful Ignorance is Just Easy
Each one of us has constructed our own specific set of beliefs. We base them on our past experiences, ideas and relationships with others.
Your beliefs are hard-wired into your brain. Thus, instead of taking the time to assess contradictions and form doubts, you willfully rationalize your beliefs.
Let’s be honest. It’s easy to block out uncomfortable realities (like prevalence of the herbicide glyphosate in food products marketed to children…or the fact that seven million tons of plastic end up in the oceans each year.)
These facts can be scary and difficult to digest. Truly accepting them would require thought and action, and who has time for that!
No one wants to be called dramatic, or Debbie-downer, or conspiracy theorist. Frankly, we just want to be accepted by our peers.
Conformity often trumps rationale. Take a moment and think: how often do you use your culture, social norms or identity to justify your point of view or action? I’m definitely guilty of it.
Cognitive psychologist, Albert Bandura, states:
“…people transform harmful practices into worthy ones, coming up with social justification, distancing themselves with euphemisms and numbers, ignoring the long-term consequences of their actions.”
I would guess we’re all guilty of rejecting contradictions to our beliefs about what lifestyle is acceptable, especially if they make us uncomfortable.
Basically, we have to make ourselves disbelieve our initial belief. That, my friends, takes effort. Many of us are not willing to put in that effort.
Hence, we’re back to willful ignorance.
Hefferman states:
“People are about twice as likely to seek information that supports their own point of view as they are to consider an opposing idea.”
The Influencers of our Beliefs
What’s concerning is that many of our beliefs are shaped by corporations and media.
We do not give this much thought, because very few people are willing to talk about subliminal programming. (This is a perfect example of willful ignorance!)
Yet, most generations living today grew up in front of the TV. Newscasters, Hollywood producers, and advertisers have been feeling ideas of what is rights, what is acceptable and what should be ridiculed.
The problem is surmounted with the influence of religions, educators and governments. Most of these have their own agendas, unbeknownst to us during our childhood and young adulthood.
It’s OK to Change Your Mind
What’s exciting is that we now live is a completely different world than even 20 years ago. We have access to massive amounts of information. It is all at our fingertips.
Social psychologists, activists, and thought leaders, such as Hefferman, are able to share their knowledge, experience and wisdom with the masses.
Where the challenge lies is in our willingness to give thought to contradictions. It’s ok to consider information that oppose the official story you were fed in school or the marketing pitch of massive corporations. It’s ok to change your mind.
Perhaps milk “Does not do A Body Good.” When you’re drinking a Coke, you don’t “Catch the Wave”…instead you pollute the wave.
Maybe, just maybe, it’s not weird but smart to homeschool, opt out of politics, and stop reading/watching the news.
Ms. Hefferman writes in the book:
“Whether individual or collective, willful blindness doesn’t have a single driver, but many. It is a human phenomenon to which we all succumb in matters little and large. We can’t notice and know everything: the cognitive limits of our brain simply won’t let us.
That means we have to filter or edit what we take in. So what we choose to let through and to leave out is crucial. We mostly admit the information that makes us feel great about ourselves, while conveniently filtering whatever unsettles our fragile egos and most vital beliefs..”
It may be beneficial to reflect on what you’re filtering out because it intimidates your ego.
Next time something contradicts one of your beliefs, it may be a noteworthy practice to give these new ideas some thought.
Federal Grand Jury To Hear Evidence That 9/11 Was A Controlled Demolition
+ President Donald Trump Implies 9/11 Was A Controlled Demolition [Archival] September 11 2022 | From: WakingTimes/ GlobalResearch / Various The 9/11 truth movement has been active and persistent for 20 years, and while mainstream media won’t touch the story, and while most Americans refuse to even consider the possibility that the attacks were an inside job, the actual evidence supporting controlled demolition theory is so convincing that a legitimate federal grand jury investigation will address this very question.
Thousands of architects and engineers, pilots, security professionals, journalists and concerned citizens have been demanding that the federal government release the truth about the attacks.
Comment: Whilst this article is fom the archives, it remains as relevant as ever. Some video links below should be clicked on to be viewed at the source platform. Censorship continues. A section of more recent links has been added.
All noted that there is overwhelming circumstantial and scientific evidence proving that the World Trade Center towers, including building 7, were brought down by a pre-planned controlled demolition.
The evidence for this is exceptionally captivating, and The Lawyers’ Committee for 9/11 Inquiry has successfully submitted a petition to the federal government demanding that a grand jury consider this possibility.
Finally, the U.S. Attorney has issued a response, agreeing to ‘comply with the law’ and open a grand jury investigation. This could mark the most substantial progress to date in the fight for 9/11 truth.
“The Lawyers’ Committee’s April 10th 52-page original Petition was accompanied by 57 exhibits and presented extensive evidence that explosives were used to destroy three WTC buildings.
That evidence included independent scientific laboratory analysis of WTC dust samples showing the presence of high-tech explosives and/or incendiaries; numerous first-hand reports by First Responders of explosions at the WTC on 9/11; expert analysis of seismic evidence that explosions occurred at the WTC towers on 9/11 prior to the airplane impacts and prior to the building collapses; and expert analysis by architects, engineers, and scientists concluding that the rapid onset symmetrical near-free-fall acceleration collapse of three WTC high rise buildings on 9/11 exhibited the key characteristics of controlled demolition.
The Lawyers’ Committee’s July 30th Amended Petition addresses several additional federal crimes beyond the federal bombing crime addressed in the original Petition.
The Lawyers’ Committee concluded in the petitions that explosive and incendiary devices preplaced at the WTC were detonated causing the complete collapse of the WTC Twin Towers on 9/11 and increasing the tragic loss of life.”
This famous video of the free fall collapse of WTC building 7 has haunted the internet for years, demanding justice.
In it, you can see a virtually unharmed building being brought down in a matter of seconds, exactly like a professional controlled building demolition.
The following interview with the founder of Architects & Engineers for 9/11 Truth goes into great detail about the criminal nature of the cover up of the truth about these attacks.
Seventeen years after the worst terrorist attack in modern history, we may be finally seeing some official recognition that the official story is false and incomplete.
Will the truth finally be revealed? Time will tell. While we wait, however, you can view the petition to the federal grand jury here.
Fires Did Not Cause WTC Building 7 Collapse, New Study Finds
Four-year study uses computer models to recreate multiple collapse scenarios.
A new study from university researchers concludes uncontrolled fires did not bring down World Trade Center building 7, as contended in the official story regarding 9/11.
Engineers at the University of Alaska Fairbanks recreated sophisticated computer models of the Salomon Brothers building based on actual blueprints of the building’s construction.
After a four-year research project, they found it was not likely for fires to have compromised the structural integrity of the 47-story tower enough to lead to the collapse at free fall speed, which can be witnessed in video footage of the building’s collapse.
University Study Concludes: Fire Did Not Bring Down Building 7 on 9/11
The Study Concludes:
“It is our conclusion that the collapse of WTC 7 was a global failure involving the near simultaneous failure of all columns in the building and not a progressive collapse involving the sequential failure of columns throughout the building.
“Despite simulating a number of hypothetical scenarios, we were unable to identify any progressive sequence of failures that could have taken place on September 11, 2001, and caused a total collapse of the building, let alone the observed straight-down collapse with approximately 2.5 seconds of free fall and minimal differential movement of the exterior.”
In-depth research into the collapse was never conducted, according to AE911Truth, because the debris was hauled off and destroyed in the days following 9/11.
“Seven years later, federal investigators concluded that WTC 7 was the first steel-framed high-rise ever to have collapsed solely as a result of normal office fires,” notes AE911Truth, a group of over 200 architects and engineers who question the official narrative surrounding the 9/11 attacks.
President Donald Trump Implies 9/11 Was A Controlled Demolition
The destruction of the World Trade Towers on 9/11 is an event that continues to spark our awakening to the malice contained at the heart of several governments.
These governments are dangled from a string by the corporations who sit above them, who are in turn dangled by the financial elite who sit above them.
This is important to know. Prominent politicians have referenced this ‘secret government’ for decades, but when a topic like the ‘deep state‘ is presented on mainstream media, it’s pushed as a conspiracy theory.
In Brief:
The Facts: Donald Trump's comments on 9/11 suggest that bombs were involved in taking down the World Trade towers. He joins a long and growing list of people suggesting that this was actually a controlled demolition.
Reflect On: Why does the US continue to hide truth about 9/11? Why do they refuse to do a proper investigation?
While this can get frustrating, a growing number of people are seeing through the veil more than ever.
The End of Our Innocence
Prior to 9/11, many global citizens, especially American citizens, could not fathom that their government could do anything so barbaric, so unethical, and so destructive.
It’s quite ironic that for years, Western media has falsely accused several politicians of other nations of murdering their own people, such as chemical gas attacks being blamed on Syrian president Bashar al Assad.
But many people are seeing through this, and coming to understand how false flag terrorism has been used a lot throughout history, both prior to and post 9/11. That said, no event has had the awakening effect that 9/11 had and continues to have.
Today, we have thousands of architects and engineers, many academicians and even peer-reviewed studies that show there is no possible way that planes could have brought down the two towers, as well as the official story about the collapse of building number seven, which wasn’t even hit by a plane.
This is why the global citizenry, and judging by the latest polls, the American citizenry, do not believe the official story put out by the government regarding what really happened on that day.
It’s not because we are stupid, it’s not because we are ‘conspiracy theorists,’ it’s simply because we questioned what was being told to us via mainstream media, and decided to investigate for ourselves.
Donald Trump Weighs In
U.S. Politicians and others within government have not really questioned what happened on 9/11 – except for Donald Trump.
One of his engineers was the architect of the building. Here’s what he had to say, taken from this interview:
"It wasn’t architectural defect… The World Trade Center was always known as a very very strong building… Don’t forget that building took a bomb in the basement (1993).
Now the basement is the most vulnerable place because that’s your foundation, and it withstood that…
I got to see that area, about three or four days after it took place because one of my structural engineers actually took me for a tour, because he did the building and I said “I can’t believe it.”
The building was standing solid and half of the columns were blown out…So, this was an unbelievably powerful building.”
After talking about the structure of the building, and the way it was built with the steel on the outside (first building ever to do so for structural purposes …), and how it’s not possible for a plane to destroy that, he went on to say:
"How could a plane, even a 767 or a 747 or whatever it might have been, how could it possibly go through the steel?
I happen to think they had not only a plane but they had bombs that exploded almost simultaneously because I just can’t imagine anything being able to go through that wall... I just think that there was a plane with more than just fuel.
Obviously they were very big planes, they were going very rapidly…You’re talking about taking out steel, the heaviest caliber steel that was used on the building. These buildings were rock solid."
Trump also stated the fact that the US government had knowledge before the attack before it happened, and they still did not stop it. He also mentioned that he saw a big hole in some of the steel beams, hinting to explosions.
Trump has been quite outspoken regarding corporate control over the government, as well as all of the deceit that goes on as to how our government has been hijacked by rogue groups within the government.
It’s easy to see why he was and is completely vilified. It had nothing to do with racism or sexism, and if you think this, you’re simply regurgitating what you get from television programming, and have no understanding of how politics works.
Below is a great quote from Robert W. Welch Jr, given way back in 1958, addressing the Deep State.
“So brush the insiders dust out of your eyes, my friends, and the communist soap suds out of your Brain, and ask yourselves in all honesty, what on Earth is wrong with the United States simply minding its own business, or with having its foreign policy function primarily for the safety and benefit of the American people?
Which is exactly what we had done for the first 140 years of our existence as a nation, to the incredible advantage of ourselves and everybody else, everybody, that is, except a numerically small clique of power-lusting conspirators who have somehow inflicted themselves on a gullible world.”
The American empire has had a history of infiltrating and destroying other countries through unethical means (terrorism) and then stepping in to be a ‘savior,’ imposing their will on others.
This has been done through the most savage means, with 9/11 being one small example compared to what they’ve done overseas.
“The real menace of our Republic is the invisible government, which like a giant octopus sprawls its slimy legs over our cities, states and nation...
The little coterie of powerful international bankers virtually run the United States government for their own selfish purposes.
They practically control both parties … [and] control the majority of the newspapers and magazines in this country."
- John F. Hylan was Mayor of New York City from 1918-1925
But it is not representative of America, but rather the corruption within politics and the deep state that in no way represents the will of the American people.
Steve R. Pieczenik is one of many people from ‘within’ these ranks who is currently speaking about this. He’s a former United States Department of State official and has been involved with the intelligence community for years.
He’s been through and worked within multiple administrations. He has been providing updates on what is happening, the deep state that exists within the American government and how there is currently a ‘battle’ between the Trump administration and the deep state.
You can find those interviews online everywhere, he conducted most of them with Alex Jones. He’s also been outspoken and addressed that Trump has already commented on 9/11, and referenced the interview below.
This is why Trump has been vilified. I’ll leave you with this great quote from author Richard Dolan, taken from one of his 2016 articles.
“For sure, the power elite closed ranks and did everything possible to ensure a victory for Clinton.
This included not only the Democratic party (which previously played dirty pool against Bernie Sanders), but the entire mainstream media machine, the financial community, the EU, and even the Republican party itself.
If nothing else, I had concluded that the media alone had done a sufficient job of demonizing Trump – multiple negative headlines daily for more than a year – to make him unelectable to the American people.
For more than a year, we have been told that Trump is a racist, sexist, xenophobe, liar, cheat, and narcissist. The attack bears all the marks of a coordinated effort among the major news outlets: CNN, NYT, WaPo, HuffPo, USA Today, and the rest.
It reminded me very much of the concerted media attack against Brazil’s Dilma Rousseff which culminated earlier in 2016 in her impeachment and removal from power.
In the case of Rousseff, we see what has been alternately described as a soft coup or a Wall Street coup, rather along the lines of the “color revolutions” of a few years earlier (which are now largely understood as CIA-NGO orchestrated).
In both cases, pretexts were created and hammered home by an insistent media that whipped up public opinion. In Brazil, it worked. It seemed like it would work in the U.S.
It is important to understand why Trump was demonized. To be sure, his character makes it easy.
There is no shortage of narcissistic, sexist, or otherwise offensive statements in his repertoire from which to draw.
But I have never and will never believe this is why he was demonized. Ultimately, Trump is a disruptor, and his disruption falls squarely against the two key pillars of the American ruling elite’s ideology: neoliberalism and neoconservatism.”
There are many reasons to believe that Trump’s survival is a sign that the deep state is losing its power, and that the battle that Steve Pieczenik talks about is going in favor of the Trump administration and their allies.
If so, 2018 [19] might be the last year we have to pass through 9/11 without the full and incontestable knowledge about what actually happened. For more articles from Collective Evolution on 9/11, click here.
9/11 Truth: Why Do Good People Become Silent About the Documented Facts that Disprove the Official 9/11 Narrative
“It is my firm belief that 9/11 skeptics - and true skeptics of any paradigm-shifting and taboo subject - who publicly expose lies and ‘naked emperors’ are heroes...
They have suffered the ridicule and wrath of those emperors, their minions, and the just plain frightened... In our American society, many of our authority figures routinely lie to us, but nonetheless, many citizens continue to look to them for truth and safety - especially when fear is heightened."
“This strong tendency to believe and obey authority is another obstacle with which skeptics of the official 9/11 account must contend…
By unquestioningly believing and obeying authority, we make very bad decisions, which often negatively affect others.
This can be equally true for the four human proclivities studied by social psychologists: doublethink, cognitive dissonance, conformity, and groupthink..”
- Frances Shure, clinical psychologist and early skeptic of the official 9/11 Conspiracy Theory that two hi-jacked commercial jet planes caused three concrete, steel-reinforced towers to explode into fine dust and collapse into their own footprints in less than 12 seconds.
“One of the saddest lessons of history is this: If we’ve been bamboozled long enough, we tend to reject any evidence of the bamboozle.
We’re no longer interested in finding out the truth. The bamboozle has captured us. It’s simply too painful to acknowledge, even to ourselves, that we’ve been taken.
Once you give a charlatan power over you, you almost never get it back.”
- Carl Sagan
“We are apt to shut our eyes against a painful truth … For my part, whatever anguish of spirit it might cost, I am willing to know the whole truth; to know the worst, and to provide for it.”
- Patrick Henry – March 23, 1775
“It also gives us a very special, secret pleasure to see how unaware the people around us are of what is really happening to them. …
“What good fortune for those in power that the people do not think.””
- Adolf Hitler
“If you tell a lie big enough and keep repeating it, people will eventually come to believe it.
The lie can be maintained only for such time as the State can shield the people from the political, economic and/or military consequences of the lie.
It thus becomes vitally important for the State to use all of its powers to repress dissent, for the truth is the mortal enemy of the lie, and thus by extension, the truth is the greatest enemy of the State. …
Propaganda must always be essentially simple and repetitious.
The most brilliant propagandist technique will yield no success unless one fundamental principle is borne in mind constantly… it must confine itself to a few points and repeat them over and over.”
- Joseph Goebbels, German Nazi “Minister of Propaganda and Public Enlightenment”
“We’ll know that our disinformation campaign has worked when everything the American public believes is false.”
- William Casey, Ronald Reagan’s CIA Director at his first staff meeting, 1981
“Image of the World Trade Center’s South Tower as it explodes, from top to bottom, into fine dust and severed steel columns. Within the next 12 seconds much of the tower blows away and the rest collapses into its own footprint into a relatively small pile of debris.
The arrow points to one of the exploding “squibs” from one of the multitude of pre-planted demolition charges that are intended to section all the massive steel 110 story columns (4 inches thick at their bases) which allowed the building to fall straight down rather than falling sideways and causing damage to adjacent structures or people.
This image is typical of what it looks like when standard controlled demolitions take down high-rise buildings in the most cost-effective manner possible.
In the 100 year history of skyscrapers, the only tall buildings that have ever fallen down without controlled demolitions (allegedly) were the 3 World Trade Center Towers 1, 2 and 7 – and they all happened on 9/11/2001!.”
(Check out www.ae911truth.org for everything you need to know about the many anomalies that conclusively disprove the “official”, CIA-, Pentagon- White House- Mainstream Media-approved conspiracy theories about what happened of 9/11.)
The question posited by the title of this article, explores the dilemma faced by truth-seekers who have the facts that totally refute the Big Lies about 9/11/2001 about which the mainstream media, their elected representatives in Congress, their presidents and the Deep State refuse to debate.
These “9/11 Truthers” have been unfairly labeled “conspiracy theorists” (a pejorative term invented by the CIA after the John F. Kennedy assassination in 1963 raised all sorts of skepticism doubting the official story blaming “the single shooter”).
This courageous group of truth-seekers have been attempting to inform and enlighten individuals and institutions that have chosen to disregard and / or disbelieve the overwhelmingly documentable evidence that proves that pre-planted controlled demolition charges – and not airplanes – pulverized into fine dust the three WTC towers on 9/11/01.
The corollary of course is that the three towers could not have been demolished by anybody other than insiders using explosives.
Given that the alleged planes that allegedly hit 2 of the towers were commercial planes (that of course contained no explosives), no other conclusion can be drawn than that the explosives that brought down the three skyscrapers had been pre-planted in the manner of classical controlled demolitions, which are the only way that concrete, steel-reinforced, high-rise buildings can be efficiently demolished.
It is obvious to many folks who were alive and aware in the era of the assassinations of the 1960s (the Kennedy brothers and Martin Luther King) that 9/11/01 was a false flag operation that has seriously (and intentionally, according to the Project for the New American Century) destabilized the Middle East and the world and justified the invasion of Iraq and Afghanistan.
And, of course the rapid passage of the Patriot Act by the bamboozled US Congress ensured that the United States took another step closer to becoming an armed police state, by seriously curtailing the civil liberties of its citizens.
That series of programmed events started a state of perpetual US-led wars in the Mideast (wars that only benefited our one ally in the area [Israel].
It also ensured the lucrative future of America’s military-industrial-congressional complex and global weapons manufacturers.
These self-perpetuating – and ultimately bankrupting – wars have destroyed and are continuing to destroy the physical and psychological well-being of the tens of thousands of duped patriot soldiers (and their families) as well as the millions of unarmed innocents that were victimized by the lethal, often indiscriminate weaponry of our military.
Also victimized forever were their cultures, their religions, their economies and the very planet that militarism is making uninhabitable.
And, it must be mentioned, our illegal and ill-advised military aggressions have raised up billions of mortal enemies all around the world whose enmity and justified desire for revenge will never be quenched until “the Great Satan” is finally beaten.
The dilemma raised by the title question, “Why Do Good People Remain Silent”, has been faced throughout the history of the world by a multitude of truth-seekers and truth-tellers long before the events of 9/11.
A short list of American examples that have shaped world history was enumerated in the previous two Duty to Warn columns, which are available here.
9/11 - The Footage They Didn't Let You See Twice
Rare Video footage that was not repeated on the news, or used by CNN ever wondered why?
The “bamboozle quote” from Carl Sagan above should help any thinking person to understand one of the psychological reasons why both human and inhuman entities (such as corporations and the corporate-controlled press) so readily accept – and even promote – Big Lies; and then, when the truth comes out that thoroughly refutes the lies, these entities refuse to admit that they have been bamboozled.
One expects major corporate media networks like ABC, CBS, NBC, FOX, the New York Times, the Washington Post, The Los Angeles Times and the Wall Street Journal (not to mention the Duluth News-Tribune) to refuse to admit that they are shills for the Deep State or their corporate advertisers or just being duped by them, but even the more honorable BBC, PBS, NPR and MPR do the same by continuously using the phrase “terrorist attacks on 9/11” instead of telling the truth.
Perhaps, if one could only get through to these unaccountable and unreachable talking heads, they might at least claim that they were unaware of what is blatantly obvious to most unbiased observers.
The quotes from Hitler and Goebbels could have easily been made by J. Edgar Hoover’s FBI, Allen Dulles’ CIA and right-wing politicians like the odious politicians during the McCarthy, leftist witch-hunt era, not to mention any number of the pro-militarization, pro-war, pseudo-patriotic “my country right or wrong” types that profitably occupy Wall Street, War Street and Washington, DC.
Those realities should help us understand how the misleaders of militarily powerful empires are able to manipulate the “Good Germans” of every nationality into believing Big Lies.
Anyone who isn’t a 9/11 Skeptic or a Boeing 737 Skeptic or a Vaccine Safety Skeptic isn’t Paying Attention (or has been Duped by or is a Shill for Corporate Power.
Clinical psychologist Frances Shure, who was an early skeptic of the official White House conspiracy theories has experienced her share of criticism from those who tend to implicitly trust their leaders.
Her story, in a 9-part series on the subject, discusses the psychological background about how public opinion and beliefs can be manipulated. The series can be found here.
It is painful being an artificially demeaned and unfairly criticized “conspiracy theorist” about 9/11. Even though the 9/11 Truth-tellers have the scientific truth behind them, they have been mistreated by the mass media as a despised out-group for the past 18 years.
Being a 9/11 truth-teller is like being a black-listed anti-fascist author, writer or musician during Hitler’s thousand-year Reich or during the proto-fascist American McCarthy era of the 1950s.
One has to sympathize with Galileo who was persecuted by the authoritarian church when he proved that the earth revolved around the sun when 99.9% of the world believed that the sun revolved around the earth – because it said so in the bible.
I personally empathize with the Hungarian physician Ignaz Semmelweis who proved in the mid-1800s that washing or sterilizing one’s hands before delivering a baby resulted in a dramatic decrease in post-delivery deaths of new mothers from “child-bed fever”.
99.9% of physicians at the time often delivered babies between performing autopsies without washing their hands.
His discovery never caught on with the profession, although midwives understood the wisdom and washed their hands prior to deliveries.
The midwive’s patients had 10 times fewer deaths from infection than the doctor’s patients.
Dr Semmelweis, just like many other dissident physicians to follow, was ostracized by his arrogant and ignorant profession for promoting such a radical notion and, labeled as being mentally ill, died in disgrace in a mental institution a few years later.
One major psychological factor that helps explain why the Cheney / Bush White House’s official conspiracy theory has become so ingrained is the concept of cognitive dissonance.
A good YouTube discussion of the title question – by a number of psychologist colleagues of Frances Shure – can be seen here. I highly recommend watching it.
I wrote a Duty to Warn column devoted to the subject of cognitive dissonance in 2013. It has been archived here.
Here are a couple of paragraphs from the article:
“Cognitive dissonance refers to the psychological or emotional discomfort felt when one is confronted with new information or a new reality that contradicts one’s deeply held beliefs.
“When there are conflicting, mutually exclusive beliefs, intelligent, open-minded and thoughtful people that have not been victimized by significant psychological trauma during their upbringing, are usually willing to change their minds by re-evaluating their prior stances, looking carefully and honestly at the new evidence, reassessing the credibility of both positions and then making a decision to adopt or reject the new information, depending on the evidence before them.
“Close-minded, distracted, uninformed, addicted, ignorant, too-busy, overly obedient, uber-patriotic, co-opted or radically conservative people may not have the time, inclination, intelligence or political will (or courage) to look at the available new evidence that runs contrary to their old, ingrained beliefs.
Therefore, they may unconsciously or reflexively reject the new information, even if the evidence is overwhelmingly and provably true.”
Not too many people that live in punitive, militarized empires have the courage to do what the whistle-blowing boy did when he saw that his emperor had no clothes on.
Not too many people want to be truth-tellers in a nation whose governmental bodies imprison, expel, black-lists or bans truth-tellers and their stories and suppresses every truth that threatens national security and corporate security or profitability.
Hitler got his timid or privileged “Good Germans” – who lived outside the concentration camps – to believe the Big Lie that “Arbeit Macht Frei” (“work makes one free” even inside a concentration camp) and that his dictatorship would last a thousand years.
Citizens of supposedly democratic societies like America’s are told that “The Truth Shall Make You Free”, that “The Pen is Mightier Than the Sword” and that “The Arc of History Bends Towards Justice”.
Don’t believe it, unless lots of courageous citizen take action and demand justice.
Otherwise, those noble thoughts are just cunning lies to calm the people.
Without a body of dissenters, whistle-blowers and courageous people of conscience (like the multitude of banned 9/11 truth-seekers and antiwar, anti-globalist, anti-fascist activists) that are willing to go up against the conscienceless, the profiteers, the globalists, the fascists, the militarists, the racists, the corporate polluters, the economic exploiters, the bankers and the sociopathic corporations those exploiters will continue to grow in power, wealth and influence – fouling our planetary nest as they go.
Good Hearts, Fooled Minds: Four Fallacies Of The (Hijacked) Environmental Movement September 10 2022 | From: WakeUpWorld / Various
The hijacked environmental movement is a symptom of the current general, collective state of humanity: good hearted but ignorant.
Many people in the environmental movement are in it for the right reasons: they see the ongoing poisoning and destruction of the planet, led by corporations, and are determined to defend and speak out for the Earth.
Yet, in spite of their good intentions, they have unwittingly allowed themselves to be channeled in a direction that is not really going to help the Earth, unintentionally supporting the very forces that are responsible for the pillaging of it.
By continuing to push notions that carbon dioxide is a poison, that global warming exists and all of mankind is responsible for it, that we need a worldwide carbon tax and that we require Agenda 21-style global governance, these people are unknowingly promoting the New World Order program – and unwittingly placing elite controllers in power who don’t care about the environment and view it merely as a resource to be exploited.
It has even gotten to the point where those opposing popular beliefs about climate change (another Rothschild-Rockefeller creation) are being treated like criminal extremists – there have even been calls in the US for Obama to prosecute them!
Welcome to Planet Earth. If your opinion diverges too much from the mainstream, you could get locked up for thinking “wrongly”.
With the current focus being on the outcomes of the 2015 UN Summit, the hackneyed buzzword of sustainability is being thrown around like there’s no tomorrow. In this context, it’s worth revisiting how the environmental movement came to be so hijacked and co-opted.
Basis for the Hijack: Conspiracy Reports from The Iron Mountain and The Club of Rome
The basis for the hijacked environment movement lies within formerly secret military reports, and one of the elite Round Table groups that run the world: the Club of Rome.
The Club of Rome meeting in Salzburg in 1972. "The Club of Rome, the prestigious think tank founded in 1968, is for the first time meeting in the Dutch capital Amsterdam. Key guest is former Russian President Mikhail Gorbachov, who is to speak on Monday. Other guests include Queen Beatrix, former Dutch Prime Minister Ruud Lubbers and Environment Minister Jacqueline Cramer.The think tank, which comprises economists, scientists, politicians and business people, meets once a year to discuss environmental pollution, the depletion of natural resources and the growth of the world population." As pointed out by an astute reader, the man fifth from the left is the Prime Minister of Canada - Joseph Philippe Pierre Yves Elliot Trudeau.
I wonder if those who believe in AGW (Anthropogenic Global Warming) or Manmade Global Warming have any idea that the elite came up with the idea of using mankind itself as the global threat against which we are all supposed to gather behind a One World Government?
The 1966 Report from the Iron Mountain was commissioned by John F. Kennedy and considered by Lyndon B. Johnson as too dangerous to reveal to the public at the time when it was completed. This excerpt from it discusses how a global government could be imposed without war, and suggests the threat could instead be environmental pollution:
“The possibility of war provides the sense of external necessity without which no government can long remain in power… An effective political substitute for war would require “alternate enemies,” some of which might seem equally farfetched in the context of the current war system.
It may be, for instance, that gross pollution of the environment can eventually replace the possibility of mass destruction by nuclear weapons as the principal apparent threat to the survival of the species.
Poisoning of the air, and of the principal sources of food and water supply, is already well advanced, and at first glance would seem promising in this respect; it constitutes a threat that can be dealt with only through social organization and political power.
But from present indications it will be a generation to a generation and a half before environmental pollution, however severe, will be sufficiently menacing, on a global scale, to offer a possible basis… [however] the rate of pollution could be increased selectively for this purpose”.
The Club of Rome’s 1991 document entitled The First Global Revolution? contains this passage:
“In searching for a common enemy against whom we can unite, we came up with the idea that pollution, the threat of global warming, water shortages, famine and the like, would fit the bill. In their totality and their interactions these phenomena do constitute a common threat which must be confronted by everyone together …
all these dangers are caused by human intervention in natural processes, and it is only through changed attitudes and behavior that they can be overcome.
The real enemy then is humanity itself.”
Are You Being ‘Green Washed’?
The current environmental movement we see today was hijacked a long time ago. Let’s take a look at the top 4 fallacies the NWO conspirators have managed to get ‘greenies’ to believe.
Comment: And Before You Have a Cry About Pollution:
There are some who will say, "well come on - all of this aside, humans should not be polluting the planet."
Duh. Do yah think?
Without an understanding of how the globalist systems have been put into place to effectively rape all natural resources and with no regard to the resulting effects - how do you expect a fix within that system?
Unnecessary use of oil, et al, supression of clean energy technologies, packaging made out of pretrochemical shit? And the people are all to blame? Follow the money.
And where do you think all of the govenmental and corporate recycling initiatives came from?
Wake up. If it is part of a large system within this paradigm - the establishment runs it.
Do the best you can within how you live your life - but until this cabal system falls - we are not going to be able to properly address all of the envoronmental shitfuckery that they have concocted.
If this
still doesn't make sense to you then take a journey around this website, and many other websites that have been sharing related information; such that we may be able to help the sheeple wake up on not only this - but all fronts.
The Hijacked Environmental Movement Fallacy #1: Carbon Dioxide is a Poison
Let’s start with the basics: carbon dioxide (CO2) is a nutrient, not a poison. We breathe out carbon dioxide every breath, but we also take some of it in on the inbreath. According to the IPCC (Interplanetary Panel on Climate Change), we are therefore poisoning ourselves every breath!
Think about it – if CO2 were really a poison, why does it help plants grow so much?
Why is it a key part of the fundamental equation of biology: sugar + oxygen = carbon dioxide + water + heat?
How is it that those in the environmental movement are ignorant of basic biology?
As the website PlantsNeedCO2.org states, the more CO2 around, the better plants grow:
“In Idso and Idso’s (1994) analysis of soil nutrient limitations, the percentage growth enhancement due to a 300-ppm rise in the air’s CO2 content actually did exhibit a slight (but statistically non-significant) decline, dropping from 51% to 45% when nutrients went from non-growth-limiting to limiting in a group of 70 experiments.
But when the atmospheric CO2 enrichment was 600 ppm, this slight negative trend reversed itself, going from a CO2-induced growth stimulation of 43% when nutrients were present in abundance to a 52% enhancement when their supply was sub-optimal.
And for a 1200-ppm increase in atmospheric CO2, the percentage growth enhancement jumped from 60% when the soil nutrient supply was adequate to 207% when it was less-than-adequate.”
It’s a simple equation: the more CO2 you have, the more the plants like it, and the faster they will grow.
The demonization of carbon dioxide is not about helping the environment.
The NWO idea has always been to attach the worsening condition of the environment to an individual’s energy usage – and even his or her breathing – so as to introduce a carbon tax.The Government literally wants to tax you for breathing – for merely being alive.
The Hijacked Environmental Movement Fallacy #2: The Manmade Global Warming Hoax
That is why the term global warming got changed to climate change – this way, no matter what happens with the weather, the IPCC can say the climate is changing. But climate change is a slick truism – you can’t argue against it. Of course the climate is changing. When has it not changed?
The Hijacked Environmental Movement Fallacy #3: The Carbon Tax and Global Governance as Eco-Solutions
As pointed out above, all this focus on carbon is for one reason: taxation. The whole scheme to get people and corporations fixated on their carbon footprint – rather than how much actual benefit or harm they are doing the environment – is to pave the way for more taxation and centralization of power.
To have a worldwide carbon tax, of course, you need a One World Government to enforce and collect it. The UN, ICLEI and its other subdivisions are constantly talking about global governance for this very reason.
In this context, “global governance” means centralizing vast amounts of power into a body destined to become the World Government, under the pretext of fighting man-made global warming or climate change.
It also means extending the reach of the United Nations so that local bodies such as local councils and municipalities that belong to ICLEI, (the International Council for Local Environmental Initiatives, created in 1990 as a non-governmental spin-off of the United Nations) can implement its global directives and make it look ‘grassroots’, or like it was locally decided.
For further information on this topic, check out George Hunt’s work in exposing how Evelyn Rothschild and David Rockefeller were cooking up the cap-and-trade scheme in the 1980s. Hunt was present at some of the meetings where the carbon tax was first being discussed.
The Hijacked Environmental Movement Fallacy #4: Overpopulation
Mahatma Gandhi once said: “Earth provides enough to satisfy every man’s need, but not every man’s greed.” There is no doubt that rising populations can put a strain on resources, yet where is the proof that the Earth cannot support 7 billion people? Or 9 billion people? Is it really population that is the problem here, or is it rather self-centered greed and destructive environmental practices and technologies?
We can accept the world’s rising population not as a threat or a reason to justify killing (which goes by the euphemism of depopulation) but rather as a challenge. It can propel us into living more from the heart, to having more compassion for those less well off than us, to doing a better job of sharing, of distributing resources equitably.
It can stimulate us into better modes of efficiency. Could the rising population help a critical mass of people awake to the truth of free energy, and the fact that free energy or over unity devices already exist which provide practically unlimited energy for free or very cheaply?
It has been known in many countries for a long time that as you increase education, you decrease population, naturally. There is no need for stealth sterilization programs, introducing contraceptives through vaccines or other depopulation murder programs.
When people gain a higher education, they organically choose to have less kids. If the conspirators really cared about the planet’s population, why not use their money to help everyone access better education? The answer is, of course, that they don’t.
Underpinning the propaganda of overpopulation is eugenics. It’s the idea that some humans are superior to others, and that some humans don’t deserve to be here.
This is really the philosophical and spiritual basis of the hijacking. As they have confessed, the conspirators in their delusions view the rest of the population as a virus that must be rid from the planet. Yet, the real virus is the fear mindset that runs the show in the brains of the elite controllers.
“In the event that I am reincarnated, I would like to return as a deadly virus, in order to contribute something to solve overpopulation.”
What does any of this have to do with climate change or carbon? These 2 terms are a huge distraction and a deliberate way to trick people who genuinely care for the environment.
Last year, in September 2014, around 400,000 people turned up in New York for the People’s Climate March – but what is the point of this activism if it gets diverted?
Some of the most powerful and wealthiest environmental organizations have… led the climate movement down various dead ends: carbon trading, carbon offsets, natural gas as a “bridge fuel” - what these policies all held in common is that they created the illusion of progress while allowing the fossil fuel companies to keep mining, drilling and fracking with abandon.
We always knew that the groups pushing hardest for these false solutions took donations from, and formed corporate partnerships with, the big emitters. But this was explained away as an attempt at constructive engagement - using the power of the market to fix market failures. Now it turns out that some green groups are literally part owners of the industry causing the crisis they are purportedly trying to solve.
When it comes to our environment, as David Icke says, we need streetwise spirituality.
We need to have our hearts in the right places, but also put our thinking caps on, otherwise we will easily by led astray by tricksters.
Only once the leaders of the environmental movement have their hearts and brains in alignment can we effect real change on the ecosystems of Planet Earth.
Houston Anthropologist Reveals Irrefutable Proof That Recorded History Is Wrong September 9 2022 | From: WakingTimes / Various
Evidence Found Across the Globe of Highly Evolved Human Species from before the Ice Age, Demand Scientific Recognition of our Past that Depicts Societies of Advanced Technology and Culture.
Does this look super advanced or what?
Houston anthropologist, Dr. Semir Osmanagich, founder of the Bosnian Archaeology Park, the most active archaeology site in the world, declares that irrefutable scientific evidence exists of ancient civilizations with advanced technology that leaves us no choice but to change our recorded history.
An examination of the age of structures across the earth reveals conclusively that they were built by advanced civilizations from over 29,000 years ago.
“Acknowledging that we are witness to fundamental proof of advanced civilizations dating back over 29,000 years and an examination of their societal structures forces the World to reconsider its understanding of the development of civilization and history,” explains Dr. Semir Osmanagich.
“Conclusive data at the Bosnian Pyramid site revealed in 2008 and confirmed this year by several independent labs who conducted radio carbon testing dates the site at 29,400 +/-400 years minimum.”
The radiocarbon dating tests of 29,200 years +/- 400 years was done by Radiocarbon Lab from Kiew, Ukraine, on organic material found at the Bosnian Pyramid site. Physicist Dr. Anna Pazdur of Poland’s Silesian University first announced the news at a Press Conference in Sarajevo in August of 2008.
Professor of Classical Archaeology from the University of Alexandria Dr. Mona Haggag called this discovery “writing new pages in European and World history.”
The C14 date of 29,000 years at the Bosnian Archaeological Park was obtained from a piece of organic material retrieved from a clay layer inside the outer casing to the pyramid. It follows a sample date obtained during the 2012 dig season on material located above the concrete at 24,800 years, meaning this structure has a construction profile stretching back almost 30,000 years.
“The ancient people who built these pyramids knew the secrets of frequency and energy. They used these natural resources to develop technologies and undertake construction on scales we have never witnessed on earth,” said Dr. Osmanagich.
Evidence clearly shows that the pyramids were built as ancient energy machines aligned with the earth’s energy grid, providing energy for healing as well as power.
Ancient historians in the US have news just as astonishing as anything found in the far corners of the globe. For instance, the Rockwall discovery outside of Dallas, Texas, is only one example of how we are now re-examining ancient mysteries to reveal more about our past, right in the United States.
H2 (History 2) popular series Unearthing Ancient America recently filmed an episode about the Rockwall that will air later this year. The Texas site is a complex and massive wall ten miles in diameter built over 20,000 years ago and covered by soil seven stories below the ground.
The question is by whom was this structure built and for what purpose and, most importantly, how can knowledge left by these past civilizations help shape our future?
Newly-revealed or rediscovered traces of ancient civilizations have ignited an innate curiosity about human origins as reflected by recent coverage in mainstream media and TV. The November 2013 issue of National Geographic: 100 Greatest Mysteries Revealed-Ancient Civilizations Unearthed says;
“Sometimes cultures leave behind mysteries that baffle those who come after them, from standing stones to coded manuscripts, indications that ancient people indeed had a profound purpose.”
Forward-thinking scientists continue to pursue knowledge from our past that is useful to determine a better future. Renowned author Michal Cremo in his book Forbidden Archeology theorizes that knowledge of advanced Homo-sapiens has been suppressed or ignored by the scientific establishment because it contradicts the current views of human origins that don’t agree with the dominant paradigm.
Cremo’s body of work has been described as “a useful teaching resource, raising a wide range of issues covering aspects of knowledge transfer, sure to be provocative in the classroom.” It has been reviewed with widespread appraisal by hundreds of academic journals.
Gobekli Tepe in Eastern Turkey
Results clearly indicate that similar advanced civilizations of humans were present all across the globe at that time in history. For example, Gobekli Tepe located in Eastern Turkey, is a vast complex of enormous megalithic stone circles with a radius of between 10 and 20 meters, much larger than the well-known Stonehenge in Great Britain.
Excavations at Gobekli Tepe that began there in 1995 revealed radio carbon dating at least 11,600 years. German archaeologist Dr. Klaus Schmidt from the German Archaeological Institute, Berlin, Germany, with the support of ArchaeoNova Institute from Heidelberg, Germany, has led the excavation of these recently-discovered pre-historic megalithic circles at the Turkey location.
“Gobekli Tepe is one of the most fascinating Neolithic locations in the world,” Dr. Klaus Schmidt claims. But as he explains in a recent report, to understand the new finds, archaeologists need to work closely with specialists in comparative religion, architectural and art theory, cognitive and evolutionary psychology, sociologists using social network theory, and others.
“It is the complex story of the earliest, large settled communities, their extensive networking, and their communal understanding of their world, perhaps even the first organized religions and their symbolic representations of the cosmos,” as reported by Klaus Schmidt.
In addition to the megalithic structures, figures and carvings have been discovered, depicting animals of pre historic nature such as dinosaurs and other wild life. Since excavations started in 1995, four of the circles have been partially cleaned, but it is thought that there are a total of up to 50 circles hidden underground.
These vast monoliths, soaring seven meters in height and 25 tons in mass at Gobekli Tepe, are situated right in the heart of what we perceive as the origin of civilization. This find offers new guidance to the true history of earth and our ancient civilizations.
“Our archaeological research goal is not to simply uncover all of the megalithic circles but to try to figure out their purpose,” adds Schmidt.
Bosnian Pyramid Now in Eighth Year: Proof of Advanced Civilizations from over 30,000 years ago
The Bosnian Valley of the Pyramids now in the eighth year of excavation spans six square kilometers in the Visoko River Basin 40km northwest of Sarajevo. Comprised of four ancient pyramids almost three times the size of Giza and an extensive subterranean pyramid tunnel complex, new discoveries each year continue to reveal proof of a much different history of mankind on earth.
The central pyramid of the Sun rises a colossal 420 meters in to the air and has a mass of millions of tons. By comparison the Great pyramid of Cheops (Khufu) in the Giza plateau is 146 meters high, making the Bosnian Pyramids the largest and oldest known pyramids on the planet.
Since research began at the Bosnian site, Dr. Osmanagich has amazed the scientific and archaeological community by gathering a team of interdisciplinary engineers, physicists and researchers from around the world to conduct open and transparent investigation of the site to try and discover the true nature and purpose of this pyramidal complex.
“This is an unknown culture presenting highly-advanced arts and sciences, technology capable of forming truly massive structures and we believe in that process demonstrating an ability to harness pure energy resources,” comments Tim Moon, who has recently joined Osmanagich as lead archeologist at the Bosnian site.
The archaeological project delivered another significant finding this year in the pyramid tunnel complex known as Ravine. Tunneling deep into a ridge line leading toward the Pyramid of the Sun the team has unearthed several megalith stones.
Oh yeah, that one was definitely made with ropes and pulleys too. Sigh.
We are locating foundation walls around its perimeter and cut stone blocks.” Large quantities of artifacts have been recovered from the associated tunnels leading to the site, including effigies painted on stone, art objects and a series of hieroglyphics or ancient texts carved into the tunnel walls.
Dr. Osmangich stresses that it is time for open sharing of knowledge so we can understand and learn from our past.
“It is time for us to open our minds to the true nature of our origin and destruction of each other as a civilization on this planet. Our mission here is to realign science with spirituality in order to progress as a species, and this demands a clear path of shared knowledge.”
Visitors are welcome to the Bosnian Valley of the Pyramids and its Foundation offers a volunteer program each dig season, running June to September.
To hear Dr. Sam’s interview on Lost Knowledge go here.
For more on the Bosnian Pyramids go to www.icbp.ba.
Harm from exposure to sources of wireless radiation (cell phones, cell towers, utility “smart” meters, WiFi routers, etc.) continues to be debated despite multiple research studies that have actually proven harm over several decades. This includes: 1. Industry funded research.
2. Independently funded research.
3. Government funded research. (U.S. and elsewhere)
"…radiofrequency (RF) radiation from any source – such as the signals emitted by cell phones, other wireless and cordless and sensor devices, and wireless networks – fully meets criteria to be classified as a “Group 1 carcinogenic to humans” agent, based on scientific evidence associating RF exposure to cancer development and cancer promotion..”
According to other researchers, as many as 1/3 of the population is “sensitive” to wireless radiation and other sources of electrical pollution (Electrosmog) and 3% is clinically sensitive.
This “sensitivity” may not result in cancer; however, it may lead to a condition first discovered in the 1950s called “Microwave Sickness.”
Like second hand smoke, your wireless choices and habits affect everyone else around you including your children, even if you don’t feel that you are being affected.
Sickness from wireless radiation and Electrosmog exposure may not be immediate; however, it is cumulative. You and your loved ones may be fine for a while and then eventually not so much.
This is why many – including firefighters– try to prevent cell towers from being installed in their neighborhoods and communities.
The National Toxicology Program (NTP) announced that the draft reports on its $25 million animal study on the cancer risks associated with cell phone radiation will be released on February 2, 2018.
Despite what is released, it will likely be debated. There’s a lot of money being made from all of this technology.
Here are some “expert” quotes from the 1960s regarding the “health benefits” from smoking cigarettes:
Max Cutler, cancer surgeon of Chicago: “I feel strongly that the blanket statements which appeared in the press that there is a direct and causative relationship between smoking and cigarettes, and the number of cigarettes smoked, to cancer of the lung is an absolutely unwarranted conclusion.”
Sir Charles Ellis, Senior Scientist at British American Tobacco Company: “It is my conviction that nicotine is a very remarkable, beneficent drug that both helps the body to resist external stress and can as a result show a pronounced tranquillizing effect.” [3]
Ian MacDonald, a Los Angeles surgeon: “For the majority of people, smoking has a beneficial effect.” (Source)
The Dark History Behind Fluoride (That The Media Refuses To Report) September 7 2022 | From: NaturalNews/ Various
Did you know that the same chemical in municipal drinking water played a key role in producing the atomic bomb?
Were you aware that huge quantities of the chemical that supposedly protects teeth from cavities were needed to manufacture the bomb-grade plutonium and uranium for nuclear weapons during the Cold War?
There are plenty of reasons that fluoridated drinking water is the topic of such fierce debate throughout the country – and most people don’t even know about its dark origins.
According to WWII-era documents uncovered by journalists Chris Bryson and Joel Griffiths, fluoride quickly emerged as the top chemical health hazard of the U.S. atomic bomb program. Their documents show that it posed a huge health threat to workers and the communities surrounding the manufacturing plants.
Moreover, they maintain that the initial “proof” that fluoride doesn’t harm people in low doses was actually fabricated by scientists working on the atomic bomb program after being ordered to come up with evidence that would be useful in any potential future litigation from those who were poisoned by the chemical.
They also explained how the first lawsuits against the atomic bomb program were actually over fluoride damage and not radiation.
The biggest fluoride study was conducted from 1945 to 1956 in Newburgh, New York. The secret operation, which was known as Program F, saw tissue and blood samples collected from people living there through the New York State Health Department.
After comparing the published version of the study and the original one, the journalists found evidence that the negative effects of fluorides were suppressed by the Atomic Energy Commission for reasons of “national security.”
Scientist’s Fluoride Investigations 50 Years Later Hit Roadblocks
In studies on animals carried out in the 1990s by Dr. Phyllis Mullenix at Forsyth Dental Center in Boston, fluoride was found to be a strong central nervous system toxin that could adversely affect brain functioning in humans even at low doses.
Dr. Mullenix was rejected when applying for a grant to study it further by the National Institutes of Health and informed that fluorides do not affect the central nervous system.
This goes directly against a 1944 memo from the Manhattan Project which said: “Clinical evidence suggests that uranium hexafluoride may have a rather marked central nervous system effect…it seems most likely that the F [fluoride] component rather than the [uranium] is the causative factor.”
Dr. Harold Hodge, who was working on the Manhattan Project at the time, then requested a study on the effects of fluoride on the central nervous system.
Although it was granted, the records of its results have gone missing.
It’s not a coincidence that Dr. Hodge was then called in 50 years later to “advise” Dr. Mullenix on her own investigations of the effects of fluorides. He never disclosed his past work on fluoride toxicity for the Manhattan Project to her, and she believes that he was enlisted to keep an eye on her and prevent her from sharing any damaging findings.
Dr. Hodge was also the author of a memo suggesting that fluorides be promoted as dental treatments after people started to consider lawsuits after a fluoride pollution incident that took place in New Jersey in 1944.
On that occasion, the tomato and peach crops of farmers were destroyed and animals were crippled after widespread fluoride contamination downwind from the Deepwater plant where the first atomic bomb was being worked on.
Declassified memos from an emergency meeting show they sought “evidence which may be used to protect the interest of the Government at the trial of the suits brought by owners of peach orchards in … New Jersey.”
So the next time someone tells you that fluoride in your drinking water is all about helping you maintain good dental health, keep in mind that there is so much more to the story.
Meditation For Beginners: A Guide To Inner Tranquility September 6 2022 | From:GlobalHealingCenter
The best time to start meditating is now. Meditation can help quiet the mind, focus your thoughts, and promote general well-being.
Best of all, anyone with a few free minutes can start meditating today.
Even if you have never meditated before, don’t be intimidated. Follow the 10 easy steps below, and you will become a meditation expert in no time!
How to Meditate for Beginners
1.
Find your motivation to start.
2.
Pick a peaceful, quiet place.
3. Choose relaxing clothes and a comfortable pose.
4.
To start, set a timer for two minutes.
5.
Concentrate on your breathing.
6.
If your concentration is interrupted, refocus on your breathing.
7.
Do a body scan by focusing on different areas of your body.
8.
End your meditation with a positive ritual.
9.
Remember not to overthink it. Just enjoy the journey.
10.
Make it a habit.
The Step-by-Step Guide to Meditation
While there are countless meditation techniques and practices, the steps below offer a simple way to begin. Remember, while meditating, there is always room for improvement and a chance to learn something new. Try to enjoy the journey as you hone your meditation skills.
1. Choose to Start
Meditation starts with you. No matter your age or physical condition, meditation is always within reach. What is required on your part is the decision to begin. If you need some motivation, then try thinking about the reasons why you want to try it in the first place.
Meditation can relieve stress and anxiety, promote physical and mental well being, and even be a spiritual experience. Find a quiet moment to write down what you are hoping to get out of it and go back and read it anytime you need some motivation to meditate.
2. Pick Your Location Wisely
Your environment is critical to cultivating the right experience. Try to find a peaceful, quiet space that helps you feel relaxed. While a calm bedroom, tranquil garden, or dedicated meditation space is ideal, it’s not always possible.
When the optimal location is not available, remember, your car or even work desk can serve as your very own meditation retreat. The most important thing, especially when first starting out, is finding a location where you have the freedom to meditate for at least two minutes without interruption.
3. Get Comfortable With It
Before you can completely clear your mind, you will need to limit as many distractions as possible. Even small irritations will become distracting once you begin to meditate. Scan the area before you start and consider the type of pose you will be in, the clothes you are wearing, and your surroundings in general. Turn off your cell phone and anything else that might be disruptive.
Meditation works in nearly any position. Sitting, standing, and laying down are three basic poses that are great for first-time meditators. Select your starting posture based on comfort and whether or not you can hold it for a few minutes at a time. For most people, a good starting position is sitting cross-legged, hands resting on the legs, and eyes closed.
Clothes
Any clothing can work for meditation, but again, comfort is key. Many people enjoy light, loose-fitting clothes when they meditate, but you can wear anything you find relaxing. If you can’t decide what to wear, throw on your favorite pair of pajamas or comfortable workout clothes.
Chairs & Pillows
Meditation can involve long periods of sitting, especially as you progress. Seasoned meditators will typically have a dedicated cushion or mat in their home, but these are not necessary when you’re first starting out. Choose a comfy blanket or pillow or a sturdy, well cushioned chair to maximize comfort for extended meditation sessions.
Sounds & Smells
Many other factors such as sounds and smells can help set the stage for a positive meditation session. Some prefer adding aromas in the forms of incense, essential oils, or scented candles, while others like to avoid sensory distractions altogether.
Whatever you choose, just make sure the air you are breathing is fresh and clear of any toxins or pollutants. Natural sounds like wild animals or a babbling brook can also enhance or distract depending on the individual. Try a variety of settings to find out which works best for you.
4. Set a Timer
Meditation does not need to be a long process unless you want it to be. If you are just starting out, then begin with small increments of time. Setting a timer is very helpful for beginners because it can help keep your focus on breathing and not on the clock.
To start, set the timer for two minutes, and do your best to stay focused and in the moment. As your confidence builds, try extending the timer by 30 seconds every session until you are meditating for five minutes or longer.
One of the best ways to begin the practice of meditation is to focus on your breathing. Choose your pose and follow your breath as it flows from your nose into your lungs and out again as you exhale.
Some find it helpful to count breaths, but it isn’t necessary. Concentrating on your breathing will help your mind focus as it adjusts to the silence. Even seasoned meditators pay close attention to their breathing as a way to be more mindful.
6. Return When You Wander
Most meditation practices aim to clear the brain of all thoughts and be more mindful. However, it is natural and even inevitable that your mind will wander or fixate on rotating feelings and physical sensations. Getting lost in these distractions is entirely normal, but not the goal of meditation. When this happens to you, recognize that your mind has wandered and try to refocus on your breathing.
7. Scan Your Body
Towards the end of each meditation session, take the time to do a body scan. During this scan, focus on different areas of your body. Ask yourself how you feel, and pay close attention to any part that may need healing. Shift your focus from your breathing and gradually move your attention from your toes up through your feet and legs. Eventually, you will reach every area of your body. Similar to your breathing, return focus when your mind wanders.
8. End Your Session on a Positive Note
Carry your mindfulness through to the end of your session. Slowly get up and take note of how you feel. Breathe in deeply and gently adjust your body and mind. Creating a personal ritual to end each session may be helpful. Ending rituals could include reciting a personal mantra or finishing with a light exercise or walk.
Don’t spend your meditation time worrying whether or not you are doing it right. It may take a while for you to become proficient, and that is ok. Just keep at it, have fun, and enjoy the journey.
10. Repeat Often
Meditation can help support a healthy body and mind. It promotes healthy blood pressure, a happy mood, and strengthens coping skills. However, to start seeing the benefits you will need to meditate regularly and make it a habit. Try picking a time and place every day where you can dedicate two to five minutes to meditate.
Meditation Aids
As you continue with your meditation journey, you may benefit from additional help and advice along the way. As meditation has gone mainstream, meditation aids of all kinds are more available.
Guided Meditation
Guided meditation is an excellent option for many beginners. Many audio and video guides are inexpensive or even free online. Depending on where you live, local guided meditation classes may also be available.
During these guided meditation classes, instructors will walk you through what to do and how to do it. In-person classes can also provide additional support from like-minded meditators.
Thanks to modern technologies, there is a constant stream of new resources to help you meditate better. Many phone apps can help you start or perfect the practice of meditation. With new apps coming out daily, you will have many options to choose.
Look for an app that’s in a comfortable price range and focuses on a technique you want to improve. Apps are especially beneficial for first-time meditators looking to track their progress.
Your Meditation Journey
Have you tried meditation? Leave a comment below and let us know what helps you meditate and how it improves your physical and mental health.
Why Are People Falling Ill And Dying In Record Numbers & The Normalisation Of Sudden Death Drags On September 5 2022 | From: HatchardReport / NZDSOS / NexusNewsfeed / Various
Excess all-cause mortality in New Zealand is running at record levels. About 100 people are dying each day in New Zealand (pop. 5 million).
A few times during the last couple of months, we have asked a key question: what are people dying of?
Ministry of Health data records that about 7 people are dying each day with Covid, but only about a maximum of 3 of these per day because of Covid.That is just 3% of deaths.
Occupancy of ICU beds with Covid hovers around 3-5%. Therefore it is not Covid that is overwhelming our hospitals, so what is?
The Ministry of Health and mainstream media have been talking vaguely about a bad flu season, but a quick check of the FluTracking website reveals that the 2022 flu season is not even as bad as 2019.
My plumber called in on a job last week and complained about staff falling ill continuously. Sick leave among teachers is up by 80%. The newspapers are also reporting kiwi businesses are closing because of staff shortages exacerbated by ‘winter illness’, but as the incidence flu is not that high what could be going on?
An in depth article in Stuff this morning contains an important hint:
Te Whatu Ora Taranaki hospital emergency department clinical nurse manager Therese Manning said, while there had not been much change to the number of presentations to ED in the last five years, the acuity of the patients is higher.
"This means we are seeing patients presenting with more severe illnesses and injuries…So there are more patients that need to be seen within 10 minutes of arriving….This demonstrates patients are more unwell and therefore likely to stay in hospital longer”.
Acute presentations at ED are increasing, but what are they ill with? We aren’t being told and may never be if our health czars are allowed to continue to deny access to information.
This week it has been widely reported (correctly) that six Canadian doctors died suddenly (at least three of them immediately after receiving their mandatory 4th shot), but hospitals refused to release the cause of death or vaccination status citing privacy concerns.
The authorities have vehemently denied that the deaths could be related to mRNA vaccination. See this article for a summary.
I don’t know if you have noticed, but stories about sudden death incidents seem to have dropped off the MSM radar.
Three years ago a sudden unexplained death might have made the headlines, but today if they are reported at all, they only remain on the visible online page for a very short time. You might have missed this one.
Yet as the Taranaki Hospital ED data and the all cause mortality data reveal:
Acute illness and sudden death are at an all time high. Life insurance data from the USA paints a similar picture.
So have our newspapers ceased to care or are they, like the hospitals and emergency services, too inundated to cope? Having heavily promoted mRNA vaccination for eighteen months, are they too embarrassed to ask questions?
Not Everyone is Keeping Silent
Professor Shmuel C. Shapira, long time Head of the Israeli Institute of Biological Research, has been speaking out about the failure of the Israeli mRNA Pfizer vaccination programme, describing it as a house of cards about to come tumbling down that will bury us all.
He tweeted:
"I am not against vaccines, I am against stupidity, false science and management that is not professional and ignores matters-of-fact.”
Dr. Clare Craig, former UK NHS diagnostic pathologist, is also raising her voice. Speaking on GB news she analysed the official German Government data. This shows that 1 in every 5,000 doses causes a serious reaction to Covid vaccines, but it doesn’t stop there.
The German government is never one to shrink from data collection, so they also conducted a survey of more than half a million vaccine recipients and found that 1 in 500 reported a serious reaction after an mRNA dose (more than ten times the underreported official count).
If you are worried that lightly affected Germans are inflating the figures, stop worrying. The definition of a serious adverse reaction requires that a person be hospitalised or suffer a permanently life changing event.
Dr. Craig invited us to step back from the modelling and government guidance about efficacy and safety and consider that Covid data from around the world does not show that mRNA vaccination leads to any reduction in deaths.
Most illustrative are comparisons between comparable countries with high and low vaccination rates.
For example Israel with close to 100% vaccinated (and most boosted with four doses) compared to Palestine with just 40% double vaccinated. Israel has 1,204 Covid related deaths per million population and Palestine 1,182 deaths per million population roughly the same. It becomes apparent that mRNA vaccination does not reduce the Covid death rate.
A group of international lawyers, top level experts, and renowned scientists present the evidence before a Grand Jury that the COVID-19 pandemic is a criminal operation, with the purpose of installing a world dictatorship.
Among the expert witnesses are World Health Organization advisors, a United Nations official, members of British Intelligence Services, former officers from the U.S. and U.K. military, an expert from the Center for Disease Control, a former vice-president from Pfizer, a Nobel prize winner for medicine, and many other high-level witnesses.
Just remember that analysis of Covid death data does not include rising all-cause deaths unrelated to Covid infection, the evidence points to reduced immunity as a result of mRNA vaccination.
Dr. Craig reported that the general public in the UK are voting with their feet and failing to come in for boosters (and they are stopping bringing in their children for this dangerous jab).
Aren’t we all in sympathy? We are waiting for our doctors to speak up and our courts to do the math.
The words “sudden” and “unexpected” in the nation’s obituary pages continue to assault the eye and the heart.
Despite the New Zealand Herald’s risible attempt to suggest otherwise, we have put out much work to show that an excess of people young and old are being crushed to death by an elephant in a room – the jabs.
We are living through an apparent crime – doggedly uninvestigated by Police and Medsafe as documented at www.nzdsos.com – so monstrous that it defies belief.
Except that we know propaganda works. People have been relentlessly lied to. We are truly sick of it, and many others are waking up and sniffing the air too.
Change is in the wind, and not before time. Information is power, and we present some more anonymised deaths below, in addition to those already listed in our prior article Deaths Following C-19 Vaccination.
Whilst state funded media would have the country – and the world – believe that sudden death of the young and fit, and / or otherwise healthy is a normal occurrence, it is in fact a highly unusual occurrence which began happening last year at alarming rates.
River of Freedom - A Feature Documentary
River of Freedom is a feature documentary about Convoy NZ and the Parliament Protest during February and March 2022. It tells the story of who the people were, why they were protesting, and what happened.
Thank you to everyone who shared their stories with us. Ngā mihi nui. Noho ora mai Aotearoa New Zealand.
The Cardiac Inherited Diseases Group state that around 90 New Zealanders between one year to 40 years of age, experience sudden death each year.
About a third are unexplained. A registry was developed in 2008 by Waikato Clinical School at Auckland University with the aim to “detect and protect young people at risk from SADS”.
Reading the above Herald article and researching the cases featured, shows most are not exactly young and otherwise healthy, compared to the literally hundreds of young New Zealanders dead since the rollouts.
Yearly excess mortality data is available as a visual interactive at the Human Mortality Database, with New Zealand data taken from StatsNZ since 2010.
The pale blue line in the graph shows average mortality across the years 2010-2019. In no prior year does New Zealand’s excess mortality trend so consistently above the average as it has throughout 2022.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
As the government attempts to portray this excess death as being due to Covid-19 disease, proper data analysis shows that this is not the case.
Pharmaceutical products instructing the body to produce spike protein are being deliberately injected into the population, despite some terrible effects.
“Risk of SADS can be lowered by avoiding certain activities such as drinking alcohol and other preventive measures” – but surely including not being injected with a substance which causes direct damage to the heart muscle and creates inflammatory responses in a number of organs including blood vessels.
An Article in a Local Paper Describes How Much Money Was Spent on Incentives to Get People to Get Vaccinated in Hawkes Bay
Over $900,000 was spent in the region coercing citizens to get an injection (that still has only provisional consent and for which the clinical trial is not yet complete) that many neither wanted nor needed.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Swathes of freebies (not really free, our tax money was used) including overseas holidays were offered to citizens! How is this remotely appropriate?
This is the antithesis of ethical medicine. It is practising medicine by bribery and corruption. This is not even the practice of medicine. It is frankly despicable.
The prescription and administration of pharmaceutical medicine should only occur in the context of a personal doctor-patient relationship without bribery or the interference of government. Is it too late to reclaim ethical medicine?
Watch: Excess Death Data Contradicts Normalisation of Sudden Death
This video discusses increased excess deaths in New Zealand up to June 2022, using data from the New Zealand government’s own StatsNZ website. For those who find graphs difficult to interpret, the researcher talks it through clearly.
The highest excess mortality appears to be occurring in the 60+ age group, although all groups are affected. Numbers are increasing over time, particularly since February 2022.
We asked NZ statistics researcher Grant Dixon to check out the work, and he confirms it is correct. Grant says the very latest figures are worse still, with a 30% excess mortality.
The presenter also talks of possible motive. It seems relevant to question why those expressing concerns about overpopulation are now central to a “public health” intervention which, rather than offering improvements in health outcomes, appear to be contributing to excess harm and death.
"An extremely concerning trend where more and more people are dying, especially in 2022 … Why is it that this year, we are starting to see a big explosion in deaths?”
Why are all these deaths occurring? Well, NZ researchers and others have found abnormalities down the microscope but frankly there any number of possible reasons since no clinical trials were done to see what might happen with these untried and unknown ingredients.
Below are some more unexpected and sudden deaths of New Zealanders since May 2022. These are in addition to those listed in our prior article. The names are fictional.
We repeat yet again, that these deaths must be investigated to determine whether any link to the novel gene therapy injections exists. We say it does. How many more will have to die before authorities investigate?
Les, 60yo. Fire Chief, several hours after his booster. Suffered aortic rupture.
Richard, 44yo. Bad headaches then died following jab. Supposedly compensation was paid.
Rosie, 12yo. Suddenly collapsed at athletics, parents did CPR. Died at hospital.
Louis, 64yo. Holidaying overseas. “Sudden medical event” while swimming. Needed vaccines to attend all of his disabled son’s activities.
Kerry, 53yo. Sudden medical event. Yeah, he died. Mandated at supermarket.
Joanne, 32yo. Medical worker. Her mother found her dead in bed after severe headaches, the evening after a booster. Single mother, was concerned booster would harm her. Coroner kept her phone.
Whetu, 40s. Sudden death playing basketball with his son, their favourite activity together.
Simon, 50s. Died overseas after sudden short illness. Worked for an airline so fully jabbed up.
George, 62yo. Fit man, grew vegetables. Sudden death after being sent home from ED.
Dionne, 59yo. Mandated teacher. Sudden death at home.
Malua, 14yo. Double-jabbed. Sudden cardiac arrest at home, died 2 days later in ICU.
Marlon, 30yo. Off-duty police constable. Died in single car crash.
Jenny, 30yo. NHS worker, died overseas. Death labelled as Sudden Adult Death Syndrome.
Dr. Michael Yeadon: The Most Important Single Message I’ve Ever Written
Dear everyone, who is nervously looking around and is asking “What the hell is going on?”
I hope this isn’t too controversial. It’s certainly frightening, but I believe we are still on the right side of disaster & if enough of us become aware of what is happening here & everywhere in the democratic world, we can recover the situation.
We really don’t have long. I believe it’s likely things will change irretrievably over this coming winter [Northern Hemisphere]. Hence this urgent and unusual request.
Everything that’s happened and is happening becomes much simpler and it all makes sense, only when you force yourself to think the impossible.
If you experimentally adopt the position that OUR GOVERNMENT IS ACTIVELY WORKING TO HARM US, TO DISMANTLE MODERN SOCIETY & ENSLAVE ALL PEOPLE IN A DIGITALLY CONTROLLED TOTALITARIAN WORLD, it all fits.
Even if your immediate response is that this is absurd, please try it for a day or so.
I ask you further to adopt the experimental position that the media, controlled by just six global corporations, all allied to a single global organization you’ve all heard of, is relentlessly lying to you and has been doing so for over 2.5 years.
Same for the internet, controlled by fewer global corporations, also all allied to that same global organization.
Because I am certain it’s true. I am certain because this all started with a scientific fraud relating to a virus, augmented it with a relentless campaign of fear, imposed measures known to be useless, which wrecked the economy and smashed civil society, then coerced most to accept useless, unnecessary, ineffective and deliberately dangerous injections.
Obviously, this is an odious crime. Nothing like it has ever happened.
I’ve been 41 years in life sciences from training to successful biotech CEO and was worldwide research head and Vice President of Pfizer’s respiratory unit (1995-2011). I have absolutely no incentive to say any of this if I wasn’t certain.
Many have asked why people didn’t resist tyrants in the past. Partly it is fear. But it’s more than that. It’s that normal people, like you and me, simply cannot imagine being so evil. We trust in humanity.
And so we should. Most people are good. Few are truly terrifyingly horrible. But some are. It’s the inability to believe it’s happening that really stopped people objecting when they should, when the evidence was unmistakable but had not yet quite reached their door, their family.
They are coming for you and your children. It is happening again. There’s ample evidence emerging of long-term, patient planning. I’m so sorry.
It’s now up to you. I genuinely don’t see what else I can do.
Executive Producers and Hosts of ‘Counterspin Media’ Kelvyn Alp and Hannah Spierer were arrested on Thursday 25th August 2022 and charged with allegations relating to ‘objectionable’ material.
The alleged offense; a link to an offshore site containing parts of a documentary investigation into the “Christchurch Massacre” shared on ‘Telegram’. All electronics including production equipment, mobile phones, drives and computers were seized.
It seems the state via its Chief Censor, believes it’s the sole arbiter of what information people have access to.
Kelvyn and Hannah reject these allegations.
‘Counterspin Media’ hold the steadfast belief that the people are the highest authority on this land and as such are not subject to restrictions in anyway, save physical harm being caused and a victim created.
Liz Gunn has 30+ years of presenting and interviewing experience & after working as a litigation lawyer, Liz began presenting the magazine show Sunday for TVNZ in the early 1990s, then filled in on Radio New Zealand.
She became a familiar face on Kiwi television, including launching long-running magazine show Good Morning & news reading on weekend bulletins. After a decade in Australia she returned to Aotearoa, rejoining RNZ, and doing video interviews for entertainment website The 13th Floor.
In 2001 she surprised audiences on Breakfast with Mike Hosking, when she suddenly quit the show live on-air.
Counterspin Media, along with a handful of other freedom groups and individuals, was dead centre of major government funded media attack.
The lavishly funded 'Stuff circuit' hit piece 'Fire and Fury' spectacularly failed to hit its mark. Instead, the attempt to demonise various individuals and organizations within the 'Freedom movement' become more of a 'fizzer and flop'.
Nothing more that gutter journalism in a designer dress.
Megalithic New Zealand: Pyramids, Rabbits, And Megaliths Of Upper World And Underworld September 3 2022 | From: Priscilla Rawiri-Steele
Pyramids and megalithic monuments are everywhere in New Zealand, so often eroded or utterly huge they may, and have been explained away as natural rock formations, so people tend to fail to see them.
‘Little Pyramid’ Okia, Victory Beach, Otago Peninsula New Zealand
It is only in old photos like the one below of the Gorge du Fier in France, it is possible to see the men are looking down upon an enormous face of a pagan deity which has subsequently been carefully smoothed, as has protractedly occurred in New Zealand.
It is only in old photos like this one of the Gorge du Fier in France, it is possible to see the men are looking down upon an enormous face of a pagan deity which has subsequently been carefully smoothed, as has protractedly occurred in New Zealand.
Gorge du Fier at d'Annecy France – the yellow box contains the face that the men are looking down upon; sourced from an old post card in my personal collection
Little pyramid at Okia, Victory Beach Otago, in the South Island of New Zealand has long since been vandalized. Next to it is a half-buried sphinx; its face has been cut away. Why intentionally hide an ancient civilization by disguise / disfigurement / damnatio memoriae and then present the wreck of it to future generations as mysterious: Cui Bono?
Low tide reveals an ancient wall at Achilles Point Ladies Bay / St. Heliers, Auckland, NZ. This is clearly a construction - not a natural formation
Wall at Machu Picchu, Peru. The construction technique is an example of the dimensional knockover technique as decribed by David Wilcock in his research / writings
Elephant Megalith Heimaey Island south Iceland
Cape Brett, New Zealand carving of an African Elephant
Cape Brett, where the tourist ships pass through was long ago carved into the shape of a massive African Elephant. Like these massive carvings, black basalt columns with hexagonal / pentagonal tops were carefully explained away as natural rock carvings as early as 1772, by Sir Joseph Banks.
Having noticed them in New Zealand upon the Otago Peninsular, Banks hurried to Staffa Island to compare the black basalt columns there with the The Giants’ Causeway in Ireland, and to obscure their true nature and meaning by explaining them away as miraculous and natural rock formations (The Extreme Earth, Caves by Jeanne K. Hanson, and Geoffrey H. Nash p. 70 Staffa Island).
Canto XLi Ludovico Ariosto’s Orlando Furioso as translated by (Hieronymus)Jiminez de Urrea
Why would Sir Joseph Banks do such a thing? Honey bees make hexagonal cells in their hives, and the honey bee is the emblem of Minoans. Ubiquitous hexagon causeways, and pillar designs are an important key to understanding that, like a honey thief pillaging the hive for honey, the gold and riches stored in the castles / temples / pyramids of Minoans had been violently and protractedly extracted.
Ancient wall at Owairaka, New Zealand
At Don Heads Coles beach Devonport Tasmania are the same worn hexagonal / pentagonal rocks, and by 1802-4 the Tasmanian Aboriginal had been eradicated from the face of the Earth.
Was Banks covering up archaeological monumental clues? Was Banks complimenting with his dismissal of man-made edifices and megaliths, the damnatio memoriae practiced by academics over the last four centuries so that today, Hyperborea mentioned in my modern edition of Orlando Furioso, is referred to by just one short line stating that Hyperborea is a land that lies “in the extreme north”?
Lion Rock, Piha, West coast, Auckland,m New Zealand.
It is hard to escape the question: what would drive academics to so deface an original work so they might change the location of a whole country / domain spanning at least three continents, from south to north?
Photo below, imputed to portray Machu Picchu as it was found by the son of a Protestant missionary, Hiram Bingham. Under sphinx (with ancient ghostly outline of face cut away and lying crumped on left paw?
The same sawing marks are on this sphinx head, as on the cut away head at one of the two sphinx at Piha pictured above, on Auckland’s west coast) 1912. Overleaf are two photos of Paritutu, or what is called today Sugar Loaf at New Plymouth. Despite all the foliage and erosion, the sphinx face and flaring Egyptian crown is evident to the naked eye. In the water, paws may yet be discerned.
Machu Picchu, 1912
Why pyramids and Megaliths in New Zealand? Due to the towering stature of remains found, Flinders Petrie hypothesized that the first dynasty of Egypt came from Pa Swenet (Pwenet, Punt).
After the Reformation, those once clandestinely Humanist, but subsequent to and during the Reformation, openly Protestant countries, undoubtedly took what became known as the Flemish and or German Giant Rabbit, off the abodes they destroyed, at what is today called Auckland. I believe our rabbit of Pa Swenet (Pwenet or Punt) went on to carry his time piece, and run in haste before Alice in Dis.
Paritutu New Plymouth, New Zealand
Fairly central to The Triumph of Death, did Bruegel the Elder depict next to our beloved honey bee depicted as flying fecal matter, our beautifully preserved and treasured vases being lowered from our castles?
Today these ancient masterpieces are held in great Museums of the world such as The Getty and are given pertinent or profound attributions such as The Underworld Painter and too, bogus attributions like The Baltimore Painter.
Paritutu New Plymouth, New Zealand
In the late 18th century, the light bulb was also stolen from the Pa at what is today called Auckland, a place which The Royal (Naval) Society explorative scientists vouched was the receptacle of all the treasures and secrets of The Herculaneum (as mentioned in the Third Edition of my second book citing The Enlightenment and Why it Still Matters by Anthony Pagden).
Bruegel The Elder The Triumph of Death
Terrain for comparison with Bruegel’s The Triumph of Death from a View of Auckland from Mount Eden circa 1910 as sourced from a Post card marked Tourist Series B026 Printed in Great Britain. The zigzag of dark greenery follows the old canal
This almost two and a half thousand year old Red Figure Vase is attributed to The Underworld Painter, so does it form part of loot taken from Te Totara (said by the Ancient Greeks Tartaros – The Underworld)?
Francesco del Cossa (1430 – 1477) The Triumph of Venus painting held in Palazzo Schifanoia, Ferrara
The rubbing out of archaeological sites was carried out and recorded over centuries. At the beginning of the 20th Century, Ōwairaka Pa (later called Mount Albert) was forcibly taken down by half its mass. In the photo below, the quarry pictured is noticeably on the same proportions as Bruegel’s Tower of Babel.
Pieter Bruegel the Elder 1525 – 1569 Painting called The Tower of Babel
The beautiful Auaunga (Au as it is today, is short for Latin Aurum or gold) stream canal has been covered. (“….Quarrying stopped suddenly in 1928. The height of the mountain was reduced from 148 metres to 135 metres and most of the Maori terraces were destroyed. Today, less than half the original land mass remains.
Men posing on a ‘quarry’ at Auckland ca. 1900. Photograph originally sourced from Auckland War Memorial Museum
The ballast pit was levelled off to make the archery field and in 1961, the inside surfaces of the cone were smoothed off further removing archeological traces”. As sourced from ‘Destruction of the Mountain’ at Ōwairaka Mount Albert Heritage Walks, Neighbourhood Walks at Aucklandcouncil.gov.nz).
A rock climber at the base of the citadel Mount Eden 1967
Did the Hyperboreans survive the last Ice Age, and are those ghostly straight lines really the outline of pyramids hiding there under snow and ice in Antarctica?
Are there undiscovered pyramids in New Zealand filled with untold treasure? If these matters which stir every adventurer’s heart would be answered by the truth coming out about the fate of the Hyperboreans, it is also pertinent to ask; what is the long term social and political and moral legacy of covering up the truth about what happened to the Minoans of Hyperborea?
Philomel passing before Pyramid Coromandel 1946
Here, the twins with the Minoan flower central to the Phaistos disc are beautifully painted in Augustus Earle’s observation about the fate of the founders of the First Dynasty of Egypt. Are future generations of academics really going to allow the raft of lies and manipulation of truth to continue, and ultimately, at what cost to Humanity?
Megalithomania 2008: Hamish Miller - The Stone People of New Zealand
Published on Jun 26, 2012 The 2016 Megalithomania Conference is on 7th-8th May in Glastonbury, UK, with a top line-up of ancient mysteries authors and researchers including Julian Richards, Brien Foerster, Hugh Newman and more. Details here: megalithomania.co.uk.
Filmed at the Megalithomania Conference, Glastonbury, 17th - 18th May 2008. (Also available on a high-quality DVD from megalithomania.co.uk. An account of the extraordinary manifestations of the energy of the earth at sacred places in New Zealand, looking at many ancient pre-Maori megalithic sites.
Hamish co-authored 'In Search of the Southern Serpent' with Barry Brailsford about the pre-historic sites and earth energies of New Zealand and updates us on his research at Megalithomania. He discussed the cathartic communication through the Stone People which led to the creation of his new project, the Parallel Community 9includes 6 minute preview of the new DVD).
Hamish Miller is a dowser, metal sculptor and author. He read engineering at Edinburgh and through his books, talks and workshops his work on earth energies has earned him an international reputation. Book titles include The Sun and the Serpent, It's Not Too Late,
The Dance of the Dragon, The Definitive Wee Book on Dowsing, and In Search of the Southern Serpent (published in May 2006).
A new DVD, Hamish on The Parallel Community was released in November 2007 and is now available. Hamish has lectured widely in Britain, America, Australia, South Africa and New Zealand and has appeared in television programmes in Britain, Sweden, Holland, America, Australia and South Africa.
Currently working with the rapidly expanding Parallel Community (inspired by his cathartic 'meeting' with the ancestors in New Zealand), Hamish lives with his wife Ba, physiotherapist, dowser and researcher, on twelve acres of rough bracken, gorse and granite where they spend their spare time planting trees and trying to stop rabbits from eating them. Related:Russian Scientists Build And Study Pyramids: What They Found Could Change The World
You Are Being Programmed: Five Ways Your Thoughts Are Being Driven Against Your Own Self-Interest September 2 2022 | From: NaturalNews/ Various
There are plenty of examples in history of mind control being used to influence masses of people to bend to the will of those in control.
These days, as the Activist Post points out, mind control has expanded beyond the purely psychological to incorporate a technological aspect as well.
The good news is that by being aware of these methods, you can avoid or at least reduce their effects to some degree.
Propaganda and Advertising
As media continues to consolidate, the lines are blurring between government and corporate structure. News, television, movies and print can work together to deliver a message that seems to be true simply because so many sources report the same thing.
With increasingly busy lives, people don’t have time to make the effort to delve further into what is true and what isn’t among all the information we are constantly bombarded with, and it can be easier to just accept what we’re told about topics like vaccines, the flu, and pesticides. Many times, these messages are even taken one step further and also sent subliminally.
Water, Air and Food
Another modern method of mental programming is the use of poisonous additives in our foods that change people’s brain chemistry to make them more docile.
For example, MSG and aspartame essentially kill off brain cells by overstimulating them, and they are so widely distributed that we’re seeing the population become increasingly unmotivated and distracted.
The fluoride that is regularly put in people’s drinking water, meanwhile, has been found to lower IQ.
Even those who are more conscious about avoiding processed foods are still vulnerable from the pesticides sprayed on produce.
Education
Many people grumble that today’s youth are far less intelligent in many regards than older generations, and this might not be an accident.
After all, dumbing down the people makes it a lot easier to impose your will on them. People who want to homeschool often face a lot of opposition – have you ever asked yourself why that is?
Drugs
Drugs are a convenient way to control people, and many times, it’s the people themselves who seek them out after being convinced that they somehow have something wrong with them.
Psychiatry is considered by some to be one of the biggest facilitators of modern mind control as it tries to define everyone based on their disorders rather than their positive attributes.
In fact, it is those who dare to question authority who often find themselves being labeled as having a mental problem and therefore in need of a mind-numbing medication. With more than a quarter of American children now taking psychiatric drugs, it’s becoming a normal way of life for the next generation.
Military Testing
It’s an unfortunate fact that service men and women have long been subjected to mind control and medical experiments. When you think about it, people in the military tend to be those who respond well to structure and obedience, and training entails following orders without putting up resistance.
There are plenty of other mind control methods we’re seeing put to good use these days everywhere from religion and politics to sports and computers and even the electromagnetic spectrum.
We are even seeing the development of artificial intelligence (AI) that can essentially read your mind by decoding your brain signals, and it’s scary to think of where this could all be headed. It’s time to wake up to what is really going on around you if you want to stand any chance of saving your free will.
NWO Control System Vs. The Awakening - Which Will Win? September 1 2022 | From: HumansAreFree
At this pivotal time in history, the era of our awakening through truth and transparency, it has never been more amazing to be alive.
A number of us know that the stakes are high in the fight for our freedom: On one side, we have an increasingly destructive parasitic control system; a well-oiled machine coldly designed by the ruling elite and associates to screw us all over with its false and limiting paradigms.
Then, on the other hand, we are undergoing a mass awakening with changes in consciousness having the potential to co-create a transformed planet.
So, which one will win, the ruling elite’s control system or our awakening? – A very open-ended question that could give many different responses, I realize, but here’s my response, coming from the heart perspective.
The Control System
All things are energy. Every aspect of the parasitic control system serves to destroy our heart energy. It serves to disconnect us from our powerful intuitive heart intelligence. Put simply, the ruling elite want us to be like them, heartless.
They have had us programmed and brainwashed into believing many falsehoods so that we can be left to our own accords to demonstrate our heartlessness to each other.
Take for example, the case of fighting their secretly manufactured wars for power, profit and political gains. In these never-ending wars, the only real enemy, the only ‘us’ versus ‘them’ is we-the-people against the ruling elite, everything else is merely an illusion.
-The same can be said about other secretly manufactured conflicts such as those involving civil unrest, race wars and the spoils of economic disruption...
From cradle to grave our intuitive heart energy takes a hammering by the narrow, deeply stifling education system curriculum and then the workplace: In both cases we’ve been programmed and brainwashed into the profit worshiping, self-serving corporate/banker greed-driven systems with the consumerist ‘he who dies with the most toys wins’ and the ‘survival of the fittest’ attitudes.
Then there’s the ruling elite’s owned and controlled mainstream media. Entertainment is entrainment: The mainstream media is designed to affect our behaviour after watching endless hours of TV/movies where people treat each other horribly, while we are made to become desensitised.
Not to forget the highly deceptive fear-inducing fake news; selling secret sponsored false terrorism with its outsider demons or false bogeymen…
Occultism
Another assault on the heart exists in the form of occultism. The ruling elite secretly meet up in rooms said to have the right geometry/symmetry conducive to holding their negative energy rituals.
Their negative energy rituals or occult symbolism as for example in corporate logos is designed to have counterproductive effects on humanity through affecting our psyche in the morphogenetic field.
Transhumanism
Our human qualities are seriously under threat by the transhumanism agenda. With the use of its technologies such as nano-technology, genetic engineering, drugs, robotics and bionics… to ‘enhance’ us, we are in grave danger of losing our heart connectivity and thus getting rendered powerless to do anything about the ruling elite’s control system. 7 Reasons Why Transhumanism is the Greatest Threat to the Human Species
Earth and our energetic disconnection
Our heart energies extend to an energetic connection with Earth. It’s no coincidence that EARTH is an anagram for HEART.
The ruling elite are destroying planet Heart’s energy by polluting the land, air, food and water through geo-engineering, fracking, chemical pollution, radiation, genetic modification… as we blindly partake.
The recent protests over the laying down of oil pipeline at Standing Rock, Dakota is a stand for the heart energy: Here we have a situation where on one side there are protesters honouring a piece of land as a God-given sacred living entity, providing fertile soil and fresh water…
On the other side, a number of heartless individuals; bribed politicians representing greed-driven corporations, an over-the-top, intimidating and known to be brutal militarized police force to deal with the peaceful protesters should they impede the land-spoiling pipeline construction…
Our Awakening
In this age of truth and transparency, in our awakening, having chosen the ‘service to others’ pathway, more than ever, we need to demonstrate gratitude, compassion, empathy, generosity, kindness and caring for each other as a way of staying in the heart.
Self-acceptance, finding peace with yourself allows staying in the heart, a place where the parasitic control system cannot find a way of attaching itself in order to use you.
Not only for survival and supporting each other, but also for our transformation, I’ve always believed that the answer lies in forming local communities.
Each community must have unity, self-sufficiency and discernment to survive and thrive. A community-based living that would focus on an even distribution of wealth rather than concentrating it to the hands of a select few…
We need to redefine the education system with theory and practice that goes beyond the current paradigm. Besides openness, we need to demonstrate more honesty and integrity in our approaches.
We, as a species, got ourselves into this mess essentially by blindly accepting the general consensus of the masses and the opinions of so-called experts, now it’s up to us to consciously co-create our way out of it. Consciousness is the key to world change.
It’s a lot simpler than some might imagine. We will make this turnaround through feeling, thinking and acting from the heart.
Although traumatizing to the collective consciousness we need to experience this current reality to transform. It will allow us to align our mass conscious intention to create a new paradigm experience, a world that makes a difference for everyone.
It will allow us to have the profound realization that I am YOU and YOU are me, so why lie, cheat and hurt yourself?
Our awakening will win:The shift in mass consciousness towards the heart energy will bring about the manifested reality necessary to defeat the control system.
We Don’t Need Government, We Need Purpose August 31 2022 | From:PublicIntelligence/ Various
What truly motivates a person? Years ago I would have answered, “well, money of course. Money helps to pay for our food, shelter, some entertainment and allows us to (sometimes) further our education.”
While that answer is true in ways, today I will take it further and say that a purpose is what motivates us.
It is not that money itself is motivating for us, but it is the security money can provide us by allowing to our basic needs like food, shelter and clothing to be met.
From our childhood, we have been conditioned to believe that it is necessary to have money and to need the institutions in our world that direct the flow of money to the greater populace. However, if we analyze this deep enough, we see that it is a fact that such a means of rationing resources (which money does) and the institutions that control the rationing, are not necessary, but are by choice.
Sure, in some ways government has served it’s purpose. It has allowed us to build an infrastructure on this planet where we can travel pretty much wherever we would like. It has also built schools, hospitals and allowed for the creation of all sorts of public services as well as public entertainment.
However, what is important to remember is that it wasn’t governments who build these things. It was people. People made the choice each and every morning to wake up and go to their job to help create their projects.
Though money was almost certainly an incentive for many of these people, I believe that we human beings have an innate desire to help serve a greater cause. Perhaps for many of these people, an additional incentive for doing their work was that they knew on a deeper level that this was in some way, big or small, helping our civilization to develop and grow in a positive direction.
In today’s world, with the internet, 3-D printing, blockchain technology and the ability to harness unlimited energy for the entire world in the forms of solar, wind, tidal and geothermal, not to mention the numerous patented “free energy” devices which are currently suppressed, the need for money and government has passed us.
We no longer need money as a way to ration resources when we have the technology to create unlimited abundance for everyone on the planet. With no longer needing money, we no longer need a system such as governance who acts as the hub of rationing these resources through the means of money.
While I do not think that immediately stopping the usage of money and governance simultaneously around the world would be a wise or even positive decision in the short-term, I do believe that we could easily begin the process of scaling these back tremendously with the intention of completely ridding them of our reality.
It is no secret that many people today do not like their jobs or the work they do. However, people realize that the money that is paid to them allows them to pay for a place to live and for food to eat, which in turn allows them to live. In a very real way, many people are working a job they couldn’t care less about, just in order to stay alive. Some say, “well, that’s life. Get used to it.” Or, “You have to work. Stop complaining.”
I say, “with the technology we have today that could easily provide abundance in all forms for every person on this planet, it is counter-productive to use our time doing things we do not enjoy doing.”
We can cleanly power the entire world, which will allow us to grow the food and resources needed to feed, house and clothe everyone. This in turn will allow the basic needs of everyone to be met. From there, we will stop doing the work we’ve been doing to earn the “money.” The insanity will stop and the spirit of life will be sparked once again throughout our world.
At that point, we will start doing things that are passionate about. We will move away from the need of a government and move into finding what is of purpose for us. We can move from competition to cooperation. We can begin to heal ourselves, our family and friends. We can begin to heal our pets, the animals, the water and the flora and fauna of the Earth. We can create a truly peaceful paradise.
For those arguing, “this sounds like communism,” I say, “this has nothing to do with politics or money and is several levels evolved past such barbaric methods of intentionally rationing resources.”
Remember, communism is a political system who also has been enslaved via the monetary system just as every other political system has been, including capitalism, feudalism, and fascism.
Powering, feeding, clothing and housing the entire world has nothing to do with politics. It does, however, have everything to do with the human spirit and the deservability that each person has naturally.
To put this things in perspective, we must remember that we are incredible human beings living on a planet that is flying through our solar system at improbable speeds, which receives it’s warmth from a massive ball of gas known as the Sun.
Our lives on this planet is itself a miracle. Why would we not deserve for all of our needs to be met? What other species pays “money” to live on this planet? We are each a miracle. This planet’s existence is a miracle. We needn’t do a thing but simply exist to deserve the abundance this Earth can and one day will easily provide to all of us.
With that, I ask you: What is it that you can do, whether as a “job” or as a hobby that allows you feel a sense of purpose? What do you get passionate about? Maybe you are already in your purpose.
I do believe strongly that with the advancements we have made and continue to make technologically, but most importantly emotionally and spiritually, we are beginning the transition away from a monetary world and into a world where abundance, peace and purpose are the norm.
The World’s Best Economist August 30 2022 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / Various
If you want to learn real economics instead of neoliberal junk economics, read Michael Hudson’s books.
What you will learn is that neoliberal economics is an apology for the rentier class and the large banks that have succeeded in financializing the economy, shifting consumer spending power from the purchase of goods and services that drive the real economy to the payment of interest and fees to banks.
His book J is for Junk Economics is written in the form of a dictionary, but the definitions give you the precise meaning of economic terms, the history of economic concepts, and describe the transformation of economics from classical economics, where the emphasis was on taxing incomes that are not the product of the production of goods and services, to neoliberal economics, which rests on the taxation of labor and production.
This is an important difference that is not easy to understand. Classical economists defined “unearned income” as “economic rent.”
This is not the rent that you pay for your apartment. Economic rent is an income stream that has no counterpart in cost incurred by the receipient of the income stream.
For example, when a public authority, say the city of Alexandria, Virginia, decides to connect Alexandria with Washington, D.C., and with itself, with a subway paid for with public money, the owners of property along the subway line experience a rise in property values.
They owe their increased wealth and their increased incomes from the rental values of their properties to the expenditure of taxpayer dollars. If these gains were taxed away, the subway line could have been financed without taxpayers’ money.
It is these gains in value produced by the subway, or by a taxpayer-financed road across property, or by having beachfront property instead of property off the beach, or by having property on the sunny side of the street in a business area that are “economic rents.” Monopoly profits due to a unique positioning are also economic rents.
Hudson adds to these rents the interest that governments pay to bondholders when governments can avoid the issuance of bonds by printing money instead of bonds.
When governments allow private banks to create the money with which to purchase the government’s bonds, the governments create liabilities for taxpayers than are easily avoidable if, instead, government created the money themselves to finance their projects.
The buildup of public debt is entirely unnecessary. No less money is created by the banks that buy government bonds than would be created if the government printed money instead of bonds.
The inability of neoliberal economics to differentiate income streams that are economic rents with no cost of production from produced output makes the National Income and Product Accounts, the main source of data on economic activity in the US, extremely misleading. The economy can be said to be growing because public debt-financed investment projects raise the rents along subway lines.
“Free market” economists today are different from the classical free market economists.
Classical economists, such as Adam Smith, understood a free market to be one in which taxation freed the economy from untaxed economic rents. In neoliberal economics, Hudson explains, “free market” means freedom for rent extraction free of government taxation and regulation. This is a huge difference.
Consequently, today the US economy is focused by policymakers including the Federal Reserve on maximizing rentier income at the expense of the growth in the real economy. Rentier income has the productive economy in a death grip.
The economy cannot grow, because consumer income is siphoned off into payment of interest and fees to banks, and is not available for increased purchases of real goods and services.
Independently I arrived at Hudson’s conclusion that neoliberal economics is a device for ripping off workers and producers in order to convey awards to the rentier class.
Neoliberal economics is a predatory device that justifies the exorbitant incomes of the One Percent while blaming rising debt on those forced into debt-peonage in order to survive.
Hudson’s virtue is that he explains the historical development of debt-peonage and makes it clear that this is the status that the One Percent intends for the 99 Percent. He resurrects classical economics and reformulates economic theory in keeping with the facts on the ground instead of rentier interests.
Hudson is a coauthor of mine. In former times it would have been inappropriate for me to review the work of a colleague.
However, the neoliberal apologists for the One Percent are not going to confront themselves with Hudson’s facts. As I do not think that my integrity or Hudson’s is in question, I have no qualms about introducing you to this major work.
Buy the book. Read and study the book. Learn to rise far above corrupt neoliberal economics.
How To Spot A Media Psy-Op August 29 2022 | From: YogaEsoteric / Various
I enjoy a good conspiracy theory as much as the next peddler of anti-establishment vitriol. If you can hold them loosely, conspiracy theories can keep you conceptually and ideologically fluid so you don’t settle into any single set of perceptual or cognitive habits with this political stuff, and as an added bonus they tend to consistently infuriate all the worst kinds of people at all the right times.
But this article is not about conspiracy theory. What I’ll be sharing with you here are verifiable matters of public record which I encourage you to independently investigate if anything you read here is new to you.
I emphasize this not because I want you to believe me, but because we need as many eyes on this stuff as possible.
The American [Western] political establishment appears to have settled into an aggressive disinformation campaign against its own citizens as a result of the way it lost control of the narrative in 2016, and that campaign is only escalating.
In 2005, President George W. Bush admitted in a televised press conference that the US government creates its own “news” videos to give to the press, who often air those stories with no disclaimers informing viewers that they are watching government-generated media. In 2013, the US government implemented the negation of a 1948 law which had made it illegal for it to conduct psychological operations (psy-ops) on its citizens.
The 2017 NDAA allots a portion of the defense budget to a new State Department-run “counter-propaganda” program to fight certain types of information Americans are getting from the internet.
So when I tell you that the American government is known to actively use the media to psychologically manipulate the American people, that isn’t some wacky conspiracy theory, it’s a fact. These people have been legalizing and legislating psy-ops campaigns because they want to use them.
A lot of my readers probably tuned out from mainstream media long ago, as did I, but as the manipulators of the political establishment become more desperate their movements are becoming a lot more obvious, and they’ve been giving us a lot of valuable information lately.
I encourage you to tune back in as much as you feel inclined to, because when they really overextend, these mouthpieces of the oligarchy actually tell us where they don’t want us to look. Here are a few things you can watch out for to spot their manipulations:
Whenever you hear all the talking heads on TV suddenly start using the same phrase at the same time, you are hearing a slogan, a marketing ploy cooked up by a political think tank in the same way corporate think tanks come up with slogans for their products like “I’m lovin’ it” or “Silly rabbit, Trix are for kids!” Only political slogans aren’t geared to manipulate you into buying a product, they’re geared to manipulate you into buying into an idea.
In 2003 while the corporate media was manufacturing consent for the Iraq invasion, everyone suddenly started using the phrase “Support our troops.” It was everywhere. “Support our troops, support our troops!” You couldn’t watch the news without hearing it frequently peppered into the conversation, which is bizarre because taken on its own the phrase is essentially meaningless.
The opposition to the Iraq war wasn’t rooted in a lack of “support” for the individuals in the armed forces, it was opposition to the invasion itself and the decision to do so made by politicians in DC.
But all at once corporate media began slamming the American psyche with the absurd subconscious notion that if you didn’t support the invasion you must therefore hate soldiers and marines.
Following Hillary Clinton’s loss due to counter-establishment ideas and information being circulated largely via alternative media outlets, we began seeing the phrase “fake news” being constantly bleated with very broad brush strokes in a transparent attempt to lump dissenting alternative media outlets in with Macedonian clickbait and Russian propaganda.
And it was fairly successful at first; for weeks every single one of my opinion articles was getting comments calling them “fake news” despite being neither fake nor news.
Alternative media was getting slammed with this deliberate government psy-op, and luckily there was a strong pushback against it wherein every time CNN or the Washington Post published an unsubstantiated and inflammatory claim there was widespread use of their own slogan against them.
WaPo recently announced that it’s “time to retire the term fake news” since it’s been co-opted by the political right, and it’s true; you now hear that term being used more often on right-leaning mainstream media than on the left. By hijacking the term, they broke the spell, causing it to become an ineffective psy-op.
Pay close attention to when establishment shills interject a phrase that doesn’t seem to really “fit” with the rest of their words. Whenever you see the CIA-funded Washington Post arbitrarily start babbling about Pizzagate in the middle of an article about something or someone who opposes the political establishment, even when the hard substance of the report has nothing whatsoever to do with Pizzagate, you are seeing this psy-op at work.
CNN’s Chris Cuomo is an absolute wizard with this trick. The son of a former Democratic New York Governor and brother of a current Democratic New York Governor, Cuomo is political establishment royalty, and he appears to have been groomed for his job.
Cuomo went to law school instead of studying journalism, but has been given a prominent spot on the media juggernaut Clinton News Network, where he routinely inserts ideas into his commentary that are designed to fly below the radar and bury themselves deep in America’s subconscious.
My readers might remember Cuomo as the guy who casually slipped the absurd notion that it’s illegal for Americans to read WikiLeaks into his report, which to me is less notable for how blatantly manipulative it is than for the way Americans finally caught him in the act.
It was a very brief insertion, just a few seconds long, but some alert viewers were able to isolate it and go “Hey! What did you just do there? You’re tricking us!”
Which is great, but this was the only time Cuomo has really been caught in a big way. Whenever you see a pundit word-salading, it’s probably because they’re slipping a toxic idea into what they’re serving you.
It looks weirder written down, since he works his magic with such confidence; here’s a transcript from CNN if you want to see it in writing.
You can see a more overt example here in his interview with Rep. Tulsi Gabbard, where he somehow manages to force the adamant assertion “Assad is a tyrant, that he is an oppressor of his people and he needs to be taken out in the name of democracy” into the form of a question to help inoculate viewers from Gabbard’s anti-establishment message involving Syria.
It’s a magic trick. I don’t know where he learned it or why he relentlessly uses it on the American public, but the technique he’s using is called neuro-linguistic programming and it’s well-known among magicians. Check out UK magician Derren Brown who uses it extensively in his act to manipulate people into doing what he wants so he can appear to be psychic.
During his show, he sprinkles subconscious messages throughout his patter so his “predictions” come true at the end. These words and phrases that are so odd and out of context that they should jump out at you, but the mind smooths it over and moves on to the next thing he says. These tiny weird little phrases don’t even need to be repeated that often for them to work.
And work, they do. He can get any three people from the audience to collaborate to select a word of his choosing out of a possible 1.6 million words, seemingly at random to the participants.
The only difference with Brown is that it’s a part of his reveal at the end, and he walks you through how he manipulated everyone. Watch here to see him walk an audience through how he got them to choose that one word from 1.6 million for him, complete with video clips of each insertion.
I guarantee you Chris Cuomo has made a study of neuro-linguistic programming or something similar as part of his establishment grooming. His quick, rhythmic delivery and seamless insertions are the hallmark of a genius-level NLP practitioner.
This psy-op is designed to forcefully marry two unrelated ideas in the minds of the audience for the benefit of the political establishment. Half a year after the Iraq invasion, a poll by USA Today found that 70 percent of Americans still believed that Saddam Hussein was responsible for 9/11.
This wasn’t because reporters were directly saying this; they never could have gotten away with such blatant falsehoods.
What they could get away with was consistently making sure they mentioned Saddam Hussein in the same breath as the September 11th attacks over and over again, and I remember them doing this frequently.
They’d mention the “intelligence” which said Saddam had weapons of mass destruction, and then they’d say something about the possibility of another attack similar to 9/11.
They did this on purpose as part of corporate media’s well-documented participation in manufacturing consent for the invasion, and it worked.
A poll at the time found that 50 percent of Hillary Clinton voters believe that the Russian government tampered with vote tallies to help Donald Trump win the presidential election.
This is because media outlets, nearly all of which are owned by just five powerful companies in the US, have been deliberately using phrases like “election hacking” and “hacked the election” instead of phrases like “hacked the DNC emails” or “spearphishing John Podesta’s emails” which would have been an infinitely more accurate reflection of the actual substance of their reports.
People were tricked into marrying those two ideas, and now half the Democrats you meet will likely believe that Putin was involved in hacking actual election booths or vote tallies.
A few days ago we saw the same thing when Donald Trump lashed out at Rep. John Lewis for saying he didn’t consider him a legitimate President; the overwhelming majority of the headlines from liberal corporate media used words like “civil rights hero” and “civil rights icon” when referring to Lewis and “attack” and “smear” when referring to Trump’s response to him.
In reality Trump was just returning fire initiated by a Congressman in the opposing party, but I guarantee you there are millions of Americans who now think of Trump as someone who attacks civil rights leaders because he hates civil rights, for the same exact reason people think Russia hacked polling booths and thought Saddam was responsible for 9/11.
Just the whole entire Washington Post. The entire thing is one gigantic government psy-op. Its owner Jeff Bezos has collected many hundreds of millions of dollars directly from the CIA (a conflict of interest WaPo never mentions when reporting on US intelligence agencies), and his rag has consistently been the most unapologetic promulgator of the establishment narrative.
To list just a very few examples, WaPo ran sixteen negative articles about Bernie Sanders in the span of sixteen hours during the most hotly contested point in the presidential primaries, published a story which blacklisted hundreds of dissenting alternative media outlets as “Russian propaganda”, reported that Russians had hacked America’s electrical grid when nothing of the sort had happened and then covertly and unapologetically edited their article as their lies became exposed after millions of Americans had consumed their false narrative, and have been among the most aggressive peddlers of the aforementioned “Russia hacked the election” forced association psy-op.
WaPo is a great resource for all clear-eyed rebels, because it can be used as a daily memo of what the CIA and the political establishment it supports want the American public to believe.
Jeff Bezos is the second wealthiest person on the planet and prior to his purchase of WaPo he had already obstructed WikiLeaks via his company Amazon, so he’s unquestionably got a vested interest in propping up the oligarchy. Paying attention to his publication tells us where we aren’t meant to look.
One of the first things I noticed before any campaigning had even started in the recent Democratic primary was when Hillary Clinton got caught buying millions of fake “zombie” accounts to bolster her numbers on Twitter and Facebook.
They’re called zombie accounts because they’re not real people. You can buy followers pretty inexpensively it turns out, but they’re only shell accounts. They will never retweet you, they just make your numbers look better.
It was the beginning of the largest and most outrageous astroturfing of a campaign we’ve ever seen. Astroturf is so called because it seeks to mimic the growth of a natural grassroots campaign.
You buy followers, pay people to turn up to your rallies, offer incentives to wear your stickers and badges, pay people to go online and defend you, hand out signs at rallies that look home-made, pay celebrities to endorse you, pay your marketing campaign to make memes for you, stage “spontaneous” photo-ops with “fans" - in short, you use money to pay for the appearance of what burgeoned from the Bernie Sander’s campaign organically because there was genuine and growing enthusiasm for the candidate. Astroturfing seeks to mimic that kind of virality.
These strategies are usually used by advertising companies to generate interest for a product. Check out this Ted talk by Sharyl Attkisson for a little tour. It’s well-known in the trade that word-of-mouth is by far the best salesman, so those sneaky bastards have dreamed up ways of mimicking that.
What the Clinton campaign did went way beyond hiring a few shills to inject positive messages about their candidate and into the realm of mass psychological abuse, using real-life disrupters, social media shills, and the mainstream media to demonize Trump and his supporters to the point where the nation is still showing symptoms of post-traumatic stress disorder.
Here’s the thing though - we can only prove that the Clinton campaign did that because of the email leaks and the fact that the FEC enforces some transparency on the activities and budgets of the campaign and its superPACS. If we didn’t have those two things, we wouldn’t have proof that it occurred.
Post-campaign, you can still hire a company to shill for you online, on whatever issue you please, and you don’t have to report it to anyone. It’s relatively inexpensive and it’s a very effective way of controlling the narrative and disrupting natural healthy collaboration between normal humans.
This is just a taster but according to this amazing article from Double G, I mean, Glenn Greenwald, the key tactics boil down to the four D’s - Deny, disrupt, degrade, deceive.
So just because the campaign bunting has been taken down, don’t think that there aren’t regular assaults occurring on the hearts and minds of average Westerners, but the good news is, they are getting easier and easier to spot.
In The Western World Lies Have Displaced Truth August 28 2022 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / Various
Recently I was awarded Marquiss Who’s Who In America’s Lifetime Achievement Award.
This did not prevent a hidden organization, PropOrNot, from attempting to brand me and my website along with 200 others “Putin stooges or agents” for our refusal to lie for the corrupt, anti-American, anti-constitutional, anti-democratic, warmonger police state interests that rule the Western World.
The only honest, factual media that exists in the Western World today are the names on the PropOrNot list of “Putin agents.”
The purpose of ProOrNot is to convince Americans that freedom of speech must be halted by destroying fact-based Internet media, such as this website and 200 others that provide factual information at odds with Big Brother’s universal brainwashing as delivered by CNN, NPR, the New York Times, the Washington Post, and the rest of the utterly corrupt presstitute media, a collection of scum devoid of all integrity and all respect for truth.
A conspiracy of US government agencies, tax-exempt think tanks funded by the ruling interests, and media acting in behalf of a war and police state agenda work to shape perceived reality as it is described in George Orwell’s book, 1984, and in the film, The Matrix.
Controlled perception-based reality is only a Facebook “like” away from killing one person or one million or elevating a liar or the warmonger responsible for the killing to hero status or to the control of the CIA or FBI or the US presidency.
Eliason’s article is long and documented. It demonstrates the organized conspiracy against truth that exists in the Western World.
Nothing stated in the Western presstitute media and no statement by any Western government or subservient vassal state can be trusted to comply with the facts.
Truth is the enemy of the state, and the state is eliminating the truth.
Peoples in the United States, Europe, Britain, Canada, Australia, New Zealand, and the various vassal states, such as Japan, all live day in, day out, an orchestrated lie that serves interests directly opposed to the interests of the peoples.
Governments that do not rest on truth rest on tyranny.
Researcher Uncovers What May Be The Real Cause Of Depression August 27 2022 | From: WakingTimes / Various
Depression as a mental illness is actually quite controversial.
The psychiatric profession has agreed to attribute it on a chemical imbalance in the brain, although many question if this is the real cause of depression.
Clearly, Hari discovered enough interesting information about the real cause of depression to fill a whole book. What I wanted to highlight in this article is Hari’s perspective on the medical establishment’s choice to categorize depression as a chemical imbalance.
The Grief Exemption
The term major depressive disorder was introduced by a group of US clinicians in the mid-1970s. It established the diagnostic criteria for depression based on patterns of nine possible symptoms.
In 1980, depression was incorporated into the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual (DSM). In this book, American psychiatrists include all the symptoms of different mental illnesses, so they could identify and treat these diseases in the same way.
After some time, psychiatrists started to questions if people who are bereaved also need pharmacological treatment.
Hari writes:
"If you lose someone, it turns out that these symptoms will come to you automatically. So, the doctors wanted to know, are we supposed to start drugging all the bereaved people in America?
This is when the grief exemption was created. The DSM authors updated the manual to exclude people who have lost somebody in the preceding year from the depression diagnosis, even if they showed depression symptoms.
Hari states:
"The grief exception seemed to have blasted a hole in the claim that the causes of depression are sealed away in your skull."
The grief exception created too much debate in mainstream psychiatry. Doctors started asking if depressive symptoms where a logical and understandable response to other life circumstances, not just a death of a loved one.
Eventually, DSM authors eventually did away with the exemption. Doctors were once again told to say that depression is, in fact, caused by a chemical imbalance in the brain.
Dr. Joanne Cacciatore, associate professor at Arizona State University, is a leading expert on the grief exception. In his book, Hari reveals Cacciatore’s perspective:
"She told me this debate reveals a key problem with how we talk about depression, anxiety and other forms of suffering: we don’t, she said, “consider context”.
We act like human distress can be assessed solely on a checklist that can be separated out from our lives, and labelled as brain diseases.
If we started to take people’s actual lives into account when we treat depression and anxiety, Joanne explained, it would require “an entire system overhaul”.
She told me that when “you have a person with extreme human distress, [we need to] stop treating the symptoms. The symptoms are a messenger of a deeper problem. Let’s get to the deeper problem.”"
Most typical mainstream doctors address symptoms associated with depression with anti-depressant drugs, such as Prozac. Cacciatore raises a very valid concern, that we may be treating the symptoms, but that a potential untreated problem is the actual cause of depression.
As a patient taking anti-depressants for many years, Hari asked:
"Why were so many other people across the western world feeling like me? Around one in five US adults are taking at least one drug for a psychiatric problem.
In Britain, antidepressant prescriptions have doubled in a decade, to the point where now one in 11 of us drug ourselves to deal with these feelings.
What has been causing depression and its twin, anxiety, to spiral in this way? I began to ask myself: could it really be that in our separate heads, all of us had brain chemistries that were spontaneously malfunctioning at the same time?”"
To examine this question, Hari took at 40,000 mile journey around the world.
Here are some of the findings he uncovered during his investigation.
"They [drug companies] would fund huge numbers of studies, throw away all the ones that suggested the drugs had very limited effects, and then only release the ones that showed success.
To give one example: in one trial, the drug was given to 245 patients, but the drug company published the results for only 27 of them. Those 27 patients happened to be the ones the drug seemed to work for.
Professor Andrew Scull of Princeton, writing in the Lancet, explained that attributing depression to spontaneously low serotonin is “deeply misleading and unscientific”.
Dr David Healy told me: “There was never any basis for it, ever. It was just marketing copy.”
Were Psychiatrists Wrong About the Cause of Depression?
Finding out the story fed to depressed patients may be no more than a marketing pitch, Hari researched further. He sought out to uncover the true cause of depression.
He collected evidence that led him to believe that there are seven specific factors in the way we are living today that are causing depression to rise. In addition, two real biological factors (such as your genes) can combine with these forces to make things worse.
Here’s Hari’s thoughts:
"It turns out that, in the same way, all humans have certain basic psychological needs. We need to feel we belong.
We need to feel valued. We need to feel we’re good at something. We need to feel we have a secure future. And there is growing evidence that our culture isn’t meeting those psychological needs for many – perhaps most – people.
…the depression of many of my friends, even those in fancy jobs – who spend most of their waking hours feeling controlled and unappreciated – started to look not like a problem with their brains, but a problem with their environments."
Hari is not alone in claiming that our environment and power inequalities may be the real cause of depression.
"In its official statement for World Health Day in 2017, the United Nations reviewed the best evidence and concluded that “the dominant biomedical narrative of depression” is based on “biased and selective use of research outcomes” that “must be abandoned”.
We need to move from “focusing on ‘chemical imbalances’”, they said, to focusing more on “power imbalances”.
If you are struggling with depression and have found antidepressants an ineffective or undesirable treatment, it may be a worthwhile read.
"If you are depressed and anxious, you are not a machine with malfunctioning parts. You are a human being with unmet needs.
The only real way out of our epidemic of despair is for all of us, together, to begin to meet those human needs – for deep connection, to the things that really matter in life."
Tyranny And Free Speech August 26 2022 | From: BreakingViews / Various Do you support free speech? How about free speech for climate change skeptics? For homophobes? For racists? For sexists? For white males? For even Donald Trump?
Those who defend free speech, as did the American Founding Fathers, understand it is not about defending speech you agree with, but defending speech you disagree with. Without free speech, there is no liberty.
The State Department diversity officer, John Robinson, has just warned the staff that they may be penalized for engaging in “microaggressions,” which include jokes or other comments that someone who hears them may find offensive.
In a recent letter, he referred to a definition of microaggressions as:
"Everyday verbal, nonverbal and environmental slights, snubs or insults, whether intentional or unintentional, which communicate hostile, derogatory or negative messages to target persons.”
In other words, whatever you hear may be considered a microaggression if you choose to be offended.
Such vague and infinitely elastic laws and regulations are the bread and butter of all totalitarian regimes.
Lavrentiy Beria (Joseph Stalin’s head of the NKVD, a predecessor of the KGB) was quoted as saying to Stalin:
"You name the person and I will find the crime.”
Related:Ardern Intent On Smashing Free Speech
The “crime” of microaggression has already been used to stifle and prosecute speech by those who have contrary views in several left-leaning universities, and now it is coming to the federal government.
The climate change lobbyists have been increasingly aggressive in their attacks on free speech.
They seek to silence their critics, who have committed the “sin” of noting their many failed predictions.
George Mason University meteorologist Jagadish Shukla was the lead signatory of the letter sent to the president and attorney general asking them to use RICO (Racketeer Influenced and Corrupt Organizations Act) laws to prosecute;
"Corporations and other organizations that have knowingly deceived the American people about the risks of climate change.”
Mr. Shukla “paid himself and his wife $1.5 million from government climate grants for part-time work.”
Other prominent global warming fear-mongers, who are on the government teat, have also called for “war crimes trials” and even the “execution” of some critics.
Even Attorney General Loretta Lynch once said she has looked at the possibility of pursuing civil actions against so-called “climate change deniers.”
The message: Don’t look to the Obama administration to protect free speech. Which do you find more offensive, a person advocating socialism or a person telling jokes about one-eyed people?
Socialism is an ideology that has resulted in governments killing more than 200 million of their own citizens in the last century. It is based on coercion rather than liberty. It demands involuntary servitude. Socialist Bernie Sanders promises “free” stuff to his supporters to be paid for by the involuntary servitude of others - to which there will be no end.
Having spent considerable time in socialist countries and seen the human wreckage that results, I am offended by the ignorance or venality of those who engage in the microaggression of advocating socialism. Several decades ago, I lost an eye, and in the years since I have been told hundreds of “one-eyed” jokes, even by people who do not know me.
Rather than being offended, I have chosen to enjoy them. Offensive speech is totally subjective, and making it a crime is incompatible with a free society.
The Guardian, a left-wing British newspaper, published an article last year by a woman author titled;
"Why do women lie more than men?”
It reported on a new poll that “suggests that women are twice as likely to lie as men.”
The article goes on to say: “It may be irritating to be told, yet again, that women are more morally slippery than men (just as in Genesis).”
The article goes on to cite several reasons why this may be true - including differences “between masculine and feminine brains.”
All of this may or may not be nonsense, but in cases of women complaining about men engaging in “offensive” speech, it is most often assumed, without evidence, that the woman is telling the truth and the man is lying. In fact, men are frequently not allowed to know who their accuser is or what she claimed was said.
One of the most basic protections of liberty is the right of the accuser to know the specific charges against him or her and by whom.
As a result, many innocent men are not given a fair hearing by the human resource departments in organizations and even sometimes by the courts.
The late well-regarded feminist, Joan Kennedy Taylor, argued in her book “What to Do When You Don’t Want to Call the Cops: Or a Non-Adversarial Approach to Sexual Harassment” (Cato Institute) that it is important to understand that men and women perceive things quite differently, and that non-legal strategies which she describes can be far more effective and less damaging than legal remedies.
Law professor Catherine Ross has just written an important book, “Lessons in Censorship” (to be discussed at a Cato book forum on March 16), in which she argues that “the failure of schools to respect civil liberties betrays their educational function and threatens democracy.”
The popularity of the verbally crude Donald Trump might, in part, be a reaction to the political correctness of the political class and timid leaders of organizations who have failed to defend freedom of speech.
Unschooling: Radical Education That Produces Free Human Beings Instead Of Slaves August 25 2022 | From: DaisyLuther / Various
Let’s talk about the “education system,” that cornerstone of civilized societies everywhere.
We all know that the future lies in the hands of our children. That’s why parents want to do everything they can to give their kids a good start in life. We make careful choices about the food they eat, the friends they hang out with, and the education they receive.
Unfortunately, over the past decades, the education system in America has been churning out kids who are less interested in the world around them, more dependent on others for safety, and programmed to accept whatever information they’re provided without question.
Our education system is actually dumbing kids down instead of making them smarter. It’s killing natural curiosity, independent decision-making, and critical thinking. We all rant about Generation Snowflake, but these kids have grown up to be exactly what they’ve been taught to be.
The “education system” is working exactly as it was designed. This curriculum is a social experiment, designed to reduce critical thinking and increase obedience. How else will children learn to be the type of citizens that governments want?
At school, you learn important things like the following:
How to respond to bells
How to reign in your attention span into 50-minute increments
How to multitask and “learn” 6 different subjects at the same time, while mastering none of them
How to follow the instructions of authority figures without question
How to recite things off by memory
How to feel about politically correct topics
How to squelch your individuality
How to respond to questions to get the best grades
When the appropriate time is to visit the restroom, and how to ask permission to do so if the urge strikes at an inopportune time
How you must show up to serve your sentence on the required days, regardless of whether you feel like it or whether another opportunity has arisen
How to sleep and awaken at the times that are most convenient to your masters teachers, as opposed to the ones that work with your personal circadian rhythms
How you will completely fail at life if you don’t continue your “education” after high school
How to dive so deeply into debt that you must take any job you can get in order to pay off the student loans that were supposed to help you get a “good” job
Basically, you learn to become a better slave. You learn to spend all day doing things you might hate, might find boring, or might not understand.
The problem runs far deeper than just the classroom. It’s the system of learning itself. Even most homeschool curriculums focus on a broad range of subjects directed by the parent. While many parents do a fantastic job engaging their children in the lessons, there are children who just don’t respond to a format in which they must learn about 5 different subjects each day.
If you can awaken in a child the desire to know more... more about bugs and how they live... more about microclimates... more about geology... more about the past... then you can teach a child how to learn.
In my opinion, the utter failure of the education system is that they don’t create curious children. We moved quite a few times, and rarely did I see children challenged, piqued, and tempted with knowledge. Instead, I observed drudgery, boredom, and conveyor belt education.
If a child slips behind, they don’t stop the belt, take the kid off, and help them catch up. They say, “No child left behind” and they shove them along that belt, forcing them to try to learn the next installment of the lesson plan on top of the complete lack of foundational information that they didn’t understand in the first place.
A few years ago, I pulled my youngest child out of the public school system after a (cough) disagreement with the principal there. For a couple of years, we slogged away using a state-approved curriculum for homeschool.
Not only did it bore the daylights out of her, I found it pretty torturous too. The whole time we did the standard curriculum, I watched the curiosity that is the necessary spark to kindle the flame of learning, slowly die.
And that is the saddest death imaginable, because with it dies the future.
If you don’t love learning new things, if you aren’t curious about the how and the why and the when and the where, how will you ever jump into life with both feet, ready to explore new places, climb new mountains, and have new adventures?
Don’t get me wrong - you need to learn to read and to write and to do math - but you also need to embrace the very idea of learning something new and different, too.
So, we pulled out of all things school. I decided to trust my daughter. I will indulge her sharp wit, her natural curiosity, and her love for photography.
I want to undo the damage done by the school system, with their laborious texts, their Common Core, and their politically correct death-by-boredom.
If I don’t want her to grow up to be a slave to the state, I decided, it was time to stop raising her in the same way the other slaves are raised.
“This is also known as interest driven, child-led, natural, organic, eclectic, or self-directed learning. Lately, the term “unschooling” has come to be associated with the type of homeschooling that doesn’t use a fixed curriculum…
This is the way we learn before going to school and the way we learn when we leave school and enter the world of work…
Unschooling, for lack of a better term (until people start to accept living as part and parcel of learning), is the natural way to learn. However, this does not mean unschoolers do not take traditional classes or use curricular materials when the student, or parents and children together, decide that this is how they want to do it.
Learning to read or do quadratic equations are not “natural” processes, but unschoolers nonetheless learn them when it makes sense to them to do so, not because they have reached a certain age or are compelled to do so by arbitrary authority."
Can you really think of anything in the world that makes more sense than that?
Unschooling can be as simple as letting your child exhaustively indulge his or her curiosity about a subject by getting books about it, attending a class on it, and going on field trips that are related to it. Alternatively, it can become a family affair of travel, knowledge-seeking, and adventure.
This is how people used to learn - they were free to develop their interests, to pursue their passions, and to investigate, experiment, and think. Initially, education was a way for kids to have the world at their fingertips, especially if their parents were illiterate and not able to expose them to things beyond their own farm.
But then, it became an indoctrination system that separates children from their families, forces them to conform, and stamps out individual learning styles.
Let your Child Learn to be Free
When you no longer live by the school bell, the most beautiful thing can happen. You become free.
By learning when and what you want, you gain a true understanding of freedom, and who doesn’t want that for their children?
You can sleep when you’re sleepy.
You can find out more about the things that make you curious.\
You can focus on one thing at a time if that is how you learn best.
You can make art when you want to make art, not when you finally finish all of the boring stuff you’re forced to do.
You can eat when you’re hungry.
You can become the master of your own future.
You can take what makes you the happiest and completely immerse yourself in it.
You can travel when the spirit moves you, not when you get a scheduled break from school.
You can learn about real life, not just get dumped into it when you graduate.
You can start a business of your own.
You can take a class that fascinates you just for the joy of taking the class
You can take field trips to learn from experts and personal experiences.
Best of all, when you unschool, your child lives a kind of freedom that will set them on the course for an adulthood of freedom.
Is there any better gift than that? Is there any educational goal greater than teaching your child to be a free human being, unfettered by bells, whistles, and authority figures?
Common Core Possibly Coming To A School Near You
After reading this bill it seems that Americas Common core is spreading like wild fire across the world under different guises.
I read the bill and honestly alarm bells rang which makes the education reform a one size fits all, seems quite coincidental parata decides to resign after this bill has passed: New Zealand Education Legislation Bill
The Fall And Rise Of Truth, Trust And Society’s Capacity For Wisdom August 24 2022 | From: TomatLee / Various
What does it mean to live in a “post-truth era? Is there a broader history and context feeding that phenomenon than just Trump and the Russians? How do we address it at a deep level to serve our collective capacity to generate wisdom for our public affairs?
“Truth” shares the same Indo-European root as “trust” and “tree”.* It’s like trust and truth are grounded in the solidity and dependability that we associate with great oaks, redwoods, cedars and baobobs.
We might also reflect that trees – and, metaphorically, trust and truth – are living things that can thrive and grow – or be damaged and die.
We are in a period that is sometimes called the “post-truth era”, with a disturbing subtext that it might also be post-trust. Where do we turn for people, information, institutions that we can fully trust, that are dependably truthful – especially for ALL of us diverse people who find ourselves sharing public spaces and challenges with others we don’t understand and may even detest or fear as driven by evil designs and deranged narratives?
Dimensions of Our Predicament
Logic, reason, facts, compassion – all these seem distorted or missing in action. And lately even “reality” has become challenged.
From post-modern relativism, “false memory” research and the surreality of quantum physics to our growing technological capacity to engineer convincing apparancies (e.g., Photoshop, computer-generated imagery, virtual reality, dubbed-in voices in real time, etc.) and the generation and spread of “fake news” and “alternative facts”, it is becoming increasingly hard to know what is real and what is not – and sometimes even to be confident that reality is buried somewhere behind all the illusions!
All this is shaking up the worlds of social media and journalism. It turns out that even efforts to fact-check and identify fake news may ultimately backfire. But even traditionally reliable news media are often distorted by confirmation bias (favoring facts that justify what we already believe), advertising dollars, herd mentality, self-censorship to gain access, and undue focus on conflict, controversy and scandal – all of which undermine journalism’s ideal democratic role and stature.
And while it is true that some media are more biased and deceitful than others, reporting that is consistently and truly fair, honest and useful is increasingly hard to find.
Even science – once the undisputed arbiter of testable truth – is being undermined both by attacks from anti-science ideologues and exposés showing its foundational methods and trustability are more subject to hidden distortions than we realized.
Human fallibility, ego, greed, groupthink, systemic biases and outright manipulation can play outsized roles in published results**, adding to the frustrating tendency for asserted scientific “facts” to be replaced by new studies with totally different conclusions.
This last dynamic – which would be an unadulterated strength of ever-evolving scientific knowledge, were it not for the other factors mentioned – unfortunately doesn’t help the public turn to science for solid truths to depend on.
In addition to all that, more people are becoming aware that expertise is often used to assert social control by delegitimating people’s experience and undermining their judgment and capacity to form bonds of common interest based on common experience.
We’re being told we cannot trust ourselves but should follow (and pay for) experts in every aspect of our lives – diet, politics, child care, education, whatever. This strengthens elite power and versions of meritocracy that make it hard for us ordinary people to gain control of our lives, individually and collectively. (See, for example, Listen, Liberal or Whatever Happened to the Party of the People? by Thomas Frank)
In the face of all this, is it any wonder that so many people retreat into the comfort and tribal muscle of sectarian narratives and pundits, reinforced by social conformity, physical and informational migration into polarized like-minded silos, and the cognitive comfort of confirmation bias?
The implications for democracy and the generation of collective wisdom are profound. How do we make collective decisions when we can’t trust our information sources, ourselves, or each other – or when we place our trust in incompatible sources and ways of thinking whose primary goals are to invalidate and defeat each other.
A). Diverse views are, in fact, facets of a more complex reality, the whole of which we need to better comprehend if we wish to make wise decisions that will actually work in the real world.
This applies even to views that are demonstrably false, because belief in them arises from that more complex reality and plays a role in how it unfolds. So those factors are deeply relevant and vital to take into account if we want to make real progress.
B). Diverse people bring diverse gifts to understanding the whole situation and bringing about wholesome outcomes in our shared lives. They bring different values, different perspectives, different experiences, different cognitive styles and ways of solving problems, different aptitudes and skills, different connections and resources – all of which we can use – if we are discerning, welcoming and creative enough – to help make life better for all of us.
The trick is to help people engage creatively with their diversity – and with any disturbances that come along with it – in ways that enhance our collective comprehension and capacity.
Fortunately, there are thousands of resources to help us do that. Hundreds of them are explored in the wise democracy pattern language.
The current spirit of partisanship and the renewed effort to empower a political “center” are all fine, as part of the complex reality in which we find ourselves.
But ultimately we need to see all these stances and perspectives as resources for something far more inclusive and wise, and to build among us the capacity to access that more embracive collective wisdom to sustain our collective well-being.
Cash is simply a currency, a medium of exchange that is used to purchase something that has value, namely an asset or service. The word currency is derived from the word current – electricity – a current must move or else it will die. A currency does not store value in itself. Rather, it is a medium to transfer value from one asset to another.
Money has, unlike currency, value within itself. Money is always a currency in that it can be used to purchase other items that have value, however currency is not always money as explained above; it doesn’t have intrinsic value. The basic definition of money is; income-energy received for energy given.
The following statement illustrates this definition. The rectangle of paper representing a one-hundred-euro bill is not worth one hundred euros!
The piece of paper [debt note] represents the value of one hundred euros that is stored somewhere else, waiting to be purchased; the fact that a rectangle of paper, or currency, represents value in and of itself, was true only in the past, when the world was on a gold standard.
Today every bill is backed by nothing other than air or what commonly is called ‘good faith’ and the credit worthiness of the ‘issuer’ the Central Bank. In other words, authorities have the ability to create money at will without anything to back it up, in plain language money-printing or counterfeiting, but governments call it fiscal policy, and this together is called ‘fiat currency’, which is not money.
So, money is not what people think it is. Nowadays money is ‘currency’ invented and created by Governments or for that matter, the Central Banks, to steal from the people, by taxation without approval of parliament, by means of inflating the currency and consequently reducing people’s purchasing power by lowering the nominated ‘intrinsic’ value.
Money Has Value of its Own, Currency Doesn’t:
The abstract viewpoint is; Currency is a metaphysical technology that facilitates the development of trust, which in essence is what money is.
Trust that exists between two or more individuals is the true source of all wealth, allowing everyone to create on his/her own and naturally transpiring through the environment.
In other words; Wealth, in all its forms, is something of value created by people in unison with nature.
Currency, in this sense, is a social lubricant that enables two or more people to work together on some project, objective, or agenda. The objective might not be intrinsically valuable to the people involved - they might not be willing to cooperate merely to accomplish the purpose alone - but the motivation arises by offering them money, which gives them a valuable stake in the business.
Generally speaking, people tend to participate in things they find valuable, which is money, as an effective motivator.
Thus, even with respect to debt-based money, which is money “printed out of thin air” it is people’s faith and trust that gives any monetary system power. If people don’t derive some kind of value from the use of money, they won’t use it.
But what makes a society benevolent is that the people within it have a genuine interest in placing their trust solely in honourable projects. On the flipside of the coin, when morality, ethics, and justice are lost, people can be bribed into malevolence through the promise of money.
And this is essentially where the world is today. The powers that be, the elite, use us like cogs in a wheel to keep the systems of control alive, which we willingly participate in, mainly through the use of their created money.
Wealth is by Nature Valuable:
Personal wealth is by nature valuable for an individual and potentially for others. For example, a musician plays a piece of music that is inherently valuable to the musician but also valuable to others who listen to it, because in some way it is beautiful, inspiring, or expressive.
In nature, wealth needs to be tamed or refined, often through the collective works of individuals. When a group of people mutually agree that they value something, like farming food for their community, they can work together to bring that value into existence. The formal process for creating a mutually agreed model of value is called trust.
Money is a symbol of trust; people in a nation trust in the money the nation employs, enabling them to exchange these symbols amongst themselves.
Because money is a symbol of value that can be traded for other things, people can be encouraged into group projects by offering them money. If someone doesn’t see the value of doing something innately, simply for the act of doing so, they can nevertheless be motivated to participate and “rewarded” for their efforts with money. Value is measured by what people really want and freely choose, it will not make the world poorer.
5,000 years ago gold was introduced as a money. It is money people could trust. Not a promise by someone, as it is today. This “gold money” was something very different. It was something people could count on.
It made it easy to settle a transaction right on the spot. No need to remember who owed what to whom. No need to speak the same language or worship the same religion. This “gold money” was worth something in itself; intrinsically.
Gold is True Global Money:
Gold, as opposed to paper currency, is a proven form of sound money. People have bought and sold goods and services with it for thousands of years.
It has survived every kind of financial crisis. And it has survived countless paper currencies. Gold’s value and by the same token silver’s value are stable.
They are not going to plunge 25% or more over the course of a few days. There also isn’t a central authority in the world that controls PHYSICAL GOLD’S price or its supply. It’s a truly global currency. That’s why gold is still the best way to protect yourself from reckless governments and central banksters.
What is Real Wealth?
Money, right? Currency, gold, silver, you name it. Money is only real wealth because you can use it to buy whatever you want. Money in any form is in actual fact only the means to acquire real wealth. It is the instrument for opportunity and time to pursue your goal.
The conventional view that wealth is money and leisure is upside down. Let’s imagine the owner of a vault has conventional treasures: jewels, gold coins, etc. If the “wealth” stays in the vault, what’s the point of owning this “wealth”? The secret satisfaction of being “wealthy”?
If “wealth” is only an internal state, then let’s measure friendship and being needed/wanted with the metrics of “wealth.” Do you see the point; if “wealth” is merely an internal state of satisfaction, then a vault full of “money” is a poor metric.
What money buys is what real wealth truly is, which is freedom and the control over one’s life. This control over one’s life is called action. Action is defined as “the capacity of an actor to act in a given environment.” This may not seem like a profound concept, but another way to describe action is that action is the opposite of helplessness.
Forms of Wealth:
People with activity or drive define themselves and their identity. They shape the world they inhabit, rather than passively awaiting whatever circumstances may be delivered.
In the real world, people with drive are driven. They move on when things no longer work for them in a particular situation.
Action is not just the opposite of of helplessness; it’s also the opposite of victimhood, i.e. the state of being in which others are held responsible for all of one’s trials and tribulations.
Action and auto responsibility are two sides of the same coin: each manifests the other.
Opportunity is a form of wealth - and so is the ability to take opportunities that arise. Though there is a random element to opportunity – i.e. getting lucky. However, the ability to take the opportunity is not a matter of luck. It requires a specific appetite for risk, perseverance, the ability to discern how best to use the opportunity, and access to the capital required to exploit the opportunity.
Capital is a type of wealth that isn’t limited to “money”: Character traits are capital, social networks are capital, experience is capital, knowledge is capital. All of these forms of capital are often more important than “money” capital.
As for “money” buying leisure; Leisure in abundance is a disaster for the vast majority of people. Humans are designed to be needed by others, to be part of something greater than themselves, and to gain dignity and pride by doing useful work – whether they are paid “money” for this work or not.
This is why so many of those with the “money” to have endless leisure are miserable. Their lives are an endless treadmill of frivolous consumerism, neurotic pettiness, hypochondria, expressing their infinite heartaches to counsellors, and saddest of all, medications in abundance to relieve the ennui and the deadweight of their purposeless existence.
“Money” is only useful if it is a means to acquire real wealth, which is the activity, opportunity and time to pursue your ideals.
There are many people who can spend $600,000 a year on various things, i.e. their “lifestyle”, who don’t feel “wealthy” – and if they don’t have activity and time for work which is meaningful to them, they aren’t wealthy: They’re as impoverished as the person earning a fraction of their income.
Real Wealth Doesn’t Need Much Money:
Real wealth doesn’t actually require a vast horde of “money.” It requires some money, but how much depends on the cost of activity, opportunity and time.
For those with few needs and the right priorities, the cost is minimal.
As for acquiring capital – the most important types of capital don’t require much money; determination, self-discipline, organisation, a voracious appetite for knowledge and work, an insatiable curiosity, a generous heart, a knack for friendship, the purposeful pursuit of goals – these are the tools to acquiring real wealth.
Money Can’t Solve the Core Problems of Humanity:
People, through no direct fault of their own, accept the mistrust of the government as an unchangeable fact; “This is just the way things work!” It is assumed that governments can be nothing but corrupt, and as such, people don’t realise they can be forces of change to address this problem of trust.
As each one takes on the burden of self-education in law and trust, they become a single unit of honesty that can one day unite with others to form a truly honest and fair society.
In short, just because human history has been plagued by tyrannies and corrupt governments this doesn’t in the least prevent us from forming truly benevolent governments.
Such a benevolent body, should be built from the ground up, it should be anarchically founded on a population of educated and vigilant people, who know how to form trusting relationships as individuals and as a collective.
Our world is plagued by dishonesty, unfairness, and wholesale rejection of the truth; the founding principle of life.
In our world today Might is right, it’s the order of the day; lawlessness; where the law of the jungle and survival of the “fittest” are the primary criteria for oppression and success. And yet, despite the poverty stricken status of the human realms of trust, there is nothing stopping us from turning the ship of civilisation around and righting our course toward prosperity and abundance.
All the money in the world can’t solve the core problem humanity faces; the destruction of social trust and the capacity for individuals to restore the greater human family.
Restore the Trust:
The Cabal, for all their power through technology, their abundance of monetary wealth, and their seemingly limitless capacity to pollute and distort the minds of humans are practically powerless without the trust of their subordinates.
Even they, in their ivory towers of splendour and opulence, need a population of trusting serfs – puppets – to act as pawns for their games of domination and control.
The powers that should not be know that trust is the blood that flows through the veins of the entire social enterprise and as a result, they have worked tirelessly to ensure that we, the people never restore trust amongst ourselves.
Since we cannot trust each other, we end up placing our trust in the corrupt power structure, growing increasingly dependent on the very people who have destroyed our trust.
This is why history has been marked by the endless divisive movements, religions, creeds, sexuality and wars, all designed to destroy the human family and social trust.
The most dangerous thing to these morally void fools who have managed to climb the pillars of egocentric personal power, is an awakened individual and their potential to restore honour, relationship, and trust with others of like mind.
One of the best weapons against tyranny is the love of truth, and the willingness to work in trust with others.
Trust, honour, and respect are what make all relationships work. In this sense, good faith is what money really is. If trust is broken with someone, they likely won’t want to work with them in the future.
Humanity, on the whole, betrays trust, acts dishonourably and is pathologically disrespectful, making cooperation very difficult.
To solve this problem, a false form of trust is needed, a kind of forced cooperation, otherwise known as debt. That is why all money today is debt-based.
Restore trust, honour, and respect, and credit-based ‘money’ can return; otherwise known as the love of faith in one’s fellowman.
The Consequences of Scarcity Are All Around Us
We are deprived of physical affection from birth, leading to lifelong personality pathology and longing for emotional acceptance.
We are materially deprived of healthy food and clean products.
We are intellectually deprived of the truth and the self-empowerment that comes therefrom. And,
We are spiritually deprived of the healing power of fellowship, the restorative bestowment of genuine human interaction, and the transcendent joy of exploring cosmic meanings and values as a unified people.
Each Human Being Has Been Effectively Reduced to a Starving Rat
We spend our modern technologically enhanced lives in overcrowded towns and cities, connected to thousands of people through social media, all the while feeling more alone, disconnected and destitute than ever before.
We chase dreams of perfect romantic love; as portrayed in movies, TV shows, and books, to compensate for the profound state of loneliness, deprivation of intimacy and chronic feelings of
We yearn for true meaning in life and personal attainment, indulging in entertainment laden with cosmological archetypes and spiritual overtones, all the while denying the spiritual nature of existence.
We fulminate against anyone labelled as the enemy by social engineers in the mainstream media, feeling a sense of righteous empowerment as a result.
The result of these seemingly endless cycles of lack and dependence is the effectiveness of the elite’s divide and conquer - the destruction of the human family.
The elephant in the room isn’t that the Cabal or the globalists exist. It’s not that extra-terrestrials or spiritual forces are here and are likely trying to help us. It’s not even that fraud, deception, and lies are the backbone of our broken civilisation.
It’s that we, the people continue to allow their programs of division and self-disempowerment to run our lives. We continue to act without trust, honour and righteousness, even within the awakening community.
The Real Source of Wealth:
But this seems to be coming to an end, as more and more people rediscover the source of true wealth: love, trust, righteousness, good health and fellowship.
The desire for material wealth in most people reflects the fact that our basic human needs aren’t being met. But if we can, as a people, come together to solve this problem and build trust in the process, we’ll become immune to the rat-in-the-trap social program. We will transcend the Rat Race!
A Biologist Believes That Trees Speak A Language We Can Learn August 22 2022 | From: QZ / Various I’m in a redwood forest in Santa Cruz, California, taking dictation for the trees outside my cabin. They speak constantly, even if quietly, communicating above - and underground using sound, scents, signals, and vibes.
Biologists, ecologists, foresters, and naturalists increasingly argue that trees speak, and that humans can learn to hear this language.
Many people struggle with this concept because they can’t perceive that trees are interconnected, argues biologist George David Haskell in his 2017 book The Songs of Trees. Connection in a network, Haskell says, necessitates communication and breeds languages; understanding that nature is a network is the first step in hearing trees talk.
For the average global citizen, living far from the forest, that probably seems abstract to the point of absurdity. Haskell points readers to the Amazon rainforest in Ecuador for practical guidance.
To the Waorani people living there, nature’s networked character and the idea of communication among all living things seems obvious. In fact, the relationships between trees and other lifeforms are reflected in Waorani language.
In Waorani, things are described not only by their general type, but also by the other beings surrounding them. So, for example, any one ceibo tree isn’t a “ceibo tree” but is “the ivy-wrapped ceibo,” and another is “the mossy ceibo with black mushrooms.”
In fact, anthropologists trying to classify and translate Waorani words into English struggle because, Haskell writes, “when pressed by interviewers, Waorani ‘could not bring themselves’ to give individual names for what Westerners call ‘tree species’ without describing ecological context such as the composition of the surrounding vegetation.”
Because they relate to the trees as live beings with intimate ties to surrounding people and other creatures, the Waorani aren’t alarmed by the notion that a tree might scream when cut, or surprised that harming a tree should cause trouble for humans.
The lesson city-dwellers should take from the Waorani, Haskell says, is that “dogmas of separation fragment the community of life; they wall humans in a lonely room. We must ask the question: ‘can we find an ethic of full earthly belonging?’”
There’s room at the Redwood Inn
Haskell points out that throughout literary and musical history there are references to the songs of trees, and the way they speak: whispering pines, falling branches, crackling leaves, the steady hum buzzing through the forest. Human artists have always known on a fundamental level that trees talk, even if they don’t quite say they have a “language.”
Redefining Communication
Tree language is a totally obvious concept to ecologist Suzanne Simard, who has spent 30 years studying forests. In June 2016, she gave a Ted Talk (which now has nearly 2.5 million views), called “How Trees Talk to Each Other.”
Simard grew up in the forests of British Columbia in Canada, studied forestry, and worked in the logging industry. She felt conflicted about cutting down trees, and decided to return to school to study the science of tree communication.
Now, Simard teaches ecology at the University of British Columbia-Vancouver and researches “below-ground fungal networks that connect trees and facilitate underground inter-tree communication and interaction,” she says. As she explained to her Ted Talk audience:
"I want to change the way you think about forests. You see, underground there is this other world, a world of infinite biological pathways that connect trees and allow them to communicate and allow the forest to behave as though it’s a single organism. It might remind you of a sort of intelligence.”
Trees exchange chemicals with fungus, and send seeds - essentially information packets - with wind, birds, bats, and other visitors for delivery around the world. Simard specializes in the underground relationships of trees. Her research shows that below the earth are vast networks of roots working with fungi to move water, carbon, and nutrients among trees of all species.
These complex, symbiotic networks mimic human neural and social networks. They even have mother trees at various centers, managing information flow, and the interconnectedness helps a slew of live things fight disease and survive together.
Simard argues that this exchange is communication, albeit in a language alien to us. And there’s a lesson to be learned from how forests relate, she says. There’s a lot of cooperation, rather than just competition among and between species as was previously believed.
Peter Wohlleben came to a similar realization while working his job managing an ancient birch forest in Germany. He told the Guardian he started noticing trees had complex social lives after stumbling upon an old stump still living after about 500 years, with no leaves.
“Every living being needs nutrition,” Wohlleben said. “The only explanation was that it was supported by the neighbor trees via the roots with a sugar solution. As a forester, I learned that trees are competitors that struggle against each other, for light, for space, and there I saw that it’s just [the opposite].
Trees are very interested in keeping every member of this community alive.” He believes that they, like humans, have family lives in addition to relationships with other species. The discovery led him to write a book, The Hidden Life of Trees.
By being aware of all living things’ inter-reliance, Simard argues, humans can be wiser about maintaining mother trees who pass on wisdom from one tree generation to the next.
She believes it could lead to a more sustainable commercial-wood industry: in a forest, a mother tree is connected to hundreds of other trees, sending excess carbon through delicate networks to seeds below ground, ensuring much greater seedling survival rates.
Seedling survival is important to human beings because we need trees. “The contributions of forests to the well-being of humankind are extraordinarily vast and far-reaching,” according to the United Nations Food and Agriculture Organization 2016 report on world forests (pdf).
David Wilcock explains the science researc h behind plant communication in his book "Source Field Investigations"
Forests are key to combating rural poverty, ensuring food security, providing livelihoods, supplying clean air and water, maintaining biodiversity, and mitigating climate change, the FAO says. The agency reports that progress is being made toward better worldwide forest conservation but more must be done, given the importance of forests to human survival.
Most scientists - and trees - would no doubt agree that conservation is key.
Haskell believes that ecologically friendly policies would naturally become a priority for people if we’d recognize that trees are masters of connection and communication, managing complex networks that include us.
He calls trees “biology’s philosophers,” dialoguing over the ages, and offering up a quiet wisdom. We should listen, the biologist says, because they know what they’re talking about.
Haskell writes, “Because they are not mobile, to thrive they must know their particular locus on the Earth far better than any wandering animal.”
How Consumerism Is Ruining Our Lives And The World August 21 2022 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit Our economic system is based on consumption: The more stuff we buy, the more money moves in the economy, and hence the more the economy grows.
If we stopped consuming, the economy would collapse and result in unemployment, poverty and violence.
Not surprisingly, we believe that consumerism is good for us, and there’s even an entire industry - the advertising industry - dedicated to making us want to consume without end.
Yet, as I explain in the video below, consumerism is actually ruining our lives and the world, and unless we change our way of living, we’re soon going to face the tremendously negative impacts of our consumer behavior.
Brave New World And Individual Power & How The Elite Dominate The World: They Buy Politicians, And Incumbents Almost Always Win August 20 2022 | From: JonRappoport / PrisonPlanet / Various Rule by technocracy - that is the subject of this article. In such a future, there would be no politicians. They would have been made extinct…
Huxley’s 1932 novel about a World State and its version of Utopia is still one of the most important and relevant novels of our time.
It is the companion piece to Orwell’s 1984. The overt brutal force has been removed from the equation in Brave New World.
Instead: all births are synthetic, hatched in artificial womb factories, with accompanying genetic manipulation; no more nuclear families; no more monogamy; education is achieved through hypnotic sleep-learning; a caste system is engineered so the lower, less intelligent classes are happy with their lot, and the upper-level “alphas” occupy the top positions; the castes have little interest in associating with each other.
Technocracy has triumphed. The theme of life, the basic theme, is Pleasure. Pleasures of the senses. Not of the mind, not of constructive action, certainly not of imagination.
Pleasure keeps the citizens of the World State occupied…and if that fails, the ultimate backup is a drug called Soma, which relieves anxiety and depression and stimulates “happiness.”
There are many people living among us today who would opt for that life in a heartbeat. They would see no downside.
“Well, of course. Sign me up. I’ve been trying to find that pleasure all along. I’ll take it.”
The 1932 technocrats of Brave New World found a key. Why should they waste time trying to inflict pain on the population as a control mechanism? Why should they risk rebellion and revolution? Go “positive.” Give people pleasure. Absolutely.
All older forms of government fade away. They were just crude experiments in the foothills of the one and only revolution: technology deployed to pacify the world.
By the way, in Brave New World, no one reads books. They’re unnecessary. They make no sense. The “better life” is already a living fact. What possible benefit could a book deliver?
Every time I read Brave New World I see complacent animals grazing in pastures. That’s the picture. Human animals at peace in the fields. Nothing to care about. Nothing to think about. Just bend and chew. Don’t worry, be happy.
As Patrick Wood mentions in his fine and highly recommended book, Technocracy Rising, Huxley began writing Brave New World as a parody of other utopian novels of his time, but he became fascinated with his own ideas along the way, and set his mind to the task of fleshing out a technological end-game civilization.
Brave New World reveals a landscape in which people would be unable to turn around and throw off what has been done to them. They would not consider it. They would have no basis for comparison. They would have no cultural memory.
They are living in a universal super-welfare state. Their needs are satisfied - especially the central need: pleasure. It isn’t gained or worked for. It’s given. It’s a fact as basic as rain and sun. It’s there. It’s the shortest distance between the present moment and the next moment.
Isn’t this the fairy tale told about rich and famous celebrities? They can wake up in the morning thinking about pleasure that is immediately there for the taking. They have the means. They have the time. They have the opportunity. In Brave New World, everyone is that kind of creature. By necessity. There is no real choice. Their most base desires are their only desires. Their horizon is shortened.
Here are several choice quotes from Huxley’s masterwork:
"Hot tunnels alternated with cool tunnels. Coolness was wedded to discomfort in the form of hard X-rays. By the time they were decanted the embryos had a horror of cold. They were predestined to emigrate to the tropics, to be miner and acetate silk spinners and steel workers.
Later on their minds would be made to endorse the judgment of their bodies. ‘We condition them to thrive on heat,’ concluded Mr. Foster. ‘Our colleagues upstairs will teach them to love it’.”
“Feeling lurks in that interval of time between desire and its consummation. Shorten that interval, break down all those old unnecessary barriers.”
“No pains have been spared to make your lives emotionally easy – to preserve you, so far as that is possible, from having emotions at all.”
“A gramme [of the pleasure drug Soma] is better than a damn.”
The foundation of Brave New World conditioning: With enough basic pleasure, there is no need to think, to contemplate, to assess, to investigate; there is no need to imagine new realities because the current one is more than sufficient; there is no need to rebel because when a person is attuned to pleasure as the highest value - and he has pleasure - what is there to object to?
Lee Silver, a molecular biologist at Princeton, has written a book, Remaking Eden (1998), about the future of gene science in society. This is how he sees things playing out:
"The GenRich - who account for ten percent of the American population - all carry synthetic genes. All aspects of the economy, the media, the entertainment industry, and the knowledge industry are controlled by members of the GenRich class….
Naturals work as low-paid service providers or as laborers. [Eventually] the GenRich class and the Natural class will become entirely separate species with no ability to crossbreed, and with as much romantic interest in each other as a current human would have for a chimpanzee.
Many think that it is inherently unfair for some people to have access to technologies that can provide advantages while others, less well-off, are forced to depend on chance alone, [but] American society adheres to the principle that personal liberty and personal fortune are the primary determinants of what individuals are allowed and able to do.
Indeed, in a society that values individual freedom above all else, it is hard to find any legitimate basis for restricting the use of repro-genetics. I will argue [that] the use of reprogenetic technologies is inevitable. [W]hether we like it or not, the global marketplace will reign supreme.”
Of course, in the future Huxley describes in Brave New World, there is no marketplace. The powers-that-be have built a World State. It is run by a scientific elite. They have left behind all traditional forms of governing.
That is all. That is enough.
This vision of technocracy clarifies the agenda. The New World Order eventually travels light years beyond political tyranny. What need is there for laws or courts or traditional office holders or even the inside game of bribery and special favors?
They were old; this is new.
Make a list of people, down through history, you would consider the most important heroes and geniuses. In the Brave New World, such people would be inessential. They would not exist. They would be programmed out of the equation. Gone. Erased.
Technocracy becomes the ultimate form of governance. The ultimate form of Globalism. The solution to conflict.
What has really been “solved?” THE INDIVIDUAL. He is the thorny outlier, the person who says NO. The person who has his own ideas and his own vision.
He becomes “nice.” He becomes agreeable. He becomes polite. He becomes a member of the group. He gives up the ghost.
HE DOESN’T EVEN KNOW HE’S SURRENDERING, PIECE BY PIECE.
He doesn’t realize he’s forsaking himself for a world of shallow pleasure.
The struggle of centuries, to liberate the individual from the group and from the king and the priest class, is gradually reversed. The “new wisdom” says: go back, go back into the group.
Here is another gem, from Gregory Stock, former director of the program in Medicine, Technology, and Society at the UCLA School of Medicine:
"Even if half the world’s species were lost [during genetic experiments], enormous diversity would still remain.
When those in the distant future look back on this period of history, they will likely see it not as the era when the natural environment was impoverished, but as the age when a plethora of new forms - some biological, some technological, some a combination of the two - burst onto the scene.
We best serve ourselves, as well as future generations, by focusing on the short-term consequences of our actions rather than our vague notions about the needs of the distant future.”
The primary assumption here is that species are replaceable. If one species dies out, another can be created. As for the individual, he doesn’t count at all. He’s not even on the radar.
So who will put him on the radar? Our leaders? Brain researchers and molecular biologists?
That task falls to individuals themselves. In order to gain a glimpse of hope, the individual needs to discover he has power. He is not a tiny creature in a sea of collective reality.
The collective is the illusion.
In our time, the individual discovering his own power and its true scope is the work of a lifetime. This is why I write.
This is the actual Brave New World.
Individual power. The power to invent new Reality.
How The Elite Dominate The World: They Buy Politicians, And Incumbents Almost Always Win
Once we wake up to how the game is being played, then we will have a real shot at changing things.
For decades, the elite have been pulling the strings behind the scenes in both major political parties. That is why nothing has ever seemed to change very much no matter which party has been in power. [Archival article]
The agenda of the elite has always seemed to march forward, and ordinary people like us have always been frustrated that we can’t seem to make a difference. But now a shift seems to be taking place.
Donald Trump took on the establishment in both major parties, and he miraculously won the presidency. Down in Alabama, the elite spent more than 30 million dollars to defeat Roy Moore, and he still defeated Luther Strange. A political awakening is taking place, and I can’t wait to see what happens during the mid-term elections in 2018.
In Part I and Part II of this series, I talked about how the elite use debt as a tool of enslavement. In Part III, I went over how the elite use the colossal media corporations they own to control what we think. Today, I want to talk about their influence in the realm of politics.
In Washington D.C., it is well understood that the game of politics is all about the money. If I win my election, and online polling suggests that there is a ton of enthusiasm for my campaign, I will be expected to spend most of my time on the phone raising money.
As a freshman member of Congress, at orientation it will be explained to me that I am supposed to spend approximately four hours a day doing fundraising, and that is why the House and Senate floors are so empty most of the time.
By law, members of Congress cannot make fundraising calls from their offices, and so both parties have huge call centers just across from the Capitol. Especially around lunch and dinner times (because those are some of the best times to reach people), those call centers are packed as members of the House and Senate run through lists of potential donors.
And it isn’t just about raising money for their own campaigns. As a freshman member of Congress I would be expected to raise at least $200,000 for the NRCC (the National Republican Congressional Committee). If I don’t pay my dues, I would get into big trouble with party leadership.
But you know what? I have already pledged that I am not going to participate in this very corrupt system. If I am sent to Congress, I am going to spend my time doing the job that the people of Idaho sent me there to do.
So will Paul Ryan and the others in leadership get very upset with me for not “paying my dues”? Of course.
But it is time for some of us to take a stand and do what is right. Congress has become a cesspool of filth and corruption, and it is time to flush the toilet.
Because if we don’t fight this corrupt system, the influence of money in politics will just get worse and worse. Today, the elite pour millions upon millions of dollars even into small campaigns, and in 2016 it took an average of more than 10 million dollars to win a U.S. Senate seat…
"While the White House may not have gone to the biggest spender, an awful lot of House and Senate seats did - as usual. And it was pricier than ever to win them.
This election cycle, an average winning Senate candidate had spent $10.4 million through Oct. 19 (reflecting the latest reports filed with the Federal Election Commission).
That’s a $1.8 million increase over the same period in the 2014 cycle. By the end of last cycle, the number rose to $10.6 million, and a similar uptick is expected this time once post-election and year-end reports are filed."
Once you win, the pressure to raise money for your next campaign never ends.
The elite know this, and they use this pressure to influence votes. Prior to a big vote, lobbyists will make it abundantly clear how they want certain members of Congress to vote, and if they vote the “right way” those members of Congress will be rewarded.
Just across from the U.S. Capitol there are clubs where fancy receptions are regularly held. If you vote the “right way” on a particular bill, you may be invited to one of these receptions, and there will be big, fat donation checks waiting there for you.
Of course most members of Congress have learned how to play the game, and this is why it is nearly impossible to defeat incumbents. Over the past six decades, the re-election rate for members of the House of Representatives has consistently been well over 80 percent, and according to the UVA Center for Politics incumbents actually did far better than that in 2016…
"This election cycle, 393 of 435 House representatives, 29 of 34 senators, and five of 12 governors sought reelection (several of the governors were prohibited from seeking another term).
Of those, 380 of 393 House members (97%), 27 of 29 senators (93%), and four of five governors (80%) won another term. These members of Congress and governors not only won renomination, but also won in November."
Since World War II, the overall success rate for Senate incumbents has been 84 percent, and the overall success rate for House incumbents has been 94 percent.
Incumbents are almost always armed with huge war chests and most of them have tremendous name recognition, and so toppling them is not easy.
Fortunately, there is no incumbent in my race because Raul Labrador is running for governor. So the race is completely wide open, and right now my campaign has the most enthusiasm by far. If you would like to help me flush the toilet in Washington, I would encourage you to visit MichaelSnyderForCongress.com.
If we don’t fight back, we will never break the stranglehold that the elite have on our political system.
Every generation of [not just] Americans has had to stand up and fight for liberty and freedom, and now it is our turn. This particular battle will not be fought with guns and bullets, but rather with ideas, values and principles.
We are part of a movement that is sweeping the nation. Good men and women are rising up to run in federal, state and local races all across the country, and it is absolutely imperative that we all get behind them and support them.
Finally, the mainstream media is reporting that a coup is underway in New Zealand – by the Maori tribal elite.
Admittedly that observation was penned by former Labour Minister and ACT Party leader Richard Prebble in an opinion piece for the Herald – but the newspaper published it and RadioNZ reported it.
The on-line Herald headline read, “Three Waters is a coup - an attack on democracy”.
That bold and compelling headline, however, didn’t last. It was changed to remove the words “a coup” and now reads: “Three Waters is an attack on democracy”.
The obvious question is why?
A clue comes from an article written last year by political journalist Andrea Vance, about Jacinda Ardern’s PR machine:
"The Government’s iron grip on the control of information has tightened. At every level, the Government manipulates the flow of information."
She then explained;
"And the prime minister’s office makes sure its audience is captured, starting the week and cementing the agenda with a conference call with political editors.”
So, did a member of the Prime Minister’s Office contact the Herald and ask them to change the headline?
Richard Prebble: Three Waters is a Government Coup
The Prime Minister has recently attempted to discredit her critics as “keyboard warriors”. But she can’t dismiss Richard Prebble that lightly. As a former member of Labour’s Cabinet, he has a unique political insight and his views carry weight.
Richard explains that New Zealand is a “liberal democracy”, and as such:
"individual rights and freedoms are officially recognised and protected… by the rule of law.” Governments are therefore “accountable to the people by a system of one person, one vote”.
That means, “Liberal democracy is incompatible with co-government by tribes.”
Richard believes that while there is some logic to the use of co-governance as a pragmatic solution to Treaty claims for the ownership of public assets such as national parks, there is none for Three Waters:
"Applying it to assets which iwi have no claim to is confiscation… It is ratepayers – Maori and non-Maori – who paid for the pipes, dams, stormwater drains and sewage plants.”
He concludes:
"The Government’s Three Waters legislation is a coup. It is replacing liberal democracy with co-government with iwi.”
In fact, it can be argued that Three Waters is much more than co-governance.
The way the Local Government Minister Nanaia Mahuta has structured the legislation – ostensibly to fulfil the fictitious Treaty “partnership” obligations of central government – iwi will gain ultimate control of water services at every level: from the Water Regulator – through the Maori Advisory Board; to Regional Representation Groups – giving iwi a disproportionate 50 percent control and veto rights; to Water Entity Boards – requiring members with “expertise in accessing matauranga Maori, tikanga Maori and Te Ao Maori knowledge”; to local Te Mana o te Wai directives to Water Entity Boards – that can be issued by any iwi member on any aspect of water services.
Kaipara Mayor Dr Jason Smith, who was a member of Minister Mahuta’s working group described Three Waters as “a Trojan Horse for ending democratic rights”.
And, after extensive investigation, journalist Graham Adams has concluded it is a “giant stitch-up” – “a coup hiding in plain sight”.
Counterspin Media, along with a handful of other freedom groups and individuals, was dead centre of major government funded media attack.
The lavishly funded 'Stuff circuit' hit piece 'Fire and Fury' spectacularly failed to hit its mark. Instead, the attempt to demonise various individuals and organizations within the 'Freedom movement' become more of a 'fizzer and flop'.
Nothing more that gutter journalism in a designer dress.
The iwi elite driving the takeover are seeking tribal rule by 2040. The plan to achieve this goal – He Puapua – was mapped out by the Government in 2019, under the guise of enacting the United Nations Declaration of the Rights of Indigenous Peoples.
Knowing how explosive this agenda was, Jacinda Ardern kept it hidden – so well hidden that even her Deputy Prime Minister Winston Peters knew nothing about it. Nor was it mentioned in Labour’s 2020 Election Manifesto – she only revealed it after winning the election.
But as the 1986 Royal Commission into New Zealand’s Electoral System warned:
“Our Governments have great powers and great responsibilities. Their exercise of those powers and fulfilment of those responsibilities is legitimate only because it arises from the consent of the people.”
By failing to gain the consent of voters for her plan for tribal rule, Jacinda Ardern has no mandate for her He Puapua co-governance agenda – it is illegitimate.
The Government’s Office for Maori Crown Relations clarifies on their website where this tribal ‘partnership’ agenda is leading:
“Maori decide and the Crown assists in implementing the decision made by Maori. The Crown’s role is as enabler and implementer not decision-maker.”
Hiding in plain sight, this Government website confirms that the ultimate goal of this so-called ‘co-governance’ partnership agenda is tribal rule.
To understand the mechanisms being used, we need to look back to 2019 when Jacinda Ardern boasted to the Bill Gates Foundation about how she was implementing the radical objectives of the United Nations:
In another address that same year to the World Economic Forum, she explained her reforms were designed to lead to permanent change:
“One of the biggest threats we have … are political cycles.
This needs to be something that we embed in our national cycles, in our political cycles, and in our actions and it needs to endure beyond us as individuals.”
Using this same approach, the Prime Minister is embedding tribal rule into our regulatory and legislative framework.
Enabling iwi to control health required new legislation to abolish the country’s 20 health boards; and giving them control of water involves a bill to confiscate water infrastructure and services from all 67 councils.
When it came to the Public Service, new legislation was also needed with the PM’s tribal rule provisions included in the Public Service Legislation Bill that was passed into law just before the 2020 election – again, hiding in plain sight.
The Public Service Commission’s Factsheet 3 outlines the requirements. Under the new Act, The Public Service Commissioner and Chief Executives are accountable to their Minister for “strengthening the Crown’s relationship with Maori”.
This means not only ensuring staff ‘engage’ appropriately with Maori, but also that a Maori World View dominates the way they operate – including using the Maori language, adopting Maori customs, and applying the Treaty “day-to-day”.
And when it comes to employment decisions, they are required to “recognise the need for greater involvement of Maori in the Public Service”.
Back in 2018, when the Office for Maori Crown Relations was being established, iwi leaders demanded status in official Government decision-making. Through the appointment of specialist iwi advisors in key state sector agencies, their influence is now widespread.
As a result, Maori supremacists are not only changing the culture of the public service and other government agencies, but of the country itself.
The 2021 Annual Report of the Office for Maori Crown Relations confirms the mission of their 180 staff:
“Is all about embedding the Treaty into policy and lifting capability across the Crown… In practical terms, we get involved across the full range of the government’s reform agenda.
We help agencies consider the Treaty in policy design and implementation… Maori rights and interests are built into the design.”
"Maori are NOT the indigenous people of Aotearoa New Zealand. There were many other races already living here long before Kupe arrived. I am his direct descendant and I know of our oral history passed down 44 generations." – David Rankin
Among the many ‘training’ resources available on their website, one explains their goal is “a significant culture change across the public service.”
Another suggests hiring more Maori, paying them more, and providing “paid leave to fulfil iwi responsibilities.” Yet another requires staff to “demonstrate a commitment to tikanga Maori, speak te reo, and participate in kapa hake groups.”
An overarching requirement is indoctrination in ‘institutional racism’ and the ‘impact of colonisation’.
To assess the competency of public sector agencies in supporting “the Maori-Crown relationship” a survey has been devised which questions staff over such things as whether “I feel confident in my ability to: introduce myself in te reo; converse in te reo; pronounce te reo words correctly; or sing two waiata from memory.”
It asks whether they would be confident to “work in partnership and share decision-making with a Maori group”, and it also seeks their feedback on whether their agency “may inadvertently disadvantage Maori.”
By encouraging public service staff to provide feedback on the progress of their agencies in adopting the Prime Minister’s tribal rule agenda, implementing a Maori World View is now dominating the government sector.
With increasing pressure on the Public Services Commissioner and Chief Executives to deliver on the objectives of the iwi elite, is it any wonder that real service delivery and performance is in decline?
Has it all gone so far, that policy development has now reached the point where, for instance, the Government’s inadequate response to the country’s critical workforce shortage is, in fact, being influenced by the opposition of iwi leaders to immigration?
Tribal control is now replacing our Kiwi culture within the heart of Government by ensuring Maori rights and interests dominate the agenda.
And it doesn’t just stop with the core public service either. In the best totalitarian tradition, everyone in ‘official’ positions is being targeted including teachers, school trustees, doctors, nurses, firefighters, Police, military, and local authority employees.
The scale and speed of this cultural takeover is breath-taking, and its effect is the reshaping of democracy as we know it.
This week’s NZCPR Guest Commentator is Professor Elizabeth Rata, the Director of Knowledge in Education at Auckland University, who outlined the threat posed by this tribal coup in a recent address entitled “In Defence of Democracy”:
“I want to talk about democracy – about what it is we are in danger of losing and what we need to do to retain our nation’s remarkable 170 year legacy of democratic governance…
The question we must ask is this: How has a small group of individuals, both Maori and non-Maori, managed to install a racialised ideology into our democracy?
The corporate tribes have already acquired considerable governance entitlements – the next and final step is tribal sovereignty.
It’s a coup d’etat in all but name, accomplished not by force but by ideology – enabled by a compliant media.
Given the enormous success of retribalism is it too late to reclaim New Zealand from the relentless march to blood and soil ethno-nationalism?
That depends upon our willingness to understand, value, and restore democracy.”
Professor Rata paints a bleak picture of the future – unless New Zealanders wake up and fight back.
The reality is that because ordinary Kiwis are allowing it to happen, as a country, we are sleepwalking our way to apartheid – in our case the tyranny of a minority over a majority.
But, just as Jacinda Ardern embedded her racist tribal rule agenda throughout our statutory framework, so too it can all be repealed.
As Professor Rata has recommended, removing all references to the Treaty and its principles from legislation and public institutions – including universities – is the key.
We also need to do more to remind New Zealanders that the principles of democracy should not be tampered with nor altered to suit the selfish power-hungry motives of an aggressive minority.
Fortunately, people like Richard Prebble, Jason Smith, Graham Adams, and Elizabeth Rata are calling out the transformational change Jacinda Ardern promised for what it is – a coup against democracy.
Generations before us have fought and died for the democracy New Zealand had, before she became our Prime Minister.
We owe it to them, and to our future generations, to take a stand and defend our democracy against this attack.
Our collective goal must be to save New Zealand – and our democratic Kiwi way of life – and in this mission, we cannot allow ourselves to fail!
Ten Things You’re Not Supposed To Know August 18 2022 | From: AnonymousNews / Various “The general population doesn’t know what’s happening, and it doesn’t even know that it doesn’t know.” - Noam Chomsky.
1. It is Nearly Impossible to Pay Off the National Debt
"Nothing is so well calculated to produce a death-like torpor in the country as an extended system of taxation and a great national debt.”
- William Cobbett
This is because money is created out of debt in a one-to-one increase in public debt. The national debt is $20 Trillion. [Archival] That means the (roughly) 234 million US Americans would have to pay approximately $62,000 each to pay it off.
This includes babies, children, poor people, and homeless people. There are even those who claim that it’s mathematically impossible to pay off the debt. And almost every country is in debt to every other country. It’s the height of insanity.
As former Governor of the Federal Reserve Marriner Eccles said, “If there were no debts in our money system, there wouldn’t be any money.”
“Federal Reserve notes are not redeemable in gold, silver or any other commodity, and receive no backing by anything. The notes have no value for themselves.”
- The Treasury
All money is fiat money. A dollar bill is a dollar bill because everyone agrees it’s a dollar bill. The dollar bill is not lawful money, but rather “legal tender.”
Money used to be backed by a “gold standard” – which meant the government had $100 worth of gold in a vault from which they made a $100 bill that went out into the market (though even gold only has value because we’ve all agreed since time immemorial that it’s valuable).
However, they moved away from gold years ago, so now we must take the government’s word for it that the note is worth $100.
The bill itself is just an IOU note, made from thin air, based on debt, and laundered by the government.
Even the debt issue discussed in the first bullet is based on nothing, and is nothing more than a financial concept financiers agree on. The debt isn’t actually there.
But since we all just go along with it, it affects us through inflation, and devaluation, and the sky-is-falling knee-jerk reactions to money meaning something only because we give it meaning. Money is little more than a cartoon in the brain that we’re addicted to watching.
3. How to Live Off the Grid
“Live simply so that others may simply live.”
- Gandhi
You’re not “supposed” to know how to live off the grid, because then you can’t be controlled by the government. The more self-sufficient you are, the less money the corporations can make off you.
The more rain water you catch, the less you’ll need to pay the water companies.
The more windmills you build and solar panels you erect, the less you’ll need to pay the electric companies. The more composting toilets you install, the less you’ll have to pay plumbing companies. The more gardening you do, the less you’ll have to pay someone else for your food.
In short: the more independent you become, the less codependent you will be on the state. And the state doesn’t like that, because they like your money way more than they like your freedom.
4. Planned Obsolescence
“Armaments, universal debt and planned obsolescence – those are the three pillars of Western prosperity.”
- Aldous Huxley
Speaking of making money off you, planned obsolescence is a way for companies to keep making money off you by capitalizing on your consumerist tendencies.
Let’s face it, we’re a world of consumers with Big Macs for brains and iPhones for hearts. We need our fix and we need it fast, and we are willing to fill all the landfills in the world, and then some, to get it.
Planned obsolescence is designed into a product to encourage the consumer to buy the next upgrade.
Everything from toasters to automobiles, microwaves to cell phones are prone to planned obsolescence by greedy companies that know you will come back for more no matter how many times your things-things-things fall apart.
5. Civil Asset Forfeiture
“The State is nothing more nor less than a bandit gang writ large.”
- Ludwig Von Mises
As if police brutality, extortion, and overreach of power weren’t enough, unscrupulous police officials have been manipulating the deeply flawed federal and state civil asset forfeiture laws that give them permission to seize, keep, or sell any property allegedly involved in a crime.
The key word is “allegedly.” Because most of the time property is taken without even being charged with a crime. That’s crazy!
Originally meant to be used on large-scale criminal organizations, it is now used almost entirely on individuals, ruining people’s lives over petty “crimes.”
More and more police departments are using forfeiture to benefit their bottom lines. It’s less about fighting crime and more about profit. John Oliver did an excellent piece on the matter that gets right at the heart of the issue.
6. The US Imprisons More of its Population Than Any Other Country (And Profits Off it)
"Some may say that jailing people over their debts makes poverty into a crime. Well if that’s true, maybe we should just cut out the middle man and put all poor people in jail. Of course, this will require new prison facilities, which we can build using people who can’t pay their prison fees. Not as workers, as the bricks.”
-
Stephen Colbert.
Living in what is widely considered the “land of the free,” this one should come as a body blow to anybody who truly believes in freedom. The total prison population has grown by 500 percent over the last 30 years. 500!
The icing on this shit-cake is the deplorable fact that big corporations are making a killing off the prison system. Equal parts extortion and slavery, for-profit prisons do nothing in the way of rehabilitation and therapy, and everything in the way of profit and criminal relapse.
7. Forced Taxation is Theft
“Since few men are wise enough to rule themselves, even fewer are wise enough to rule others.”
- Edward Abbey
When taxation is forced, one cannot say they live in a free country. When taxation is not optional, the country forcing the tax is not free. Bottom line. If one does not pay their taxes, in such a country, they are threatened with violence or prison if they don’t pay.
That is point-blank extortion. And since it is being done by an authoritarian government, it is naked tyranny.
If one feels like paying taxes, then they should feel free to pay. That’s fair, because that’s voluntary. But if the state is using its monopoly on violence to get money out of you, that is not fair, that is extortion. It really is that simple.
If freedom is primary then voluntarism is paramount. The use of state services built off taxes is an entirely different matter with entirely different solutions, and is an irrelevant red herring to the issue at hand.
8. You’re Not “Allowed” to be Stateless, But You Can Be
“A man without a government is like a fish without a bicycle.”
- Alvaro Koplovich
Statelessness is an alien concept in our world, even though it can be extended to all living beings “in principle” and “in theory,” at its irreducible bedrock truth, it is exceptionally difficult to be sovereign and stateless.
This is because the entire world is plagued with the disease of statism.
It is so second-nature to our existence that we never question it. We might as well be fish questioning water. But we are not fish. We are human beings with the ability for deep logic, higher reasoning, and basic common sense.
That is, unless we are being oppressed into blind servitude and myopic subordination and we are unwilling to question things… And here we are.
Similar to living off the grid, you’re not supposed to know this one because then the corrupt nation states of the world would have less control over you. And, don’t be fooled, it’s all about control, as Mike Gogulski found out firsthand.
Unfortunately, the cons outweigh the pros on becoming a stateless person (Though these two gents seem to be enjoying it).
Especially because we are social creatures and most of the other social creatures in our world are conditioned statists.
As Nietzsche famously said, “State is the name of the coldest of all cold monsters. Coldly it lies; and this lie slips from its mouth: ‘I, the state, am the people.’”
9. The Police Are Not legally Obligated to Protect You
“There’s no weakness as great as false strength.”
-
Stefan Molyneux
Most people falsely and ignorantly assume that it is the sworn duty of the police to protect and to serve. But it is actually the exception, not the rule.
A cop protecting and serving is doing so in a humane capacity and not because he/she is obligated to do so. They just happen to be acting humanely while wearing a badge.
The reality is that power tends to corrupt. This applies especially to police. And especially-especially to police that are trained to be offense-minded, oppressive, extorting, overreaching, and violent enforcers of a statist agenda.
The solution is not more ill-trained offense-minded police with too much power, but more well-trained defense-minded police with just enough power (a power with built-in checks and balances in place to prevent power from corrupting).
In short: a complete eradication of the Thin Blue Line.
If we lived within a horizontal democracy, we would have a better chance at being free.
No masters, no rulers, and hence, no chance for power to become concentrated in the hands of a few. Easier said than done, sure, but nothing worth doing was ever easy.
As it stands, it is impossible to live freely within an oligarchic plutocracy.
The plutocrats will simply continue buying up power by creating oppressive laws and “legal” extortion rackets that keep the people without wealth and power in a permanent state of poverty and powerlessness.
Add to that the use of lobbyists and a fiat currency based on debt, and you have a world of hoodwinked debt slaves under the delusion that they live in a free democratic republic.
How To Succeed In Western Media Without Really Trying
& Britain Moves To Criminalize Reading Extremist Material On The Internet August 17 2022 | From: StephenLendman / InformationClearingHouse Most important is loyalty to monied interests, war-profiteers, and the imperial state – serving as their press agents, abandoning fundamental journalistic principles, learning how to lie well, along with leaving honesty and integrity at home when heading for work.
Julian Assange offered his own recommended strategy for success. It’s simple, he said. Blame Russia for everything.
1. Pick random globally newsworthy event. Russian press will also be reporting it by definition.
2. Write story: Russian state secretly behind globally newsworthy event as proved by their press reporting it.
3. Profit!
Bashing Russia works, the bandwagon effect when everybody does it, following the same script.
Saying it makes it so. Repeating it ad nauseam works best. Lying is simpler than truth-telling – no evidence needed, no sources required.
Citing the usual unnamed ones works fine. Who’ll check? Lying pays well in America and other Western countries, truth-tellers shunted, contradicting the official narrative not tolerated.
Western major media are deplorable, truth-telling a lost art in their publications and broadcasts. The fourth estate, dominated by corporate giants, feature disinformation, fake news and advocacy instead of what legitimate journalism is supposed to be.
It’s shocking how low major media reporting has sunk. It’s biased, sensationalist, irresponsible rubbish, what Project Censored calls “junk food news.”
Major media are in cahoots with other powerful interests, government and private. Free and open societies are threatened when propagandists pose as journalists, letting fiction substitute for facts, stifling the free flow of content, shutting out dissent, working as paid liars, what famed journalist George Seldes called “prostitutes of the press.”
Imperial wars are called liberating ones, humanitarian intervention and responsibility to protect. Civil liberties are suppressed for our own good.
Beneficial social justice is considered heresy. The marketplace works best, we’re told, so let it. Patriotism means going along with what harms our welfare.
Independent journalism is the only legitimate kind, notably digital democracy, threatened by administration efforts to control Internet content.
Facebook, Twitter and other social media are willing accomplices. So are Google and other search engines, censoring and suppressing content, flagrantly violating the most vital of all constitutional rights – media and speech freedom.
During pre-television days, noted journalist and author AJ Liebling once said “People everywhere confuse what they read in newspapers with news.”
HL Mencken called US journalism “predominantly paltry and worthless. Its pretensions are enormous, but its achievements are insignificant.”
He explained why major media sanitize news, filtering out unwanted content, saying:
“The most dangerous (person) to any government is (anyone) able to think things out for himself (or herself), without regard to the prevailing superstitions and taboos.”
“Almost inevitably (they come) to the conclusion that the government…is dishonest, insane, and intolerable…”
The state of Western media today is too deplorable to fix. Independent sources provide the only reliable news, information and analysis, no others.
Britain Moves To Criminalize Reading Extremist Material On The Internet
For years, civil libertarians have warned that Great Britain has been in a free fall from the criminalization of speech to the expansion of the surveillance state.
Now the government is pursuing a law that would make the repeated viewing of extremist Internet sites a crime punishable to up to 15 years in prison.
It appears that the government is not satiated by their ever-expanding criminalization of speech. They now want to criminalize even viewing sites on the Internet. As always, officials are basically telling the public to “trust us, we’re the government.”
UK home secretary Amber Rudd is pushing the criminalization of reading as part of her anti-radicalization campaign . . . which turns out to be an anti-civil liberties campaign.
Rudd told a Conservative Party conference that she wants to crackdown on people “who view despicable terrorist content online, including jihadi websites, far-right propaganda and bomb-making instructions.”
So sites deemed “far-right propaganda” (but not far-left propaganda) could lead to your arrest - leaving the government with a sweeping and ambiguous mandate.
The law would move from criminalizing the downloading of information to simply reading it. The move confirms the long criticism of civil libertarians that the earlier criminalization would just be the start of an ever-expanding government regulation of sites and speech. Rudd admits that she wants to arrest those who just read material but do not actually download the material.
In the past, the government assumed near total discretion in determining who had a “reasonable excuse” for downloading information.
Britain has long relied on the presumed benevolence of the government in giving its sweeping authority in the surveillance and regulation of speech, including the media.
This move however is a quantum shift in government controls over speech and information. Indeed, this comes the closest to criminalization not just speech but thought. It is a dangerous concept and should be viewed as disqualifying for anyone who want to hold (or retain) high office.
What is particularly striking is that this new law seeks to create a new normal in a society already desensitized to government controls and speech crimes. Thee is no pretense left in this campaign - just a smiling face rallying people to the cause of thought control.
Sound familiar?
“We are different from all the oligarchies of the past, in that we know what we are doing. All the others, even those who resembled ourselves, were cowards and hypocrites.
The German Nazis and the Russian Communists came very close to us in their methods, but they never had the courage to recognize their own motives. They pretended, perhaps they even believed, that they had seized power unwillingly and for a limited time, and that just round the corner there lay a paradise where human beings would be free and equal.
We are not like that. We know that no one ever seizes power with the intention of relinquishing it. Power is not a means; it is an end. One does not establish a dictatorship in order to safeguard a revolution; one makes the revolution in order to establish the dictatorship.
The object of persecution is persecution. The object of torture is torture. The object of power is power."
The Great Transformation: A World Awakening August 16 2022 | From: WakeUpWorld / Various We are currently living in the most profoundly transformative time in the history of our Planet.
Never mind the Industrial Revolution or even the advent of our current techno wonder-world: this is a time of Awakening Consciousness on a planetary level, and not one single being or location on the earth will remain untouched.
Of course, you may not be remotely aware of this, as we each experience life depending upon where we put our attention - and right now there is a reality show of international proportions grabbing the spotlight from nightly news to social media.
However, those of us looking in another direction are perceiving an expansion in Consciousness of a cosmic magnitude.
It was a work based on my own awakening and recognition that “whatsoever we do to or for another, we are doing to or for our own selves - for good or ill.” It spoke of a way of cultivating Self-Awareness and expanding Consciousness, and was published in the midst of the Great Recession - a crisis that demanded a rethinking of priorities and a recreating of systems.
Unfortunately, rather than accept that uncomfortable truth and the accompanying challenge, the powers-that-be scrambled to recreate the status quo with all haste.
Nine years later we are experiencing the consequences of those decisions with a vengeance - a nationwide dissatisfaction of such profound depth it has led to an unprecedented rejection of establishment thinking and the elevation of an antihero into a position of power.
Meanwhile, the energetics of Transformation - not to be trifled with by out-of-control egos of any stature - are barreling on and showing up globally: from the astonishing upstart in the Vatican speaking a Christ-like rhetoric of caring for the poor, to alternative energy becoming a new norm, and governments around the world granting rights to animals, water and the Earth herself.
In all this we are witnessing what I call the Great Transformation: a period of societal upheaval and political antics indicating the death throes and approaching dissolution of the Old Paradigm on the one hand, and a greater acceptance of our interdependence arising in the multitudes, leading us toward a new way of being in harmony with all life, on the other.
“The Evolution Revolution is our only solution ‘fore we kill ourselves with our insanity. The nuclear madness, environmental sadness, all the actions that deny our Unity - the evolution Revolution’s what we need…”
- Sahara Devi, The Evolution Revolution Rap
So where does that leave us as individuals, the ‘little people’ who may feel powerless to have an impact in the face of such great turbulence? Where does the average Joe, a decent, hardworking, live-and-let-live kind of guy, who abhors how things are but doesn’t have a clue what to do about it, find the power to make a difference if he is not a protester, activist, billionaire, ‘celebrity’ or CEO?
If we are not simply reactive organisms, responding to stimuli like Pavlov’s dogs, we have the profoundly influential power (and empowerment) of intentional, conscious choice.
We can choose where to put our attention, we can choose what to feed with our energy, we can choose what to support with our money, we can choose how to respond to what we perceive, and we can choose the words and tone of voice in our speaking. We can choose the attitude and intention we bring into our world, and more specifically, our community.
“May I live this day compassion of heart, clear in word, gracious in awareness, courageous in thought, and generous in love.”
- John O’Donohue
It’s actually quite simple: the key to the power of the individual (those who en masse make up the overwhelming majority) is in relationship - because the basis of a harmonious life in any society depends upon our inter-relatedness and how we choose to treat each other on a daily basis.
We needn’t wait for a natural disaster to evoke a sense of ‘all in this together’ because we really ARE all in this - Life - together.
We needn’t wait for a catastrophe to inspire kindness, cooperation, consideration, generosity or compassion - we can choose to embody those qualities and express them in every encounter, every day - and race, religion, nationality, gender or even political affiliation need never come into play.
Start where you are. The simplest way to say it is: Be friendly. We can choose to be friendly and pleasant when engaged in transactions with the cashier or waitress who serves us, we can choose to be considerate of others when we’re driving down the street, we can choose to be kind, supportive or complimentary in every human transaction.
In a world that has sped up exponentially, just being willing to spend the moment it takes to be still and listen to what another wants to express is a kindness.
“Kindness is a language that the deaf can hear and the blind can see.”
-
Mark Twain
All around us are folks working at jobs we’ve done, or jobs we would never want to do. These people are not nameless ciphers, they are our neighbors - someone’s mother, father, sister, child or loved one - and they are serving us in the positions they occupy.
What if we expressed appreciation for their service and made their encounter with us a moment of warmth and connection?
What if our default intention as we go about our daily life was making people feel good about themselves? What if our speaking elicited the response: “You made my day.”
The change we want to see in our world is not something that can be legislated or imposed from without; it is not something we can achieve through protest. It is something that can only come from within each one of us choosing to bring a little more kindness into our way of being as we go about the business of living our lives.
Quantum physics tells us how the observer affects that which it observes - this is the way as individuals we affect our collective reality.
What if we started to observe through the eyes of Love? In the same way that the reward of patience is patience, the reward of kindness is finding oneself living in a kind world. Verily: whatsoever we embody and express creates the world in which we live.
It’s a question of critical mass. Small numbers have the power to affect collective consciousness and do, as when TM meditators demonstrably reduced crime in cities by their focus.
When we recognize we are part of a whole and continuously contributing the quality of our energy to that whole, we can begin to choose to embody and express more kindness, raising the vibratory rate of the collective and contributing to a transformed society.
What A Coincidence: Greta Thunberg Is A Blood Relative Of The Rothschild Clan & The “Great Zero Carbon” Conspiracy And The WEF’s “Great Reset” August 15 2022 | From: EuropeRenaissance / Electroverse / GlobalResearch / Various
The house of the Rothschild bankers reluctantly confirms the undeniable. Greta Thunberg is a blood relative of the notorious Rothschild chain of nation-buyers.
Behind Greta – Luigi Di Maio (born 6 July 1986) is an Italian politician serving as Minister of Foreign Affairs since 5 September 2019
It explains much about the precocious adolescent’s celebrity status drooled over by presidents and prime ministers – and, of course, the slobbering ‘on-message’ media barons of the Western swamps.
By the way, the net worth of Greta’s parents is estimated at $3 million – that we know about.
Not bad for a modestly successful opera musician and her stage actor husband.
Greta Thunberg will return to Davos, despite the fact that last year she ended up disappointed. The young Swedish activist will meet with various political leaders, including the Swiss federal president, the socialist Simonetta Sommaruga. Greta Thunberg with Christine Lagarde, last year in Davos
The media became interested in the alleged kinship after a source at the large Swedish bank Handelsbanken stated that the Thunberg family had received transfers from the Rothschild Foundation to their accounts.
Despite this information appearing in the tabloid press, the bank was so zealous to find the source of the leak that it raised suspicions.
After two weeks of research, it turned out that the pubescent activist’s great-grandfather Joachim Thunberg was the son of Lionel Rothschild, who was illegitimate but was recognised in 1928.
As his mother brought him up alone for the first two years, he was given her surname.
Joachim was then adopted by his biological father, and from the age of 12, he moved to France. There he received his education and then studied additionally in London.
At the age of 26, Joachim Rothschild-Thunberg became one of the most successful bankers in Sweden. His success lasted until 1957 when he sold the bank, donated most of his capital to certain ‘foundations’ and retired.
According to the Rothschild family, Greta Thunberg is indeed the great-great-granddaughter of one of their most famous representatives, but her environmental activities, they assured, are not related to her origins and are not financed by the house in any way.
Of course not; her spectacular international celebrity status that propelled giant corporations to make billions in environmental pursuits is purely coincidental.
The fact of the transfers to the Thunberg family was neither confirmed nor denied in the announcement.
German Professor: Climate Change Is Delusional Nonsense
One of Germany’s most distinguished atmospheric scientists, Professor Hermann Harde, has slammed his nation’s politicians for being duped into “believing they can save the world”.
The vast majority of the published studies and “horror scenarios” are not based on a secure physical foundation, said Harde, “but rather represent computer games that reflect what was fed in”.
The idea that humans can control the climate with their CO2 emissions is an “absolute delusion”.
There is considerable doubt over the “scientifically untenable thesis” of human-caused climate change, continued the Professor, “and it is completely wrong to assume that 97% of climate scientists, or even more, would assume only anthropogenic warming”.
Climate and energy policy need to be based on reliable knowledge, “and not on speculations or belief”.
For years now, Germany’s politicians have been placating the ‘green movement’ by closing nuclear and coal power stations and banning exploration for fossil fuels. At the same time, the country started importing large quantities of oil and gas from Russia.
For a nation happy to spend €100b a year on defense, handing your energy security over to a foreign, nuclear-armed superpower should be all the proof you need that politicians follow the gravy and the fad, and not what’s actually best for their country.
In Harde’s view, the extreme ‘climate emergency’ policies we’re all suffering with today (the main cause of inflation) are driven by competition between different research groups trying to outdo each other in predicting the most hair-raising horror scenarios.
These alarming, click-baity predictions attracted media attention, unsurprisingly; it then got an ill-informed public involved, “and our decision-makers felt obliged to quickly react”.
Cheap energy has been under attack for decades now. But it is absolutely clear, noted Harde, that without a reliable and sufficient energy supply, “Germany and many other countries that take such a path will end in anarchy”.
Or is that the goal?
So-called ‘journalism’ today isn’t designed to seek truth, it is rather a mechanism for the elites to propagandize their ideologies to a trusting and compliant population.
This is visible in the data: the vast majority of mass media journalists come from the exact same schools and neighborhoods as the elites and politicians they purport to be holding to account – which wasn’t always the case.
This is a deliberate move, of course, and results in the MSM sharing the same world-views as those in power, views that have little appeal to the general population; however, because the ideologies are promoted everywhere you turn – newspapers/TV/internet – it is assumed that this is the way to think, and so the sheeple blindly follow-along without question.
When a question is raised, however, and a sheep reaches in vain for a logical answer — bam! — it can feel like a sledgehammer to the head.
I, personally, can remember that moment vividly, and I also recall the crucial decision that follows:
"You take the blue pill, the story ends, you wake up in your bed and believe whatever you want to believe.
You take the red pill, you stay in wonderland, and I show you how deep the rabbit hole goes.”
I’m sure the majority of those reading Electroverse are, by now, riving in the deepest, darkest reaches of the rabbit hole; but truth is approaching, and along with it will come light and redemption for those of us branded ‘deniers’, ‘anti’-whatevers, and ‘heretics’.
Serving as another example: those who have avoided ‘the vaccine’ up until now have ‘won’. This is particularly true given the fresh revelations that all the vaccines are doing is keeping the virus in circulation; forcing it to mutate but never actually eradicating it.
It is proposed, by some scientists (see video here), that when the strain finally ‘breaks’ the vaccines’ resistance, which Mother Nature is currently aiding it in doing, it will be far more destructive to the vaccinated than the unvaccinated as the immune systems of the jabbed wouldn’t of been exposed to all the prior, steadily mutating ‘versions’.
Evolution really sorted this out for us: vaccines are a money-making ploy, a political power trip - they are not necessary.
Professor Harde’s research leads him to state that the UN’s Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change overestimates by five times the thermal effect of doubling carbon dioxide in the atmosphere.
He points to the “highly overlapping and saturated absorption bands” of CO2 and water vapor, and the significant reduced effect of greenhouses gases under cloud cover.
Harde goes on to state that the recent increase in CO2 has caused warming of less than 0.3°C over the last century.
Only about 15% of the global CO2 increase is of man-made origin. After doing a little math –15% of 0.3°C– the warming attributed to humans can only be 0.05, at most.
In view of this insignificant contribution, it is absurd to think that a ban on fossil fuels could even remotely impact Earth’s climate. Climatic changes are caused by grand natural forcings and interactions that exceed our human influence by orders of magnitude.
In Professor Hande’s opinion, modern climate science has developed more as an ideology and world view, rather than a serious science.
Scientists who question or point to inconsistencies in the global warming hypothesis are “publicly discredited” and excluded from research funds; research contributions in journals are suppressed; and in a reference to the recent Professor Peter Ridd case, scientists placed on leave or dismissed from their university.
What we call truths, continued Harde, depends to a large extent on our state of knowledge. He suggests that climate science requires a fundamental review of the hypotheses and a shift away from the widely established climate industry.
Science must not be misled by commerce, politics or ideology, he said. It is the genuine task of universities and state-funded research institutions “to investigate contradictory issues and to ensure independent, free research that gives us honest answers, even when these answers are often complex and do not fit into a desired political context”.
Harde concludes by warning politicians that it would be an irresponsible environmental and energy policy to continue to ignore serious peer-reviewed scientific publications that show a much smaller human impact on the climate than previously thought.
It is also irresponsible to shut down a reliable, adequate and affordable energy supply, to be replaced by millions of wind turbines, “that destroy our nature and shred trillions of birds and insects”.
Professor Hermann Harde retired a few years ago from Helmut Schmidt University in Hamburg as Professor of Experimental Physics after a long career in science academia.
This is the main reason he is able to speak out: his career isn’t on the line.
The “Great Zero Carbon” Conspiracy And The WEF’s “Great Reset”
The globalist Davos World Economic Forum is proclaiming the necessity of reaching a worldwide goal of “net zero carbon” by 2050. This for most sounds far in the future and hence largely ignored.
Yet transformations underway from Germany to the USA, to countless other economies, are setting the stage for creation of what in the 1970’s was called the New International Economic Order.
In reality it is a blueprint for a global technocratic totalitarian corporativism, one that promises huge unemployment, deindustrialization and economic collapse by design. Consider some background.
Klaus Schwab’s World Economic Forum (WEF) is currently promoting his favorite theme, the Great Reset of the world economy. The key to it all is understanding what the globalists mean by Net Zero Carbon by 2050.
The EU is leading the race, with a bold plan to become the world’s first “carbon neutral” continent by 2050 and reduce its CO2 emissions by at least 55% by 2030.
In an August, 2020 post on his blog, self-appointed global vaccine czar Bill Gates wrote about the coming crisis in climate:
“As awful as this pandemic is, climate change could be worse… The relatively small decline in emissions this year makes one thing clear: We cannot get to zero emissions simply - or even mostly - by flying and driving less.”
With a virtual monopoly on mainstream media as well as social media, the Global Warming lobby has been able to lead much of the world into assuming that the best for mankind is to eliminate hydrocarbons including petroleum, natural gas, coal and even the “carbon free” nuclear electricity by 2050, that we hopefully might avoid a 1.5 to 2 degree Centigrade rise in average world temperature.
There is only one problem with this. It’s cover for a diabolical ulterior agenda.
Many have forgotten the original scientific thesis put forward to justify a radical shift in our energy sources. It was not “climate change.” Earth climate is constantly changing, correlated to changes in the emission of solar flares or sunspot cycles affecting Earth climate.
Around the turn of the millennium as the previous solar-led warming cycle was no longer evident, Al Gore and others shifted the narrative in a linguistic sleight-of-hand to “Climate Change,” from Global Warming.
Now the fear narrative has gotten so absurd that every freak weather event is treated as “climate crisis.” Every hurricane or winter storm is claimed as proof that the Climate Gods are punishing us sinful CO2 emitting humans.
But wait. The entire reason for the transition to alternative energy sources such as solar or wind, and abandoning carbon energy sources, is their claim that CO2 is a greenhouse gas that somehow goes up to the atmosphere where it forms a blanket that supposedly warms the Earth below - Global Warming.
Greenhouse gas emissions according to the US Environmental Protection Agency come mostly from CO2. Hence the focus on “carbon footprints.”
What is almost never said is that CO2 cannot soar up into the atmosphere from car exhaust or coal plants or other manmade origins.
Carbon dioxide is not carbon or soot. It is an invisible, odorless gas essential to plant photosynthesis and all life forms on earth, including us. CO2 has a molecular weight of just over 44 while air (mainly oxygen and nitrogen) has a molecular weight of only 29.
The specific gravity of CO2 is some 1.5 times greater than air. That would suggest that CO2 exhaust gases from vehicles or power plants do not rise into the atmosphere some 12 miles or more above Earth to form the feared greenhouse effect.
Maurice Strong
To appreciate what criminal action is unfolding today around Gates, Schwab and advocates of an alleged “sustainable” world economy, we must go back to 1968 when David Rockefeller and friends created a movement around the idea that human consumption and population growth were the major world problem.
Rockefeller, whose wealth was based on oil, created the neo-Malthusian Club of Rome at the Rockefeller villa in Bellagio, Italy. Their first project was to fund a junk study at MIT called Limits to Growth in 1972.
A key organizer of Rockefeller’s ‘zero growth’ agenda in the early 1970s was his longtime friend, a Canadian oilman named Maurice Strong, also a Club of Rome member.
In 1971 Strong was named Undersecretary of the United Nations and Secretary General of the June 1972 Stockholm Earth Day conference. He was also a trustee of the Rockefeller Foundation.
Maurice Strong was a key early propagator of the scientifically unfounded theory that man-made emissions from transportation vehicles, coal plants and agriculture caused a dramatic and accelerating global temperature rise which threatens civilization, so-called Global Warming.
He invented the elastic term “sustainable development.”
As chairman of the 1972 Earth Day UN Stockholm Conference, Strong promoted population reduction and lowering of living standards around the world to “save the environment.” Some years later the same Strong stated:
"Isn’t the only hope for the planet that the industrialized civilizations collapse? Isn’t it our responsibility to bring that about?”
This is the agenda today known as the Great Reset or UN Agenda 2030.
Strong went on to create the UN Inter-governmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC), a political body which advances the unproven claim that manmade CO2 emissions were about to tip our world into irreversible ecological catastrophe.
Co-founder of the Club of Rome, Dr Alexander King, admitted the essential fraud of their environmental agenda some years later in his book, The First Global Revolution. He stated:
"In searching for a new enemy to unite us, we came up with the idea that pollution, the threat of global warming, water shortages, famine and the like would fit the bill …
All these dangers are caused by human intervention and it is only through changed attitudes and behaviour that they can be overcome. The real enemy, then, is humanity itself..”
King admitted that the “threat of global warming” was merely a ploy to justify an attack on “humanity itself.” This is now is being rolled out as the Great Reset and the Net Zero Carbon ruse.
In 2011, acting on the advice of Joachim Schnellnhuber, of the Potsdam Institute for Climate Impact Research (PIK), Angela Merkel and the German government imposed a total ban on nuclear electricity by 2022, as part of a 2001 government strategy called the Energiewende or Energy Turn, to rely on solar and wind and other “renewables.”
The aim was to make Germany the first industrial nation to be “carbon neutral.”
The strategy has been an economic catastrophe. Going from having one of the industrial world’s most stable low-cost and reliable electric generation grids, today Germany has become the world’s most expensive electric generator.
According to the German energy industry association BDEW, at the latest by 2023 when the last nuclear plant closes, Germany will face electricity shortfalls.
At the same time coal, the largest source of electric power, is being phased out to reach Net Zero Carbon. Traditional energy-intensive industries such as steel, glass production, basic chemicals, paper and cement manufacturing, are facing soaring costs and shutdowns or offshoring and loss of millions of skilled jobs.
The energy inefficient wind and solar, today costs some 7 to 9 times more than gas.
Germany has little sun compared with tropical countries, so wind is seen as the major source for green power. There is a huge input of concrete and aluminum needed to produce solar or wind farms.
That needs cheap energy - gas or coal or nuclear - to produce. As that is phased out, cost becomes prohibitive, even with no added “carbon taxes.”
Germany already has some 30,000 wind turbines, more than anywhere else in the EU. The gigantic wind turbines have serious problems of noise or infrasound health hazards for residents nearby the huge structures and weather and bird damage.
By 2025 an estimated 25% of existing German windmills will need replacement and waste disposal is a colossal problem. The companies are being sued as the citizens realize what a disaster they are.
To reach targets by 2030 Deutsche Bank recently admitted the state will need to create an “eco dictatorship.”
At the same time the German push to end gasoline or diesel transport by 2035 in favor of e-vehicles is on course to destroy Germany’s largest and most profitable industry, the auto sector, and take down millions of jobs.
The lithium-ion battery-powered vehicles have a total “carbon footprint” when the effects of mining lithium and producing all parts are included, that is worse than diesel autos.
And the amount of added electricity needed for a zero carbon Germany by 2050 would be far more than today, as millions of battery chargers will need grid electricity with reliable power.
Now Germany and the EU begin to impose new “carbon taxes,” allegedly to finance the transition to zero carbon. The taxes will only make electric power and energy even more expensive, insuring the faster collapse of German industry.
Depopulation
According to those advancing the Zero Carbon agenda, it is just what they desire: The deindustrialization of the most advanced economies, a calculated decades-long strategy as Maurice Strong said, to bring about the collapse of industrialized civilizations.
To turn the present world industrial economy backward to a wood-burning, windmill turning dystopia where blackouts become the norm as now in California, is an essential part of a Great Reset transformation under the Agenda 2030: UN Global Compact for Sustainability.
Merkel climateadviser, Joachim Schnellnhuber, in 2015 presented the radical green agenda of Pope Francis, the encyclical letter, Laudato Si , as Francis’ appointee to the Pontifical Academy of Science.
And he advised the EU on its green agenda. In a 2015 interview, Schnellnhuber declared that “science” has now determined that the maximum carrying capacity of a “sustainable” human population was some six billion fewer people:
"In a very cynical way, it’s a triumph for science because at last we have stabilized something - namely the estimates for the carrying capacity of the planet, namely below 1 billion people.”
To do that the industrialized world must be dismantled.
Christiana Figueres, a World Economic Forum Agenda Contributor and former executive secretary of the UN’s Framework Convention on Climate Change, revealed the true aim of the UN climate agenda in a February 2015 Brussels press conference where she stated, “This is the first time in human history that we are setting ourselves the task of intentionally changing the economic development model that has reigned since the Industrial Revolution.”
Figueres’ 2015 remarks are echoed today by French President Macron at the January 2021 World Economic Forum’s “Davos Agenda” where he claimed that “under the current circumstances, the capitalist model and open economy are no longer feasible.”
Macron, a former Rothschild banker, claimed that the “only way to get out of this epidemic is to create an economy that is more focused on eliminating the gap between the rich and the poor"."
Merkel, Macron, Gates, Schwab and friends will do so by bringing living standards in Germany and the OECD down to levels of Ethiopia or Sudan.
This is their zero carbon dystopia. Severely limit air travel, car travel, people movement, closing “polluting” industry, all to reduce CO2.
Uncanny how conveniently the coronavirus pandemic sets the stage for the Great Reset and UN Agenda 2030 Net Zero Carbon.
The Telltale Signs The Western Oligarchs Are Doomed August 14 2022 | From: JournalNeo / Various Everyone hates sore losers, so why do the globalists and their puppet media still exist? Reading today’s headlines, listening to failed politicians sputtering and stuttering around the world, I’m constantly dismayed by the apathy and ignorance of the world’s populations. Isn’t it abundantly clear by now, Vladimir Putin and Russia hold the winning cards?
Comment: This article is shared because it contains some interesting observations - however it should be noted that the author is clearly unaware of the Alliance (which Trump is working with) that is actually working to take the Cabal down. This is why there is a constant media onslaught against him.
[ From the Archives] Before I go on, let’s get something straight. I am a patriotic American who loves his country and her people. Nobody on God’s Earth can prove otherwise. Now that this is settled, let me make something else abundantly clear. America has no positive future without the kinship and partnership of Russia.
If the globalists elite who’ve admittedly set themselves up as the new world order (See leaders from Obama to Trump admitting same) remain on the present geo-policy course, then war or certain economic collapse will ensue.
Many of the world’s leaders already know this and are making moves to side with Russia should the inevitable happen suddenly. But before I go on, let’s look at some sore loser media headlines.
The western world’s most famous “fake news” tabloid these days, Newsweek continues its unending tabloid Russophobia with “Putin’s Birthday: Protests Call for his Exit as he Hits Retirement Age Under Russian Law”.
I’ll not get into how or why Newsweek became a media whore for the globalists, this Pew Research analysis of the magazine industry should explain this succinctly. The fact there is virtually no dissent aimed at Vladimir Putin inside Russia shows once again the Russian leader’s winning ways.
I can almost hear the average Newsweek policy genius reader glowing with agreement, “Hey, that’s right, it’s illegal for Putin to be president anymore!” As if the universe will turn over, and America will elect Hillary Clinton and become truly great again of Putin is gone!
Next in the sequence of news delivered by Google, I guess the Washington Post and the New York Times bombardment this morning was not harsh enough for the NSA’s favorite tool, and AFP bit parroted by The Times of India was highlighted for me. “Russia is not Putin’s says Pussy Riot’s Alekhina” stands out as a total waste of digital news space.
Once again, the mainstream and the elites running media in the west lost – this woman is a nobody, and nobody cares. Another desperation grab at attention, that´s all AFP is trying to do here. Enter what we know about CNN and admitted traffic sensationalism.
The typical Times of India readr chimes in in broken English, “Oooh, who, who, dat pooseee riot is a riot man! Dey some crazeee beaches” Give the world a break AFP.
Over at CNN the news network most in need of viewers even let’s US President Donald Trump off the hook for a day to paint a picture of Russia’s Putin alongside North Korean’s Kim wringing their hands at America’s most recent tragedy, which Trump is supposed to be distracted by.
“As Trump deals with tragedy, Putin and Kim regroup” is a fabrication, a propaganda tidbit meant for total idiots, and insult to intelligent life forms.
The story attempts to cement together all America’s justifiable and unreasonable fears into one comfortable globalist narrative – everything is Putin’s fault, and anything that is not can be solved by bombing North Korea to hell. Las Vegas gunman Stephen Paddock ends up aiding and abetting evil tyrants Putin and Kim in this fairytale.
Finally, the grand mucky muck of news, financial “go to” Bloomberg proclaims, “As Putin Turns 65, His Power is Slowly Waning”. I had to take a moment or two to stop laughing at seeing the ultimate loser, nobody Russian blogger Alexei Navalny in the feature photograph of this major Bloomberg story.
If this nincompoop western oligarch patsy is the best the Rothschilds and the American deep state can come up with to foil Vladimir Putin, they need to pack up and run for their lives.
The typical big chested banker idiot reading Bloomberg chimes in, “Thank God Putin’s on the way out, maybe my energy stocks can finally split when Israel annexes the West Bank for good!” Yeah, American investors don’t give a damn about dead soldiers or babies. ROI is the name of the Wall Street game.
I could go on and on, but the point of this report is to show the mediocrity I reveal in my upcoming book on this media war, the pitiful essence of failed democracy and capitalism – or the bred mediocrity of the elites who’ve lost the Great Game.
The bas sportsmanship and loser ethics you see in news against Putin every day, play out in my work “Putin’s Praetorians: The Top Kremlin Trolls Confess”, which is out this month.
The reason for my plug here is to frame the reality that Vladimir Putin has won at every turn not simply because of his or his team’s genius, but because of the losers they have faced.
Let’s take a brief look at what Vladimir Putin has done versus this elite world order and its trillion dollar media machine.
Even if we examine Putin’s efforts the last few years from a western globalist’s perspective, his strategies seems flawless. When the EU and NATO threatened Russia’s doorstep Ukraine, the Russian leader simply secured the frontiers by ensuring the naval base at Sevastopol remained secure, and that the Donbass would serve as a literal “no man’s land” should Kiev choose to arm up with NATO.
Take note, this is not actually what Putin did, but from the Washington think tank and Pentagon perspective, the event amount to a win for Putin. Next, in a bid to weaken Putin and Russia, the western oligarchs imposed massive sanctions that only ended up making Putin’s country and his position stronger.
Again, a win for Putin without hardly trying. In the meanwhile, as western media and politicians turned up the heat on the Russian leader, American and its coalition elevated the proxy war in Syria to thwart and Israeli enemy, and to cut off Putin’s South Stream pipeline plan.
Turkey was leveraged to shoot down Russia’s airmen, and the west threatened with a wider regional conflict. Again, Putin outmaneuvered western strategists and ended up in full alliance with Erdogan and Turkey.
Through the efficient use of military force against ISIL and “moderate” terrorists propped up by the US, the Saudis, and Israel, Russia’s leader made absolute fools of Washington and its satraps in London, Brussels, and Berlin.
As it stands now, with the mediocre losers in the west pounding out the same idiotic tune in media, Vladimir Putin is on the cusp of creating a grand coalition of his own, one that could end US dominance on the world stage forever. Putin’s meetings with Turkey’s Erdogan, with the Saudi King, and with Iran’s leadership show a polar shift in global influence.
For me, the inevitable emergence of Russia as a leader on the global stage is happening no matter what. While Trump stomps about threatening at the UN, Putin does not even waste the time attending. Instead, Russia’s leader leverages wins in Syria and elsewhere, along with the trend away from dollar dominance, to forge new friendships and possibilities.
The “loser” mentality American and European dinosaurs have adopted, it leaves them looking like fools who simply scramble to keep up, or to keep afloat at all. And the “loser” narrative in their media is the clearest indicator. Look at what Washington is trying to do to Russia’s RT in America.
It’s pitiful to see a tiny by comparison media effort, so feared by the trillion dollar ad network the western oligarchs created. Now they have Google, Twitter, Facebook, the US Senate, cyberwarfare companies, the technocrats, universities, and God knows who else – all attempting to mitigate the tiny voices of dissent. It’s pitiful.
The Individual Versus The Fake Collective August 13 2022 | From: NoMoreFakeNews / Various Trumpets blare. In the night sky, spotlights roam. A great confusion of smoke and dust and fog, and emerging banners, carrying the single message: WE. The great meltdown of all consciousness into a glob of utopian simplicity…
There are denizens among us. They present themselves as the Normals. Beyond all political objectives, there is a simple fact: those group-mind addicts who have given up their souls will rage against the faintest appearance of one who tries to keep his.
And in this rage, the soulless ones will try to pull the other down to where they live. And somehow, it all looks normal and proper and rational.
In the 1950s, before television had numbed minds and turned them into jelly, there was a growing sense of: the Individual versus the Corporate State.
Something needed to be done. People were fitting into slots. They were surrendering their lives in increasing numbers. They were carving away their own idiosyncrasies and their independent ideas.
But television, under the control of psyops experts, became, as the 1950s droned on, the facile barrel of a weapon:
“What’s important is the group. Conform. Give in. Bathe in the great belonging…”
Recognize that every message television imparts is a proxy, a fabrication, a simulacrum, an imitation of life one step removed. When this medium also broadcasts words and images of belonging and the need to belong, it’s engaged in revolutionary social engineering.
Whether it’s the happy-happy suburban-lawn family in an ad for the wonders of a toxic pesticide, or the mob family going to the mattresses to fend off a rival, it’s fantasy time in the land of mind control.
Television has carried its mission forward. The consciousness of the Individual versus the State has turned into: love the State. Love the State as family. In the only study I have been able to find, Wictionary partially surveys the scripts of all television shows from the year 2006, to analyze the words most frequently broadcast to viewers in America.
Out of 29,713,800 words, including the massively used “a,” “an,” “the,” “you,” “me,” and the like, the word “home” ranks 179 from the top. “Mom” is 218. “Together” is 222. “Family” is 250.
This usage reflects an unending psyop. Are you with the family or not? Are you with the group, the collective, or not? Those are the blunt parameters.
“When you get right down to it, all you have is family.” “Our team is really a family.” “You’re deserting the family.” “You fight for the guy next to you.” “Our department is like a family.” “Here at Corporation X, we’re a family.”
The committee, the group, the company, the sector, the planet. The goal? Submerge the individual.
Individual achievement, imagination, creative power? Not on the agenda. Something for the dustbin of history.
Aldous Huxley, Brave New World: “‘Ninety-six identical twins working ninety-six identical machines’! The voice was almost tremulous with enthusiasm. ‘You really know where you are. For the first time in history.’”
“The two aims of the Party are to conquer the whole surface of the earth and to extinguish once and for all the possibility of independent thought.”
The soap opera is the apotheosis of television. The long-running characters in Anytown are irreversibly enmeshed in one another’s lives. There’s no escape. There is only mind-numbing meddling.
“I’m just trying to help you realize we all love you (in chains).”
“Your father, rest his soul, would never have wanted you to do this to yourself…”
“How dare you set yourself apart from us. Who do you think you are?”
For some people, the collective “WE” has a fragrant scent - until they get down in the trenches with it. There they discover odd odors and postures and mutations. There they discover self-distorted creatures scurrying around celebrating their twistedness.
The night becomes long. The ideals melt. The level of intelligence required to inhabit this cave-like realm is lower than expected, much lower. Hypnotic perceptions, which are the glue that holds the territory together, begin to crack and fall apart, and all that is left is a grim determination to see things through.
As the night moves into its latter stages, some participants come to know that all their activity is taking place in a chimerical universe.
It is as if reality has been constructed to yield up gibberish. Whose idea was it to become deaf, dumb, and blind in the first place?
And then perhaps one person in the cave suddenly says: I EXIST. That starts a cacophony of howling.
In the aftermath of the 1963 assassination of JFK and the 1995 bombing of the Federal Building in Oklahoma City, the covert theme was the same: a lone individual did this.
A lone individual, detached from the group, did this. “Lone individuals are people who left the fold. They wandered from the communal hearth. Therefore, they inevitably became killers.”
In 1995, after the Oklahoma City Bombing, President Bill Clinton made a speech to the nation. He rescued his presidency by essentially saying, “Come home to the government. We will protect you and save you.”
He framed the crime in those terms. The individual versus the collective.
The history of human struggle on this planet is about the individual emerging FROM the group, from the tribe, from the clan. The history of struggle is not about the individual surrendering and going back INTO group identity.
As the trumpets blare in the night sky, as the fog-ridden spotlights roam, as the banners emerge carrying the single message, WE, as people below are magnetically drawn to this show, a unpredicted thing happens:
Someone shouts: WHAT IS WE? Other pick up the shout. And the banners begin to catch fire and melt. They drip steel and wax and the false grinding of hypnotic dreams breaks its rhythm.
The whole sky-scene stutters like a great weapon losing its capacity to contain heat. The sky itself drips and caves inward and collapses, and the trumpets tail off and there is a new fresh silence.
The delusion, in pieces, is drifting away… The cover: gone. Behind it is The Individual. What will he do now?
Will he seek to find his inherent power, the power he cast aside in his eagerness to join the collective?
Will he? Or will he search for another staged melodrama designed to absorb him in an all-embracing WE?
Puppet Masters Of Media Propaganda August 12 2022 | From: HuffPost / Various In this day and age of vast amounts of news and media that bombard and compete for public attention fewer and fewer are able to discriminate fact from fiction.
Shocking tabloid headlines, once reserved for amusement at grocery store line checkout, are now used by the mainstream press to bait the hook to get the consumer to bite and read/watch more.
Journalists and reporters, if you can now call them such, are woefully compromised in the bias they take in propagandizing issues that ultimately serve the agenda of the media giants and hidden elite (owners of these media conglomerates) for whom they work and shape the perceptional lens of the masses.
Is there a intentional agenda behind all this and if so, whose masterminding it and for what purpose? The answer, I believe, is YES.
One of the greatest known masterminds of media propaganda and tactical distraction was Dr. Edward L. Bernays. He is considered the founding Father of Public Relations and was also the nephew of famed psychoanalyst Sigmund Freud.
Some twenty-five years ago I spent an afternoon with Dr. Bernays picking his brain on the subject of PR strategies to promote humanitarian concerts I envisioned could promote world peace.
In his late 90’s at the time, he was kind and considerate with me as he served coffee and crumb cakes and showed photos of himself with Henry Ford, Thomas Edison and numerous US Presidents of this era that he had worked with.
Over the course of the next 25 years I would experience great pushback from various power structures in achieving my goals towards peace.
I went to great lengths to educate myself about why this could be occurring and ultimately learned of the real power and philosophies that drove the manipulative skills use of Bernay’s.
Edward’s agenda of herding society in specific directions, on behalf of those who envisioned a new world order, is apparent in his quote:
“We are governed, our minds are molded, our tastes formed, our ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard of... If we understand the mechanism and motives of the group mind, it is now possible to control and regiment the masses according to our will without them knowing it...
...The conscious and intellectual manipulation of the organized habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in democratic society. Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country.”
Towards bringing a spotlight to the elite few who orchestrate the monstrous intent of mind-controlling society, consider this excerpt from a speech from John F. Kennedy before the American Newspaper Publishers Association on April 27, 1961 (some two years before his assassination) :
“We are opposed around the world by a monolithic and ruthless conspiracy that relies on covert means for expanding its sphere of influence - on infiltration instead of invasion, on subversion instead of election, on guerrillas by night instead of armies by day.
It is a system that has conscripted vast human and material resources into the building of a tightly knit, highly efficient machine that combines military, diplomatic, intelligence, economic, scientific and political operations...
Its preparations are concealed, not published. Its mistakes are buried, not headlined. Its dissenters are silenced, not praised. No expenditure is questioned, nor rumor printed, no secret revealed. It conducts the Cold War, in short, with a war -time discipline no democracy would ever hope or wish to match...
...That is why the Athenian lawmaker Solon decreed it a crime for any citizen to shrink from controversy. And that is why our press was protected by the First Amendment -the only business in America specifically protected by the Constitution - not primarily to AMUZE and ENTERTAIN not to emphasize the Trivial and the sentimental, not to simply “give the public what it wants” -but to inform, to arouse, to reflect, to state our dangers and our opportunities, to indicate our crises and our choices, to lead, mold, educate and sometime even anger public opinion.”
In order to place the agenda and motive of mind-controlling society through the modern media machine lets consider a few historic quotes that point to people behind such actions.
“All Wars are fought for money.”
- Socrates (469 BC)
“When one with honeyed words but evil mind persuades the mob, great woes befall the state.” - Euripides (406 BC) from his play “Orestes”
The means of defense against foreign danger have been always the instruments of tyranny at home. Among the Romans it was a standing maxim to excite a war, whenever a revolt was apprehended. Throughout all Europe, the armies kept up under the pretext of defending, have enslaved the people.”
- James Madison
“Experience has shown, that even under the best forms of government those entrusted with power have, in time, and by slow operations, perverted it into tyranny.”
- Thomas Jefferson
“Those who would give up essential liberty to purchase a little temporary safety, deserve neither liberty or safety.”
- Benjamin Franklin
“In every age it has been the tyrant, the oppressor and the exploiter who has wrapped himself in the cloak of patriotism, or religion, or both to deceive and overawe the People.” - Eugene Victor Debs, Voices of a People’s History of the United States
“For PEOPLE to rule themselves in a REPUBLIC, they must have virtue; for a TYRANT to rule in a TYRANNY, he must use FEAR.”
- William J. Federer
“Those who are capable of tyranny are capable of perjury to sustain it.”
- Lysander Spooner
“A democracy which makes or even effectively prepares for modern, scientific war must necessarily cease to be democratic. No country can be really well prepared for modern war unless it is governed by a tyrant, at the head of a highly trained and perfectly obedient bureaucracy.”
-
Aldous Huxley, Oxford graduate, English writer, novelist and philosopher.
One of the greatest truisms of the human existence and wisdom, when describing the various monstrous realities that have occurred on our earth, is “Follow the money.” In part II of this series of articles we’ll next explore the subject of “Banking and War Profiteering.”
As a pretext to subject, I encourage you to consider the nature of greed, money and power as described by Mayer Amschel Rothschild, considered the ‘Founding Father of International Banking’: “Let me issue and control a Nation’s money and I care not whom makes the laws.”
The Hypnotic Symbols Of Modern Medicine August 11 2022 | From: JonRappoport/ Various
There are four major symbols I want to take up here.The important thing to remember is: these symbols conspire to produce a “view of self” in the patient.
The patient comes to see himself in a certain way, and this way implies a reduction of his own power. Reducing his own power, he literally sees himself as smaller.
The cascade of effects continues. Seeing himself as smaller, he comes to believe he has no significant role in his own health and well-being.
And armed with that conviction, he comes to believe he is gradually deteriorating.
This belief is a perception, a view of self. This view, like a magnet, attracts and interprets events as further evidence of weakening and deterioration…
This reality is far from the only possible one, but it is the one the patient chooses.
The first symbol is SYMPTOM
The person sees and experiences feelings and physical manifestations, and in the doctor’s office, he learns these are symptoms that collectively MEAN SOMETHING. He has symptoms. These are not random, he is told.
They are not transient. They cannot be ignored. They will not go away on their own. They are serious.
The doctor’s diagnosis of the symptoms makes it clear that the patient has a disease, an illness, a disorder.
A label is applied. A name. There is no doubt that the patient has this named disease. This is a THING. An entity.
It is not a passing phenomenon. It is solid and stable. It is singular.
The third symbol is TREATMENT
This is what the doctor tells the patient he must do. Take a medicine. Have surgery. The treatment will get rid of the condition.
The treatment is specific. It is geared to address the condition. It is the solution to the problem.
The fourth symbol is the DOCTOR
He knows. Nobody else knows. He is the authority. He is in charge of recognizing the symptoms, which lead him to make the diagnosis of the condition, which is turn leads him to prescribe the treatment.
This progression is lock-step. There no other factors to consider. The doctor has effectively ruled out all other possibilities.
These four symbols lead the patient into a state of obedience. And in that state, he realizes his own power is beside the point and is irrelevant.
Of course, this is not the first time he has been to the doctor’s office. This is not the first time he has been put through this progression of the four symbols. Therefore, the effect on him, over time, is magnified.
Each successive visit to the doctor confirms he can and does develop new sets of symptoms - and each set implies a new condition. As the conditions pile up, the patient is more convinced than ever that he is composed of diseases that appear “out of nowhere.”
He views himself as a set of symptoms which indicate a condition and imply a treatment. This is, in a sense, who and what he is.
Over time, his conditions tend to be more serious.
He never imagines that the toxic treatments he is taking are contributing to, or causing these more serous conditions - because each disease has a separate name, as if it exists in a vacuum.
The doctor handles each diagnosis in that fashion. “Now you have this…and now you have that.”
When the patient reaches a point where he views himself as BEING these symptoms and conditions and very little else, he simply waits for the next arrival of the next set of symptoms and the next condition.
This is how powerful symbols can be. In a better world, people would be educated in the use and effects of symbols, before succumbing to them.
Some would say, “What do you mean, symbols? The doctor is real, I do have physical problems, the doctor really does make a diagnosis, and I do take real medicines. Why are you talking about symbols?”
Because what locks a person in is what happens in his mind. And what happens in his mind is this parade of symbols.
That’s what forms the basis of HIS VIEW OF HIMSELF. He rolls these symbols around in his mind and accepts them and locks himself in, and he sees himself as deteriorating.
“I am a deteriorating person. That’s who I am. That’s what I am. I’m waiting for the next round of symptoms and the diagnosis and treatment from the doctor.
Any other ideas about what I am and what I can do are beside the point. No reason to entertain them. I have the potential to be more than a deteriorating person? What does that even mean? It makes no sense.”
The person doesn’t understand symbols, doesn’t understand how he is dealing with them, and so he closes the book on his life and future. This process is not necessary, but he doesn’t grasp that.
Am I claiming that everything is in the mind? Nothing else possibly matters? No one ever really gets sick?
No. But I am saying a shocking amount of what turns out to be a person’s future or non-future flows from how he recognizes, or doesn’t recognize, symbols and how he reads them and interprets them, how he accepts or rejects them, how he choose to surpass them or succumb to them.
Yes, there is a doctor. Yes, there is such a thing as physical illness. Yes, the doctor is delivering a diagnosis and calling it a condition. But these factors are not in the mind, unless the physical doctor can squeeze himself into the patient’s head.
In the mind, there are symbols of these elements - and that is what the patient is dealing with, for better or for worse.
And over the long-term, for most patients, it’s worse.
The Rothschild Bloodline: Financial Wizards & Wealthy Cults August 10 2022 | From: Omnithought / BibliotecaPleyades The content of the following article gives the impression that the Rothschild bloodline is the wealthiest and most powerful family on Earth. The wealthiest and most powerful families on Earth are the people who hide in the shadows. In this lifetime, the chance of you hearing their names is near zero percent. You have a better chance of winner a million dollar lottery jackpot than hearing or seeing their names on the news or internet. – Pao Chang
Two neighbor horse farmers came together one day to talk business. The first farmer sold his horse to the second for a quarter million dollars, and then bought it back for about $20 more. He could now advertise his horse (actually worth $20), as a horse he that he had paid over a quarter of a million dollars for.
We can laugh over such schemes. And perhaps we should laugh at ourselves for having been fooled, for if there is one area in life that exceeds the religious in deception, and touches all of us it is the financial.
What else can we do about it except laugh? The famous poet Lord Byron describes the archtype of our two farmers in 1823, Who keeps the world, both old and new, in pain Or pleasure? Who makes politics run glibber all? The shade of Bonaparte’s noble daring?
Jew Rothschild and his fellow-Christian, Baring. You’ll learn about some other ,,neighbor horse traders” in this chapter too.
Lord Rothschild in his book The Shadow of a Great Man quotes a letter sent from Davidson on June 24, 1814 to Nathan Rothschild:
“As long as a house is like yours, and as long as you work together with your brothers, not a house in the world will be able to compete with you, to cause you harm or to take advantage of you, for together you can undertake and perform more than any house in the world.”
The closeness of the Rothschild brothers is seen in a letter from Saloman (Salmon) Rothschild to his brother Nathan on Feb. 28, 1815, “We are like the mechanism of a watch: each part is essential.
This closeness is further seen in that of the 18 marriages made by Mayer Amschel Rothschild’s grandchildren 16 were contracted between first cousins.
Visiting the Nation the Rothschilds Built
In 1974, in the summer after the Yom Kippur War this Author toured Israel, and got the chance to personally visit many of the buildings like the Knesset that the Rothschild’s money has built.
The Knesset is the Israeli equivalent to the US Congress’s Capitol building. One of the Rothschilds in his will left money for ongoing building projects in Israel, and the Rothschilds are honored with a Street named after them in Jerusalem.
The people of Germany and Turkey have been very close. I can recall meeting Turkish “Gastarbeiter” (guestworkers) in Germany.
The reader will remember that Turkey fought on Germany’s side in W.W. I. A few powerful Jews, including the Rothschilds were responsible for the wording of the Treaty imposed on Germany that ended W.W. I.
The treaty gave the Rothschilds the German owned railway rights in Palestine (which had been part of the Turkish Ottoman Empire), thus paving the way for the Rothschilds to have a sure leverage to dictate policy concerning Palestine.
The Rothschilds had made loans to Turkey which amounted to almost one hundred million pounds. When the Turkish government collapsed after W.W. I because they were on the losing side, the Rothschilds had a claim on Palestine because of those unpaid Turkish loans.
The British government followed the dictates of the Rothschilds. The British were given a mandate over Palestine, and the Rothschilds were able to through their proxies in the British government, to create the steps that led to the nation of Israel.
The Rothchilds as Prophets
One item stands out as a person listens to the International Bankers and reads their books. They believe money is what makes the world go round. If you have money, you can do anything.
Money is “God”, and it is worshipped and served. Even after these families accumulate more than can be spent, these devotees continue selling their souls for this false but powerful god.
The great poet-philosopher Heinrich Heine (a Banker’s son) said, “Money is the god of our time, and Rothschild is his prophet.” Following the cue of the Rothschilds, Heinrich Heme, a Jew, signed his name by drawing a Seal of Solomon.
Amschel Rothschild is reported to have said, “Give me control of the economics of a country; and I care not who makes her laws. Today his descendents meet twice daily in London to dictate to the world what the world price of gold will be. They also dictate what the “Federal Reserve System” will do with America’s finances.
Another God Too
According to eye-witnesses, who were prominent enough to visit one of the British Rothschild homes, the Rothschilds worship yet another god too, Satan. They set a place for him at their table.(8a) The Rothschilds have been Satanists for many generations.
The Rothschilds are an important part of the history of the Seal of Solomon (also known as hexagram, Magen David, six-pointed star, Star of David.) The Seal of Solomon, the hexagram, was not considered a Jewish symbol before the Rothschilds began using it.
Throughout the Middle Ages the Seal of Solomon had been used by Arab Magicians, Cabalist Magicians, Druid witches and Satanists. One of the few ancient uses of the symbol was on the floor of a 1,200 year old Moslem Mosque found where Tel Aviv is today.
In the twelve century an Ashkenazic Jew Menahem ben Duji, who thought he was the Messiah, used the magical symbol. Because the Rothschilds were Satanists they adopted this powerful magic symbol in 1822 for their coat- of-arms.
The name they adopted for their family actually comes from the fact that in the 17th century Mayer Amschel Bauer began hanging out a red hexagram in front of their house to identify it. Mayer Amschel then decided to take the name red-schield (Rothschild in German) after the red Seal of Solomon that they used.
Alice Bailey in A Treatise On White Magic, p. 412, claims that the Hierarchy has a special group which she calls “the financial group” ,,controlling all that can be converted into energy, and constituting a dictatorship over all modes of intercourse, commerce and exchange.”
According the Luciferian Alice Bailey, the “financial group” is the latest group directed by the Hierarchy. In 1836 Zevi Hirsch Kalischer approached Rothschild and proposed Rothschild buy all of Erez Israel. It took many years for the Rothschilds to finally create Israel.
The Ultra-orthodox Jews in Israel will not serve in the Israeli army because they know that Almighty God was not behind the creation of modern Israel, but rather the rich ungodly apostate Jews.
They refuse to serve the ungodly. They are more wiser than men like Jerry Falwell who run around proclaiming Israel is God’s nation. Men like Falwell are the type that this Author finds reference to repeatedly in Jewish documents that speak of their power within the Fundamentalists.
God is ultimately in charge, he has allowed Hitler to come to power, Stalin to come to power, and the Rothschilds to come to power. In the same sense that God rules over and blessed Stalin’s Russia, he rules over America and Israel.
To twist scriptures about God seating the rulers and then to apply them to bless one Satanic secular communist nation and not another is inconsistent and not correctly using the Word of Truth. Some people object that the conspiracy of Power is labelled Jewish rather than Satanic by certain concerned citizens.
This objection is valid - however, will these objectors then take the obvious next step and admit the nation of Israel which the Rothschild’s created is Satanic and not Jewish? But then who knows precisely why people do what they do?
If you ask someone why he does something, he will give you one answer today, another tomorrow, and another the next day. Does he do what he does for a real reason, or a single motive? Perhaps to label the Power as only Satanic or only Jewish or only Masonic is to neglect the personal human dimension.
This personal human dimension is godless. Being godless it fills that void, by pretending its men are gods. This brings us right back to the Gnostic religions and Satan. Most Jewish people do not concern themselves with learning the occultic significance to their treasured Magen David (Star of David).
King David did not have anything to do with the hexagram, although his son Solomon did when he began worshipping Ashtoreth (star, also known as Astarte, Chiun, Kaiwan, Remphan, and Saturn). Solomon built altars to Star (Astarte, aka Ashtoreth).
The god Saturn is associated with the Star but both Saturn and Astarte also been identified with a number of other names. Saturn is an important key to understanding the long heritage this conspiracy has back to antiquity.
The city of Rome was originally known as Saturnia or City of Saturn. The Roman Catholic church retains much of the Saturn worship in its ritual.
Saturn also relates to Lucifer. In various occult dictionaries Saturn is associated with evil. Saturn was important to the religion of Mithra, and also the Druids.
Charles T. Russell, in a 1891 letter to Baron (Lord) Rothschild, mailed from Palestine, outlined possible courses of action that could be taken to establish the Jews in Palestine.
Russell’s letters praised the Rothschild’s money which established Jewish colonies in Palestine. Russell writes Rothschild,
“What is needed here, therefore, next to water and cleanliness, is a good government which will protect the poor from the ravenous and the wealthy. Banking institutions on sound bases, and doing business honorably, are also greatly needed", Russell continues:
“May the God of Jacob direct you, my dear Sir, and all interested with you in the deliverance and prosperity of Israel, and blessed will they be who, to any extent, yield themselves as his servants in fulfilling his will as predicted.”
When the Mormon Church needed financing in the late 19th century, they went to Kuhn, Loeb Co. To explain the Rothschild’s control of Kuhn, Loeb Co. here is some background information. The method that the House of Rothschild used to gain influence, was the same that Royalty had used for centuries, marriage.
The Rothschild children, girls and boys, have had their spouses chosen on the basis of alliances that would benefit the House of Rothschild, but since consolidating world power they generally have married cousins these last two centuries.’
Jacob Schiff grew up in the house that the Rothschild’s had at 148 Judengasse, Frankfurt. Jacob Schiff came to the United States with Rothschild capital and took over control of a small jewish banking concern founded by two Cincinnati dry goods merchants Abraham Kuhn and Solomon Loeb. He even married Soloman’s daughter.
In 1885, Loeb retired, and Schiff ran the Kuhn, Loeb Co. for the Rothschilds until 1920 when he died. During Russell’s and Brigham Young’s day, Lord Rothschild was considered the “lay leader of world Jewry.”
Edmund Rothschild was President of the Jewish Colonization Assoc, which was a major Zionist group. Amselm Rothschild indicated that his grandfather Amschel Mayer Rothschild had insisted in Clause 15 of his will to his children, “may they and their descendants remain constantly true to their ancestral Jewish faith.”
However, the will has been secret and there is no way of knowing what it says.
The Rothschilds have not remained true to the Orthodox faith. If this was actually what Clause 15 said then something is amiss.
The Jewish world has showered the Rothschilds with praises:
“The Rothschilds govern a Christian world. Not a cabinet moves without their advice. They stretch their hand, with equal ease, from Petersburg to Vienna, from Vienna to Paris, from Paris to London, from London to Washington.
Baron Rothschild, the head of the house, is the true king of Judah, the prince of the captivity, the Messiah so long looked for by this extraordinary people… .The lion of the tribe of Judah, Baron Rothschild, possesses more real force than David–more wisdom than Solomon.”
The Prieure de Sion-the Elders of Sion also relates to the Rothschilds who are reported to serve on a jewish council of Elders of Sion. The Rothschilds have “helped” the Jewish people the Rothschild’s own way.
For those who admire stingyness, the Rothschilds will be greatly looked up to. For instance, the extent of James Rothschild’s charity in France to poor Jews was 5 francs (the equivalent of $1). Their dynasty has destroyed honest Jews along with Christians. Today, few dare criticize the Rothschilds.
Co-Masters of the World: Connections to Secret Societies
The Rothschilds had played a major role in the Bavarian Illuminati, and it is known that a least one of the sons of Amsel was a member.
As the reader remembers, Amsel placed his sons in the major European capitals, where they each set up the principal banking houses.
By their own secret intelligence service and their own news network they could outmanouver any European government. The large amounts of voluminous correspondence by Rothschild couriers attracted attention, but no one ever stopped their personal intelligence and mail services.
After the Bavarian illuminati were exposed, the central occult power over the European secret societies shifted to Carbonarism a.k.a. the Alta Vendita, led by another powerful Rothschild, Karl Rothschild, son of Amschel.
In 1818, Karl participated in a secret document that was sent out to the head-quarters of Masonry from the Alta Vendita.
The Masons were quite distressed when a copy of this was lost, and offered rewards to anyone who could return the lost copy. It was originally written in Italian. Its title translates “Permanent Instructions, or Practical Code of Rules; Guide for the Heads of the Highest Grades of Masonry.”
The Masonic reference book 10,000 Famous Freemasons, Vol. 4, p.74, indicates two other sons of Amschel were Masons, James Meyer Rothschild, and his brother Nathan Meyer Rothschild. James Rothschild in Paris was a 33 degree Scottish Rite Mason, and his brother Nathan in London was a member of the Lodge of Emulation.
And Jewish Freemason Katz indicates Solomon Meir Rothschild, a third member of the five brothers, was initiated into Freemasonry on June 14, 1809. The Rothschilds became powerful within Freemasonry.
We find the Saint-Simonians, the occult religious millenialist forerunners of communism, praising Baron de Rothschild in their magazine Le Globe:
“There is no one today who better represents the triumph of equality and work in the nineteenth century than M. le Baron de Rothschild…
Was this Jew born a millionaire? No, he was born poor, and if only you knew what genius, patience, and hard work were required to construct that European edifice called the House of Rothschild, you would admire rather than insult it.”
Lionel de Rothschild (the de was added by the French Rothschilds) was involved with the first communist Internationale. The Mason Mazzini who helped start communism praised Rothschild, “Rothschild could be King of France if he so desired.”
Adoiphe Cremieux, was a french Jewish Mason (see chap. 1.4 for his credentials). The Rothschilds gave at least £ i ,000 to Cremieux to go to Damascus with Salomon Munk, and Sir Moses Montefiore to win the release of Jews imprisoned there, and to convince the Turkish Sultan to declare the charges of ritual murder false.
According to the three Jewish authors of Dope, Inc. the B’nai B’rith was a spin-off of the Order of Zion and was organized as a “covert intelligence front” for the House of Rothschild.
It is highly probable that the B’nai B’rith was used as a Rothschild intelligence cover. The Rothschilds are prominent in the Bilderbergers too. The Rothschilds were closely related to the Council of Foreign Relations (CFR).
Although many people today would not view the CFR as a secret society it was originally set up as part of a secret society and it was kept secret for many years, in spite of its awesome power.
Carroll Quigley, professor of International Relations at the Jesuit Georgetown University, exposed the Round Table Group with his book Tragedy and Hope. The Rothschilds supported Rhodes to form De Beers.
Later, Rhodes made seven wills which established a secret society modelled after the Jesuits and Masons to help bring in a One-World- Government centered upon Britain, and the Rhodes Scholarships. The inner group was established in Mar.
1891 and consisted of Rhodes, Stead, Lord Esher (Brett), and 33* Mason Alfred Milner.(33bb) A secondary circle of “potential members of the Circle of Initiates” consisted of the Jew Lord Balfour, Sir Harry Johnson, Lord Rothschild, Lord Grey and others.
Initially, Lord Rothschild was part of the inner group of Rhode’s secret society, but was replaced by his son-in-law Lord Rosebury who wasn’t as conspicuous. The Fabian Socialists dominated the staff at Oxford when the Rhodes Scholars began arriving.
These scholars then received indoctrination and preparation to become part of an international socialist New World Order. The Round Table Group developed from the inner executive circle of Rhode’s secret society.
The outer circle was established after the start of the 20th century. The Round Table Group was extended after W.W. I by organizing a front organization the Royal Institute of International Affairs.
The Council of Foreign Relations was the American part of this front. The inner circle continues to direct the outer circle and its two front organizations RIIA and CFR. The CER in turn set up a number of fronts including the Institute of Pacific Relations (IPR).
Co-Masters of the World: Management of the Catholic and Czars’ Wealth and the Capture of the Orthodox Church’s Wealth.
Early in the 19th century the Pope came to the Rothschilds to borrow money. The Rothschilds were very friendly with the Pope, causing one journalist to sarcasticly say “Rothschild has kissed the hand of the Pope… Order has at last been re-established.”
The Rothschilds in fact over time were entrusted with the bulk of the Vatican’s wealth. The Jewish Ency., Vol. 2, p.497 states,
“It is a somewhat curious sequel to the attempt to set up a Catholic competitor to the Rothschilds that at the present time (1905) the latter are the guardians of the papal treasure.”
Researcher Eustice Mullins writes that the Rothschilds took over all the financial operations of the worldwide Catholic Church in 1823.
Today the large banking and financial business of the Catholic Church is an extensive system interlocked with the Rothschilds and the rest of the International Banking system.
The great wealth of the Russian Czars was entrusted to the Rothschilds, $35 million with the Rothschild’s Bank of England, and $80 million in the Rothschild’s Paris bank.
The Rothschilds financed the Russian Revolution which confiscated vast portions of the Orthodox Church’s wealth. They have been able to prevent (due to their power) the legitimate heirs of the Czars fortune to withdraw a penny of the millions deposited in a variety of their banks.
The Mountbattans, who are related to the Rothschilds, led the court battles to prevent the claimants from withdrawing any of the fortune.
In other words, the money they invested in the Russian Revolution, was not only paid back directly by the Bolshevists in millions of dollar of gold, but by grabbing the hugh deposits of the Czars’ wealth, the Rothschilds gained what is now worth over $50 Billion.
Co-Masters of the World: Control Over Satanism and Witchcraft
Chapter 2.11 gives the names of a Witchcraft Council of 13 which is under Rothschild control and in turn issue orders to various groups. One of the purest form of Satanism can be traced to the Jewish Sabbatain sect and its Frankist spinoff.
The leaders of this up to the Rothschilds were:
Sabbatai Zevi (1626-1676)
Nathan of Gaza (16??-?)
Jacob Frank (1726-1791)
Rothschilds - Three Connections Between Satanism, Evil, and Money
Money naturally attracts itself to evil. For instance, if a woman prostitutes herself she may receive a great sum of money, but who will pay her for keeping her virginity or her dignity?
If you are a hit man a large amount of money is yours if you kill your target, who will pay you if you would miss your target?
Second, evil men believe in where there is a will there is a way, and they are willing to sell their souls for their God money. They will employ evil to gain money.
While most people are quite aware of these last two connections, a third may likely have escaped their attention.
Thirdly, the principle group of men who cranked up International Banking were Satanists from the beginning.
Just having total control over the supply of U.S. paper money almost gives them leverage over the world’s finances, without mentioning they control the world bank.
It is no accident then, that once they established world financial control, they would do all in their power to divide and conquer and destroy both the Christian and the Moslem faith in God.
These powerful Bankers relate to faith in God as Cain related to his brother Abel. That they may be related to the Jewish people, does not mean they have the Jewish people’s best interest at heart. Initially Sabbetai Zevi was rejected by many Jews.
His sect gained momentum in second half of the seventeenth century in southeastern Poland.
In 1759-60, 500 Jewish Sabbateans “converted” to Christianity. In 1715, 109 of the 415 Jewish families in Frankfurt were engaged in moneylending. The rest were merchants of various kinds. The concepts that Satanism holds to were a natural shoe in to justify for many of these Jewish bankers the type of behavior they were engaged in.”
Long Story Short
Many divisions and battles between religious elements in the world have been encouraged and supported by the Power’s wealth. Unfortunately, many have been fooled into thinking that being devout and faithful to God is the source of religious fighting.
In some areas of the world, Moslems, Christians, and others have gotten along fine for centuries.
Religious tensions do spring to some degree from within the religions themselves, but the fuel to keep those fires burning and to light up conflicts often come from the Power’s wealth. An obvious example is the Iran-Iraq war.
Co-Masters of the World: Control Over WWI Treaty
When Germany fell, not only did Rothschild agents draft the treaty, prepare the idea of the League of Nations, but Max Rothschild was one of 11 men who took control over Bavaria. Max Rothschild was a Freemason in Lodge No. 11, Munich, Germany.
Co-Masters of the World: Connections to MI5, Rockefellers, J.P. Morgan, CFR et.al.
Victor Rothschild, who worked for J.P. Morgan & Co., and was an important part of MI5 (British Intelligence). Victor Rothschild was also a communist and member of the Apostles Club at Cambridge.
Lord Rothschild was one of the original members of Rhode’s Round Table group which developed into the CFR. It was the Rothschilds who had financed Cecil Rhodes, beginning in Africa.
The Rothschilds’ have several agents which their money got started and who still serve them well, the Morgans and the Rockefellers. The Rockefellers were Marrano Jews. The original Rockefeller made his money selling narcotics, (they weren’t illegal then).
After acquiring a little capital he branched out in oil. But it was the Rothschild capital that made the Rockefeller’s so powerful. “They also financed the activities of Edward Harriman (railroads) and Andrew Carnegie Steel.”
Co-Masters of the World: Power Within Christendom
The Rothschilds also wielded much influence and power not only in Secret Societies, but also in Christendom’s churches. The Salvation Army under the suggestion of the Rothschilds adopted the Red Shield (Roth-red Schild-shield) for their logo.
“The Rothschilds had rapidly propelled themselves into a position of immense financial power and political influence. They were an independent force in the life of Europe, accountable to no one and, to a large extent, reliant on no one. Popular lampoons depicted them as the real rulers of Christendom…”
Some of the Rothschilds have been involved in the campaign to loosen public morals. The first executive Secretary of the National Student Forum was John Rothschild. This National Student Forum changed its name like articles of clothing.
Speaking about clothing, one of the aims of this Socialist group was to promote public nudity, and free love. This organization had the following constituent groups Radcliffe Liberal Club, Union Theological Seminary Contemporary Club, Yale Liberal Club” to name just a few.
A further development of this was the Youth Peace Federation which consisted of the League of Youth of Community Church, Methodist Epworth League, NY District, Young Judea, and Young People’s Fellowship of St. Phillip’s Parish to name a few.
American religious men have ties to the Rothschilds especially through their various agents.
Harry Emerson Fosdick, who was Pastor of Rockefeller’s church was also among the Presidents of the Rockefeller Foundation. John Foster Dulles, CFR, was chairman of the board of the Rockefeller Foundation, and married a Rockefeller, Janet Pomeroy Avery.
Remember John Foster Dulles was an important Federal Council of Churches of Christ official
Every road leads back to the Rothschilds. There are more items than what have been mentioned above linking the Rothschilds to the various tenticles.
Each of the various tenticles that conspiracy theorists have put forth, - the Jews, the Masons, the Intelligence Communities, the International Bankers, the Prieure de Sion, the Catholics, the Trilateral commission, the CFR, the New Age, the Cults - each ties back to the Rothschild’s power.
Extent of Rothschild Power
According to one source “it was estimated that they controlled half the wealth of the world.” The Federal Reserve Bank of New York was controlled by five banks which owned 53% of its stock.
These five banks were controlled by Nathan M. Rothschild & Sons of London. Control over the U.S. Fed is basically control over the world’s money. That fact alone shows how immense the Rothschild Power is.
If one examines who has been appointed to head the Fed, and to run it, the connections of the “Federal” Reserve System to the Rothschilds can further be seen. Another private enterprise using the name Federal that the Rothschilds also direct is Federal Express.
Any one else might be taken to court for making their businesses sound like their are government, not the Rothschilds. It is appropriate for them to appropriate the name of Federal, because by way of MI6 via the CIA they instruct the U.S. government.
Senators are bought and paid off by their system, as investigators of the BCCI discovered. The Rothschilds have been intimately involved in witchcraft and the Illuminati since its early known history.
The Kaiser of Germany seems to refer to them when he said, “the magic powers of money as wielded by the Lord of Lucre are powers of Black Magic at its blackest."
If only half of the wealth is controlled by the Rothschilds, it indicates that if they are to be part of the world’s rulership, they must have allies.
The Rothschilds and Rockefellers are only two of thirteen controlling families of the Illuminati. Two Jewish families that appear to be prominent are the Oppenheims and the Oppenheimers.
A. Oppenheim was situated in Cologne. The Oppenheimers were early members of the Bavarian Illuminati. The Bund der Gerechten (League of the Just) was an illuminati front run mainly by Jews who were Satanists.
This Bund financed in part by the Rothschilds paid the Satanist and Mason Karl Marx to write the Communist Manefesto. The Jew Gumpel Oppenheim was in the inner circle of the Bund.
His relative Heinrich Oppenheim masterminded the communist revolution of 1848 in Germany. The Communist Party’s official histories even accept the Bund as the predecessor of Communism.
The Oppenheimers apparently are close to the Rothschilds. J. Robert Oppenheimer of the CFR was exposed as a communist.
Harry Oppenheimer, an international banker, is chairman of the Jewish De Beers world-wide diamond monopoly, and chairman of the Anglo-American Corp. Oppenheimers can be found in important financial positions in the U.S. They help run around 10 large foundations, including the Oppenheimer Haas Trust of NY for the care of needy Jewish children.
The Jewish Ency. Vol. 2, p. 496 indicates other Jewish families “adopted the Rothschild plan.” These were the Lazards, Sterns, Speyers, and Seligmans. The Rothschild plan was to place family members in the 5 largest European capitals to coordinate their activities.
One of Germany’s largest magazines is the Stern, and Ernst Stern is second-in-command of the World Bank.”
The Jewish families that established the Frankfurt Judenloge (this was the Masonic lodge the Rothschilds belonged to in Frankfurt) included the Adlers, Speyers, Reisses, Sichels, Ellisons, Hanaus, Geisenheimers, and Goldschmidts.
Isaac Hildesheim, a Jew who changed his name to Justus Hiller is credited as being the founder of this Frankfurt lodge. Michael Hess, principal of the Reformed Jewish school Philanthropin was an important figure in the lodge too, as was Dr. Ludwig Baruch (later Borne) who joined in 1808.
Most of these Frankfurt Jewish Freemasons engaged in commerce. Those Freemasons from 1817-1842 were the leaders of the Frankfurt Jewish community.
A gentile Mason in Frankfurt Johann Christian Ehrmann began warning the German people that the Frankfurt Jewish Masons wanted a world republic based on humanism.
In 1816 he came out with a warning pamphlet Das Judenthum in der M[aurere]y (The Jews in Masonry). A powerful ally of the world’s jewry can be seen beginning with men like Oliver Cromwell, who was considered a Mason.
Cromwell was financed by Jews, and helped the Jews gain power in England. Cromwell was willing to go along with the Jews, because he became convinced of British Israelism. Since the core of the conspiracy of power is Jewish, the attitude of those allied with it hinges on their attitude toward the Jewish people.
The religious idea that the British people are descended from the tribes of Israel doesn’t automatically place people into the camp of the conspiracy. Some of the British-Israelites realize that the so called Jewish people in general have no claim over the promises of God.
For that reason, they realize that it is not the Christian duty to bow and scrape at their every move. When Christians can be arrested in Israel and abused, and Christians will not even stand up for their own kind, we can see how much hold the idea of the “Chosen Race” theory has over Christendom.
Some of the British Israelites such as the Mormons, the old New England wealthy families such as make up the Order, some Masons and New Agers, and the non-Jewish members of the Priuere de Sion are collaborating with the One-World-Power. The anglican church which is run by the Freemasons is strongly British Israelistic.
Sorting Out the Various Identity Groups
In contrast, a hodge-podge of groups which are opposed to the conspiracy like some Neo-Nazi groups, and various Churches unrelated with them are also believers in British Israelism.
These various groups are sometimes all lumped together as the “Identity” movement, which is misleading because of their vast differences.
It is important to diferentiate between those groups that are trying to approach things from a Christian perspective and place themselves under the authority of God, and those who are setting themselves up under the New Order’s authority, or under their own authority.
Co-Masters of the World: The Media
Eustice Mullins has published his research in his book Who Owns the TV Networks showing that the Rothschilds have control of all three U.S. Networks, plus other aspects of the recording and mass media industry.
It can be added that they control Reuters too. From other sources it appears CNN, which began as an independent challenge to the Jewish Network monopoly, ran into repeated trickery, and ended up part of the system.
Money from B.C.C.I., (B.C.C.I. has been one of the New World Orders financial systems for doing its dirty business such as controlling Congressmen, and is involved with INSLA, the Iran-Contra Scandal, Centrust, and other recent scandals) which has tainted so many aspects of public power in the U.S. has also been behind CNN.
Perhaps nothing dominates the life of some Americans as does the television. Americans sit themselves before the television set and simply absorb what it projects to them.
On a day to day basis the biggest way the Rothschilds touch the lives of Americans are the three major networks which are under Rothschild direction.
Honouring The Trailblazers August 9 2022 | From: WakeUpWorld
We are in the midst of a massive shift in consciousness that is sweeping our sweet little planet. So why not take a moment and honour all of the brave souls, the “unsung heroes” who came here before us to assist with this shift and make it happen?
The empaths, the sensitives, lightworkers, wayshowers, and all those who were holding light and transmuting the dense energies long before the rest of us, so that others may awaken as well. They were the ones who were “awake” before the word “awake” ever had a deeper, more profound meaning. For many years, they have been the souls on the “front lines” of this awakening.
Some trailblazers were very aware of their role and courageously used their voice and called “bullshit” on the injustices and dishonesty of others, as they were able to see through it all with crystal clear vision.
They were often the activists and the leaders of social movements. They were those ahead of their time, who established newsletters and platforms such as this one, intended to help awaken the masses.
For many, they remained out of the spotlight and the world stage, choosing to personally guide those closest to them. And others, either aware of it or not, they went about their trailblazing in a more subtle fashion, choosing to show the way for others by simply living their lives as the example.
You know, the ones who were eating organic before eating organic became a trend, before it was even called “organic”, and before there were countless studies to prove that organic eating is indeed healthier for us.
They were the ones who took risks and followed their intuition. They were the ones who, in spite of all logical reasoning, sold everything they had and moved across the globe simply because their soul was calling them there, only to discover the many synchronicities, growth opportunities and reasons for this choice.
They were the people who were not satisfied with conformity and the status quo of getting a job that didn’t fulfill them just to pay the bills and buy things they don’t need, and then hope to one day retire and enjoy life, if there’s anything left of it.
They snuck puppies into care homes just to see the faces of the residents light up with joy.
They usually avoided or were very uncomfortable with organized religion.
Were often deemed as “lazy” or weirdos because of their lack of ambition or drive for monetary goals.
Their bodies were some of the first to reveal the damaging effects of our toxic food chain and vaccines, such as leaky gut and gluten intolerance, diabetes, thyroid problems, cancer and alzheimer’s disease.
They were the ones who refused to accept ill health as their destiny, and just a side effect of “growing old.”
They were the dreamers who knew that their dreams were important. They understood that peace and freedom are a right, not a privilege.
They were often exposed to trauma, abuse, and other challenging life situations.
They were the ones who refused to be a victim and instead chose to accept responsibility for their life and learn the lessons that were intended for them to learn.
They are the ones for whom experience did not harden their hearts, but instead, they chose to transcend and help others with their lessons.
They have a genuine love and affection for all of humanity, regardless of culture or skin colour.
Chances are, you likely recognize many of these examples either in yourself, or in others that you know. I have been blessed to have trailblazers in my life and to call them my friends. I honestly don’t know what I would do without their wisdom and support.
They have a strength and an unwavering nerve that comes with experience. They know exactly what they are capable of and there isn’t a whole lot that can surprise them.
One really has to appreciate those who were doing this great work at a time when the energies were so very dense. They were working with the limited tools, opportunities, support and knowledge that they had at the time, before the internet allowed information to flow freely, and before the term “the Shift” was even coined.
It could be said that they had to learn “the hard way”. (My own mother endured health issues for many years until, thanks to the vast amount of information on the internet, she finally discovered her health problems were all symptoms triggered by the mercury fillings in her mouth.)
At 32 years old myself, I realize that I am not speaking with decades upon decades of experience, but I can feel and see the effects of this Shift. There is such a greater acceptance of other ideas and concepts that were quite taboo only a short time ago, even from when I took my first level of Reiki training in 2010.
It is nothing now to hear people speaking of energy work and mindfulness as though they are everyday topics. But it wasn’t always this way…
I am in deep gratitude for all of those who came before me, and bravely lit the way so that I could step into who I really am.
Beyond Your Comfort Zone
While the trailblazers certainly had their hefty share of challenges, my generation is, of course, facing challenges as well. We are learning to play in a new arena.
The energies are changing quickly and our sensibilities and our bodies are trying to keep up. We are living within a higher dimension but still dealing with people and the limited concepts of the third dimension.
These are the days when we can become tired, or fed up with the world. When our expanded awareness threatens to become too much for our sensibilities to handle. We understand how it might be nice to live in ignorance, to not be so aware and feel so responsible.
And these are the days when a trailblazer will swoop into our life, our unassuming angels, to comfort and remind us of how amazing we are and of the great work we are doing. They restore our energy and tell us, “don’t give up, you’ve come so far. There are greater things ahead of you if you push beyond your comfort zone.”
The trailblazers have taught me compassion, patience, humility, and when I needed it, tough love. They have been there to assure me, “no, you’re not crazy”, or else, “this isn’t easy, but it is worth it.” They have reminded me that change is necessary and that there is vast potential that awaits within uncertainty.
Sometimes they have come into my life to stay, others have passed through, or were there only for a short time when I really needed them. On occasion, it was just a chance encounter or conversation in the line up of a grocery store.
And as you read this, no matter your age or where you feel you are at on this path, take a moment to honour yourself. Because the truth is, we are all trailblazers in our own, unique way.
We all have gifts to share with the rest of the world. And for every moment that we are living in our truth, or expressing our authentic selves, we are lighting the way and lending a hand for the next person to do the same.
No matter what “hat” we are wearing in this lifetime, absolutely everything that we do makes a difference. And every time that we are true to who we are and express our authentic selves, we light the way for another soul to do the same.
It is absolutely no accident that you are here at this time.
And that is something that every trailblazer will tell you; you are doing more than you can possibly know right now, but one day, it will be easy for you to see.
Nuggets of Wisdom from the Trailblazers
I would like to leave you with a few nuggets of wisdom and advice for this particular time that we are in that have recently been shared with me from my friends, “the trailblazers”;
Right now, it is of utmost importance to listen to your body. These energies are intense. In fact, the most intense that they have ever felt. This is huge work we are doing, and if you don’t get the much needed rest that your body is requiring, you will get burn out and end up needing to take a lot of time to recover.
So if you are feeling like you need more sleep even though your mind is telling you that you shouldn’t, tell your mind very gently to f*#k off!
Not everything that you feel is actually yours. You are transmuting dense energies for so many souls other than yourself, so honour the importance of that by listening to your body.
Do what ever it takes to stay grounded and balanced, be it taking regular nature walks, spending time with loved ones, meditating, simply sharing healing time with a pet by stroking their fur, going for a swim, or watching a sunset.
Listen to your soul and pay attention to what fills you with a sense of peace and contentment.
The other evening I sat on my deck and gazed into the setting sun. There was a magical glow cast upon my yard, and as I sat there, I allowed my eyes to lose focus and simply see the “light” that seemed to be glowing from within everything around me. It was then that I heard a gentle voice say, “now you are seeing the love that is in all things.”
They understand what we are going through right now, and you will feel your energy lighten considerably in their presence. I prefer to hug them or climb up into their limbs and wrap my arms around them for full effect.
Eat healthy and drink lots of water. Again, this is about honouring our bodies with proper fuel.
If you have fear, learn from it, integrate it. But do not let it stop you. We are here for self-actualization. It is wise to be wary, and to practice discernment, but try not to live in fear.
This is when our vibration drops and we are left feeling powerless. Fear is there to teach us something, so focus on what that lesson may be, not the fear itself.
Check in with yourself often. Just a simple question such as “Am I on the right track?” It is simply to confirm that you are aware of why you do what you are doing and for what reasons.
Follow the guidance of your heart as our brains can’t keep up to this shift. They always need to “know” what is going to happen and what the outcome will be. This is not how we operate on this level.
As I’ve been told, “we are in a new arena. The rules are changing.” I had a message similiar to this pop into my awareness as I was enjoying an evening bike ride, “I am not of this world, I don’t play by these rules.”
I felt as though it was a reminder from my higher self to not get caught up in the drama and anxiety of the third dimension and all of the “shoulds” that we feel we have to surrender to to feel happy and successful.
Stay humble. Just when you think you have it all figured out, your awareness will expand and you will realize just how much you didn’t know. We can only grow so much at one time, because if we tried to keep going and going, our bodies could never handle it. This is where the burn out comes in.
So remember that if you feel as though you have plateaud, this is simply a lookout point to your next stage of awareness. As long as you are willing, you will continue to grow, but trust that it cannot happen too quickly.
And above all, you can do this. Trust yourself. There is always help available, and you have many guides that are working with you. Not to mention, the Universe is on your side. Just think about the grand scope of that for a moment. The entire Universe which is capable of all things is on our side.
Meet the Universe halfway, and expect to be helped in magical ways that you would never expect.
Lastly, I would like to extend my deep appreciation to all of the trailblazers of the world, those who I have had the pleasure to meet and to talk to across the miles, and for the countless souls that I haven’t. Thank you.
Financial Fraud: Easy Money Corrupts The Monetary System August 8 2022 | From: FinalWakeUpCall / Various
Virtual Money: “Money” is virtual, a mental concept, an accounting system. Our currency is like a coupon, in other words, money is a medium of exchange. The Central Banking Cartel creates it out of thin air, as a debt to itself, something our government could do interest and debt-free.
But our governments belongs to a small group of elites, not to us. The aim of the New World Order is to expand this racket into a global political, cultural and economic monopoly.
The freezing of accounts that took place in Greece is only a taste of what’s to come. Right now the highest levels of government and the banking system are locked in a desperate last stand against a disturbing monetary shock, one that will make what happened in Greece seem mild by comparison.
And it could disrupt people’s lives in ways you never thought possible. You will suddenly be locked out of your bank account, unable to withdraw cash or deposit a check. Your stocks will swing wildly out of control. Your government-controlled payments will stop.
Remember: media disinformation serves the interests of global banks and institutional speculators, which use their command over the financial and commodity markets to amass vast amounts of monetary wealth. The corporate establishment, including the speculators, controls the corridors of governments.
Meanwhile, the “bank bailouts”, presented to the public as a requisite for economic recovery, have facilitated and legitimised a further process of appropriation of people’s wealth.
Vast amounts of monetary wealth are acquired through market manipulation and deceit.
With inside-information and foreknowledge, major financial actors, using the instruments of speculative trade, have the ability to fiddle and rig market movements to their advantage, precipitate the collapse of a competitor, or even the system itself, and wreak havoc in the economies and societies of developing countries.
Take the Greek’s valuable lessons to heart, and let other people know that the upcoming crash will cause the world to descend into chaos, as planned by the RK Mafia, to rob people blind and bring them to their knees so that they will accept the New World Order without any revolt.
It is the long time phenomenon, their well-orchestrated Problem – Reaction – Solution.
Since it is very likely that things may get out of control even for the RK Mafia, you had better use the coming few months for the preparation of your survival.
Governments Can Seize Your Property Without Having to Convict You of a Crime:
Governments are trying to abolish cash. Leading economists are pushing for it to be banned, too. Limits on cash use are already in place in many countries.
Having a large amount of cash is already considered “suspicious,” subject to forfeiture without due process – thanks to civil forfeiture laws, governments can seize your property without having to convict you of a crime.
"Mandrel Stuart, a 35-year-old African American owner of a small barbecue restaurant in Staunton, Va., was stunned when police took $17,550 from him during a stop in 2012 for a minor traffic violation on the Interstate 66 in Fairfax. He rejected a settlement with the government for half of his money and demanded a jury trial.
He eventually got his money back but lost his business because he didn’t have the cash to pay his overheads. – “I paid taxes on that money. I worked for that money,” Stuart said. “Why should I give them my money?”
As the Washington Post reported here, police have made 61,998 cash seizures – totalling $2.5 billion since 9/11 – without search warrants or indictments.
Why do governments want to eliminate cash? Isn’t it obvious? They want to control you and your money. Where did you get it? They’ll want to know everything. What will you do with it?
They’ll want a say. Could you not be planning to use it for something “bad”? – You might support “terrorists” – evade taxes – or buy a pack of illegal cigarettes. The possibilities are too vast to ignore. And the arguments are too persuasive to stop the Witch Hunt.
Easy Money Corrupts the Monetary System:
The system is corrupt and dangerously dysfunctional. But why does no one say anything? Central Bankers have, since the 1980s, been fighting credit corrections – being themselves the originators of the credit bubbles.
And for the last six years, the Central Bankers have been so actively and aggressively defending the past that the future doesn’t have a chance. Their easy money has corrupted the entire system. So, there can never be a true recovery of the economy.
Zero Hedge summarizes the “pros”: Enhance the tax base, as most, if not all transactions in the economy can now be traced by the government. – Substantially constrain the parallel economy, particularly in illicit activities. Force people to squander their savings on consumption and/or convert them into investments, thereby providing a boost to GDP and employment!
The United Nations Agenda 21 Program:
The Archon bloodlines want us to accept their Agenda 21 program. Unfortunately for the people of the world, so far everything is going according to the New World Order Plan.
Agenda 21 is so-called as it is the ‘the agenda for the 21st century’ and that constitutes global fascism/communism. Here is a summary of what Agenda 21 includes: ‘Sustainable’ development – don’t use more than can be replaced – sounds sensible enough at first, until it is realised what this and ‘biodiversity’ really means in the context of the conspiracy.
As, ‘Sustainable Development’ and ‘Biodiversity’ is seeking to impose the following:
Termination of national sovereignty
State planning and management of all land resources, ecosystems, deserts, forest, mountains, oceans, and fresh water; agriculture; rural development; biotechnology; and ensuring ‘equality’ e.: equal enslavement
The State defines the role of business and financial resources Abolition of private property – as it is not ‘sustainable’
‘Restructuring’ the family unit
Children raised by the State
Telling people what their job will be and where to live
Major restrictions on the movement of people
Creation of ‘human settlement zones’
Mass resettlement as people are forced to vacate their land; homes, where they currently live
Dumbing down education-form – achieved, in effect.
Mass global depopulation in pursuit of all of the above.
Agenda 21, the term coined already over two hundred years ago – implies the goal for the completion phase lies in this century.
The secret plan of the New World Order is to reduce the world’s population to a “sustainable” level “in perpetual balance with nature” by a ruthless Population Control Agenda via Population and Reproduction Control.
A Mass Culling of the People is accomplished via Planned Parenthood, toxic adulteration of water and food supplies, the release of weaponised, man-made viruses – like AIDS, EBOLA, etc. – man-made pandemics, mass vaccination programs and the planned Third World War.
Then, Agenda 21 will impose upon the drastically reduced world population, a global feudal-fascist state with ‘one’ World Government, World Religion, World Army, World Central Bank, World Currency and a micro-chipped population for optimal control.
In short, they plan to kill 90% of the world’s population in order to control all aspects of human life and thus rule over everyone, everywhere from the cradle to the grave.
WAKE UP PEOPLE – Research everything while we can still join forces to overthrow these Criminal Mafioso that control every government in the world, as all are governed by corrupt politicians, most, if not all them being RKM bought puppets. They have literally sold their souls to the devil and they know they won’t survive if they don’t obey RKM orders.
Not only the monetary system, but also the whole geopolitical system is corrupted. We will very soon have no freedom anymore, unless we wake up and join forces. We are currently enslaved through the tax system through our birth certificates. People have become assets to exploit and earn money off of.
Related: The Vatican Is A Criminal Hornets’ Nest Our tax money is deposited in the RKM controlled Vatican bank. Things are getting worse by the day. The point of no return is rapidly approaching and soon it will be too late. We have only very little time left to come to our own defence by waking up and joining forces.
If you do nothing you deserve what you’re going to get.
The Truth About Our Civilisation and You:
This video clearly explains in a nutshell how deeply we, the people are caught up in the network that has been continuously functioning since the year1860. In this system you are not whom you think you are, because a legal person owns his DNA, but at birth your DNA was stolen.
Our oppressors created from every person a corporation with his name in Capital letters, that’s why your name on all official documents is written in capital letters, which does NOT represent the physical you. Check your driver’s licence for confirmation. Only a birth certificate supported by its DNA is evidently a person or citizen.
The Crown in the City of London backs all these corporations, which in reality represents the Vatican. Meanwhile countless Lawyers worldwide are working on the reclamation of DNA, as soon as more progress is made it will be published, as it is in everyone’s interest to break-up the diabolical system in which we live.
By owning your DNA, they own you, your money, your property; they can create a bank holiday to steal your money, as it is not yours as a person, but theirs as the owner of the company that bears your name in CAPITAL letters! You are living under Admiralty Law, you neither have natural rights, nor Civil Rights. YOU ARE A SLAVE!
After controlling the monetary system, and stealing your civil rights, other Archon bloodline (RKM) Agenda 21 implementations are nearing completion, such as the total control of the food supply, weather, water, pharmaceuticals, energy, in order to render people in dire economic straits with no way out.
And so it has come to pass that the unelected EU government in 2013 proposed, rubberstamped and implemented new laws, making it illegal to grow your own food, reproduce or trade any ‘untested’ vegetables, awaiting approval by the Orwellian ‘EU Plant Variety Agency’, which charges a fee for each registration – ever-increasing payments for our food and for our own prison.
The ‘Plant Reproduction Material Law’ will make home gardening with non-regulated seeds a criminal act. This law will stop the professional development of vegetable varieties for home gardening, organic growers, and small-market farmers.
All these new laws do, is to create a whole new raft of EU civil servants who will be paid to move mountains of paper around all day long, while killing off the seed supply to home gardeners and interfering with the right of farmers to grow what they want.
It is also very disturbing that they have given themselves the power to regulate and license any plant species of all sorts in the future – not just agricultural plants, but grasses, mosses, flowers, absolutely everything – without having to bring it back to the Council to vote.
The Global Fascist / Communist Structure:
This is all connected to the plan to ban the population from growing their own food, destroy seed-diversity and allow the Archon food and biotech corporations to monopolise the global food supply – ‘Growing food can hereby be banned by simply stating that it isn’t safe, and then big RKM corporations would control all the food production of the entire planet.’
The global fascist/communist structure would subsequently decide what you should eat and if you are permitted to eat; and what you eat would invariably be full of chemical cocktails beyond anything consumed today to control the masses mentally, emotionally and physically.
The water supply would also be drugged so that people would end up ‘loving their servitude’ as Aldous Huxley wrote in his book the Brave New World.
If you ate, would depend on whether you were a good little mindless slave or not. No acquiescence, no food, and no water – the supply and distribution of food would be monitored so that no-one could give food to a fugitive of the system, as Dr Day put it in his lecture in 1969.
A terrible future prospect for all of us, but – for not too long – the power is still with the people if only we would come together in mutual support and if only international publicity and response to this would steadily lead to opposing and rejecting these horrible laws relating to growing our own food.
The bloodline families are terrified that the people will unite, that’s why ‘dividing and conquering us’ is their top priority.
It’s important to understand the reasoning of our Archon bloodline tyrants. They have no empathy, no compassion – they are narcissistic, psychopathic, sociopaths.
They have falsely invented the global warming scam – with the climate change narrative as their argument to depopulate, to cull the world’s populace from seven billion at present to 500 million by 2050.
Dr Richard Day, the Rockefeller insider and weather manipulator during WW2, said in 1969: 'The weather will be modified and used as a weapon of war to create drought or famine.’
Producing record-breaking snow in the mountains and constant heavy rains to flood the Missouri and the Mississippi is easy with the technology at the Archon bloodlines’ disposal – especially HAARP, in Alaska and various other locations worldwide, that transmits high-powered radio waves to the upper atmosphere, the ionosphere, heating it up and eventually bouncing back to earth.
Ken O’Keefe Exposes Jesuits, World Bankers, Illuminati, Reptilians, Freemasons:
Imperial Narrative Control Has Five Distinct Elements August 7 2022 | From: CaitlinJohnstone / Various
All of our world’s worst problems are created by the powerful. The powerful will keep creating those problems until ordinary people use their superior numbers to make them stop.
Ordinary people don’t use their superior numbers to stop the powerful because the powerful are continuously manipulating people’s understanding of what’s going on.
Humans are storytelling creatures. If you can control the stories humans are telling themselves about the world, you control the humans, and you control the world.
Mental narrative plays a hugely prominent role in human experience; if you’ve ever tried to still your mind in meditation you know exactly what I’m talking about.
Babbling thought stories dominate our experience of reality. It makes sense then that if you can influence those stories, you’re effectively influencing someone’s experience of reality.
The powerful manipulate the dominant narratives of our society in approximately five major ways: propaganda, censorship, Silicon Valley algorithm manipulation, government secrecy, and the war on journalism.
Like the fingers on a hand they are distinct from each other and each play their own role, but they’re all part of the same thing and work together toward the same goal. They’re all just different aspects of the US-centralized empire’s narrative control system.
1. Propaganda
Everyone's Anti-War Until The War Propaganda Starts
"Nobody thinks of themselves as a warmonger, but then the spin machine gets going and before you know it they're spouting the slogans they've been programmed to spout"https://t.co/lLnPVlfyfK
Propaganda is the empire’s narrative creation system. While the other four elements of imperial narrative control are geared mostly toward preventing inconvenient narratives from circulating, propaganda is the means by which the empire generates narratives which benefit it.
That foreign leader is a dictator and needs to be removed. That inconvenient politician is sinister in some way and must not be permitted to lead.
Your government loves human rights and all its wars are humanitarian. Voting works. Capitalism is great. You can trust us, we’re the good guys.
The wealthy media-owning class protects its own class interests by hiring media executives whose worldview matches its own, and those executives hire underlings with the same worldview, who hire their own underlings with the same worldview, and before you know it you’re looking at a media conglomerate full of people who all support the status quo politics of the media-owning class whose kingdoms are built upon that status quo.
In fact these giant media institutions are so invested in protecting the status quo that they have a very large degree of overlap with other institutions responsible for maintaining the imperial status quo, like the US intelligence cartel.
News punditry is now full of “former” intelligence officials, and anytime there’s a narrative an intelligence agency wants printed it simply has an officer or a proxy whisper it to a mainstream news reporter who then uncritically repeats that narrative disguised as a news story.
Reporters within this system are not explicitly told to generate propaganda to protect status quo power. Rather, they develop a sense for what kind of reporting will get published and earn them attaboys in the newsroom and what will get spiked and cause their career to stagnate.
If they fail to learn to navigate the system in this way, you simply never hear about them, because their careers peter out.
2. Censorship
More Escalations In Online Censorship
"YouTube has been deleting videos disputing the US government narrative about Russian war crimes in Bucha"https://t.co/M7zupF8AMa
Propaganda is geared toward putting narratives favorable to the oligarchic empire in front of people, while censorship is all about keeping unfavorable narratives away from public vision.
We’ve long seen this expressed in the way the mass media simply refuse to give any platform or voice to critics of capitalism and imperialism, but imperial narrative management has required a whole new order of censorship since internet access became widely available.
Because the widespread ability to share ideas and information poses a major threat to imperial narrative control, empire managers have been working toward normalizing and expanding censorship on internet platforms like Google / YouTube, Meta / Facebook / Instagram, and Twitter.
Any online space where a large number of people gather will find itself pressured by the US government to remove a wider and wider spectrum of content in the name of public safety, election security, containing a virus, or just keeping people from thinking wrong thoughts about a war.
Every few months since the US election in 2016 we’ve been fed a new reason why more internet censorship is needed, which is always followed by a giant purge of the newly-banned content and the accounts which created it.
This trend has escalateddramatically with the Ukraine war, where for the first time there’s no pretense being made that content is being censored to protect the public interest; it’s just being censored because it disagrees with what western government and media institutions tell us.
3. Silicon Valley Algorithm Manipulation
Silicon Valley Algorithm Manipulation Is The Only Thing Keeping Mainstream Media Alive
Recent statements by YouTube's CEO highlight the way Silicon Valley tech giants use algorithms to boost mainstream media propaganda and suppress independent content.https://t.co/rJRkSmydUG
This one relates to both propaganda and censorship, because it facilitates both.
Silicon Valley officials have admitted to manipulating their algorithms to make sure that independent media doesn’t get seen very much while artificially elevating the online publications of mass media outlets on the basis that they are “authoritative sources” of information, despite the fact that those “authoritative sources” have lied to us about every war.
Silicon Valley algorithm manipulation does more damage than overt forms of online censorship, because its consequences are much more far-reaching and because people don’t even know it’s happening.
When Google changed its algorithms to ensure that leftist and antiwar media outlets ranked much lower in search results than they used to, it influenced the way millions of people gather information about the most important issues in the world.
If it weren’t for tech giants artificially directing traffic toward empire-approved media outlets, those outlets probably would have shut down by now.
We saw a clear illustration of how disdainful the public is of mass media outlets when the paid streaming service CNN+ was forced to shut down just 30 days after its launch when it failed to maintain even ten thousand daily viewers.
People don’t consume mainstream news media unless it is foisted upon them.
4. Government Secrecy
The Only Obstacle To A Healthy World Is Government Secrecy And Propaganda
"If people in power were no longer able to hide secrets and spin lies about what’s going on in the world, all of our major problems would come to an end."https://t.co/NIWdBpY4Jn
Like censorship, government secrecy is another way the empire prevents inconvenient narratives from entering public awareness.
By classifying information on the basis of “national security”, the empire prevents unauthorized narratives before they even get off the ground. As Julian Assange once said;
"The overwhelming majority of information is classified to protect political security, not national security.”
The amount of power you have should be inversely proportional to the amount of privacy you get.
In a healthy society, ordinary people would have full privacy from the government while government officials should have to be fully transparent about their lives, finances and behavior.
In our society it’s exactly reversed: the people are surveilled and monitored while those in power hide vast troves of information behind walls of government opacity.
They hide everything they’re doing from the view of the public, then when people start taking educated guesses about what they might be up to behind the veil of government secrecy they get called “conspiracy theorists”.
There would be no need to form theories about conspiracies if there was complete transparency for the powerful, but of course this would greatly hinder the ability of the powerful to conspire.
They claim they need government secrecy to avoid giving an advantage to the enemy in times of war and conflict, but really they need government secrecy to start wars and conflicts.
5. The War on Journalism
Assange Is Doing His Most Important Work Yet
As important as his WikiLeaks publications are, none of them exposed the depravity of the empire as much as forcing them to look us in the eye and tell us they'll extradite a journalist for telling the truth.https://t.co/Qr3KVqH0TP
The goal of the Assange case is to establish a legal precedent for extraditing any journalist or publisher anywhere in the world who tries to get around US government secrecy.
Once a precedent has been set and consent has been manufactured, the war on journalism can really get going.
All of these five points are used to control the way people see, think about, and talk about their world, thereby controlling how they act and how they vote at mass scale.
This enables the powerful to maintain an entirely enslaved populace which never tries to escape its enslavement, because it thinks it is already free.
How You Were Tricked To Live In The Land Of The Legally Dead August 6 2022 | From: WakingTimes / Various
The current reality of man is heavily controlled by words. As a result of that, words play a big role in shaping the reality and culture of man.
Besides shaping the reality and culture of man, words also play an important role in trade. Some of the most important words used in the business of trading goods and services are related to the name.
Your name plays a very important role in your life because it allows others to identify you and communicate with you. Furthermore, it allows you to operate in the realm of commerce and fiction, making it easier for you to trade goods and services with people not living close to you.
Having a name can be a wonderful thing but if you do not know how to use it wisely, it can be a curse and prevent you from living a happy life. One of the ways that your name can curse you is when you allow it to bond to your mind too deeply, causing you to think that your name is who you really are.
Your name has the power to trick your mind because it is made up of sigils (letters). Because of this, it is important to use your name wisely, so you do not become a victim of your name.
When you do not know how to use your name wisely, the Dark Magicians or the Elite can use it to imprison your body, mind and soul in the "land" of the legally DEAD.
The best time to trick you to "live" in the land of the legally dead or the "sea" of the legally dead is on the day your mother gave "birth" to you.
How You Were Tricked to Live in the Land of the Legally Dead
It is interesting to know that when you look up the word birth in A Dictionary of Law (1889), it tells you to "see Abandon, 2 (2)". The word abandon in section 2 (2) is defined by A Dictionary of Law (1889) using these exact words: "The act of a parent in exposing an infant of tender years (usually under seven) in any place, with intent wholly to desert it."
Based on the definition in the previous paragraph, when your mother gave birth to you and your parents signed the birth certificate with your name on it, they unknowingly agreed to abandon you.
This allowed the State to claim "you" as its property and ship "you" to the land of the legally dead (legal fiction).
Be aware that the word birth sounds almost identical to the word berth. Because they sound nearly identical, a judge or government agent can use them to trick you to think that he is talking about birth when he is actually talking about berth and vice versa. The word berth is defined as "sufficient space for a vessel to maneuver; sea room" or "a space for a vessel to dock or anchor".
"When a ship is in the process of being docked, it is being guided to come to berth. The word berth is defined as “a space for a vessel to dock or anchor”.33 Based on this information, when a product is unloaded onto the dock, it just went through the berthing process, which is the process of delivering the product from the vessel/ship onto the dock.
Phonetically, the word berth sounds like the word birth. This is why when a woman is in the process of giving birth, she is said to be delivering a baby. The birthing process of a baby is related to the process of delivering a product on a ship. Every woman has a body.
Another word for body is vessel. A vessel can also be called a ship. The words body, vessel, and ship can all mean the same thing and be used to represent a woman’s body. This is why a ship is often referred to as “she” and the main ship is often called the “mother ship”.
To connect the dots, the process of a woman giving birth can also be defined as the process of delivering or berthing a product of a ship. Metaphorically speaking, the product is the baby and the ship is the woman’s body.
When you compare all the information that you just read about commerce and the sea business to the process of birthing a baby, you will see a strong connection between the berthing process of a ship and the birthing process of a baby.
By spelling the words berth and birth slightly different and making them sound almost the same, the Dark Forces and their minions (the Dark Magicians) can trick you to agree to be a product of a ship, so that they can have jurisdiction over you.
They know that they can not have jurisdiction over the real you (the living, breathing man or woman made of flesh and blood), which is why they need you to consent to be an artificial person, so that they can treat you like a product and make money by selling you on the stock market."
The process of tricking you to agree to be an artificial person is mostly done through the legal system, which is the system that deals with the DEAD.
The legal system is controlled by the Vatican of the Holy Roman Empire, one of the biggest practitioners of magic spells.
The legal system is obsessed with magic spells, because certain magic spells have the power to summon the dead.
This is why before a judge (also known as a magistrate/magi-strate, which is a magician) demands you to appear in court, a court agent needs to serve you a summons letter.
When a court agent serves you a summons letter, the first question he asks you is often related to your legal name, which 99 percent of the time is written in all capital letters on legal documents. For example, the court agent may ask you the question "are you JOHN DOE?"
If you were to answer yes to being your legal name and accept the summons letter, you would basically agree to play the role of a dead character. This occurs because the legal name is not living; instead it is a fictitious entity that has no life force of its own. As a result of that, it is as dead as a fictional character in a storybook.
The summons letter is used to summon the dead using you (the living man or woman) as the medium. This is why a court agent has to serve you a summons letter with your legal name on it before a judge can demand you to appear in court.
To connect the dots, when you accept a summons letter, whether you realize it or not, you agree to raise the dead so you can play the role of a dead character. In other words, you agree to be a zombie. This is why it is called a summons letter. What do witches do when they want to communicate with dead spirits? They summon them using certain magic spells.
Have you seen the TV series The Walking Dead? In this TV series, the zombies represent the sheeple who do not even realize that they are legally dead. In other words, from the perspective of the the Dark Magicians, you are the walking dead, get it?
The zombie apocalypse is not something that could happen in the future. It is already here because the people are, in a sense, the walking dead!
To learn how to free yourself from the land or sea of the legally dead, you need to learn how to use words wisely. Furthermore, you need to learn how to use the power of Natural Law to exercise your natural rights. To learn how to do these things, visit my website EsotericKnowledge.me and become a member.
Breaking The Shackles Of Social Conditioning August 5 2022 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / Various
What do a hooligan, a kamikaze, and a racist have in common? None of them use their brain.
What I mean by “they don’t use their brain” is that they don’t think - or, to be more precise, they don’t think critically.
But it’s not only they that don’t. In fact, most people are no different when it comes to this.
Sure, we all have our thoughts, and over the years have formed certain opinions. But how many of those opinions are merely beliefs resulting from social conditioning, and how many of them are based on our own understanding? And, of course, we know a lot of things, but how much of our knowledge comes from personal experience, and how much from parrot-like learning?
You see, from almost the day we were born, we were forced to not think. Take school, for example - an institution that supposedly helps children develop their intellect yet does quite the opposite.
School forces children to stay confined in a classroom for about 8 hours almost every single day for a total of (more or less) 12 years, where they are learning things they don’t enjoy learning, being forced to obey to authority figures, having to unquestionably accept what they’re being taught, not being allowed the freedom to do anything on their own without asking for permission first (even to go to pee).
As Pink Floyd would say, school conditions children to become “another brick in the wall”.
The official 1982 video clip of Pink Floyd’s Another Brick in the Wall.
I know, I’m generalizing here, since not all schools are the same. But the reality is that in most parts of the world school isn’t a place where critical thinking is stimulated - on the contrary, it is suppressed or simply ignored. Naturally, it atrophies and becomes weak, exactly like a muscle does when pressure isn’t exerted upon it.
Observe people around you and you might come to see the consequences of our educational system. They are living unconsciously, not knowing why they think and behave the way they do. They accept and act without second thought on what the media is presenting them as the truth.
They believe in and follow the religious dogmas without having any solid evidence supporting their beliefs. They wholeheartedly support political leaders and obey to the decisions they make without the slight resistance. I could go on forever giving similar examples, but these will suffice for now.
As a result of our social conditioning, corporations exploit our emotional insecurities so they can sell us their products and services, making us compete with our fellow human beings about who has more stuff. So-called journalists are selling us lies by utilizing propaganda tactics through the mainstream media, turning us into mindless puppets.
Priests and religious teachers of all sorts gain power by selling us heaven in the afterlife, dividing us into in-groups and out-groups that fight against one another in the name of god. Politicians gain power by selling us heaven on Earth, also splitting us into opposing groups that fight against each other in the name of ideology. And, again, these, are just a few examples.
Our social conditioning has turned us into mindless, obedient puppets
If we realize these consequences, and are truly willing to change our way of living for the benefit of ourselves and the world, we need to develop the courage to escape the herd mentality and start thinking for ourselves - and the sooner we do, the better.
Of course, that’s easier said than done, since our social conditioning has gone very deep and is affecting us in ways we can’t even recognize. However, with conscious, persistent effort, it’s definitely possible to do so. If you’re interested to know how exactly, here are some basic practical steps you can take right now:
Question Your Beliefs, No Matter How Much You Cherish Them
In order to release yourself from the prison of social conditioning, the first and most crucial thing you need to do is question any beliefs that you unconsciously took on from your parents, teachers, and culture. That’s because beliefs can bring all kinds of limitations in life, such us irrational fear and the sense of having to live according to what’s right for someone else but not for you.
No matter how much you might cherish a belief, ask yourself the following questions:
“Where did this belief come from?”
“Is there any logical reason for holding it?"
“Is it limiting myself in any way or is it elevating the quality of my life?”
Assuming that you consider yourself religious, and you believe that the dogma of your religion is the only true and right one, and that those who hold different belief systems to yours are evil and doomed to go to hell, ask yourself:
“What is the logical basis for holding these beliefs?”
“Did I reach to them using critical thinking, or did I just accept them as truth merely because I was indoctrinated from my early education?”
“Are they serving my happiness or are they contributing to my suffering?”
These are some very important questions that you need to ask about any beliefs that you might hold in dear faith, whether they’re concerning religion, philosophy, politics, economics, or other field of knowledge.
By doing so, you’ll decondition yourself from negative social programming, which will allow you to grow in understanding, take in emerging information and make wiser choices. In addition, you’ll be able to better understand others’ beliefs without judging them based on a fixed mind-set.
Never be afraid to question your beliefs. To doubt what you think you know is a sign of intelligence, and only those who are courageous enough to do so can break free from the shackles of social conditioning and walk on the path of wisdom.
Rebel Against Authority and Accept Responsibility for Your Life
For most of us, it has become a habit to have others tell us what to think and how to behave. We don’t think for ourselves - instead, we let others do it for us and take responsibility for our lives. Not surprisingly, we are intellectually weak and have lost control over our actions.
It seems that we allow others to dictate us how to live because we don’t want to take the burden of responsibility on our shoulders - so we throw it on them. To be responsible for your life can be troublesome, because you have to use your mind a lot, take important decisions and face failure when you make the wrong choices.
To avoid that, most of us choose to let other people - such as politicians and religious leaders - do those things for us, as if they are our saviors.
Then, we blame them entirely for anything that’s going wrong with our lives - it’s only their fault, we claim, without stopping for a second and think that perhaps it’s actually ours.
Are you courageous enough to remove the blindfold of faith?
If you want to escape the matrix of social conditioning and reclaim your freedom, you need to stop letting others control you like a mindless automaton and instead start being responsible for your actions. This might be a difficult thing to do, yet it’s the only way to choose your own path in life.
Seek Truth, Regardless of How Arduous that Might be
If you’ve questioned your beliefs, chances are that you’ve come to the realization that most of them were just imposed on you by society and don’t in fact reflect your personal experiences and understanding.
And although this does wonders to help you develop your critical thinking skills and break down the walls of social conditioning, it doesn’t answer the question of whether those beliefs actually hold any truth or not. To answer that, we need to seek truth by doing research.
Let’s take drug addiction as an example. Our social conditioning has led most of us to believe that drugs are causing addiction.
This is a belief we hold since our early childhood but rarely one of us stops for a second to contemplate why that is so. If we do some basic research on the issue, we’ll come to find out that, although drugs do play a significant role in addiction, there aren’t actually causing it; rather, taking drugs is merely a symptom of addiction.
According to health experts, emotional trauma has been identified as the root cause of addiction, whether that is to pornography, video games, gambling, or drugs. If you weren’t aware of this, and would like to find out more about the nature of addiction, here’s a great Ted talk for you:
‘Everything you think you know about addiction is wrong.’ - Johann Hariss
The problem is that people don’t usually like to think for themselves and do any research. One reason for that is that they find it exhausting and not worth their time. Another reason is that they find it threatening to their worldview.
You see, when people are attached to certain beliefs that aren’t based on critical thinking and scientific understanding, doing research might prove them wrong, and so many choose not to know the truth at all, lest it will shatter their beliefs.
Thus, living in ignorance yet thinking they know, they can’t grow into wiser individuals and are unconsciously spreading untruths.
If you’re a lover of wisdom, you’ll need to actively search for truth, no matter how difficult that might be. You’ll need to think a lot and educate yourself. You’ll need to read books, watch documentaries, listen to talks, take part in discussions, or use other tools that can assist you in your journey to expanding your understanding of reality.
Lastly yet most importantly, you’ll need to be ready to accept the truth when you encounter it, no matter if it contradicts your long-held beliefs.
The journey to truth might at times be rough, but it’s definitely worth taking
By questioning your beliefs, rebelling against the herd and thinking for yourself, you’ll be able to free your mind from the constraints of blind conformity and dogmatic ideology.
This way you’ll be able to better understand yourself and the world you live in, as well as to take responsibility for your life, without being easily fooled, exploited or manipulated by power-hungry individuals who care about nothing but their personal gain.
Energy Depletion In A Human Being August 4 2022 | From: NoMoreFakeNews / Various
Energy. As in: energy depletion. Without energy, the individual feels trapped. In that state, he / she seeks to conform, fit in, survive long enough to die of old age.
Body and mind deploy various feedback mechanisms to inform a person about his “available supply of energy,” and when these signals are taken as absolute truth, trouble comes.
“I can sense my energy is dwindling. So I have to…settle for less, or see a doctor, or give up, or accept that I’m getting older, or change my values, or tune up a victim-story, or join a group, or…”
On and on it goes. In this twilight zone, the individual is unwilling to consider solutions that could restore his vitality. He’s already opted for a lower level of life. In particular, he’s unwilling to explore the one aspect of his capability that works like magic: Imagination.
That’s out. No dice. Preposterous. Absurd. After all, imagination is just that spring rain he felt as a child, that unknown space that held all the promise in the world. That was then; this is now.
Now is sober reflection. Now is routine. Now is habit. Now is empty.
Once upon a time, he read a science fiction novel and, at the end of it, he felt as if he were standing, triumphant, in deep space at the crossroad of a hundred solar systems. Now he knows there is no such place. Now he is intelligent. And now he has no energy. The light that once flared is gone.
The idea that his own imagination could lead him to discoveries beyond anything he knows is fool’s gold. Yes, once when he was twenty, he woke up in the middle of the night and walked to his window and looked out over a city and knew he was on the cusp of an endless future…but what can he do about that now? There is no returning.
So his imagination waits. It idles. Yet…if he took a chance, if he began to dream again, if he started up the engine, if he considered offloading the interlocking systems that have become his daily life, what might happen? What layers of dead thought might peel away?
What abiding convictions might dissolve? What energies might be restored?
Is there a huge space beyond his common neurological impulses and rigid survival habits, where vision can be played out on a vast scale? Is there a different kind of life he can enter?
Can he take a route around the banners and facades of his former reality after opening the door to his imagination?
There is, in fact, a silent channel that winds through the entire time-scale of the human race.
History does not officially record it, because history is written by winners for losers, and this silent channel has nothing to do with pedestrian notions of victory or defeat.
The route of imagination has no truck with conventional space or time. It invents its own, and eventually introduces them into the world.
How many stories are there about journeying knights who cross the boundary from ordinary events into a realm of magic? The stories are messages…sent to ourselves, to remember. This place, this day, this moment is a platform from which to embark.
Bilderberg On Steroids - Meet The Secret CIA-Funded Group Behind The ‘War On Terror’ August 3 2022 | From: TheFreeThoughtProject / Various
A foreign policy think tank more secretive than Bilderberg has included both instrumental architects of the "War of Terror" and accusations of CIA funding.
Bilderberg has gained a reputation as the world’s most secretive group of billionaires and political leaders who conspire to impact global events - but reports indicate that they don’t hold a candle to another group that includes a host of war criminals responsible for the “War on Terror.”
The group is named Le Cercle. In a report dated Sept. 13, 1982, the German publication Der Spiegel describes it as a “legal cartel” made up of “loyal Bundesnachrichtendienst agents, foreign intelligence agents, reactionary politicians and ultra-right journalists” who played a crucial role in the 1980 election.
The existence of the group was revealed by Bavarian constitutional protector Hans Langemann. According to the report, he described the group as:
“In the case of CERCLE, which is clearly defamatory,” as far as my earlier knowledge of the BND “and my present knowledge are concerned, a “loose” “concentration “about two times a year and at various” places of conservative- anti-Communist politician,” “publicists, bankers, and VIPs of other professions,” “which originated in the former French Prime Minister Antoine PINAY, and the circle to which guests are invited continues to this day..”
Former U.S. Defense Secretary and President of the World Bank Paul Wolfowitz, former Iraqi Coalition Provisional Authority Leader Paul Bremer, former Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld and former Chairman of the Defense Department’s Defense Policy Board Richard Perle - some of the most notable neoconservative architects of the Iraq War - are all reportedly members.
Other reported American members of Le Cercle include former U.S. Secretary of State Henry Kissinger, former Directors of Central Intelligence Bill Casey and William Colby, and former President Richard Nixon after he left the White House.
In a report from The Independent dated June 28, 1997, the “exclusive think-tank said to be funded by the CIA” is mentioned because its chairman at the time, former Member of Parliament Jonathan Aitken, was reportedly going to be removed over a libel trial that ultimately sent him to prison for perjury.
Accusations that Le Cercle receives funding from the CIA have been made by Robin Ramsay, editor of Lobster Magazine; and by John E Lewis, author of “The Mammoth Book of Cover-Ups.”
As the report noted, “the group’s existence is only occasionally disclosed” following its creation in the 1950s:
“Cercle was intended to cement Franco-German relations, as a buffer to Soviet aggression during the Cold War. Down the years, however, it has become much more, advocating right-wing causes round the world and growing into a confidential talking shop for about 70 politicians, businessmen, polemicists and personnel from the diplomatic and security services.
Members are invited to attend its meetings; they cannot ask to be admitted, and as a condition of attending they agree to keep all sessions secret. It meets twice a year, once in Washington DC in the autumn and once in the early part of the year in an ‘overseas’ venue.”
The Independent described senior member Brian Crozier as an “author and well-known Cold-Warrior with close ties to MI6 and the CIA” who wrote a “planning paper” for Le Cercle in 1979.
In addition to securing changes of government in Germany and the United Kingdom (where Margaret Thatcher became Prime Minister in 1979), the agenda included objectives such as:
“Undercover financial transactions for political aims”
“International campaigns aiming to discredit hostile personalities or events”
“Creation of a (private) intelligence service specializing in a selective point of view”
“Establishment of offices under suitable cover each run by a coordinator from the central office. Current plans cover London, Washington, Paris, Munich and Madrid”
In a report on the history of Le Cercle, British news source True Publica noted that the 1982 Langemann Papers were “the first significant leak to expose the activities of Le Cercle, confirming that the group was actively involved in influencing Western European elections.”
“Its purpose is to subvert the democratic principles and processes of individual countries and are by nature ideologically ‘hawkish’ – distributing propaganda, stoking fear of communist plots from Russia, vote rigging and hacking the accounts of politicians and prominent global figures.
Promoting the ‘war on terror’ has been a major factor in their activities of recent years and in so doing broker weapons deals and setting up false flag operations the world over to suit its own agenda.”
While the majority of the information surrounding Le Cercle is covert and secretive - especially regarding its activity in recent years - one of the most important things to remember about the think tank is that its presence is well-documented, its members include influential U.S. politicians, there have been accusations of funding by the CIA, and yet mainstream media in the United States has ignored its existence and influence for decades.
Forgotten History: US Bankers Financing US Enemies - And Why It Is Important Now August 2 2022 | From: JonRappoport / Various
In 1971, Gary Allen published his book, None Dare Call it Conspiracy. It quickly became an unofficial best seller. Over the years, several million copies have been sold.
Allen’s thesis was stark: super-rich American capitalists were financing socialism. This bizarre paradox was resolved when socialism was properly understood - not as “power to the people” - but as elite power over the people. In other words, as a hoax.
These days, the socialist hoax is still unknown to most of the population. Cloak a global power grab as progress for all of humanity.
Here, from chapter six of None Dare Call it Conspiracy, “The Rockefellers and the Reds,” is a devastating passage commenting on the period just after the Russian Revolution of 1917:
“The Rockefellers assigned their public relations agent, Ivy Lee, to sell the American public the idea that the Bolsheviks were merely misunderstood idealists who were actually kind benefactors of mankind.”
“’Quite predictably…[Ivy] Lee concludes that the communist problem is merely psychological. By this time he is talking about “Russians” (not Communists) and concludes “they are all right.”
He suggests the United States should not engage in propaganda; makes a plea for peaceful coexistence; and suggests the United States would find it sound policy to recognize the USSR and advance credits [give loans].’ (Antony Sutton, Western Technology and Soviet Economic Development, 1917-1930, Hoover Institution on War, Revolution and Peace, Stanford University, Calif., 1968, p.292)”
“After the Bolshevik Revolution, Standard [Oil] of New Jersey [Rockefeller] bought 50 per cent of the Nobel’s huge Caucasus oil fields even though the property had theoretically been nationalized [by Russia]. (O’Connor, Harvey, The Empire Of Oil, Monthly Review Press, New York, 1955, p.270.)”
“In 1927, Standard Oil of New York [Rockefeller] built a refinery in Russia, thereby helping the Bolsheviks put their economy back on its feet. Professor Sutton states: ‘This was the first United States investment in Russia since the Revolution.’ (Ibid, Vol.1, p.38)”
“Shortly thereafter Standard Oil of New York and its subsidiary, Vacuum Oil Company [Rockefeller], concluded a deal to market Soviet oil in European countries and it was reported that a loan of $75,009,000 to the Bolsheviks was arranged. (National Republic, Sept.1927.)”
“…Wherever Standard Oil would go, Chase National Bank was sure to follow. (The Rockefeller’s Chase Bank was later merged with the Warburg’s Manhattan Bank to form the present Chase Manhattan Bank.) In order to rescue the Bolsheviks, who were supposedly an archenemy, the Chase National Bank was instrumental in establishing the American-Russian Chamber of Commerce in 1922.
President of the Chamber was Reeve Schley, a vice-president of Chase National Bank. (Ibid, Vol.11, p.288) According to Professor Sutton: ‘In 1925, negotiations between Chase and [Russian] Prombank extended beyond the finance of raw materials and mapped out a complete program for financing Soviet raw material exports to the U. S. and imports of U. S. cotton and machinery.’ (Ibid, Vol.11, p.226) Sutton also reports that ‘Chase National Bank and the Equitable Trust Company were leaders in the Soviet credit business.’ (Ibid, p.277)”
“The Rockefeller’s Chase National Bank also was involved in selling Bolshevik bonds in the United States in 1928. Patriotic organizations denounced the Chase as an ‘international fence.’ Chase was called ‘a disgrace to America… They will go to any lengths for a few dollars profits.’ (Ibid, Vol.11, p.291) Congressman Louis McFadden, chairman of the House Banking Committee, maintained in a speech to his fellow Congressmen:”
“’The Soviet government has been given United States Treasury funds by the Federal Reserve Board and the Federal Reserve Banks acting through the Chase Bank and the Guaranty Trust Company and other banks in New York City.”
“’Open up the books of Amtorg, the trading organization of the Soviet government in New York, and of Gostorg, the general office of the Soviet Trade Organization, and of the State Bank of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics and you will be staggered to see how much American money has been taken from the United States’ Treasury for the benefit of Russia.
Find out what business has been transacted for the State Bank of Soviet Russia by its correspondent, the Chase Bank of New York’. (Congressional Record, June 15, 1933.)”
“But the Rockefellers apparently were not alone in financing the Communist arm of the Insiders’ conspiracy. According to Professor Sutton ‘… there is a report in the State Department files that names Kuhn, Loeb & Co. (the long established and important financial house in New York) as the financier of the [Russians’] First Five Year Plan. See U. S. State Dept. Decimal File, 811.51/3711 and 861.50 FIVE YEAR PLAN/236.’ (Sutton, op. cit., Vol. II, p. 340n.)”
“Professor Sutton proves conclusively in his three volume history of Soviet technological development that the Soviet Union was almost literally manufactured by the U.S.A…”
“…Sutton shows that there is hardly a segment of the Soviet economy which is not a result of the transference of Western, particularly American, technology.”
“This cannot be wholly the result of accident. For fifty years the Federal Reserve-CFR-Rockefeller-lnsider crowd has advocated and carried out policies aimed at increasing the power of their satellite, the Soviet Union. Meanwhile, America spends $75 billion a year on defense to protect itself from the enemy the Insiders are building up.”
NOTE: The descendants of these bankers are now doing everything they can to build up the story that Donald Trump won the presidency by colluding with Russians. To call this an irony, in view of the above information, would be a vast understatement.
However, the motives of these men are clear: regardless of whether Trump meant to keep his promises to destroy Globalism (aka worldwide socialism), his mere mention of Globalism as the enemy, during the presidential campaign, and his declared opposition to Globalist “free trade” treaties, was sufficient to warrant an all-out attack on him.
The whole idea of nationalism as preferable to Globalism could act as a contagious germ spreading to the people of other countries - so Trump as the face and symbol of such sentiments had to be defamed and crushed.
Through various front organizations, cutouts, dupes, brainwashed useful idiots, and violent hired thugs, that operation to crush Trump is well underway.
Again - and this point must be understood - IT DOESN’T MATTER WHETHER TRUMP EVER MEANT TO KEEP HIS PROMISE TO BURY GLOBALISM. THE MERE MENTION OF GLOBALISM AS THE ENEMY WAS AND IS SUFFICIENT TO WARRANT UNCEASING ATTACKS AGAINST HIM.
Many, many of Trump’s supporters want to see Globalism buried.
Ultimately, they are the real target of the Globalists, who want to neutralize and disperse them and make them passive and demoralized.
The Corporate Life of Sheeple
Our bodies, our health, our children, our communities have been taken from us. 
GE Food Venture: Chronically Dependent On Deception
The US Is Now The Ultimate Police State: US Detains Journalist For Exercising Free Speech
The Problem of “Experts”
The Ongoing Destruction Of The Minds Of Children & The Mass Dumbing Down Of Humanity Is Now Confirmed By Scientists
The Influencers of our Beliefs
Final Thoughts
How A Small Scientific Elite Dictates Government Policy 
Les, 60yo. Fire Chief, several hours after his booster. Suffered aortic rupture.
CURRENT AFFAIRS
Why is Life So Messed Up?
Citizens for Safe Technology 
The Step-by-Step Guide to Meditation
.jpg)
